MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE

Programming Guide
VLT AQUA Drive FC 202

www.danfoss.com/drives

Contents

Programming Guide

Contents
1 Introduction

1.1 Purpose of the Manual

1.2 Additional Resources

1.3 Software Version

1.4 Approvals

1.5 Symbols

1.6 Definitions

1.6.1 Frequency Converter

1.6.2 Input

1.6.3 Motor

1.6.4 References

1.6.5 Miscellaneous

1.7 Abbreviations, Symbols and Conventions

1.8 Safety

1.9 Electrical Wiring

10

2 How to Programme

13

2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local Control Panel

13

2.2 How to Programme on the Graphical LCP

13

2.2.1 The LCP Display

14

2.2.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Converters1

16

2.2.3 Display Mode

16

2.2.4 Display Mode - Selection of Readouts

17

2.2.5 Parameter Set-Up, General Information

17

2.2.6 Quick Menu Key Functions

18

2.2.7 Quick Menu, Q3 Function Set-ups

19

2.2.8 Quick Menu, Q4 SmartStart

21

2.2.9 Main Menu Mode

21

2.2.10 Parameter Selection

21

2.2.11 Changing Data

22

2.2.12 Changing a Text Value

22

2.2.13 Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values

22

2.2.14 Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data Value

22

2.2.15 Value, Step-by-Step

22

2.2.16 Readout and Programming of Indexed Parameters

23

2.3 How to Programme on the Numerical LCP

2.3.1 LCP Keys

24

2.4 Initialisation to Default Settings

3 Parameter Description
MG20O802

23

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

25
26
1

Contents

Programming Guide

3.1 Parameter Selection

26

3.2 Parameters 0-** Operation and Display

27

3.3 Parameters 1-** Load and Motor

39

3.4 Parameters 2-** Brakes

54

3.5 Parameters 3-** Reference/Ramps

57

3.6 Parameters 4-** Limits/Warnings

63

3.7 Parameters 5-** Digital In/Out

67

3.8 Parameters 6-** Analog In/Out

81

3.9 Parameters 8-** Communications and Options

89

3.10 Parameters 9-** PROFIdrive

96

3.11 Parameters 10-** CAN Fieldbus

96

3.12 Parameters 13-** Smart Logic

100

3.13 Parameters 14-** Special Functions

112

3.14 Parameters 15-** Frequency Converter Information

119

3.15 Parameters 16-** Data Readouts

125

3.16 Parameters 18-** Data Readouts 2

131

3.17 Parameters 20-** FC Closed Loop

133

3.18 Parameters 21-** Extended Closed Loop

143

3.19 Parameters 22-** Application Functions

151

3.20 Parameters 23-** Time-based Functions

164

3.21 Parameters 24-** Application Functions 2

174

3.22 Parameters 25-** Cascade Controller

175

3.23 Parameters 26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109

185

3.24 Parameters 29-** Water Application Functions

191

3.25 Parameters 30-** Special Features

197

3.26 Parameters 31-** Bypass Option

197

3.27 Parameters 35-** Sensor Input Option

198

4 Parameter Lists
4.1 Parameter Options

200
200

4.1.1 Default Settings

200

4.1.2 0-** Operation/Display

201

4.1.3 1-** Load/Motor

203

4.1.4 2-** Brakes

205

4.1.5 3-** Reference/Ramps

206

4.1.6 4-** Limits/Warnings

207

4.1.7 5-** Digital In/Out

208

4.1.8 6-** Analog In/Out

210

4.1.9 8-** Comm. and Options

212

4.1.10 9-** Profibus

213

4.1.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus

214

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Contents

Programming Guide

4.1.12 13-** Smart Logic

215

4.1.13 14-** Special Functions

216

4.1.14 15-** FC Information

217

4.1.15 16-** Data Readouts

219

4.1.16 18-** Data Readouts 2

221

4.1.17 20-** FC Closed Loop

222

4.1.18 21-** Ext. Closed Loop

223

4.1.19 22-** Application Functions

225

4.1.20 23-** Timed Actions

227

4.1.21 24-** Application Functions 2

228

4.1.22 25-** Cascade Controller

228

4.1.23 26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109

229

4.1.24 27-** Cascade CTL Option

231

4.1.25 29-** Water Application Functions

233

4.1.26 30-** Special Features

234

4.1.27 31-** Bypass Option

234

4.1.28 35-** Sensor Input Option

234

5 Troubleshooting

236

5.1 Status Messages

236

5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages

Index

MG20O802

236
241

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

1 1

Programming Guide

Introduction

1 Introduction
1.4 Approvals

1.1 Purpose of the Manual

The Programming Guide provides information required for
programming the frequency converter in a diversity of
applications.
VLT is a registered trademark.

1.2 Additional Resources

Other resources are available to understand advanced
frequency converter operation, programming, and
directives compliance.

The Operating Instructions provide detailed

information for the installation and start up of
the frequency converter.

The Design Guide provides information required

for integration of the frequency converter in a
diversity of applications.

The VLT Safe Torque Off Operating Instructions

describe how to use Danfoss frequency
converters in functional safety applications.

Supplemental publications and manuals are

available from Danfoss. See danfoss.com/Product/
Literature/Technical+Documentation.htm for
listings.

Optional equipment is available, that may change

some of the information described in these
publications. Be sure to see the instructions
supplied with the options for specific
requirements.

1.5 Symbols
The following symbols are used in this document:

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could
result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could
result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used
to alert against unsafe practices.

NOTICE
Indicates important information, including situations that
may result in damage to equipment or property.

1.6 Definitions
1.6.1 Frequency Converter

Contact a Danfoss supplier or go to www.danfoss.com for

additional information.

IVLT,MAX
Maximum output current.

1.3 Software Version

IVLT,N
Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter.

Programming Guide
Software version: 2.2x
This Programming Guide can be used for all FC 202 frequency
converters with software version 2.2x.
The software version number can be seen from
parameter 15-43 Software Version.

UVLT,MAX
Maximum output voltage.

1.6.2 Input
Control command
Start and stop the connected motor by means of LCP and
digital inputs.
Functions are divided into 2 groups.
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
group 2.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

Group 1

Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop,

Quick-stop, DC braking, Stop and the [OFF] key.

Group 2

Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog

and Freeze output

Torque
175ZA078.10

Introduction

Pull-out

Table 1.1 Function Groups

1.6.3 Motor
Motor Running
Torque generated on output shaft and speed from zero
RPM to max. speed on motor.
fJOG
Motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via
digital terminals).
fM
Motor frequency.

rpm

Illustration 1.1 Break-away Torque

Break-away torque
VLT
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the
ratio between the power output and the power input.

fMAX
Maximum motor frequency.
fMIN
Minimum motor frequency.
fM,N
Rated motor frequency (nameplate data).

Start-disable command
A stop command belonging to the group 1 control
commands - see Table 1.1.

IM
Motor current (actual).

Stop command
See Control commands.

IM,N
Rated motor current (nameplate data).

1.6.4 References

nM,N
Rated motor speed (nameplate data).

Analog Reference
A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54, can be
voltage or current.

ns
Synchronous motor speed
ns =

Binary Reference
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port.

2 par . 1 23 60 s
par . 1 39

nslip
Motor slip.
PM,N
Rated motor power (nameplate data in kW or hp).
TM,N
Rated torque (motor).
UM
Instantaneous motor voltage.
UM,N
Rated motor voltage (nameplate data).

Preset Reference
A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100%
of the reference range. Selection of 8 preset references via
the digital terminals.
Pulse Reference
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs
(terminal 29 or 33).
RefMAX
Determines the relationship between the reference input
at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the
resulting reference. The maximum reference value set in
3-03 Maximum Reference.
RefMIN
Determines the relationship between the reference input
at 0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting
reference. The minimum reference value set in
3-02 Minimum Reference.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

1 1

1 1

Introduction

Programming Guide

1.6.5 Miscellaneous
Analog Inputs
The analog inputs are used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.
There are 2 types of analog inputs:
Current input, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA
Voltage input, -10 to +10 V DC.
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20
mA.
Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA
AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for
the connected motor at standstill.
Brake Resistor
The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the
brake power generated in regenerative braking. This
regenerative braking power increases the intermediate
circuit voltage and a brake chopper ensures that the
power is transmitted to the brake resistor.
CT Characteristics
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications
such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps and cranes.

NLCP
Numerical Local Control Pandel interface for control and
programming of the frequency converter. The display is
numerical and the panel is used to display process values.
The NLCP has no storing and copy functions.
lsb
Least significant bit.
msb
Most significant bit.
MCM
Short for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring unit for
cable cross-section. 1 MCM = 0.5067mm2.
On-line/Off-line Parameters
Changes to on-line parameters are activated immediately
after the data value is changed. Press [OK] to activate
changes to off-line parameters.
Process PID
The PID control maintains the desired speed, pressure,
temperature, etc. by adjusting the output frequency to
match the varying load.
PCD
Process Control Data

Digital Inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.

Power Cycle
Switch off the mains until display (LCP) is dark then turn
power on again.

Digital Outputs
The frequency converter features 2 Solid State outputs that
can supply a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.

Pulse Input/Incremental Encoder

An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back
information on motor speed. The encoder is used in
applications where great accuracy in speed control is
required.

DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
ETR
Electronic Thermal Relay is a thermal load calculation
based on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate
the motor temperature.
Hiperface
Hiperface is a registered trademark by Stegmann.
Initialising
If initialising is carried out (14-22 Operation Mode), the
frequency converter returns to the default setting.
Intermittent Duty Cycle
An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
period. The operation can be either periodic duty or nonperiodic duty.
LCP
The Local Control Panel makes up a complete interface for
control and programming of the frequency converter. The
control panel is detachable and can be installed up to 3 m
from the frequency converter, i.e. in a front panel with the
installation kit option.

RCD
Residual Current Device.
Set-up
Save parameter settings in 4 Set-ups. Change between the
4 parameter Set-ups and edit one Set-up, while another
Set-up is active.
SFAVM
Switching pattern called Stator Flux oriented Asynchronous
Vector Modulation (14-00 Switching Pattern).
Slip Compensation
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip
by giving the frequency a supplement that follows the
measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost
constant.
Smart Logic Control (SLC)
The SLC is a sequence of user-defined actions executed
when the associated user-defined events are evaluated as
true by the Smart Logic Control. (Parameter group 13-**
Smart Logic Control (SLC).
STW
Status Word

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Introduction

Programming Guide

FC Standard Bus
Includes RS-485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See
parameter 8-30 Protocol.

The frequency converters' built-in DC coils produce a high

power factor, which minimizes the imposed load on the
mains supply.

THD
Total Harmonic Distortion states the total contribution of
harmonic.

1.7 Abbreviations, Symbols and

Conventions

Thermistor
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the
temperature is to be monitored (frequency converter or
motor).

AC

Trip
A state entered in fault situations, e.g. if the frequency
converter is subject to an over-temperature or when the
frequency converter is protecting the motor, process or
mechanism. Restart is prevented until the cause of the
fault has disappeared and the trip state is cancelled by
activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal
safety.

Alternating current

AWG

American wire gauge

Ampere/AMP

AMA

Automatic Motor Adaptation

ILIM

Current limit

Degrees Celsius

DC

Direct current

D-TYPE

Drive Dependent

EMC

Electro Magnetic Compatibility

ETR

Electronic Thermal Relay

FC

Frequency converter

Gram

Hz

Hertz

Trip Locked
A state entered in fault situations when the frequency
converter is protecting itself and requiring physical
intervention, e.g. if the frequency converter is subject to a
short circuit on the output. A locked trip can only be
cancelled by disconnecting mains, removing the cause of
the fault, and reconnecting the frequency converter.
Restart is prevented until the trip state is cancelled by
activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
to reset automatically. The Trip Locked state may not be
used for personal safety.

hp

Horsepower

kHz

Kilohertz

LCP

Local Control Panel

Meter

mH

Millihenry Inductance

mA

Milliampere

ms

Millisecond

min

Minute

MCT

Motion Control Tool

nF

Nanofarad

Nm

Newton Meters

VT Characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.

IM,N

Nominal motor current

fM,N

Nominal motor frequency

VVC+

PM,N

Nominal motor power

If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,

Voltage Vector Control (VVC+) improves the dynamics and
the stability, both when the speed reference is changed
and in relation to the load torque.

UM,N

Nominal motor voltage

PM motor

Permanent Magnet motor

PELV

Protective Extra Low Voltage

PCB

Printed Circuit Board

60 AVM
Switching pattern called 60 Asynchronous Vector
Modulation (14-00 Switching Pattern).

IINV

Rated Inverter Output Current

RPM

Revolutions Per Minute

Regen

Regenerative terminals

sec.

Second

ns

Synchronous Motor Speed

TLIM

Torque limit

Power Factor
The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
Power factor =

3 x U x I 1 cos
3 x U x IRMS

The power factor for 3-phase control:

=

I1
I1 x cos1
=
since cos1 = 1
IRMS
IRMS

1 1

Volts

IVLT,MAX

The maximum output current

IVLT,N

The rated output current supplied by the

frequency converter

The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency

converter imposes a load on the mains supply.
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the
same kW performance.
2
2
2
IRMS = I2
1 + I 5 + I 7 + .. + I n

In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different

harmonic currents are low.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

1 1

Introduction

Programming Guide

1.8 Safety

(e.g. personal injury caused by contact with

moving machine parts), prevent motor starting,
for instance by use of the Safe Torque Off
function or secure disconnection of the motor
connection.

WARNING
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous
whenever connected to mains. Incorrect installation of
the motor, frequency converter or fieldbus may cause
death, serious personal injury or damage to the
equipment. Consequently, the instructions in this
manual, as well as national and local rules and safety
regulations, must be complied with.
Safety Regulations
Disconnect mains supply to the frequency
converter whenever repair work is to be carried
out. Check that the mains supply has been
disconnected and that the necessary time has
elapsed before removing motor and mains supply
plugs.

[Off] does not disconnect the mains supply and

consequently, it must not be used as a safety
switch.

Ground the equipment properly, protect the user

against supply voltage and protect the motor
against overload in accordance with applicable
national and local regulations.

The ground leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA.

Protection against motor overload is not included
in the factory setting. If this function is desired,
set 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to data value [4]
ETR trip 1 or data value [3] ETR warning 1.

Do not remove the plugs for the motor and

mains supply while the frequency converter is
connected to mains. Check that the mains supply
has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before removing motor and
mains plugs.

The frequency converter has more voltage

sources than L1, L2 and L3, when load sharing
(linking of DC intermediate circuit) or external 24
V DC are installed. Check that all voltage sources
have been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before commencing repair work.

A motor that has been stopped with the mains

supply connected may start if faults occur in the
electronics of the frequency converter, through
temporary overload, or if a fault in the power
supply grid or motor connection is remedied. If
unintended start must be prevented for personal
safety reasons (e.g. risk of injury caused by
contact with moving machine parts), the normal
stop functions of the frequency converter are not
sufficient. In such cases, disconnect mains supply
or activate Safe Torque Off.

NOTICE
When using Safe Torque Off, always follow the
instructions in VLT Frequency Converters - Safe Torque
Off Operating Instructions.

Control signals from, or internally within, the

frequency converter may in rare cases be
activated in error, be delayed or fail to occur
entirely. When used in situations where safety is
critical, these control signals must not be relied
on exclusively.

Warning against unintended start

The motor can be stopped with digital
commands, bus commands, references or a local
stop, while the frequency converter is connected
to mains. These stop functions are not sufficient
to prevent unintended motor start and thus
prevent personal injury caused by e.g. contact
with moving parts. To consider personal safety,
disconnect the mains supply or activate the Safe
Torque Off function.

The motor may start while setting the

parameters. If this compromises personal safety

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Introduction

Programming Guide

WARNING
High Voltage
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after
the equipment has been disconnected from mains.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been
disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing
(linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor
connection for kinetic back-up.
Systems where frequency converters are installed must,
if necessary, be equipped with additional monitoring
and protective devices according to the valid safety
regulations, e.g. law on mechanical tools, regulations for
the prevention of accidents etc. Modifications on the
frequency converters by means of the operating
software are allowed.

Protection mode
Once a hardware limit on motor current or DC link voltage
is exceeded, the frequency converter enters the protection
mode. Protection mode means a change of the PWM
modulation strategy and a low switching frequency to
minimise losses. This continues for 10 s after the last fault
and increases the reliability and the robustness of the
frequency converter while re-establishing full control of the
motor.

NOTICE
Hazardous situations shall be identified by the machine
builder/integrator who is responsible for taking
necessary preventive means into consideration.
Additional monitoring and protective devices may be
included, always according to valid national safety
regulations, e.g. law on mechanical tools, regulations for
the prevention of accidents.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

1 1

1.9 Electrical Wiring

1.9.1 Electrical Wiring - Control Cables

3 Phase
power
input

DC bus

+10Vdc

91 (L1)
92 (L2)
93 (L3)
95 PE

130BA544.12

1 1

Programming Guide

Introduction

(U) 96
(V) 97
(W) 98
(PE) 99
Switch Mode
Power Supply
24Vdc
15mA
200mA
+ +
-

88 (-)
89 (+)
50 (+10 V OUT)

(R+) 82

Motor

Brake
resistor

(R-) 81

S201
S202

relay1

ON=0-20mA
OFF=0-10V

03

ON

54 (A IN)

1 2

0-10Vdc
0/4-20 mA

ON

53 (A IN)

0/4-20 mA

1 2

0-10Vdc

02

55 (COM A IN)

01
relay2

12 (+24V OUT)
13 (+24V OUT)

05
24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

19 (D IN)

24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

(COM A OUT) 39
(A OUT) 42

24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

ON

0V
24V

S801
1 2

24V

240Vac, 2A
400Vac, 2A

04

20 (COM D IN)

29 (D IN/OUT)

06

P 5-00

18 (D IN)

27 (D IN/OUT)

240Vac, 2A

Analog Output
0/4-20 mA

ON=Terminated
OFF=Open

5V
24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)
0V

S801
0V
32 (D IN)

24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

33 (D IN)

24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

RS-485
Interface

(P RS-485) 68

RS-485

(N RS-485) 69
(COM RS-485) 61
(PNP) = Source
(NPN) = Sink

*
37 (D IN)

Illustration 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing

A=Analog, D=Digital
Terminal 37 is used for Safe Torque Off. For Safe Torque Off installation instructions, refer to the Operating Instructions.
* Terminal 37 is not included in FC 202 (except enclosure type A1). Relay 2 and terminal 29 have no function in FC 202.
** Do not connect cable screen.
Very long control cables and analog signals may in rare cases and depending on installation result in 50/60 Hz ground loops
due to noise from mains supply cables.
If this occurs, it may be necessary to break the screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor between screen and chassis.
The digital and analog inputs and outputs must be connected separately to the common inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) of the
frequency converter to avoid ground currents from both groups to affect other groups. For example, switching on the
digital input may disturb the analog input signal.

10

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Introduction

Programming Guide

12

13

18

19

27

0 VDC

Digital input wiring

130BT106.10

+24 VDC

PNP (Source)

29

32

33

20

130BA681.10

Input polarity of control terminals

37

12

NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring
13

18

19

27

130BT107.11

0 VDC

+24 VDC

Illustration 1.3 PNP (Source)

29

32

33

20

37

Illustration 1.5 Grounding of Screened/Armoured Control

Cables

1.9.2 Start/Stop

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

130BA155.12

P 5-12 [0]

P 5-10 [8]

+24V

Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start

Terminal 27 = 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No
operation (Default coast inverse)
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available)

Illustration 1.4 NPN (Sink)

Start/Stop

NOTICE
Control cables must be screened/armoured.

Safe Stop

Speed

See section Grounding of Screened Control Cables in the

Design Guide for the correct termination of control cables.
Start/Stop
[18]

Illustration 1.6 Start/Stop

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

11

1 1

Programming Guide

12

P 5 - 12 [6]

P 5 - 10[9]
13

18

130BA156.12

Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9] Latched

start
Terminal 27= 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [6] Stop inverse
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available)

19

27

29

32

33

20

130BA021.12

1.9.3 Pulse Start/Stop

+24V

12

+24V

18

Par. 5-10

27

Par. 5-12

29

Par. 5-13

32

Par. 5-14

37

37

Illustration 1.8 Speed Up/Down

Start

Stop inverse

Safe Stop

1.9.5 Potentiometer Reference

Speed

Start (18)
Start (27)

Speed RPM
P 6-15

Illustration 1.7 Pulse Start/Stop

130BA154.11

Voltage reference via a potentiometer

Reference Source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default)
Terminal 53, Low Voltage = 0 V
Terminal 53, High Voltage = 10 V
Terminal 53, Low Ref./Feedback = 0 RPM
Terminal 53, High Ref./Feedback = 1500 RPM
Switch S201 = OFF (U)
+10V/30mA

1 1

Introduction

39 42 50 53 54 55

1.9.4 Speed Up/Down

Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down
Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input
(default)
Terminal 27 = 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
reference
Terminal 29 = 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
Terminal 32 = 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input
down

Ref. voltage
P 6-11 10V

[9] Start
[19] Freeze
[21] Speed up
[22] Speed

1 k

Illustration 1.9 Potentiometer Reference

Terminal 29 only in FC x02 (x = series type).

12

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

How to Programme

Programming Guide

2 How to Programme
130BA018.13

2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local

Control Panel
The easiest programming of the frequency converter is
performed with the graphical LCP (LCP 102).

2.2 How to Programme on the Graphical

LCP

Status

1(0)

1234rpm

10,4A

2.

Menu keys and indicator lights - changing

parameters and switching between display
functions.

3.

Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

4.

Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

Status

If some operation is delaying the start-up, the LCP

displays the INITIALISING message until it is ready.
Adding or removing options may delay the start-up.

MG20O802

Alarm
Log

ck
Ba

Info

NOTICE

Main
Menu

OK

On

Warn.

Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data

defined or selected by the user. By pressing
[Status], up to one extra line can be added.
Status line: Status messages displaying text.

Quick
Menu

l
ce

c.

n
Ca

b.

Run OK

All data is displayed in a graphical LCP display, which can

show up to 5 items of operating data while displaying
[Status].
Display lines:
a.
Status line: Status messages displaying icons and
graphic.

43,5Hz

43,5Hz

The LCP is divided into 4 functional groups:

1.
Graphical display with Status lines.

Alarm

Hand
on

Off

Auto
on

Reset

Illustration 2.1 LCP

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

13

2 2

The LCP display has backlight and a total of 6 alphanumeric lines. The display lines show the direction of
rotation (arrow), the selected set-up as well as the
programming set-up. The display is divided into 3 sections.

On
Warn.

Top section
shows up to 2 measurements in normal operating status.
Middle section
The top line shows up to 5 measurements with related
unit, regardless of status (except in the case of alarm/
warning).

43 RPM

! 1(1)
5.44 A

25.3kW

1.4 Hz

Middle section

LCP Keys
The control keys are divided into functions. The keys
below the display and indicator lamps are used for
parameter Set-up, including choice of display indication
during normal operation.
Quick
Menu

Status

Main
Menu

Alarm
Log

2.9%

Bottom section

Illustration 2.4 LCP Keys

! Pwr.card temp (W29)

Auto Remote Running

Illustration 2.2 Bottom Section

The active set-up (selected as the active set-up in

0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming another
set-up than the active set-up, the number of the
programmed set-up appears to the right.
Display Contrast Adjustment
Press [Status] and [] for darker display
Press [Status] and [] for brighter display
Most parameter set-ups can be changed immediately via
the LCP, unless a password has been created via
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password or via 0-65 Personal
Menu Password.
Indicator lights (LEDs)
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or
warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear on
the LCP.
The ON LED is activated when the frequency converter
receives mains voltage or via a DC bus terminal or 24 V
external supply. At the same time, the backlight is on.

14

130BP045.10

Status

Alarm

Illustration 2.3 Indicator lights (LEDs)

Bottom section
always shows the state of the frequency converter in
Status mode.
Top section

130BP044.10

2.2.1 The LCP Display

130BP074.10

2 2

Programming Guide

How to Programme

Green LED/On: Control section is working.

Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.

[Status]
indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the
motor. Select between 3 different readouts by pressing
[Status]: 5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic
Control.
Press [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for
changing back to Display mode from either the Quick
Menu mode, the Main Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also
use [Status] to toggle single or double readout mode.
[Quick Menu]
Provides quick access to the most common functions of
the frequency converter.
The [Quick Menu] consists of:
Q1: My Personal Menu

Q2: Quick Setup

Q3: Function Setups
Q4: Smart Start
Q5: Changes Made
Q6: Loggings
Q7: Water and Pumps

The function set-up provides quick access to all parameters

required for the majority of water and wastewater
applications including variable torque, constant torque,
pumps, dosing pumps, well pumps, booster pumps, mixer
pumps, aeration blowers and other pump and fan
applications. Amongst other features it also includes
parameters for selecting which variables to display on the

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

LCP, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog references,

closed loop single-zone and multi-zone applications and
specific functions related to water and wastewater
applications.

Status

Q7-1: Special Ramps (Initial Ramp, Final Ramp,

Check Valve Ramp)

Q7-2: Sleep Mode

Alarm
Log

Ba
ck

Info

Main
Menu

el
nc
Ca

The quick menu Q7: Water and Pumps provides direct

access to some of the most important dedicated water and
pump features:

Quick
Menu

130BA027.10

How to Programme

OK

On

Q7-3: Deragging
Q7-4: Dry Run

Warn.

Q7-5: End of Curve Detection

Alarm

Q7-6: Flow Compensation

Q7-7: Pipe Fill (Horizontal Pipes, Vertical Pipes,
Mixed Systems)

Hand
on

Off

Auto
on

Reset

Q7-8: Control Performance

Illustration 2.5 LCP

Q7-9: Min. Speed Monitor

The Quick Menu parameters can be accessed immediately

unless a password has been created via
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password, parameter 0-61 Access
to Main Menu w/o Password, parameter 0-65 Personal Menu
Password or parameter 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o
Password.
It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode
and Main Menu mode.
[Main Menu]
This section is used for programming all parameters.
The Main Menu parameters can be accessed immediately
unless a password has been created via
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password, parameter 0-61 Access
to Main Menu w/o Password, parameter 0-65 Personal Menu
Password or parameter 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o
Password. For the majority of water and wastewater
applications it is not necessary to access the Main Menu
parameters. The Quick Menu, Quick Set-up and Function
Set-ups provide the simplest and quickest access to the
typical required parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode
and Quick Menu mode.
Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing [Main
Menu] for 3 s. The parameter shortcut allows direct access
to any parameter.
[Alarm Log]
displays an Alarm list of the 5 latest alarms (numbered A1
- A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm, use the
navigation keys to navigate to the alarm number and press
[OK]. Right before entering the alarm mode information
about the condition of the frequency converter is
provided.

MG20O802

[Back]
reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation
structure.
[Cancel]
last change or command is cancelled as long as the
display has not been changed.
[Info]
supplies information about a command, parameter, or
function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
information whenever help is needed.
Exit info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel].
Back

Illustration 2.6 Back

Cancel

Illustration 2.7 Cancel

Info

Illustration 2.8 Info

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

15

2 2

Navigation Keys
The 4 navigation keys are used to navigate between the
different choices available in [Quick Menu], [Main Menu]
and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys to move the cursor.

[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.

[OK]
is used for selecting a parameter marked by the cursor and
for enabling the change of a parameter.

The parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing

[Main Menu] for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows
direct access to any parameter.

Local Control Keys

for local control are found at the bottom of the LCP.

Hand
on

Off

Auto
on

Reset

130BP046.10

2 2

Programming Guide

How to Programme

Illustration 2.9 Local Control Keys

2.2.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings

between Multiple Frequency
Converters1
Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,
store the data in the LCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up
Software Tool.
Data storage in LCP

[Hand On]
enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
[Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data with the arrow keys. The key
can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP
External stop signals activated with control signals or a
serial bus override a start command via the LCP.
The following control signals are still active when [Hand
On] is activated

[Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto On]

Reset

NOTICE

Stop the motor before performing this operation.

1.
Go to parameter 0-50 LCP Copy
2.

Press the [OK] key

3.

Select [1] All to LCP

4.

Press the [OK] key

All parameter settings are now stored in the LCP indicated

by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
Connect the LCP to another frequency converter and copy
the parameter settings to this frequency converter as well.

Coasting stop inverse

Data transfer from LCP to frequency converter

Reversing
Set-up select bit 0 - Set-up select bit 1
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake

[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If no external
stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive the
motor can be stopped by disconnecting the voltage.
[Auto On]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a
start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
bus, the frequency converter starts. The key can be
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via 0-42 [Auto on] Key
on LCP.

NOTICE

Stop the motor before performing this operation.

1.
Go to parameter 0-50 LCP Copy
2.

Press the [OK] key

3.

Select [2] All from LCP

4.

Press the [OK] key

The parameter settings stored in the LCP are now

transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].

2.2.3 Display Mode

In normal operation, up to 5 different operating variables
can be indicated continuously in the middle section: 1.1,
1.2, and 1.3 as well as 2 and 3.

NOTICE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On]
[Auto On].

16

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

2.2.4 Display Mode - Selection of Readouts

Press [Status] to toggle between 3 status readout screens.
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in
each status screen - see examples below.
Several values or measurements can be linked to each of
the displayed operating variables. The values or
measurements to be displayed can be defined via the
following parameters: parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
0-23 Display Line 2 Large, and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large,
which can be accessed via [QUICK MENU], Q3 Function
Set-ups, Q3-1 General Settings, Q3-13 Display Settings.

Status screen II
See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 2) shown in
the screen below.
In the example, Speed, Motor current, Motor power and
Frequency are selected as variables in the first and second
line.
Status
207RPM

1 (1)
5.25A

24.4 kW

1.1

6.9

Hz

130BP062.10

How to Programme

1.3
1.2

Auto Remote Running

2

See parameter group 0-2* LCP Display for further details.

Illustration 2.11 Status Screen II

Status screen III

This state displays the event and action of the Smart Logic
Control. For further information, see
chapter 3.12 Parameters 13-** Smart Logic.
Status

Status
799 RPM
1.1

0.000

1.2
2

53.2 %
Auto Remote Ramping

Illustration 2.10 Status Screen I

MG20O802

7.83 A

1.3

1 (1)
36.4 kw

130BP041.10

Status screen I
This readout state is standard after start-up or initialisation.
Press [Info] to obtain information about the measurement
links to the displayed operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2
and 3).
See the operating variables shown in the screen below.

778 RPM

1 (1)
0.86 A

4.0 kW

State: 0 off 0 (off )

When: Do: -

130BP063.10

Each readout parameter selected in parameter 0-20 Display

Line 1.1 Small to 0-24 Display Line 3 Large has its own scale
and digits after a decimal point. By larger numeric value of
a parameter fewer digits are displayed after the decimal
point.
Ex.: Current readout 5.25A; 15.2A 105A.

Auto Remote Running

Illustration 2.12 Status Screen III

2.2.5 Parameter Set-Up, General

Information
The frequency converter can be used for practically all
assignments, which is why the number of parameters is
quite large. The frequency converter offers a choice
between 2 programming modes - a Main Menu and a
Quick Menu mode.
The former provides access to all parameters. The latter
takes the user through a few parameters making it
possible to program the majority of water/wastewater
applications.
Regardless of the mode of programming, parameters can
be changed in both the Main Menu mode and the Quick
Menu mode.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

17

2 2

Programming Guide

2.2.6 Quick Menu Key Functions

Select Changes made to get information about:

Press [Quick Menus] to see a list of different areas

contained in the Quick menu.
Select My Personal Menu to display the selected personal
parameters. These parameters are selected in
parameter 0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 50 different
parameters can be added in this menu.

0RPM
Quick Menus

0.00A

1(1)

Q1 My Personal Menu

130BC916.10

2 2

How to Programme

the last 10 changes. Use the [] [] navigation

keys to scroll between the last 10 changed
parameters.

the changes made since default setting.

Select Loggings to get information about the display line

read-outs. The information is shown as graphs.
Only display parameters selected in parameter 0-20 Display
Line 1.1 Small and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be viewed.
It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for
later reference.

Q2 Quick Setup
Q4 Smart Setup
Q5 Changes Made

Illustration 2.13 Quick Menus

Select Q2 Quick Setup to go through a limited amount of

parameters to get the motor running almost optimally. The
default setting for the other parameters considers the
desired control functions and the configuration of signal
inputs/outputs (control terminals).
The parameter selection is effected with the navigation
keys. The parameters in Table 2.1 are accessible.
Parameter

Setting

Parameter 0-01 Language

1-20 Motor Power [kW]

[kW]

Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage

[V]

1-23 Motor Frequency

[Hz]

1-24 Motor Current

[A]

1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

[RPM]

5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input

[0] No function*

1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

[1] Enable complete

AMA

3-02 Minimum Reference

[RPM]

3-03 Maximum Reference

[RPM]

3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

[s]

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

[s]

Parameter 3-13 Reference Site

Table 2.1 Selection of Parameter
* If terminal 27 is set to [0] No function, no connection to +24 V on
terminal 27 is necessary.

18

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

How to Programme

2.2.7 Quick Menu, Q3 Function Set-ups

The function set-up provides quick access to all parameters required for the majority of water and wastewater applications
including variable torque, constant torque, pumps, dosing pumps, well pumps, booster pumps, mixer pumps, aeration
blowers and other pump and fan applications. Amongst other features it also includes parameters for selecting which
variables to display on the LCP, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog references, closed loop single zone and multi-zone
applications and specific functions related to water and wastewater applications.
The Function Set-up parameters are grouped in the following way:
Q3-1 General Settings
Q3-10 Clock Settings

Q3-11 Display Settings

Q3-12 Analog Output

Parameter 0-70 Date and Time

Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1

Small

Parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output Relay

Q3-13 Relays

Parameter 0-71 Date Format

0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small

Parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Relay

Min Scale
2Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay

Parameter 0-72 Time Format

0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small

Parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Option relay

Max Scale
7Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay

1Parameter 5-40 Function

Relay

Parameter 0-74 DST/Summertime 0-23 Display Line 2 Large

Option relay
8Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay

Parameter 0-76 DST/Summertime 0-24 Display Line 3 Large

Start

Option relay
9Parameter 5-40 Function
Relay

Parameter 0-77 DST/Summertime Parameter 0-37 Display Text 1

End
Parameter 0-38 Display Text 2
Parameter 0-39 Display Text 3
Table 2.2 Q3-1 General Settings
Q3-2 Open Loop Settings
Q3-20 Digital Reference

Q3-21 Analog Reference

Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference

Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference

Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference

Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference

Parameter 3-10 Preset Reference

Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage

5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input

Parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage

5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input

Parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input

Parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Table 2.3 Q3-2 Open Loop Settings

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

19

2 2

2 2

How to Programme

Programming Guide

Q3-3 Closed Loop Settings

Q3-30 Feedback Settings

Q3-31 PID Settings

Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode

Parameter 20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control

Parameter 20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit

Parameter 20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]

Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference

Parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1

Parameter 20-93 PID Proportional Gain

Parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage

Parameter 20-94 PID Integral Time

Parameter 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

Parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Table 2.4 Q3-3 Closed Loop Settings

20

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

How to Programme

2.2.8 Quick Menu, Q4 SmartStart

2.2.10 Parameter Selection

SmartStart runs automatically on the first power up of the

frequency converter or after a reset to factory settings.
SmartStart guides users through a series of steps to ensure
the correct and most efficient motor control. SmartStart
can also be started directly via the Quick Menu.
The following settings are available via SmartStart:

In the Main Menu mode, the parameters are divided into

groups. Select a parameter group with the navigation keys.
The following parameter groups are accessible:

Group no.

Parameter group

0-**

Operation/Display

Single pump/motor in open or closed loop.

1-**

Load/Motor

Motor alternation: two motors share one

frequency converter.

2-**

Brakes

3-**

References/Ramps

4-**

Limits/Warnings

5-**

Digital In/Out

6-**

Analog In/Out

7-**

Controls

8-**

Comm. and Options

9-**

Profibus

10-**

CAN Fieldbus

11-**

Reserved Com. 1

12-**

Ethernet

13-**

Smart Logic

14-**

Special Functions

15-**

Drive Information

16-**

Data Readouts

17-**

Motor Feedb. Option

18-**

Data Readouts 2

20-**

FC Closed Loop

21-**

Extended Closed Loop

22-**

Application Functions

23-**

Time-based Functions

24-**

Application Functions 2

25-**

Cascade Controller

26-**

Analog I/O Option MCB 109

29-**

Water Application Functions

30-**

Special Features

32-**

MCO Basic Settings

33-**

MCO Adv. Settings

34-**

MCO Data Readouts

35-**

Sensor Input Option

Basic cascade control: speed control of a single

pump in a multi-pump system.
For example, this can be a cost-effective solution
in booster sets.
Master-follower: control up to 8 frequency
converters and pumps to ensure smooth
operation of the overall pump system.

2.2.9 Main Menu Mode

1107 RPM

3.84 A

Main menu
0 - ** Operation/Display

1 (1)

130BP066.10

Press [Main Menu] to enter the Main Menu mode. The

readout shown below appears on the display.
The middle and bottom sections on the display show a list
of parameter groups which can be selected by toggling []
and [] keys.

1 - ** Load/Motor
2 - ** Brakes
3 - ** Reference / Ramps

Illustration 2.14 Main Menu Mode

Each parameter has a name and number which remain the

same regardless of the programming mode. In the Main
Menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The
first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates
the parameter group number.
All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu.
However, depending on the choice of configuration
(1-00 Configuration Mode), some parameters can be
"missing". E.g. open loop hides all the PID parameters, and
other enabled options make more parameter groups
visible.

MG20O802

Table 2.5 Accessible Parameter Goups

After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with

the navigation keys.
The middle section on the display shows the parameter
number and name as well as the selected parameter value.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

21

2 2

2 2

10.64A

1 [1]
0-0*

0 -01 Language

Press [] [] keys to change the data value. [] increases

the data value, and [] decreases the data value. Place the
cursor on the value to save and press [OK].

[0] English

729RPM

6.21A

Load depen. setting

1(1)
1- 6*

1 - 60 Low speed load

compensation

Illustration 2.15 Parameter Selection

130BP070.10

740RPM
Basic Settings

130BP067.10

Programming Guide

How to Programme

16 0%

2.2.11 Changing Data

Illustration 2.18 Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values

menu mode. Press [OK] to change the selected parameter.

The procedure for changing data depends on whether the
selected parameter represents a numerical data value or a
text value.

2.2.12 Changing a Text Value

2.2.14 Infinitely Variable Change of

Numeric Data Value

If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text

value with the [] [] keys.
Place the cursor on the value that should be saved and
press [OK].
1 [1]
0-0*

0 -01 Language

[0] English

00.0s

Illustration 2.19 Selecting a Digit

957RPM
Start Adjustments

1.78 A

1(1)
1- 6*

1 - 60 Low speed load

compensation
100%

Illustration 2.17 Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values

22

130BP069.10

If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value,

change the data value using the [] [] navigation keys as
well as the [] [] navigation keys. Press [] [] keys to
move the cursor horizontally.

11.58A

1 (1)
1-7*

1-71 High starting torque time

130BP072.10

2.2.13 Changing a Group of Numeric Data

Values

Load depen. setting

1 (1)
1- 7*

Change the selected digit infinitely variably with [] [].

The selected digit is indicated by the cursor. Place the
cursor on the digit to save and press [OK].

Illustration 2.16 Changing a Text Value

113 RPM

0.44 A

1 - 71 Start Delay
130BP068.10

10.64 A

740RPM
Basic Settings

635 RPM
Start Adjustments

130BP073.10

If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value,

select a digit with [] [].

0. 4s

Illustration 2.20 Saving

2.2.15 Value, Step-by-Step

Certain parameters can be changed step by step. This
applies to parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW], 1-22 Motor
Voltage and parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
data values and as numeric data values that are infinitely
varying.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.

15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to parameter 15-32 Alarm Log:
Time contain a fault log which can be read out. Select a
parameter, press [OK], and press the keys [] [] to scroll
through the value log.
For example, this is how 3-10 Preset Reference is changed:
Select the parameter, press [OK], and press [] [] to scroll
through the indexed values. To change the parameter
value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the
value by pressing [] []. Press [OK] to accept the new
setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the
parameter.

130BA191.10

2.2.16 Readout and Programming of

Indexed Parameters

Setup

Status
2

Menu

The following instructions are valid for the Numerical LCP

(LCP 101).
The control panel is divided into 4 functional groups:
Numerical display.

2.

Menu keys and indicator lights - changing

parameters and switching between display
functions.

3.

Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

4.

Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

Display line: Status messages displaying icons and

numeric value
Indicator lights (LEDs)
Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on.
Yellow LED/Wrn.: Indicates a warning.
Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.

LCP keys
[Menu]
Select one of the following modes:
Status

Auto
on

Reset

Ba

OK

On

Warn.

1.

Main
Menu

ck

2.3 How to Programme on the Numerical

LCP

Quick
Setup

Alarm

Hand
on

Off

Illustration 2.21 LCP Keys

Status Mode
Displays the status of the frequency converter or the
motor.
If an alarm occurs the NLCP automatically switches to
status mode.
A number of alarms can be displayed.

NOTICE
Parameter copy is not possible with LCP 101 Numerical
Local Control Panel.

Quick Setup

22.8

Main Menu

rpm

130BP077.10

How to Programme

Setup 1

Illustration 2.22 Status Mode

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

23

2 2

A 17

2 2

130BP078.10

Programming Guide

How to Programme

Setup 1

Illustration 2.23 Alarm

Main Menu/Quick Setup

is used for programming all parameters or only the
parameters in the Quick Menu (see also description of the
LCP 102 earlier in chapter 2.3 How to Programme on the
Numerical LCP).
When the value flashes, press [] or [] to change
parameter values.
Select Main Menu by pressing [Menu] a number of times.
Select the parameter group [xx-__] and press [OK]
Select the parameter [__-xx] and press [OK]
If the parameter is an array parameter select the array
number and press [OK]
Select the wanted data value and press [OK]
Parameters with functional choices display values such as
[1], [2], etc. For a description of the different choices, see
the individual description of the parameters in
chapter 3 Parameter Description

P 2-03
Menu

Status

Quick
Setup

130BP079.10

[Back]
for stepping backwards
[] [] are used for manoeuvring between commands and
within parameters.

[Hand On]
enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
[Hand On] also starts the motor and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data with the arrow keys. The key
can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
External stop signals activated with control signals or a
serial bus overrides a 'start' command via the LCP.
The following control signals are still active when [Hand
On] is activated:

[Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On]

Reset
Coasting stop inverse
Reversing
Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake

[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP.
If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
voltage.
[Auto On]
enables control of the frequency converter via the control
terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal
is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the
frequency converter starts. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.

NOTICE

Setup 1

An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs

has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On]
[Auto On].

Main
Menu

[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.

Illustration 2.24 Main Menu/Quick Setup

2.3.1 LCP Keys

Hand
on

Off

Auto
on

Reset

130BP046.10

Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the LCP.

Illustration 2.25 LCP Keys

24

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

How to Programme

Programming Guide

2.4 Initialisation to Default Settings

Initialise the frequency converter to default settings in 2
ways.

NOTICE
A manual initialisation also resets serial communication,
RFI filter settings (14-50 RFI Filter) and fault log settings.

Recommended initialisation (via 14-22 Operation Mode)

1.
Select parameter 14-22 Operation Mode
2.

Press [OK]

3.

Select [2] Initialisation

4.

Press [OK]

5.

Disconnect the mains supply and wait until the

display turns off.

6.

Reconnect the mains supply - the frequency

converter is now reset.

Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode initialises all except:

14-50 RFI Filter

Parameter 8-30 Protocol

Parameter 8-31 Address
8-32 Baud Rate
8-35 Minimum Response Delay
8-36 Max Response Delay
8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay
Parameter 15-00 Operating hours to
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's

Parameter 15-20 Historic Log: Event to

parameter 15-22 Historic Log: Time

15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to

parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time

Manual initialisation
1.

Disconnect from mains and wait until the display

turns off.

2.

2a

Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at

the same time while power up for LCP
102, Graphical Display

2b

Press [Menu] - [OK] while power up for

LCP 101, Numerical Display

3.

Release the keys after 5 s.

4.

The frequency converter is now programmed

according to default settings.

This procedure initialises all except:

Parameter 15-00 Operating hours

Parameter 15-03 Power Up's

Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's
Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

25

2 2

3 3

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

3 Parameter Description
3.1 Parameter Selection
The parameters are grouped into various parameter groups for easy selection of the correct parameter for optimised
frequency converter operation.
Overview of parameter groups
Group

Title

Function

0-**

Operation/Display

Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the frequency converter,

function of the LCP keys and configuration of the LCP display.

1-**

Load/Motor

Parameter group for motor settings.

2-**

Brakes

Parameter group for setting brake features in the frequency converter.

3-**

Reference/Ramps

Parameters for reference handling, definitions of limitations, and configuration of

the reaction of the frequency converter to changes.

4-**

Limits/Warnings

Parameter group for configuring limits and warnings.

5-**

Digital In/Out

Parameter group for configuring the digital inputs and outputs.

6-**

Analog In/Out

Parameter group for configuration of the analog inputs and outputs.

8-**

Communication and Options

Parameter group for configuring communications and options.

9-**

Profibus

Parameter group for Profibus-specific parameters (requires profibus option).

10-**

DeviceNet Fieldbus

Parameter group for DeviceNet-specific parameters (requires DeviceNet option).

13-**

Smart Logic

Parameter group for Smart Logic Control

14-**

Special Functions

Parameter group for configuring special frequency converter functions.

15-**

Drive Information

Parameter group containing frequency converter information such as operating

data, hardware configuration and software versions.

16-**

Data Readouts

Parameter group for data read-outs, e.g. actual references, voltages, control, alarm,
warning and status words.

18-**

Info and Readouts

This parameter group contains the last 10 Preventive Maintenance logs.

20-**

Drive Closed Loop

This parameter group is used for configuring the closed loop PID Controller that
controls the output frequency of the unit.

21-**

Extended Closed Loop

Parameters for configuring the three Extended Closed Loop PID Controllers.

22-**

Application Functions

These parameters monitor water applications.

23-**

Time-based Functions

These parameters are for actions needed to be performed on a daily or weekly

basis, e.g. different references for working hours/non-working hours.

24-**

Application Functions 2

Parameters for the Drive Bypass.

25-**

Basic Cascade Controller Functions

Parameters for configuring the Basic Cascade Controller for sequence control of
multiple pumps.

26-**

Analog I/0 Option MCB 109

Parameters for configuring the Analog I/0 Option MCB 109.

27-**

Extended Cascade Control

Parameters for configuring the Extended Cascade Control (MCO 101/MCO 102).

29-**

Water Application Functions

Parameters for setting water specific functions.

30-**

Special Features

Parameters for configuring the brake resistor value.

31-**

Bypass Option

Parameters for configuring the Bypass Option (MCO 104).

35-**

Sensor Input Option

Parameters for configuring the Sensor Input Option (MCB 114)

Table 3.1 Parameter Groups

Parameter descriptions and selections are displayed on the graphic (GLCP) or numeric (NLCP) in the display area. (See
chapter 2 How to Programme for details.) Access the parameters by pressing the [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] key on the
control panel. The quick menu is used primarily for commissioning the unit at start-up by providing those parameters
necessary to start operation. The main menu provides access to all parameters for detailed application programming.
All digital input/output and analog input/output terminals are multifunctional. All terminals have factory default functions
suitable for the majority of water applications but if other special functions are required, they must be programmed in
parameter group 5-** Digital In/out or 6-** Analog In/out.

26

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.2 Parameters 0-** Operation and Display

Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the
frequency converter, function of the LCP keys and configuration of the LCP display.

0-01 Language
Option:
[52] Hrvatski

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the

motor is running.

Function:
Defines the language to be used in the
display.

The display showing depends on settings in

parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and

The frequency converter can be delivered

with 2 different language packages.
English and German are included in both
packages. English cannot be erased or
manipulated.

parameter 0-03 Regional Settings. The default setting

of parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings depends on which
region of the world the frequency converter is
supplied to, but can be re-programmed as required.

[0] * English

Part of Language packages 1 - 2

[1]

Deutsch

Part of Language packages 1 - 2

[2]

Francais

Part of Language package 1

[3]

Dansk

Part of Language package 1

[4]

Spanish

Part of Language package 1

[5]

Italiano

Part of Language package 1

[0]
*

RPM Selects display of motor speed variables and

parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of motor speed (RPM).

[1]

Hz

[6]

Svenska

Part of Language package 1

[7]

Nederlands

Part of Language package 1

[10] Chinese

Language package 2

[20] Suomi

Part of Language package 1

[22] English US

Part of Language package 1

[27] Greek

Part of Language package 1

[28] Bras.port

Part of Language package 1

[36] Slovenian

Part of Language package 1

[39] Korean

Part of Language package 2

[40] Japanese

Part of Language package 2

[41] Turkish

Part of Language package 1

[42] Trad.Chinese

Part of Language package 2

[43] Bulgarian

Part of Language package 1

[44] Srpski

Part of Language package 1

[45] Romanian

Part of Language package 1

[46] Magyar

Part of Language package 1

[47] Czech

Part of Language package 1

[48] Polski

Part of Language package 1

[49] Russian

Part of Language package 1

[50] Thai

Part of Language package 2

[51] Bahasa
Indonesia

Part of Language package 2

MG20O802

3 3

Function:

NOTICE

0-01 Language
Option:

Part of Language package 2

0-02 Motor Speed Unit

Option:

3.2.1 0-0* Basic Settings

Function:

NOTICE
Changing the Motor Speed Unit resets certain
parameters to their initial value. It is
recommended to select the motor speed unit
first, before modifying other parameters.

Selects display of motor speed variables and

parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of output frequency to the motor (Hz).

0-03 Regional Settings

Option:

Function:
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running.
The display showing depends on settings in
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings. The default
setting of parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings depends on
which region of the world the frequency
converter is supplied to but can be reprogrammed as required.
The settings not used are made invisible.

[0]
*

International

Sets parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] units to

[kW] and the default value of
parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency [50 Hz].

[1]

North
America

Sets parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] units to HP

and the default value of parameter 1-23 Motor
Frequency to 60 Hz.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

27

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

0-04 Operating State at Power-up

Option:

Function:
Select the operating mode upon reconnection
of the frequency converter to mains voltage
after power down when operating in Hand
(local) mode.

[0] * Resume

Resumes operation of the frequency converter

maintaining the same local reference and the
same start/stop condition (applied by [Hand
On]/[Off] on the LCP or Hand Start via a digital
input as before the frequency converter was
powered down.

[1]

Uses [1] Forced stop, ref=old to stop the

frequency converter but at the same time retain
in memory the local speed reference before
power down. After mains voltage is reconnected
and after receiving a start command (pressing
[Hand On] or Hand Start command via a digital
input) the frequency converter restarts and
operates at the retained speed reference.

Forced
stop,
ref=old

night set back). If it is necessary to change set-ups whilst

running, ensure parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to is
programmed as required. For the majority of water/
wastewater applications it is not necessary to program
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to even if change of set
up is required when running, but for very complex
applications, using the full flexibility of the multiple setups, it may be required. Using parameter 0-11 Programming
Set-up it is possible to edit parameters within any of the
set-ups whilst continuing the frequency converter
operation in its active set-up which can be a different setup to that being edited. Using parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy
it is possible to copy parameter settings between the setups to enable quicker commissioning if similar parameter
settings are required in different set-ups.
0-10 Active Set-up
Option:

Select the set-up in which the frequency

converter is to operate.
Use parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up
to one or all other set-ups. To avoid conflicting
settings of the same parameter within 2

0-05 Local Mode Unit

Option:

Function:

different set-ups, link the set-ups together using

Function:

[0] * As Motor
Speed Unit

parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Stop the

frequency converter before switching between
set-ups where parameters marked not
changeable during operation have different
values.
Parameters which are not changeable during

[1]

operation are marked FALSE in

Defines if the local reference unit should

be displayed in terms of the motor shaft
speed (in RPM/Hz) or as percent.

chapter 4 Parameter Lists.

3.2.2 0-1* Set-up Operations

Define and control the individual parameter set-ups.
The frequency converter has 4 parameter set-ups that can
be programmed independently of each other. This makes
the frequency converter very flexible and able to meet the
requirements of many different AQUA system control
schemes often saving the cost of external control
equipment. For example these can be used to programme
the frequency converter to operate according to one
control scheme in one set-up (e.g. daytime operation) and
another control scheme in another set-up (e.g. night setback). Alternatively, they can be used by an AHU or
packaged unit OEM to identically program all their factory
fitted frequency converters for different equipment models
within a range to have the same parameters and then
during production/commissioning simply select a specific
set-up depending on which model within that range the
frequency converter is installed on.
The active set-up (i.e. the set-up in which the frequency
converter is currently operating) can be selected in
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up and is displayed in the LCP.
Using Multi set-up it is possible to switch between set-ups
with the frequency converter running or stopped, via
digital input or serial communication commands (e.g. for

28

[0]

Factory
setup

Cannot be changed. It contains the Danfoss

data set, and can be used as a data source
when returning the other set-ups to a known
state.

[1]

Set-up 1

[1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 are the 4 parameter

set-ups within which all parameters can be
programmed.

[2]

Set-up 2

[3]

Set-up 3

[4]

Set-up 4

[9]

Multi Setup

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Is used for remote selection of set-ups using

digital inputs and the serial communication
port. This set-up uses the settings from
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

0-11 Programming Set-up

0-12 This Set-up Linked to

Option:

Option:

Function:

1. Change the edit set-up to [2] Set-up 2 in

Select the set-up to be edited (i.e.

programmed) during operation; either the
active set-up or one of the inactive set-ups.
The set-up number being edited is displayed
in the LCP in (brackets).

[1]

Factory
setup

Cannot be edited but it is useful as a data

source to return the other set-ups to a known
state.

Set-up 1

[1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 can be edited freely

during operation, independently of the active
set-up.

[2]

Set-up 2

[3]

Set-up 3

[4]

Set-up 4

[9] * Active Setup

parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up and set

parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to to [1] Set-up
1. This starts the linking (synchronising) process.

0 RPM
0.00A
Set-up Handling
0-12 This Set-up Linked to

0-1*

[1] Setup 1

Illustration 3.1

OR
2. While still in Set-up 1, using

(i.e. the set-up in which the frequency

converter is operating) can also be edited
during operation. Editing parameters in the
chosen set-up would normally be done from
the LCP, but it is also possible from any of the
serial communication ports.

parameter 0-50 LCP Copy, copy Set-up 1 to Setup 2. Then set parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked
to to [2] Set-up 2. This starts the linking process.
0 RPM
0.00A
Set-up Handling
0-12 This Set-up Linked to

0-12 This Set-up Linked to

Option:

1(1)

[2] Setup 2

1(1)
0-1*

130BP076.10

[0]

Function:

130BP075.10

Parameter Description

Function:
This parameter only needs to be programmed if
changing set-ups is required whilst the motor is
running. It ensures that parameters which are
"not changeable during operation" have the
same setting in all relevant set-ups.
To enable conflict-free changes from one set-up
to another whilst the frequency converter is
running, link set-ups containing parameters
which are not changeable during operation.
The link ensures synchronising of the not
changeable during operation parameter values
when moving from one set-up to another
during operation. Not changeable during
operation parameters can be identified by the
label FALSE in the parameter lists in
chapter 4 Parameter Lists.
The parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to feature
is used when Multi set-up in
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up is selected. Multi
set-up can be used to move from one set-up to

Illustration 3.2

After the link is complete,

parameter 0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups reads
set-ups 1 and 2 to indicate that all not
changeable during operation parameters are
now the same in Set-up 1 and Set-up 2. If there
are changes to a not changeable during
operation parameter, e.g. parameter 1-30 Stator
Resistance (Rs), in Set-up 2, they are also
changed automatically in Set-up 1. A switch
between Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 during
operation is now possible.
[0] * Not linked
[1]

Set-up 1

[2]

Set-up 2

[3]

Set-up 3

[4]

Set-up 4

another during operation (i.e. while the motor

is running).
Example:
Use Multi set-up to shift from Set-up 1 to Setup 2 whilst the motor is running. Programme
parameters in Set-up 1 first, then ensure that
Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are synchronised (or
linked). Synchronisation can be performed in 2
ways:

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

29

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Range:

Option:

0*

Function:

[0 255 ]

3 3

View a list of all the set-ups linked by means of

parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter
has one index for each parameter set-up. The
parameter value displayed for each index represents
which set-ups are linked to that parameter set-up.
Index

LCP value

{0}

{1,2}

{1,2}

{3}

{4}

[38]

Display Text 2

Enables an individual text string to

be written, for display in the LCP or
to be read via serial communication.

[39]

Display Text 3

Enables an individual text string to

be written, for display in the LCP or
to be read via serial communication.

[89]

Date and Time

Readout

Displays the current date and time.

[953]

Profibus Warning
Word

Displays Profibus communication

warnings.

[1005]

Readout Transmit
Error Counter

View the number of CAN control

transmission errors since the last
power-up.

[1006]

Readout Receive
Error Counter

View the number of CAN control

receipt errors since the last powerup.

[1007]

Readout Bus Off

Counter

View the number of bus off events

since the last power-up.

[1013]

Warning
Parameter

View a DeviceNet-specific warning

word. One separate bit is assigned to
every warning.

[1230]

Warning
Parameter

[1397]

Alert Alarm Word

[1398]

Alert Warning
Word

Table 3.3 Example: Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are

linked

0-14 Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel

Range:
0*

Function:

[-2147483648
- 2147483647 ]

View the setting of

parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up for each
of the four different communication
channels. When the number is displayed in
hex, as it is in the LCP, each number
represents one channel.
Numbers 1-4 represent a set-up number; F
means factory setting; and A means active
set-up. The channels are, from right to left:
LCP, FC-bus, USB, HPFB1.5.
Example: The number AAAAAA21h means

Function:

[1399]

Alert Status Word

[1500]

Operating hours

View the number of running hours of

the frequency converter.

[1501]

Running Hours

View the number of running hours of

the motor.

3.2.3 0-2* LCP Display

[1502]

kWh Counter

View the mains power consumption

in kWh.

Define the variables displayed in the Graphical Local

Control Panel.

[1580]

Fan Running
Hours

[1600]

Control Word

View the control word sent from the

frequency converter via the serial
communication port in hex code.

[1601]

Reference [Unit]

Total reference (sum of digital/

analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
up and slow-down) in selected unit.

[1602]

Reference [%]

Total reference (sum of digital/

analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
up and slow-down) in percent.

[1603]

Status Word

Present status word

[1605]

Main Actual Value One or more warnings in a hex code

[%]

[1609]

Custom Readout

that the FC-bus selected Set-up 2 in

parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up, the LCP
selected Set-up 1 and all others used the
active set-up.

NOTICE
Refer to parameter 0-37 Display Text 1,
parameter 0-38 Display Text 2 and parameter 0-39 Display
Text 3 for information on how to write display texts.
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
Option:

Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1,
left position.

[0]

None

No display value selected

[37]

Display Text 1

Present control word

View the user-defined readouts as

defined in parameter 0-30 Custom

30

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Option:

Option:

Function:
Readout Unit, parameter 0-31 Custom

Function:

[1636]

Inv. Nom. Current

Nominal current of the frequency

converter

parameter 0-32 Custom Readout Max

Value.

[1637]

Inv. Max. Current

Maximum current of the frequency

converter

Readout Min Value and

[1610]

Power [kW]

Actual power consumed by the

motor in kW.

[1638]

SL Controller
State

State of the event executed by the

control

[1611]

Power [hp]

Actual power consumed by the

motor in hp.

[1639]

Control Card
Temp.

Temperature of the control card.

[1612]

Motor Voltage

Voltage supplied to the motor.

[1650]

[1613]

Frequency

Motor frequency, i.e. the output

frequency from the frequency
converter in Hz.

External
Reference

Sum of the external reference as a

percentage, i.e. the sum of analog/
pulse/bus.

[1652]

Feedback[Unit]

Phase current of the motor measured

as effective value.

Signal value in units from the

programmed digital input(s).

[1653]

Motor frequency, i.e. the output

frequency from the frequency
converter in percent.

Digi Pot
Reference

View the contribution of the digital

potentiometer to the actual reference
Feedback.

[1654]

Feedback 1 [Unit]

[1614]
[1615]

[1616]
[1617]

[1618]

Motor current
Frequency [%]

Torque [Nm]
Speed [RPM]

Motor Thermal

Present motor load as a percentage

of the rated motor torque.
Speed in RPM (revolutions per
minute) i.e. the motor shaft speed in
closed loop based on the entered
motor nameplate data, the output
frequency and the load on the
frequency converter.
Thermal load on the motor,
calculated by the ETR function. See

[1655]

Feedback 2 [Unit]

[1656]

Feedback 3 [Unit]

[1626]

Power Filtered
[kW]

[1627]

Power Filtered
[hp]

[1630]

DC Link Voltage

[1632]

[1633]

[1634]

Shows the actual torque produced, in

percentage.

[1658]

PID Output [%]

Returns the Drive Closed Loop PID

controller output value in percent.

[1659]

Adjusted Setpoint Displays the actual operating setpoint after it is modified by flow
compensation. See parameter group
22-8* Flow Compensation.

[1660]

Digital Input

Displays the status of the digital

inputs. Signal low = 0; Signal high =
1.
Regarding order, see 16-60 Digital
Input. Bit 0 is at the extreme right.

[1661]
Intermediate circuit voltage in the
frequency converter.

Terminal 53
Switch Setting

Setting of input terminal 53. Current

= 0; Voltage = 1.

[1662]

Analog Input 53

Brake Energy /s

Present brake power transferred to

an external brake resistor.
Stated as an instantaneous value.

Actual value at input 53 either as a

reference or protection value.

[1663]

Terminal 54
Switch Setting

Setting of input terminal 54. Current

= 0; Voltage = 1.

Brake Energy
Average

Brake power transferred to an

external brake resistor. The mean
power is calculated continuously for
the most recent 120 s.

[1664]

Analog Input 54

Actual value at input 54 either as

reference or protection value.

[1665]

Analog Output 42 Actual value at output 42 in mA. Use

[mA]
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output to
select the variable to be represented
by output 42.

[1666]

Digital Output
[bin]

Heatsink Temp.

Present heat sink temperature of the

frequency converter. The cut-out
limit is 95 5 C; cutting back in
occurs at 70 5 C.

[1635]

View the value of Feedback 3. See

also parameter group 20-0* Feedback.

Temperature.
Torque [%]

View the value of Feedback 2. See

also parameter group 20-0* Feedback.

also parameter group 1-9* Motor

[1622]

View the value of Feedback 1. See

also parameter group 20-0* Feedback.

Inverter Thermal

MG20O802

Binary value of all digital outputs.

Percentage load of the inverters

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

31

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Option:

Option:

Function:

[1667]

Pulse Input #29

[Hz]

Actual value of the frequency applied

at terminal 29 as a pulse input.

[1668]

Pulse Input #33

[Hz]

Actual value of the frequency applied

at terminal 33 as a pulse input.

[1669]

Pulse Output #27

[Hz]

Actual value of pulses applied to

terminal 27 in digital output mode.

[1670]

Pulse Output #29

[Hz]

Actual value of pulses applied to

terminal 29 in digital output mode.

[1671]

Relay Output
[bin]

View the setting of all relays.

[1672]

Counter A

View the present value of Counter A.

[1673]

Counter B

View the present value of Counter B.

[1675]

Analog In X30/11

[1676]

Analog In X30/12

[1677]

Analog Out X30/8 Actual value at output X30/8

[mA]
(General Purpose I/O Card. Optional)

Function:

[1694]

Ext. Status Word

One or more status conditions in a

hex code (used for serial communications)

[1695]

Ext. Status Word

2

One or more status conditions in a

hex code (used for serial communications)

[1696]

Maintenance
Word

The bits reflect the status for the

programmed Preventive Maintenance
Events in parameter group 23-1*
Maintenance.

[1830]

Analog Input
X42/1

Shows the value of the signal applied

to terminal X42/1 on the Analog I/O
card.

Actual value of the signal on input

X30/11 (General Purpose I/O Card.
Option)

[1831]

Analog Input
X42/3

Shows the value of the signal applied

to terminal X42/3 on the Analog I/O
card.

Actual value of the signal on input

X30/12 (General Purpose I/O Card.
Optional)

[1832]

Analog Input
X42/5

Shows the value of the signal applied

to terminal X42/5 on the Analog I/O
card.

[1833]

Analog Out X42/7 Shows the value of the signal applied

[V]
to terminal X42/7 on the Analog I/O
card.

[1834]

Analog Out X42/9 Shows the value of the signal applied

[V]
to terminal X42/9 on the Analog I/O
card.

[1835]

Analog Out
X42/11 [V]

[1836]

Analog Input
X48/2 [mA]

[1837]

Temp. Input
X48/4

Use 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output to

select the variable to be shown.
[1678]

Analog Out X45/1

[mA]

[1679]

Analog Out X45/3

[mA]

[1680]

Fieldbus CTW 1

Control word (CTW) received from

the Bus Master.

[1682]

Fieldbus REF 1

Main reference value sent with

control word via the serial communications network e.g. from the BMS,
PLC or other master controller.

Shows the value of the signal applied

to terminal X42/11 on the Analog I/O
card.

[1838]

[1684]

Comm. Option
STW

Extended fieldbus communication

option status word.

Temp. Input
X48/7

[1839]

[1685]

FC Port CTW 1

Control word (CTW) received from

the Bus Master.

Temp. Input
X48/10

[1850]

Sensorless
Readout [unit]

[1860]

Digital Input 2

[2117]

Ext. 1 Reference
[Unit]

The value of the reference for

extended Closed Loop Controller 1

[2118]

Ext. 1 Feedback
[Unit]

The value of the feedback signal for

extended Closed Loop Controller 1

[2119]

Ext. 1 Output [%]

The value of the output from

extended Closed Loop Controller 1

[2137]

Ext. 2 Reference
[Unit]

The value of the reference for

extended Closed Loop Controller 2

[2138]

Ext. 2 Feedback
[Unit]

The value of the feedback signal for

extended Closed Loop Controller 2

[1686]

FC Port REF 1

Status word (STW) sent to the Bus

Master.

[1690]

Alarm Word

One or more alarms in a hex code

(used for serial communications)

[1691]

Alarm Word 2

One or more alarms in a hex code

(used for serial communications)

[1692]

Warning Word

One or more warnings in a hex code

(used for serial communications)

[1693]

Warning Word 2

One or more warnings in a hex code

(used for serial communications)

32

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Option:

Option:

[2139]

Ext. 2 Output [%]

Function:
The value of the output from
extended Closed Loop Controller 2

[9956]
[9957]

Fan 2 Feedback

[9958]

PC Auxiliary Temp

[9959]

Power Card
Temp.

[2157]

Ext. 3 Reference
[Unit]

The value of the reference for

extended Closed Loop Controller 3

[2158]

Ext. 3 Feedback
[Unit]

The value of the feedback signal for

extended Closed Loop Controller 3

Ext. 3 Output [%]

The value of the output from

extended Closed Loop Controller 3

[2159]
[2230]

No-Flow Power

[2316]

Maintenance Text

[2580]

Cascade Status

[2581]

Pump Status

The calculated No Flow Power for

the actual operating speed
Status for the operation of the
Cascade Controller
Status for the operation of each
individual pump controlled by the
Cascade Controller

[2791]

Cascade
Reference

Reference output for use with

follower drives.

[2792]

% Of Total
Capacity

Readout parameter to show the

system operating point as a %
capacity of total system capacity.

[2793]

Cascade Option
Status

[2794]

Cascade System
Status

[2795]

[2796]

Advanced
Cascade Relay
Output [bin]
Extended Cascade
Relay Output
[bin]

[2920]

Derag Power[kW]

[2921]

Derag Power[HP]

[3110]

Bypass Status
Word

[3111]

Bypass Running
Hours

[9920]

HS Temp. (PC1)

[9921]

HS Temp. (PC2)

[9922]

HS Temp. (PC3)

[9923]

HS Temp. (PC4)

[9924]

HS Temp. (PC5)

[9925]

HS Temp. (PC6)

[9926]

HS Temp. (PC7)

[9927]

HS Temp. (PC8)

[9951]

PC Debug 0

[9952]

PC Debug 1

[9953]

PC Debug 2

[9954]

PC Debug 3

[9955]

PC Debug 4

MG20O802

Function:

Readout parameter to show the

status of the cascade system.

Fan 1 Feedback

3 3

0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small

Option:

Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1,
middle position.

[1601] * Analog input

53

The options are the same as those listed

for 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.

0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small

Option:

Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1,
right position.

[1614] * Motor
Current

The options are the same as those listed

for 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.

0-23 Display Line 2 Large

Option:

Function:
Select a variable for display in line 2.

[1613] * Frequency The options are the same as those listed for
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.

0-24 Display Line 3 Large

Option:

Function:

[1652] * Feedback [Unit] The options are the same as those

listed for 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
Select a variable for display in line 2.

0-25 My Personal Menu

Array [20]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 9999 ]

Define up to 20 parameters to appear in

the Q1 Personal Menu, accessible via the
[Quick Menu] key on the LCP. The
parameters are displayed in the Q1
Personal Menu in the order they are
programmed into this array parameter.
Delete parameters by setting the value to
0000.
For example, this can be used to provide
quick, simple access to just one or up to 50
parameters which require changing on a
regular basis.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

33

Programming Guide

3.2.4 0-3* LCP Custom Readout

0-30 Custom Readout Unit

It is possible to customise the display elements for various

purposes: *Custom Readout. Value proportional to speed
(Linear, squared or cubed depending on unit selected in
parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit) *Display Text. Text
string stored in a parameter.
Custom readout
The calculated value to be displayed is based on settings
in

Option:

unit selected (see Table 3.4). The actual calculated

value can be read in parameter 16-09 Custom
Readout, and/or shown in the display be selecting
[1609 Custom Readout] in 0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small to 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
-

[1] *

Parameter 0-31 Custom Readout Min Value (linear

only)

[5]

PPM

[10]

1/min

Parameter 0-32 Custom Readout Max Value

[11]

RPM

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

[21]

l/min

and actual speed

[22]

l/h

[23]

m/s

[24]

m/min

[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

[31]

kg/min

[32]

kg/h

[33]

t/min

[34]

t/h

[40]

m/s

[41]

m/min

[45]

[60]

[70]

mbar

[71]

bar

[72]

Pa

[73]

kPa

[74]

m WG

[75]

mm Hg

[80]

kW

Parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit

Parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

Custom Readout (Value)

P 16-09
Custom Readout
Unit P 0-30
Max value
P 0-32

Li n

Min value
Linear
units only
P 0-31

n
rU
ea

it

. sp
(e.g

a
Qu

ic
at
dr

ee

n
da

o
d fl

e
Pr
it (

w)

e)
ur
ss

Un

)
er
ow
P
t(
ni

cU

bi
Cu

Motor Speed

Motor Speed
High limit
P 4-13 (RPM)
P 4-14 (Hz)

Illustration 3.3 Custom Readout

The relation depends on the type of unit selected in

parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit:
Unit type

Speed relation

Dimensionless

[120] GPM
[121] gal/s
[122] gal/min
[123] gal/h

Speed

[124] CFM

Flow, volume
Flow, mass

Function:
Program a value to be shown in the display of
the LCP. The value has a linear, squared or cubed
relation to speed. This relation depends on the

[0]

130BT105.12

3 3

Parameter Description

[125] ft/s

Linear

[126] ft/min

Velocity

[127] ft/h

Length

[130] lb/s

Temperature
Pressure

Quadratic

Power

Cubic

[131] lb/min
[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s

Table 3.4 Speed Relations for Different Unit Types

[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi

34

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

0-30 Custom Readout Unit

0-38 Display Text 2

Option:

Range:

Function:

Function:

[172] in WG

cursor, this character can be changed. A character

can be inserted by placing the cursor between 2

[173] ft WG

characters and pressing [] or [].

[171] lb/in

3 3

[174] in Hg

0-39 Display Text 3

[180] HP

Range:

0-31 Custom Readout Min Value

Range:
Size
related*

0*

Function:
[ -999999.99 100.00
CustomReadoutUnit]

This parameter allows the choice of

the min. value of the custom defined
readout (occurs at zero speed). It is
only possible to select a value
different to 0 when selecting a linear

[0 25 ]

permanently select Display Text 3 in 0-20 Display

Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, 0-23 Display Line 2 Large
or 0-24 Display Line 3 Large. Press [] or [] to

unit in parameter 0-30 Custom

change a character. Press [] and [] to move the

Readout Unit. For Quadratic and

Cubic units the minimum value is 0.

cursor. When a character is highlighted by the

cursor, this character can be changed. A character
can be inserted by placing the cursor between 2

0-32 Custom Readout Max Value

Range:
100 CustomReadoutUnit*

characters and pressing [] or [].

Function:
[ par. 0-31 999999.99
CustomReadoutUnit]

This parameter sets the max

value to be shown when the
speed of the motor has reached
the set value for
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
Limit [Hz] (depends on setting in
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
Unit).

0*

[0 25 ]

3.2.5 0-4* LCP Keypad

Enable, disable and password protect individual keys on
the LCP.
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP
Option:
[0]

Disabled

[1] * Enabled
[2]

0-37 Display Text 1

Range:

Function:
In this parameter it is possible to write an
individual text string for display in the LCP or to be
read via serial communication. If to be displayed

password in parameter 0-65 Personal Menu

Password. Otherwise define the password in
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.

select Display Text 1 in 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,

Large. Parameter 0-37 is linked to Parameter 12-08

Host Name. Changing Parameter 12-08 will change
Parameter 0-37 - but not in the other direction.

Range:
0*

[0 25 ]

0-41 [Off] Key on LCP

Option:
[0]

Disabled

[1] * Enabled
[2]

0-38 Display Text 2

[Hand On] key enabled

parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP is included
in the My Personal Menu, then define the

In this parameter it is possible to write an individual

text string for display in the LCP or to be read via
serial communication. If to be displayed permanently

Small, 0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3

Key disabled avoids accidental usage of the key.

Password Avoid unauthorized start in Hand mode. If

Function:

0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3

Function:

Function:
Key disabled avoids accidental usage of the key.
[Off] key is enabled

Password Avoid unauthorized stop. If parameter 0-41 [Off]

Key on LCP is included in the My Personal Menu,

Function:

then define the password in

In this parameter, it is possible to write an

individual text string for display in the LCP or to be
read via serial communication. If to be displayed

parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password.

Otherwise define the password in
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.

permanently select Display Text 2 in 0-20 Display

Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, 0-23 Display Line 2 Large
or 0-24 Display Line 3 Large. Press [] or [] to
change a character. Press [] and [] to move the
cursor. When a character is highlighted by the

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

35

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.2.6 0-5* Copy/Save

0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP

Option:
[0]

Disabled

[1] * Enabled
[2]

Function:
Key disabled avoids accidental usage of the key.
[Auto On] key is enabled

Password Avoid unauthorized start in Auto mode. If

parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP is included
in the My Personal Menu, then define the
password in parameter 0-65 Personal Menu

Copy parameters from and to the LCP. Use these

parameters for saving and copying set-ups from one
frequency converter to another.
0-50 LCP Copy
Option:
[0] * No copy

Password. Otherwise define the password in

0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP

[0]

No function

Function:

Disabled

Key disabled avoids accidental usage of the

key.

[1] * Enabled

[Reset] key is enabled

[2]

Avoid unauthorized resetting. If

Password

parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP is included

[1]

All to LCP

Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the

frequency converter memory to the LCP
memory. For service purposes it is
recommended to copy all parameters to the
LCP after commissioning.

[2]

All from
LCP

Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the

LCP memory to the frequency converter
memory.

[3]

Size indep.
from LCP

Copies only the parameters that are

independent of the motor size. The latter
selection can be used to programme several
frequency converters with the same function
without disturbing motor data which are
already set.

in the 0-25 My Personal Menu, then define

the password in parameter 0-65 Personal
Menu Password. Otherwise define the
password in parameter 0-60 Main Menu
Password.
[3]

Enabled
without OFF

[4]

Password
without OFF

[5]

Enabled with Pressing the key resets the frequency

OFF
converter but does not start it.

[6]

Password
with OFF

Prevents unauthorized reset. Upon

authorized reset, the frequency converter
does not start. See option [2] Password for
information on how to set the password.

[10] Delete LCP

copy data

0-51 Set-up Copy

Option:
[0]
[1]

[0]

Disabled

No function

Copy to
set-up 1

Copies all parameters in the present

Key disabled avoids accidental usage of the key.

[2]

Copy to
set-up 2

Copies all parameters in the present

Programming Set-up (defined in
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 2.

Password
[3]

0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP

Copy to
set-up 3

Press [Off] and select [0] Disabled to avoid accidental stop of the
frequency converter. Press [Off] and select [2] Password to avoid
unauthorised bypass of the frequency converter. If 0-45 [Drive

[4]

Copy to
set-up 4

Function:

[0]

Disabled

[1] *

Enabled

[2]

Password

Key disabled avoids

accidental usage of the
key.

Programming Set-up (defined in

Copies all parameters in the present
Programming Set-up (defined in
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 4.

the password in parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password.

Option:

Copies all parameters in the present

parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 3.

Bypass] Key on LCP is included in the Quick Menu, then define

36

Programming Set-up (defined in

parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 1.

Function:

[1] * Enabled
[2]

Function:

No copy

0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP

Option:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.

Option:

Function:

[9]

Copy to
all

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Copies the parameters in the present set-up

over to each of the set-ups 1 to 4.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.2.7 0-6* Password

0-67 Bus Password Access

Range:

0-60 Main Menu Password

Range:
100*

0*

Function:

[-9999 9999 ]

Define the password for access to the Main

0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password

Option:

Function:

[0] * Full access

Disables password defined in

parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.

[1]

LCP: Read only Prevent unauthorized editing of Main Menu

parameters.

[2]

LCP: No access Prevent unauthorized viewing and editing

of Main Menu parameters.

[3]

Bus: Read only

[4]

Bus: No access

[5]

All: Read only

[6]

All: No access

0-65 Personal Menu Password

[0 999 ]

3.2.8 0-7* Clock Settings

Set the time and date of the internal clock. The internal
clock can be used for e.g. timed actions, energy log, trend
analysis, date/time stamps on alarms, logged data and
preventive maintenance.
It is possible to program the clock for daylight saving time/
summertime, weekly working days/non-working days
including 20 exceptions (holidays etc.). Although the clock
settings can be set via the LCP, they can also be set along
with timed actions and preventative maintenance
functions using the MCT 10 Set-up Software software tool.

NOTICE

If [0] Full access is selected, parameter 0-60 Main Menu

Password, parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password and
parameter 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password are
ignored.

200*

[0 - 9999 ] Writing to this parameter enables users to

unlock the frequency converter from bus/MCT
10 Set-up Software.

Menu via the [Main Menu] key. If

parameter 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o
Password is set to [0] Full access, this
parameter is ignored.

Range:

Function:

Function:
Define the password for access to the My

The frequency converter has no back-up of the clock

function and the set date/time resets to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power down unless a Real
Time Clock module with back-up is installed. If no
module with back up is installed, it is recommended the
clock function is only used if the frequency converter is
integrated into an external system using serial communications, with the system maintaining synchronisation of
control equipment clock times. In parameter 0-79 Clock
Fault it is possible to program for a Warning in case
clock has not been set properly, e.g. after a power down.

Personal Menu via the [Quick Menu] key. If

parameter 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o
Password is set to [0] Full access, this parameter
is ignored.

NOTICE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a
battery back-up of the date and time is included.

0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password

Option:
[0] * Full access

0-70 Date and Time

Function:
Disables password defined in
parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password.

[1]

LCP: Read only Prevents unauthorized editing of My

Personal Menu parameters.

[2]

LCP: No access Prevents unauthorized viewing and editing

of My Personal Menu parameters.

[3]

Bus: Read only

[4]

Bus: No access

[5]

All: Read only

[6]

All: No access

Function:
[ 0 - 0 ] Sets the date and time of the internal
clock. The format to be used is set in
0-71 Date Format and parameter 0-72 Time
Format.

0-71 Date Format

Option:

If parameter 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set

to [0] Full access, this parameter is ignored.

MG20O802

Range:
Size
related*

Function:

[0] YYYY-MM-DD

Sets the date format to be used in the LCP.

[1] DD-MM-YYYY

Sets the date format to be used in the LCP.

[2] MM/DD/YYYY

Sets the date format to be used in the LCP.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

37

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

0-72 Time Format

0-82 Additional Working Days

Option:

Array with 5 elements [0] - [4] displayed below parameter

number in display. Press [OK] and step between elements with

Function:
Sets the time format to be used in the LCP.

[0]

24 h

[1]

12 h

[] and [].

Range:
Size related*

0-74 DST/Summertime
Option:

Function:

days according to
parameter 0-81 Working Days.

Select how daylight saving time/summertime

should be handled. For manual DST/summertime
enter the start date and end date in

0-83 Additional Non-Working Days

parameter 0-76 DST/Summertime Start and

Array with 15 elements [0] - [14] displayed below parameter

parameter 0-77 DST/Summertime End.

number in display. Press [OK] and step between elements with

[] and [].

[0] * Off
[2]

Function:
[ 0 - 0 ] Defines dates for additional working days
that normally would be non-working

Manual

Range:
Size related*

0-76 DST/Summertime Start

Range:

Function:

Size related*

days according to

[ 0 - 0 ] Sets the date and time when DST/

summertime starts. The date is
programmed in the format selected in
0-71 Date Format.

Function:

Size related*

parameter 0-81 Working Days.

0-89 Date and Time Readout

Range:
0*

0-77 DST/Summertime End

Range:

Function:
[ 0 - 0 ] Defines dates for additional working days
that normally would be non-working

Function:

[0 - 25 ] Displays the current date and time. The date and

time is updated continuously.
The clock does not begin counting until a setting

[ 0 - 0 ] Sets the date and time when DST/

summertime ends. The date is
programmed in the format selected in

different from default has been made in 0-70 Date

and Time.

0-71 Date Format.

0-79 Clock Fault

Option:

Function:
Enables or disables the clock warning, when the
clock has not been set or has been reset due to a
power-down and no back-up is installed. If MCB
109 is installed, [1] Enabled is default.

[0] Disabled
[1] Enabled

0-81 Working Days

Array with 7 elements [0] - [6] displayed below parameter
number in display. Press [OK] and step between elements with
[] and [].

Option: Function:
Set for each weekday if it is a working day or a nonworking day. First element of the array is Monday. The
working days are used for timed actions.
[0] No
[1] Yes

38

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.3 Parameters 1-** Load and Motor

1-03 Torque Characteristics

Option:

3.3.1 1-0* General Settings

[0]

Define whether the frequency converter operates in open

loop or closed loop.

Constant
torque

1-00 Configuration Mode

Option:

Function:

NOTICE

[3] Closed
Loop

Motor speed is determined by applying a speed

reference or by setting desired speed when in
Hand Mode.
Open Loop is also used if the frequency converter
is of a closed loop control system based on an
external PID controller providing a speed reference
signal as output.

Variable
torque

For speed control of centrifugal pumps and

fans. Also to be used when controlling more
than one motor from the same frequency
converter (e.g. multiple condenser fans or
cooling tower fans). Provides a voltage which is
optimised for a squared torque load characteristic of the motor.

[2]

Auto
Energy
Optim. CT

For optimum energy-efficient speed control of

screw and scroll compressors. Provides a voltage
which is optimised for a constant torque load
characteristic of the motor in the entire range
down to 15 Hz, but in addition the AEO feature
adapts the voltage exactly to the current load
situation, thereby reducing energy consumption
and audible noise from the motor. To obtain
optimal performance, the motor power factor
cos phi must be set correctly. This value is set in

Motor Speed is determined by a reference from

the built-in PID controller varying the motor speed
as of a closed loop control process (e.g. constant
pressure or flow). The PID controller must be
configured in parameter group 20-** Feedback or
via the Function Set-ups accessed by pressing
[Quick Menus].

14-43 Motor Cosphi. The parameter has a default

value which is automatically adjusted when the
motor data is programmed. These settings
typically ensure optimum motor voltage but if
the motor power factor cos phi requires tuning,

NOTICE
When set for Closed Loop, the commands Reversing and
Start Reversing do not reverse the direction of the
motor.

an AMA function can be carried out using

parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
(AMA). It is very rarely necessary to adjust the
motor power factor parameter manually.

1-01 Motor Control Principle

Option:

[3]

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running.
Select which motor control principle to employ.
[0]

U/f

Special motor mode, for parallel connected motors

in special motor applications. When U/f is selected
the characteristic of the control principle can be
edited in parameter 1-55 V/f Characteristic - V and
parameter 1-56 V/f Characteristic - f.

[1] * VVC+ Voltage Vector Control principle suitable for most

applications. The main benefit of VVC+ operation is
that it uses a robust motor model.

For speed control of constant torque

applications like axial pumps, positive
displacement pumps and blowers. Provides a
voltage which is optimised for a constant torque
load characteristic of the motor in the entire
range speed.

[1]

This parameter cannot be adjusted while

the motor is running.
[0] Open
Loop

Function:

Auto
Energy
Optim. VT

For optimum energy efficient speed control of

centrifugal pumps and fans. Provides a voltage
which is optimised for a squared torque load
characteristic of the motor, but in addition the
AEO feature adapts the voltage exactly to the
current load situation, thereby reducing energy
consumption and audible noise from the motor.
To obtain optimal performance, the motor
power factor cos phi must be set correctly. This
value is set in 14-43 Motor Cosphi. The
parameter has a default value and is automatically adjusted when the motor data is
programmed. These settings typically ensure
optimum motor voltage, but if the motor power
factor cos phi requires tuning, an AMA function
can be carried out using
parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
(AMA). It is very rarely necessary to adjust the
motor power factor parameter manually.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

39

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

NOTICE
1-03 Torque Characteristics does not have effect when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient
SPM.
1-04 Overload Mode
Select the torque level in overload mode.
[0] High torque - for undersized motors, allows up to 160% overtorque.
[1] Normal torque - allows up to 110% over-torque.

Option:

Function:

[0]

High torque

[1] *

Normal torque

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
This parameter defines the term Clockwise
corresponding to the LCP direction arrow. Used for
easy change of direction of shaft rotation without
swapping motor wires.
[0] * Normal Motor shaft turns in clockwise direction when the
frequency converter is connected UU; VV, and
WW to motor.
[1]

[0] Asynchron

Parameter 1-17 Voltage filter

time const.

Parameter 1-20 Motor Power

[kW]

Parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP]

Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage

Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency

Parameter 1-24 Motor Current

Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal

Speed

when the frequency converter is connected UU;

Parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation

Check

Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor

Adaptation (AMA)

Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance

(Rs)

Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance

(Rr)

Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance

(Xh)

Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance

(Ld)
Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles

Inverse Motor shaft turns in counter clockwise direction

[1] PM Motor
non-salient

Parameter 1-16 High Speed Filter

Time Const.

Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont.

Rated Torque

1-06 Clockwise Direction

Option:

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

x
x

Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000

RPM

x
x

Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed

3.3.2 1-10 Motor Selection

Parameter 1-51 Min Speed

Normal Magnetising [RPM]

NOTICE

Parameter 1-52 Min Speed

Normal Magnetising [Hz]

This parameter group cannot be adjusted while the

motor is running.

Parameter 1-58 Flying Start Test

Pulses Current

Parameter 1-59 Flying Start Test

Pulses Frequency

Parameter 1-60 Low Speed Load

Compensation

Parameter 1-61 High Speed Load

Compensation

Parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation

Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant

Parameter 1-64 Resonance

Damping

Parameter 1-14 Damping Gain

Parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter

Time Const.

Parameter 1-65 Resonance

Damping Time Constant

Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at

Low Speed

VV, and WW to motor.

The following parameters are active ('x') depending on

the setting of parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
Parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction

[0] Asynchron

[1] PM Motor
non-salient

Parameter 1-00 Configuration

Mode

Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics

Parameter 1-06 Clockwise

Direction

40

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

[0] Asynchron

Parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode

[1] PM Motor
non-salient
x

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

[0] Asynchron

[1] PM Motor
non-salient

Parameter 1-71 Start Delay

Parameter 4-17 Torque Limit

Generator Mode

Parameter 1-72 Start Function

Parameter 4-18 Current Limit

Parameter 1-73 Flying Start

Parameter 1-80 Function at Stop

Parameter 4-19 Max Output

Frequency

Parameter 1-81 Min Speed for

Function at Stop [RPM]

4-58 Missing Motor Phase

Function

Parameter 1-82 Min Speed for

Function at Stop [Hz]

Parameter 14-40 VT Level

Parameter 1-86 Trip Speed Low

[RPM]

Parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum

Magnetisation

Parameter 1-87 Trip Speed Low

[Hz]

Parameter 14-42 Minimum AEO

Frequency
Parameter 14-43 Motor Cosphi

Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal

Protection

Table 3.5

Parameter 1-91 Motor External

Fan

1-10 Motor Construction

Parameter 1-93 Thermistor

Source

Parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat

Current

Parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current

Parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time

Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In

Speed [RPM]

Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In

Speed [Hz]

Select the motor construction type.

Option:

Function:

[0] * Asynchron

For asynchronous motors.

[1]

For permanent magnet (PM) motors.

Note that PM motors are divided into 2
groups, with either surface mounted
(non-salient) or interior (salient)
magnets.

PM, non salient

SPM

NOTICE

Parameter 2-06 Parking Current

Parameter 2-07 Parking Time

Only available up to 22 kW motor

power.

Parameter 2-10 Brake Function

Parameter 2-11 Brake Resistor

(ohm)

NOTICE

Parameter 2-12 Brake Power

Limit (kW)

Motor construction can either be asynchronous or

permanent magnet (PM) motor.

Parameter 2-13 Brake Power

Monitoring

Parameter 2-15 Brake Check

Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max.

Current

Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage

Control

Parameter 4-10 Motor Speed

Direction

Parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low

Limit [RPM]

Parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low

Limit [Hz]

Parameter 4-13 Motor Speed

High Limit [RPM]

Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed

High Limit [Hz]

Parameter 4-16 Torque Limit

Motor Mode

MG20O802

3 3

3.3.3 1-14 - 1-17 VVC+ PM

The default control parameters for VVC+ PMSM control
core are optimised for applications and inertia load in
range of 50>Jl/Jm>5, were Jl is load inertia from the
application and jm is machine inertia.
For low inertia applications Jl/Jm<5 it is recommended
that parameter 1-17 Voltage filter time const. is increased
with a factor of 5-10 and in some cases 1-14 Damping Gain
should be reduced to improve performance and stability.
For high-inertia applications Jl/Jm>>50 it is recommended
that parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const.,
parameter 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const.
and1-14 Damping Gain are increased to improve
performance and stability.
For high load at low speed [<30% of rated speed] it is
recommended that parameter 1-17 Voltage filter time const.
is increased due to nonlinearity in the inverter at low
speed.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

41

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

NOTICE

1-14 Damping Gain

Range:
120
%*

3 3

Function:

[0 The parameter stabilises the PM motor to run it

250 %] smooth and stable. The value of damping gain
controls the dynamic performance of the PM
motor. Low damping gain results in high dynamic
and a high value results in a low dynamic
performance. If the damping gain is too high or
low, the control becomes unstable. The resulting
dynamic performance is related to the machine
data and load type.

Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW], parameter 1-21 Motor

Power [HP], 1-22 Motor Voltage and parameter 1-23 Motor
Frequency have no effect when parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction = [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
1-20 Motor Power [kW]
Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.09 2000.00
kW]

1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const.

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0.01 20 s]

High pass-filter damping time constant

determines the response time to load
steps. Obtain quick control through a
short damping time constant. However,
if this value is too short, the control
gets unstable. This time constant is
used below 10% rated speed.

1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const.

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0.01 20 s]

Size
related*

selections made in parameter 0-03 Regional

Settings, either parameter 1-20 Motor Power
[kW] or parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] is
made invisible.

1-21 Motor Power [HP]

Range:
Size
related*

High pass-filter damping time constant

determines the response time to load
steps. Obtain quick control through a
short damping time constant. However,
if this value is too short, the control
gets unstable. This time constant is
used above 10% rated speed.

Function:
[ 0.09 500.00
hp]

Depending on the selections made in

parameter 0-03 Regional Settings, either
parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] is made
invisible.

Range:

Function:
[0.001 - 1 Machine Supply Voltage Filter Time
s]
constant is used for reducing the
influence of high frequency ripples and
system resonances in the calculation of
machine supply voltage. Without this
filter, the ripples in the currents can
distort the calculated voltage and
affects the stability of the system.

Size
related*

Function:
[ 10 1000 V]

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Enter the nominal motor voltage
according to the motor nameplate data.
The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output of the unit.

1-23 Motor Frequency

3.3.4 1-2* Motor Data

Range:

This parameter group contains input data from the

nameplate on the connected motor.

Size
related*

Function:
[20 1000
Hz]

Select the motor frequency value from the

motor nameplate data. For 87 Hz operation
with 230/400 V motors, set the nameplate
data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt

NOTICE
Changing the value of these parameters affects the
setting of other parameters.

42

Enter the nominal motor power in hp

according to the motor nameplate data.
The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output of the unit.

1-22 Motor Voltage

1-17 Voltage filter time const.

Range:

Enter the nominal motor power in kW

according to the motor nameplate data.
The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output of the unit.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running. Depending on the

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

and parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference to
the 87 Hz application.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

1-24 Motor Current

Range:

Option:

Function:

Size
related*

[ 0.10 10000.00 A]

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[100 - 60000
RPM]

The AMA function optimises dynamic motor

performance by automatically optimising the

Enter the nominal motor current

value from the motor nameplate
data. This data is used for
calculating motor torque, thermal
motor protection etc.

1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

Enter the nominal motor speed
value from the motor nameplate
data. This data is used for
calculating automatic motor
compensations.

advanced motor parameter 1-30 Stator

Resistance (Rs) to parameter 1-35 Main
Reactance (Xh)) while the motor is stationary.
[0] * Off

No function

[1]

Performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the

Enable
Complete
AMA

Range:

[2]

Enable
Reduced
AMA

Performs a reduced AMA of the stator

resistance Rs in the system only. Select this
option if an LC filter is used between the
frequency converter and the motor.

Function:
[1 10000
Nm]

rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage

reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2
and the main reactance Xh.

1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque

Size
related*

Function:

Enter the value from the motor nameplate

data. The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output. This parameter is
available when parameter 1-10 Motor

NOTICE
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) does
not have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
= [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient

SPM, i.e. the parameter is valid for PM and
nonsalient SPM motors only.

1-28 Motor Rotation Check

Option:

Function:
Following installation and connection of the
motor, this function allows the correct motor
rotation direction to be verified. Enabling this
function overrides any bus commands or digital
inputs, except External Interlock and Safe Torque
Off (STO) (if included).

[0] * Off
[1]

Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand On] after

selecting [1] Enable complete AMA or [2] Enable reduced
AMA. See also the item Automatic Motor Adaptation in the
Design Guide. After a normal sequence, the display reads:
Press [OK] to finish AMA. After pressing [OK] the
frequency converter is ready for operation.

Motor Rotation Check is not active.

Enabled Motor Rotation Check is enabled.

NOTICE
Once the motor rotation check is enabled the display
shows: Note! Motor may run in wrong direction.
Pressing [OK], [Back] or [Cancel] dismisses the message
and displays a new message: Press [Hand On] to start
the motor. Press [Cancel] to abort. Pressing [Hand On]
starts the motor at 5 Hz in forward direction and the
display shows: Motor is running. Check if motor rotation
direction is correct. Press [Off] to stop the motor.
Pressing [Off] stops the motor and resets
parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation Check. If motor rotation
direction is incorrect, interchange 2 motor phase cables.

WARNING
Remove mains power before disconnecting motor phase
cables.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

43

3 3

Programming Guide

NOTICE

3 3

P 1-30
RS

I1

For the best adaptation of the frequency

converter, run AMA on a cold motor

AMA cannot be performed while the motor is

running

X1

130BA375.11

Parameter Description

X2

U1
Xh

R1s

R1

P1-35

NOTICE
NOTICE
If one of the settings in parameter group 1-2* Motor
Data is changed, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles, the advanced motor
parameters, returns to default setting.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.

Illustration 3.4 Motor Equivalent Diagram for an

Asynchronous Motor

Par. 1-30
Rs

Id

sLqIq

Par. 1-37
Ld

130BC056.10

Avoid generating external torque during AMA.

Ud

NOTICE
Full AMA should be run without filter only while reduced
AMA should be run with filter.
See section: Application Examples > Automatic Motor
Adaptation in the VLT AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide.

d-axis equivalent circuit

Par. 1-30
Rs

Id

sLdId

Par. 1-37
Lq=Ld

+
+

3.3.5 1-3* Adv. Motor Data

Parameters for advanced motor data. The motor data in
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles must match the relevant motor
to run the motor optimally. The default settings are figures
based on common motor parameter values from normal
standard motors. If the motor parameters are not set
correctly, a malfunction of the frequency converter system
may occur. If the motor data is not known, running an
AMA (Automatic Motor Adaptation) is recommended. See
section: Application Examples > Automatic Motor Adaptation
in the VLT AQUA Drive FC 202 Design Guide. The AMA
sequence adjusts all motor parameters except the moment
of inertia of the rotor and the iron loss resistance
(parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)).

Par. 1-40
sPM

Uq
-

q-axis equivalent circuit

Illustration 3.5 Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram for a PM

non-salient Motor

1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.0140 140.0000 Ohm]

Set the stator resistance value.

Enter the value from a motor
data sheet or perform an AMA on
a cold motor.

1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)

Range:
Size
related*

44

Function:
[ 0.0100 100.0000
Ohm]

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Set the rotor resistance value Rr to

improve shaft performance.
1.

Run an AMA on a cold motor.

The frequency converter
measures the value from the

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)

1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)

Range:

Range:

Function:

Function:

motor. All compensations are

reset to 100%.
2.

Run an AMA on a cold motor.

The frequency converter
measures the value from the
motor.

2.

Enter the X2 value manually.

Enter the Rr value manually.

Obtain the value from the
motor supplier.

3.

1.

Obtain the value from the

motor supplier.

Use the Rr default setting. The

frequency converter establishes
the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.

3.

frequency converter establishes

the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.

NOTICE
Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) does not have effect
when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, nonsalient SPM.

See Illustration 3.4.

NOTICE
The parameter value is updated
after each torque calibration if
option [3] 1st start with store or
option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
Calibration.

1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.0400 400.0000
Ohm]

Set the stator leakage reactance of the

motor using one of these methods:
1.

2.

3.

Use the X2 default setting. The

Run an AMA on a cold motor.

The frequency converter
measures the value from the
motor.

NOTICE
This parameter is only relevant for
ASM.

Enter the X1 value manually.

Obtain the value from the
motor supplier.

1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)

Use the X1 default setting. The

Range:

frequency converter establishes

the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.

Size
related*

Function:
[ 1.0000 10000.0000
Ohm]

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while running.

See Illustration 3.4.

NOTICE

Set the main reactance of the motor

using one of these methods:

The parameter value is updated

after each torque calibration if
option [3] 1st start with store or
option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
Calibration.

1.

motor.
2.

3.

This parameter is only relevant for

ASM.

MG20O802

Function:
[ 0.0400 400.0000
Ohm]

Set the rotor leakage reactance of the

motor using one of these methods:

Use the Xh default setting. The

frequency converter
establishes the setting on the
basis of the motor name plate
data.

1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)

Range:

Enter the Xh value manually.

Obtain the value from the
motor supplier.

NOTICE

Size
related*

Run an AMA on a cold motor.

The frequency converter
measures the value from the

NOTICE
Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) does not have effect
when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, nonsalient SPM.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

45

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)

Range:
Size
related*

3 3

Function:
[0 10000.000
Ohm]

NOTICE

Parameter 1-30 Stator

Resistance (Rs)
(Line to common)

This parameter gives stator winding

resistance (Rs) similar to Asynchronous

Parameter 1-37 d-axis

Inductance (Ld)
(Line to common)

This parameter gives direct axis

inductance of the PM motor. The daxis inductance is defined for phaseto-common measurement. For lineline data, where stator resistance is
measured between any 2 lines, divide
by 2.

This parameter cannot be

adjusted while the motor is
running.
Enter the equivalent iron loss resistance
(RFe) value to compensate for iron
losses in the motor.
The RFe value cannot be found by
performing an AMA.
The RFe value is especially important in
torque control applications. If RFe is
unknown, leave parameter 1-36 Iron
Loss Resistance (Rfe) on default setting.

NOTICE
This parameter is not available from the LCP.

Motor Stator resistance. The stator

resistance is defined for line to
common measurement. For line-line
data, where stator resistance is
measured between any 2 lines, divide
by 2.

Parameter 1-40 Back EMF This parameter gives back EMF across
at 1000 RPM
stator terminal of PM Motor at 1000
RMS (Line to Line Value ) RPM mechanical speed specifically. It
is defined between line-to-line and
expressed in RMS Value
Table 3.6 Parameters related to PM Motors

1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)

Size
related*

NOTICE

Function:
[ 0.000 1000 mH]

NOTICE
This parameter is only active when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
has the value PM, non-salient SPM
[1] (Permanent Magnet Motor).
Enter the value of the d-axis inductance.
Obtain the value from the PM motor
data sheet.

Stator resistance and d-axis Inductance values are

normally, for asynchronous motors, described in technical
specifications as between line and common (starpoint). For
PM motors they are typically described in technical specifications as between line-line. PM motors are typically built
for star connection.

Motor manufacturers provide values for stator resistance

(parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)) and d-axis
Inductance (parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)) in
technical specifications as between line and common
(starpoint) or between line-line. There is no general
standard. The different set-ups of Stator Winding
Resistance and Induction are shown in Illustration 3.6.
Danfoss frequency converters always require the line to
common value. The back EMF of PM motor is defined as
`Induced EMF developed across any of 2 phases of stator
winding of free running Motor'. Danfoss frequency
converters always require the line to line RMS value
measured at 1000 rpm, mechanical speed of rotation.
This is shown in Illustration 3.7)
Line to common (starpoint)

130BC008.11

Range:

Line to line values

Rs and Ld
Rs and Ld

Illustration 3.6 Motor parameters are provided in different

formats. Danfoss frequency converters always require the line
to common value.

46

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

Permanent magnet motors

Line to Line Back

Emf in RMS Value
at 1000 rpm
Speed (mech)

3.3.6 1-5* Load Indep. Setting

130BC009.10

Parameter Description

1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed

Range:
100
%*

[0 300
%]

Illustration 3.7 Machine parameter definitions of Back EMF of

permanent magnet motors

Function:
Use this parameter along with parameter 1-51 Min
Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] to obtain a
different thermal load on the motor when running
at low speed.
Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated
magnetising current. If the setting is too low, the
torque on the motor shaft may be reduced.

Range:
Size
related*

100%
Par.1-50

Function:
[2 100 ]

Enter the number of motor poles.

Poles

~nn@ 50 Hz

~nn@ 60 Hz

2700-2880

3250-3460

1350-1450

1625-1730

700-960

840-1153

Table 3.7 Pole Counts and Related

Frequencies
Table 3.7 shows the number of poles for
normal speed ranges of various motor types.
Define motors designed for other frequencies
separately. The motor pole value is always an
even number, because it refers to the total
number of poles, not pairs of poles. The
frequency converter creates the initial setting

Par.1-51
Par.1-52

Hz
RPM

Illustration 3.8 Magnetising current

NOTICE
Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed does
not have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
= [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM]
Range:
Size
related*

of parameter 1-39 Motor Poles based on

Function:
[10 300
RPM]

parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency and

Set the required speed for normal

magnetising current. If the speed is set
lower than the motor slip speed,
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
Speed and parameter 1-51 Min Speed

parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.

Normal Magnetising [RPM] are of no significance.

NOTICE

Use this parameter along with

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is

running.

Range:

Function:
[ 10 9000 V]

parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero

Speed. See Table 3.7.

NOTICE

1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM

Size
related*

130BA045.11

Magn. current

1-39 Motor Poles

Set the nominal back EMF for the motor

when running at 1000 RPM. This
parameter is only active when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set
to [1] PM, non salient SPM.

Parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] does

not have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
= [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]
Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.3 10.0 Hz]

Set the required frequency for normal

magnetising current. If the frequency is set
lower than the motor slip frequency,
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
Speed and parameter 1-51 Min Speed
Normal Magnetising [RPM] are inactive.
Use this parameter along with
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
Speed. See Table 3.7.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

47

3 3

Programming Guide

NOTICE

1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current

Parameter 1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] does

not have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
= [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 200
%]

Range:
Size
related*

Construction:
[0] Asynchron: [0-200%]
Reducing this value reduces the generated
torque. 100% means full nominal motor
current. In this case the default value is 30%.
[1] PM non-salient: [0-40%]
A general setting of 20% is recommended on
PM motors. Higher values can give increased
performance. However, on motors with back
EMF higher than 300VLL (rms) at nominal
speed and high winding inductance (more
than 10 mH) a lower value is recommended to
avoid wrong speed estimation. The parameter

Function:
[0 1000 V]

Enter the voltage at each frequency point

to manually form a U/f characteristic
matching the motor.
The frequency points are defined in
parameter 1-56 V/f Characteristic - f.
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]
and is only accessible when
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set
to [0] U/f.

1-56 V/f Characteristic - f

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 1000.0
Hz]

Enter the frequency points to manually

form a U/f-characteristic matching the
motor.
The voltage at each point is defined in
parameter 1-55 V/f Characteristic - V.
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]
and is only accessible when
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is
set to [0] U/f.

1-55[5]
1-55[4]
1-55[3]

1-55[2]
1-55[1]
1-55[0]
1-56
[1]

1-56
[2]

1-56
[3]

is active when parameter 1-73 Flying Start is

enabled.

NOTICE
See description of parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode for an
overview of the relation between the PM Flying Start
parameters.
1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency
Range:

Motor Voltage
Par 1-55 [x]

1-56
[0]

1-56
[4]

1-56
[5]

Size
related*

Function:
[0 The value range and function depends on
500 %] parameter parameter 1-10 Motor Construction:
[0] Asynchron: [0-500%]
Control the percentage of the frequency for
the pulses used to detect the motor
direction. Increasing this value reduces the
generated torque. In this mode 100% means
2 times the slip frequency.
[1] PM non-salient: [0-10%]
This parameter defines the motor speed (in
% of nominal motor speed) below which the

Output Frequency
Par 1-56 [x]

Illustration 3.9 U/f Characteristic

48

Set the magnitude of the magnetising current

for the pulses used to detect the motor
direction. The value range and function
depends on parameter parameter 1-10 Motor

1-55 V/f Characteristic - V

130BA166.10

3 3

Parameter Description

Parking function (see parameter 2-06 Parking

Current and parameter 2-07 Parking Time
becomes active. This parameter is only active
when parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode is set to
[1] Parking and only after starting the motor.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

NOTICE

3.3.7 1-6* Load Depend. Setting

Parameter 1-61 High Speed Load Compensation does not

have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1]
PM, non-salient SPM.

1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation

Range:
100 %*

Function:
[0 - 300 Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
%]
relation to load when the motor is running at
low speed and obtain the optimum U/f
characteristic. The motor size determines the
frequency range within which this parameter
is active.
Motor size [kW]

< 10

11-45

<5

55-550

< 3-4

0 %*

Function:

[-500 500 %]

Enter the % value for slip compensation, to

compensate for tolerances in the value of
nM,N. Slip compensation is calculated automatically, i.e. on the basis of the rated motor
speed nM,N.

NOTICE
Parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation does not have effect
when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, nonsalient SPM.

NOTICE

Um
Par.1-60

Par.1-61

130BA046.11

Parameter 1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation does not

have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1]
PM, non-salient SPM.

100%

Range:

Change-over [Hz]

0.25-7.5

3 3

1-62 Slip Compensation

1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0.05 - 5
s]

Enter the slip compensation reaction

speed. A high value results in slow
reaction, and a low value results in
quick reaction. If low-frequency
resonance problems arise, use a longer
time setting.

NOTICE

60%

Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant does not

have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1]
PM, non-salient SPM.
0%

fout

Changeover

Illustration 3.10 Low Speed Load Compensation

1-64 Resonance Damping

Range:
100
%*

[0 500 %]

100 %*

Function:
[0 - 300 Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
%]
relation to load when the motor is running at
high speed and obtain the optimum U/f
characteristic. The motor size determines the
frequency range within which this parameter
is active.

MG20O802

parameter 1-64 Resonance Damping and

parameter 1-65 Resonance Damping Time
Constant to help eliminate high-frequency
resonance problems. To reduce resonance

1-61 High Speed Load Compensation

Range:

Function:
Enter the resonance dampening value. Set

Motor size [kW]

Change-over [Hz]

0.25-7.5

> 10

11-45

<5

55-550

< 3-4

oscillation, increase the value of

parameter 1-64 Resonance Damping.

NOTICE
Parameter 1-64 Resonance Damping does not have effect
when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, nonsalient SPM.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

49

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

1-65 Resonance Damping Time Constant

1-72 Start Function

Range:

Option:

5 ms*

Function:

[5 - 50
ms]

3 3

Function:

Set parameter 1-64 Resonance Damping and

Select the start function during start delay. This

parameter 1-65 Resonance Damping Time

Constant to help eliminate high-frequency
resonance problems. Enter the time constant
that provides the best dampening.

parameter is linked to parameter 1-71 Start Delay.

NOTICE

[0] DC Hold/
Motor
Preheat

Energises motor with a DC holding current

[2] Coast

Motor coasted during the start delay time

(inverter off).

(parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current) during

the start delay time.

Parameter 1-65 Resonance Damping Time Constant does

not have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
= [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

Available selections depend on

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction:
[0] Asynchron:

1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[1 200 %]

Enter the minimum motor current at low

speed.
Increasing this current improves developed
motor torque at low speed. Low speed is
here defined as speeds below 6% of the
Nominal Speed of Motor

Option:

When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,

parameter 1-71 Start Delay has no function.
Search direction for flying start is linked to the

Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed does not have

affect if parameter 1-10 Motor Construction=[0] Asynchron

setting in 4-10 Motor Speed Direction.

[0] Clockwise: Flying start search in clockwise
direction. If not successful, a DC brake is carried
out.

3.3.8 1-7* Start Adjustments

[2] Both Directions: The flying start first makes a

search in the direction determined by the last
reference (direction). If not finding the speed it
makes a search in the other direction. If not
successful, a DC brake is activated in the time set

1-70 PM Start Mode

[1] * Parking

Function:
Suitable for all applications where the motor is
known to be standing still when starting (e.g.
conveyors, pumps and non wind milling fans).

[0] Disabled Select [0] Disable if this function is not required

fans with light wind milling, select [1] Parking

[1] Enabled

parameter 2-07 Parking Time accordingly.

[0 300 s]

Select [1] Enable to enable the frequency converter

to catch and control a spinning motor.
The parameter is always set to [1] Enable when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM non-

1-71 Start Delay

00 s*

in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time. Start then takes

place from 0 Hz.

If the motor turns at a slight speed (i.e. lower

than 2-5% of the nominal speed) e.g. due to
and adjust parameter 2-06 Parking Current and

Range:

Function:
This function makes it possible to catch a motor
which is spinning freely due to a mains drop-out.

NOTICE

Rotor
Detection

Function:
When the frequency converter receives the start
command, it delays the motor start for the time
specified in this parameter.

salient.
Important related parameters:

The function selected in parameter 1-80 Function

at Stop is active in the delay period.

50

[2] coast

1-73 Flying Start

(parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed) in

[0]

[0] DC-hold

[1] PM non-salient:

VVC+ PM Control

Option:

[2] coast

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current

1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency
Parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode
Parameter 2-06 Parking Current
Parameter 2-07 Parking Time
Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed
[RPM]
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

1-73 Flying Start

Option:

Function:

Parameter 2-06 Parking Current

Prepared for salient pole machine (IPMSM) but

not yet verified on those types of machine.

For high-inertia applications (i.e. where the load

inertia is more than 30 times larger than the
motor inertia) a brake resistor is recomended to
avoid over-voltage trip during high speed
engagement of the flying start function.

Parameter 2-07 Parking Time

When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,

parameter 1-71 Start Delay has no function.

3 3

1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip

Search direction for flying start is linked to the setting in
4-10 Motor Speed Direction.
[0] Clockwise: Flying start search in clockwise direction. If
not successful, a DC brake is carried out.
[2] Both Directions: The flying start first makes a search in
the direction determined by the last reference (direction). If
not finding the speed it makes a search in the other
direction. If not successful, a DC brake is activated in the
time set in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time. Start then
takes place from 0 Hz.
The flying start function used for PM motors is based on
an initial speed estimation. The speed is always estimated
as the first thing after an active start signal is given. Based
on the setting of parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode the
following happens:
Parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode = [0] Rotor Detection:
If the speed estimate comes out as greater than 0 Hz the
frequency converter catches the motor at that speed and
resume normal operation. Otherwise, the frequency
converter estimates the rotor position and start normal
operation from there.
Parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode = [1] Parking:
If the speed estimate comes out lower than the setting in
1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency then the parking
function is engaged (see parameter 2-06 Parking Current
and parameter 2-07 Parking Time). Otherwise, the frequency
converter catches the motor at that speed and resumes
normal operation. Refer to description of
parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode for recommended settings.
Current limitations of the flying start principle used for PM
motors:
The speed range is up to 100% Nominal Speed or
the field weakening speed (which ever is lowest).

PMSM with high back EMF (>300 VLL(rms)) and

high-winding inductance (>10 mH) needed more
time for reducing short circuit current to zero and
may be susceptible to error in estimation.
Current testing limited to a speed range up to
300 Hz. For certain units the limit is 250 Hz; all
200-240 V units up to and including 2.2 kW and
all 380-480 V units up to and including 4 kW.

Range:
0 s*

Function:

[0 - 10 If the motor does not reach the speed specified in

s]
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] within the time
specified in this parameter, the frequency
converter trips. The time in this parameter
includes the time specified in 1-71 Start Delay. For
instance, this means that if the value in 1-71 Start
Delay is more or equal to value in
parameter 1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip, the
frequency converter never starts.

3.3.9 1-8* Stop Adjustments

1-80 Function at Stop
Option:

Function:
Select the frequency converter function after a
stop command or after the speed is ramped
down to the settings in parameter 1-81 Min
Speed for Function at Stop [RPM].
Available selections depend on
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction:
[0] Asynchron:

[0] coast
[1] DC-hold

[1] PM non-salient:

[0] coast

[0] * Coast

Leaves motor in free mode.

[1]

Energises motor with a DC holding current (see

DC Hold/
Motor
Preheat

parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current).

1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[0 - 600
RPM]

Set the speed at which to activate

parameter 1-80 Function at Stop.

1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - 20.0
Hz]

Set the output frequency at which to

activate parameter 1-80 Function at
Stop.

Current testing limited to a machine power size

up to 22 kW.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

51

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.3.10 Advanced Minimum Speed

Monitoring for Submersible Pumps
Some pumps are very sensitive to operating at low speed.
Typical reasons for this are insufficient cooling or
lubrication at low speed.
Under overload conditions, the frequency converter
protects itself using its integral protection features, which
include lowering the speed. For example, the current limit
controller can lower the speed. This means that in some
cases the speed may go lower than the speed specified in
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and 4-12 Motor Speed
Low Limit [Hz].
The advanced minimum speed monitoring feature trips the
frequency converter if the speed drops below a certain
value:
If the motor of the pump does not reach the speed
specified in 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] within the time
specified in parameter 1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip
(ramping up takes too long), the frequency converter trips.
Timers for 1-71 Start Delay and parameter 1-79 Pump Start
Max Time to Trip start at the same time when the start
command is issued. For instance, this means that if the
value in 1-71 Start Delay is more or equal to value in
parameter 1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip, the frequency
converter will never start.

1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]

Range:

Function:
speed at any time after the start (or during
a stop) falls below the value in the
parameter, the frequency converter trips
with the alarm Speed Limit.

1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 par.
4-14
Hz]

NOTICE
This parameter is only available if
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set
to [Hz].
Enter the low limit for the motor speed at
which the frequency converter trips. If the
value is 0, the function is not active. If the
speed at any time after the start (or during a
stop) falls below the value in the parameter,
the frequency converter trips with the alarm
Speed Limit.

3.3.11 1-9* Motor Temperature

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

N RPM

Option:

The frequency converter determines the

motor temperature for motor protection in 2
different ways:

N 1-86

T 1-71 T 1-79

1-71 Start Delay.

T1-79

Parameter 1-79 Pump Start Max Time to Trip. This time

includes the time in T1-71.

N1-86

1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]. If the speed drops below

this value during normal operation, the frequency
converter trips.

Normal operation.

Source).

need for a lower load at lower

speed due to less cooling from the
fan incorporated in the motor.

1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]

[0]

No
protection

If the motor is continuously overloaded and

no warning or trip of frequency converter is
wanted.

[1]

Thermistor
warning

Activates a warning when the connected

thermistor in the motor reacts in the event of
motor overtemperature.

[2]

Thermistor
trip

Stops (trips) the frequency converter when

the connected thermistor in the motor reacts
in the event of motor overtemperature.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Function:
[0 par.
4-13
RPM]

NOTICE
This parameter is only available if
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set
to [RPM].
Enter the low limit for the motor speed at
which the frequency converter trips. If the
value is 0, the function is not active. If the

52

Via calculation (ETR = Electronic

Thermal Relay) of the thermal load,
based on the actual load and time.
The calculated thermal load is
comed with the rated motor current
IM,N and the rated motor frequency
fM,N. The calculations estimate the

Illustration 3.11 Advanced Minimum Speed Monitoring

Size
related*

Via a thermistor sensor connected

to one of the analog or digital
inputs (parameter 1-93 Thermistor

T1-71

Range:

Function:

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

NOTICE

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

Option:

Function:

[3]

ETR warning
1

[4]

ETR trip 1

[5]

ETR warning
2

[6]

ETR trip 2

[7]

ETR warning
3

[8]

ETR trip 3

[9]

ETR warning
4

For correct operation of ETR function setting in

1-03 Torque Characteristics must fit the application (see
description of 1-03 Torque Characteristics).

Option:
[0] * No
[1]

Function:
No external fan is required, i.e. the motor is derated at
low speed.

Yes Applies an external motor fan (external ventilation), so

no derating of the motor is required at low speed.
The upper curve in Illustration 3.12 (fout = 1 x fM,N) is
followed if the motor current is lower than nominal

[10] ETR trip 4

motor current (see parameter 1-24 Motor Current). If

the motor current exceeds nominal current, the
operation time still decreases as if no fan were
installed.

1-93 Thermistor Source

Option:

t [s]
2000
1000
600
500
400
300
200

Function:

NOTICE

175ZA052.12

ETR (Electronic Thermal Relay) functions 1-4 calculate the

load when set-up where they were selected is active. For
example ETR-3 starts calculating when set-up 3 is selected.
For the North American market: The ETR functions provide
class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with
NEC.

100
60
50
40
30
20
10

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.
Select the input to which the thermistor (PTC
sensor) should be connected. An analog
input option [1] Analog Input 53 or [2] Analog
Input 54 cannot be selected if the analog
input is already in use as a reference source

fOUT = 1 x f M,N(par. 1-23)

fOUT = 2 x f M,N

(selected in parameter 3-15 Reference 1

fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N

Source, parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source or

parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source).

1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

When using MCB 112, [0] None must always

be selected.

IM
IMN(par. 1-24)
[0] * None

Illustration 3.12 Motor Overload Protection

[1]

Analog
Input 53

[2]

Analog
Input 54

To maintain PELV, all connections made to the control

terminals must be PELV, e.g. thermistor must be
reinforced/double insulated

[3]

Digital input
18

[4]

NOTICE

Digital input
19

[5]

Danfoss recommends using 24 V DC as thermistor supply

voltage.

Digital input
32

[6]

Digital input
33

WARNING

NOTICE

NOTICE

The ETR timer function does not work when

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient
SPM.

Digital input should be set to [0] PNP - Active at 24 V in

parameter 5-00 Digital I/O Mode.

MG20O802

3 3

1-91 Motor External Fan

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

53

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.4 Parameters 2-** Brakes

2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]

Range:

3.4.1 2-0* DC-Brakes

Parameter group for configuring the DC brake and DC
hold functions.

Size
related*

Function:
[0 - 0
RPM]

in parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current, upon

a stop command.

2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current

Range:
50
%*

[0 160 %]

Set the DC brake cut-in speed for

activation of the DC braking current set

When parameter 1-10 Motor Construction

Function:

is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM this value

is limited to 0 rpm (OFF)

Enter a value for holding current as a percentage

of the rated motor current IM,N set in
parameter 1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC holding
current corresponds to IM,N.
This parameter holds the motor (holding torque)
or pre-heats the motor.

NOTICE
Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] does not
have effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1]
PM, non-salient SPM.

This parameter is active if [1] DC hold/Preheat is

selected in parameter 1-80 Function at Stop.

NOTICE

2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]

Range:

Parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current does not have

effect when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM,
non-salient SPM.

Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - 0.0 Hz] Set the DC brake cut-in speed for
activation of the DC braking current
set in 2-01 DC Brake Current, upon a
stop command.

NOTICE

NOTICE

The maximum value depends on the rated motor

current.
Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may damage the
motor.

Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] has no effect

when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, nonsalient SPM.
2-06 Parking Current

2-01 DC Brake Current

Range:
50
%*

[0 1000
%]

Range:

Function:
Enter a value for current as a percentage of the
rated motor current IM,N, see parameter 1-24 Motor

50
%*

[0 1000 %]

when the speed is lower than the limit set in

parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]; when
the DC Brake Inverse function is active; or via the
serial communication port. The braking current is
active during the time period set in
parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time.

NOTICE

Set current as percentage of rated motor

current, parameter 1-24 Motor Current. Active in
connection with parameter 1-73 Flying Start.
The parking current is active during the time

Current. 100% DC braking current corresponds to

IM,N.
DC brake current is applied on a stop command,

Function:

period set in parameter 2-07 Parking Time.

NOTICE
parameter 2-06 Parking Current and
parameter 2-07 Parking Time: Only active if PM motor
construction is selected in parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction.
2-07 Parking Time

The maximum value depends on the rated motor

current. Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may
damage the motor.

Range:
3 s*

Function:

[0.1 - 60 Set the duration of the parking current time set

s]
in parameter 2-06 Parking Current. Active in
connection with parameter 1-73 Flying Start.

2-02 DC Braking Time

NOTICE

Range:

Parameter 2-07 Parking Time is only active

when [1] PM, non salient SPM is selected
in 1-10 Motor Construction

10 s*

Function:

[0 - 60 s] Set the duration of the DC braking current set

in parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current, once
activated.

54

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.4.2 2-1* Brake Energy Funct.

2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Parameter group for selecting dynamic braking parameters.

Only valid for frequency converters with brake chopper.

Range:

For 200-240 V units:

Presistor =

2-10 Brake Function

Option:

Function:
390

dutytime
R 120

778

dutytime
R 120

Available selections depend on

Presistor =

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction:

[0] Asynchron:

For 525-600 V units:

Presistor =

[0] Off
[1] Resistor brake

943

dutytime
R 120

2-13 Brake Power Monitoring

[2] AC brake

Option:

[1] PM non-salient:

3 3

For 380-480 V units:

Function:

Function:

NOTICE

[0] Off

This parameter is only active in

frequency converters with an
integral dynamic brake.

[1] Resistor brake

[0] Off

No brake resistor installed.

[1] Resistor
brake

Brake resistor incorporated in the system, for

dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat.
Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DClink voltage during braking (generating operation).
The resistor brake function is only active in
frequency converters with an integral dynamic
brake.

[0] * Off

No brake power monitoring is required.

AC Brake only works in Compressor Torque mode

[1]

Activates a warning in the display when

the power transmitted over 120 s exceeds
100% of the monitoring limit

[2] AC brake

This parameter enables monitoring of the

power to the brake resistor. The power is
calculated on the basis of the resistance
(parameter 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm), the
DC-link voltage, and the resistor duty time.

Warning 120s

in 1-03 Torque Characteristics.

2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[5 65535
Ohm]

Set the brake resistor value in . This value

is used for monitoring the power to the
brake resistor in parameter 2-13 Brake Power

[2]

Trip 120s

Monitoring. This parameter is only active in

frequency converters with an integral
dynamic brake.
Use this parameter for values without
decimals. For a selection with 2 decimals,

Trips the frequency converter and displays

an alarm when the calculated power
exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit.

[3]

Warning & trip

120s

Activates both of the above, including

warning, trip and alarm.

[4]

Warning 30s

[5]

Trip 30s

[6]

Warning & trip

30s

NOTICE

[7]

Warning 60s

[8]

Trip 60s

This parameter is only active in

frequency converters with an
integral dynamic brake.

[9]

Warning & trip

60s

use parameter 30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm).

2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Range:
Size
related*

(parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)).

The warning disappears when the
transmitted power falls below 80% of the
monitoring limit.

Function:
[ 0.001 2000.000
kW]

[10] Warning 300s

[11] Trip 300s

Set the monitoring limit of the brake

power transmitted to the resistor.
The monitoring limit is a product of the
maximum duty cycle (120 s) and the
maximum power of the brake resistor at
that duty cycle. See the formulas below.

MG20O802

[12] Warning & trip

300s
[13] Warning 600s
[14] Trip 600s
[15] Warning & trip
600s

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

55

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

If power monitoring is set to [0] Off or [1] Warning, the

brake function remains active even if the monitoring limit
is exceeded. This may lead to thermal overload of the
resistor. It is also possible to generate a warning via a
relay/digital output. The measuring accuracy of the power
monitoring depends on the accuracy of the resistance of
the resistor (better than 20%).

NOTICE
Remove a warning arising in connection with [0] Off or
[1] Warning by cycling the mains supply. The fault must
be corrected first. For [0] Off or [1] Warning, the
frequency converter keeps running even if a fault is
located.

2-15 Brake Check

2-16 AC brake Max. Current

Option:

Range:

Function:
Select type of test and monitoring function to
check the connection to the brake resistor, or
whether a brake resistor is present, and then
display a warning or an alarm in the event of a
fault. The brake resistor disconnection function is
tested during power-up. However, the brake
IGBT test is performed when there is no braking.
A warning or trip disconnects the brake
function.
The testing sequence is as follows:
1.

The DC-link ripple amplitude is

measured for 300 ms without braking.

2.

The DC-link ripple amplitude is

measured for 300 ms with the brake
turned on.

3.

4.

If the DC-link ripple amplitude while

braking is lower than the DC-link ripple
amplitude before braking +1%. Brake
check failed, return a warning or alarm.
If the DC-link ripple amplitude while
braking is higher than the DC-link
ripple amplitude before braking +1%.
Brake check OK.

Off

Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a

short-circuit during operation. If a short-circuit
occurs, a warning appears.

[1]

Warning

Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a

short-circuit, and to run a test for brake resistor
disconnection during power-up

[2]

Trip

Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of

the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
cuts out while displaying an alarm (trip locked).

[3]

Stop and
trip

Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of

the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs the frequency converter
ramps down to coast and then trips. A trip lock
alarm is displayed.

[4]

AC brake

[0]
*

56

100 %*

Function:
[ 0 - 1000.0
%]

Enter the maximum permissible current

when using AC brake to avoid
overheating of motor windings. The AC
brake function is available in Flux mode
only.

NOTICE
Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max. Current has no effect when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient
SPM.
2-17 Over-voltage Control
Option:

Function:

[0]

Disabled

No OVC required.

[2] *

Enabled

Activates OVC.

NOTICE
Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage Control has no effect when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient
SPM.

NOTICE
The ramp time is automatically adjusted to avoid
tripping of the frequency converter.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

3.5 Parameters 3-** Reference/Ramps

130BB036.10

Parameter Description

P3-03

3.5.1 3-0* Reference Limits

3-02 Minimum Reference
Range:
Size
related*

3 3

Function:
[ -999999.999 par. 3-03
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the desired minimum value

for the remote reference. The
minimum reference value and
unit matches the configuration

P3-02

selection made in
parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode and 20-12 Reference/
Feedback Unit.

3-03 Maximum Reference

Function:
[ par. 3-02 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

P3-10

Enter the maximum acceptable

value for the remote reference.
The maximum reference value
and unit matches the configu-

50

Illustration 3.13 Preset Reference

ration choice made in

parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode and 20-12 Reference/
Feedback Unit.

12 (+24V)
Preset

3-04 Reference Function

Option:

Function:

[0] * Sum

Sums both external and preset reference

sources.

[1]

Use either the preset or the external

reference source.
Shift between external and preset via a
command or a digital input.

External/
Preset

100%

76543210
10101010

29 [P 5-13=Preset ref. bit 0]

11001100

32 [P 5-14=Preset ref. bit 1]

11110000

33 [P 5-15=Preset ref. bit 2]

130BA149.10

Range:
Size
related*

Illustration 3.14 Preset Reference Scheme

3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]

Range:

3.5.2 3-1* References

Select the preset reference(s). Select Preset ref. bit 0/1/2
[16], [17] or [18] for the corresponding digital inputs in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

Size
related*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-14 Hz]

3-10 Preset Reference

The jog speed is a fixed output speed

at which the frequency converter is
running when the jog function is
activated.
See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.

Array [8]

Range:
0 %*

[-100 100 %]

Function:
Enter up to 8 different preset references (0-7) in
this parameter, using array programming. The
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the
value RefMAX (parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference). When using preset references, select
Preset ref. bit 0/1/2 [16], [17] or [18] for the
corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
5-1* Digital Inputs.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

57

Programming Guide

3-13 Reference Site

3-15 Reference 1 Source

Option:

Option:

Function:

[0] * Linked to
Use local reference when in Hand mode; or
Hand / Auto remote reference when in Auto mode.
[1]
[2]

Remote

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

Use remote reference in both Hand mode

and Auto mode.

Local

Select the reference input to be used for

the first reference signal.

Use local reference in both Hand mode and

Auto mode.

Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source,

parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source and

NOTICE

parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source define

up to 3 different reference signals. The

When set to [2] Local, the frequency

converter starts with this setting again
following a 'power down'.

sum of these reference signals defines

the actual reference.
[0]

0 %*

[-100 100 %]

No function

[1] * Analog Input 53

3-14 Preset Relative Reference

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Pulse input 29

The actual reference, X, is increased or decreased

[8]

Pulse input 33

with the percentage Y, set in

[20] Digital pot.meter

parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference. This

results in the actual reference Z. Actual reference

[21] Analog input

X30/11

(X) is the sum of the inputs selected in

[22] Analog input

X30/12

Range:

Function:

parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source,

parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source,

[23] Analog Input

X42/1

parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source and

8-02 Control Source.
Y
X

Z
Relative
Z=X+X*Y/100

Function:

NOTICE

Select which reference site to activate.

Resulting
actual
reference

[24] Analog Input

X42/3

130BA059.12

[25] Analog Input

X42/5
[29] Analog Input
X48/2

Illustration 3.15 Preset Relative Reference

[30] Ext. Closed Loop

1
130BA278.10

3 3

Parameter Description

/10

*Y
X+X

[31] Ext. Closed Loop

2
[32] Ext. Closed Loop
3
[35] Digital input
select

The frequency converter selects AI53 or

AI54 as the reference source based on
the input signal defined in option [42]

Y
-100

100

P 3-14

Illustration 3.16 Actual Reference

58

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Ref source bit 0 of one of the digital

inputs. For more information, see
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs,
option [42] Ref source bit 0.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3-16 Reference 2 Source

3-17 Reference 3 Source

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:

NOTICE

parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source,

parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source and

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source define

up to 3 different reference signals. The
sum of these reference signals defines
the actual reference.

Select the reference input to be used for

the second reference signal.
Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source,
parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source and

[1]

Analog Input 53

parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source define

up to 3 different reference signals. The

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Pulse input 29

sum of these reference signals defines

the actual reference.

[8]

Pulse input 33

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Pulse input 29

[8]

Pulse input 33

[20] Digital pot.meter

[21] Analog input
X30/11

[0] * No function
[1]

[0] * No function

[22] Analog input

X30/12
[23] Analog Input
X42/1

[20] Digital pot.meter

[24] Analog Input

X42/3

[21] Analog input

X30/11

[25] Analog Input

X42/5

[22] Analog input

X30/12

[29] Analog Input

X48/2

[23] Analog Input

X42/1

[30] Ext. Closed Loop

1

[24] Analog Input

X42/3

[31] Ext. Closed Loop

2

[25] Analog Input

X42/5

[32] Ext. Closed Loop

3

[29] Analog Input

X48/2
[30] Ext. Closed Loop
1

[35] Digital input

The frequency converter selects AI53 or

select

AI54 as the reference source basing on

the input signal defined in option [42]

[31] Ext. Closed Loop

2

Ref source bit 0 of one of the digital

inputs. For more information, see

[32] Ext. Closed Loop

3
[35] Digital input
select

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs,

The frequency converter selects AI53 or
AI54 as the reference source basing on
the input signal defined in option [42]
Ref source bit 0 of one of the digital
inputs. For more information, see
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs,
option [42] Ref source bit 0.

3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 par. 4-13
RPM]

Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG, which

is a fixed output speed. The frequency
converter runs at this speed when the jog
function is activated. The maximum limit is
defined in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High

3-17 Reference 3 Source

Option:

option [42] Ref source bit 0.

Limit [RPM].

Function:

See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Select the reference input to be used for
the third reference signal.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

59

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.5.3 3-4* Ramp 1

3.5.4 3-5* Ramp 2

Configure the ramp parameter, ramping times, for each of

the 2 ramps (parameter group 3-4* Ramp 1 and parameter
group 3-5* Ramp 2).

To select ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4*

Ramp 1.

3 3

130BA169.11

RPM
P 4-13
High-limit
Reference
P 1-25
Motor
speed
P 4-11
Low limit

3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.10 3600 s]

Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the

acceleration time from 0 RPM to
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. Select
a ramp-up time such that the output
current does not exceed the current limit
in 4-18 Current Limit during ramping. See
ramp-down time in parameter 3-52 Ramp 2

P 3-*1
Ramp (X)Up
Time (Acc)
tacc

P 3-*2
Ramp (X)
Down
Time (Dec)

Time

tdec

Illustration 3.17 Ramp 1

Size
related*

par . 3 51 =

Range:

Function:

parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed to 0

RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such that
no overvoltage arises in the inverter due to

Enter the ramp-up time, that is, the

regenerative operation of the motor, and

such that the generated current does not

acceleration time from 0 RPM to

parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
Select a ramp-up time such that the
output current does not exceed the

Limit. See ramp-up time in

current limit in 4-18 Current Limit during

parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time.

exceed the current limit set in 4-18 Current

ramping. See ramp-down time in

par . 3 52 =

parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.

par .3 41 =

ref rpm

[ 0.10 - Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the

3600 s] deceleration time from

Function:
[ 0.10 3600 s]

tacc nnom par . 1 25

3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

Size
related*

3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

Range:

Ramp Down Time.

tacc nnom par .1 25

s
ref RPM

tdec nnom par . 1 25

ref rpm

3.5.5 3-8* Other Ramps

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

Range:
Size
related*

3-80 Jog Ramp Time

Function:
[ 0.10 - Enter the ramp-down time, that is, the
3600 s] deceleration time from
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed to 0
RPM. Select a ramp-down time preventing
overvoltage from arising in the inverter due
to regenerative operation of the motor. The
ramp-down time should also be long
enough to prevent that the generated
current exceeds the current limit set in

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0.1 - Enter the jog ramp time, i.e. the acceleration/
3600 s] deceleration time between 0 RPM and the

4-18 Current Limit. See ramp-up time in

parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time.
par .3 42 =

60

rated motor speed (nM,N) (set in

parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed). Ensure
that the resultant output current required for
the given jog ramp time does not exceed the
current limit in 4-18 Current Limit. The jog
ramp time starts upon activation of a jog
signal via the control panel, a selected digital
input, or the serial communication port.
par . 3 80 =
t jog nnom par . 1 25

tdec nnom par .1 25

s
ref RPM

jog speed par . 3 19

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

130BA070.10

Parameter Description

RPM

P 4-13 RPM
high limit

3-85 Check Valve Ramp Time

Range:

Function:
3-87 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [HZ]. See

Speed

P 3-19
Jog speed

Motor Speed
High

P 4-11 RPM
low limit

Normal
t jog

t jog

P 3-80
Ramp up
(acc)

130BA961.10

Illustration 3.20.

P 1-25
Motor speed

Ramp

Time

Motor Speed
Low

P 3-80
Ramp down
(dec)

Check valve
End Speed

Illustration 3.18 Jog Ramp Time

Time

Illustration 3.20 Check Valve Ramp

3-84 Initial Ramp Time

Range:
0 s*

Function:

[0 60 s]

Enter the initial ramp up time from zero speed to

Motor Speed Low Limit, parameter 4-11 Motor Speed
Low Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low
Limit [Hz]. Submersible deep well pumps can be
damaged by running below minimum speed. A fast
ramp time below minimum pump speed is
recommended. This parameter may be applied as a
fast ramp rate from zero speed to Motor Speed Low
Limit. See Illustration 3.19.

3-86 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-11 RPM]

active. See Illustration 3.20.

3-87 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [HZ]

Range:

130BA962.10

Speed
Motor Speed
High
Normal
Ramps
Motor Speed
Low
Ramp

0 s*
Time

3-85 Check Valve Ramp Time

[0 60 s]

[ 0 - par.
4-12 Hz]

Set the speed in [Hz] below motor

speed low limit where the check
valve ramp is no longer be active.
See Illustration 3.20.

Range:

Final

Illustration 3.19 Initial and Final Ramp Time

Range:

Size related*

Function:

3-88 Final Ramp Time

Initial
Ramp

0 s*

Set the speed in [RPM] below motor

speed low limit where the check
valve is expected to be closed and
the check valve no longer shall be

Function:
To protect ball check valves in a stop situation, the
check valve ramp can be utilised as a slow ramp
rate from parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz],
to check valve ramp end speed, set by the user in

[0 60 s]

Function:
Enter the final ramp time to be used when ramping
down from parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz],
to zero speed.
Submersible deep well pumps can be damaged by
running below minimum speed. A fast ramp time
below minimum pump speed is recommended.
This parameter may be applied as a fast ramp rate
from parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] to zero
speed. See Illustration 3.19.

3-86 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM] or

3-87 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [HZ]. When
3-85 Check Valve Ramp Time is different from 0 s,
the check valve ramp time is effectuated and is
used to ramp down the speed from motor speed
low limit to the check valve end speed in
3-86 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM] or

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

61

3 3

Programming Guide

3.5.6 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

3-95 Ramp Delay

The digital potentiometer function allows the user to

increase or decrease the actual reference by adjusting the
set-up of the digital inputs using the functions INCREASE,
DECREASE or CLEAR. To activate the function, at least one
digital input must be set up to INCREASE or DECREASE.

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 0]

is activated. See also parameter 3-91 Ramp

3-90 Step Size

Time.

Function:
[0.01 200 %]

Enter the increment size required for

INCREASE/DECREASE, as a percentage of the
synchronous motor speed, ns. If INCREASE/

Speed

DECREASE is activated, the resulting

reference is increased/decreased by the
amount set in this parameter.

130BA158.11

Range:
0.10
%*

Enter the delay required from activation of

the digital potentiometer function until the
frequency converter starts to ramp the
reference. With a delay of 0 ms, the reference
starts to ramp as soon as INCREASE/DECREASE

P 3-95
Time (s)
Inc

3-91 Ramp Time

Range:
1
s

Illustration 3.21 Ramp Delay Case 1

Function:

[0 Enter the ramp time, i.e. the time for adjustment of

3600 s] the reference from 0% to 100% of the specified
digital potentiometer function (INCREASE, DECREASE
or CLEAR).
If INCREASE/DECREASE is activated for longer than

Speed

P 3-95

130BA159.11

3 3

Parameter Description

the ramp delay period specified in

parameter 3-95 Ramp Delay the actual reference is
ramped up/down according to this ramp time. The
ramp time is defined as the time used to adjust the

Time (s)
Dec

reference by the step size specified in

Inc

parameter 3-90 Step Size.

Illustration 3.22 Ramp Delay Case 2

3-92 Power Restore

Option:

Function:

[0] * Off

Resets the digital potentiometer reference to 0% after

power up.

[1]

Restores the most recent digital potentiometer

reference at power up.

On

3-93 Maximum Limit

Range:
100 %*

Function:
[-200 - 200
%]

Set the maximum permissible value for

the resultant reference. This is advisable if
the digital potentiometer is used for fine
tuning of the resulting reference.

3-94 Minimum Limit

Range:
0 %*

62

[-200 - 200
%]

Function:
Set the minimum permissible value for the
resultant reference. This is advisable if the
digital potentiometer is used for fine tuning
of the resulting reference.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.6 Parameters 4-** Limits/Warnings

4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

Range:

Function:
Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed

3.6.1 4-1* Motor Limits

Low Limit [Hz], depending on

Define torque, current and speed limits for the motor, and
the reaction of the frequency converter when the limits are
exceeded.
A limit may generate a message in the display. A warning
always generates a message in the display or on the
fieldbus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a
trip, upon which the frequency converter stops and
generates an alarm message.
4-10 Motor Speed Direction
Option:

Function:
Selects the motor speed direction required.
When parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is
set to [3] Closed loop, the parameter default is
changed to [0] Clockwise. If both directions
are selected, running in counter clockwise
direction cannot be selected from the LCP.

the settings of other parameters

in the Main Menu, and

default settings based on

geographical location.

NOTICE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the
inverter switching frequency (parameter 14-01 Switching
Frequency).

NOTICE
Any changes in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM] reset the value in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
High to the same value as set in parameter 4-13 Motor
Speed High Limit [RPM].

[0] * Clockwise

4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

[2]

Range:

Both
directions

Size
related*

4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

Range:
Size
related*

exceed the setting in

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Range:

Function:
[0 Enter the minimum limit for motor speed
par. 4-14 in Hz. The motor speed low limit can be
Hz]
set to correspond to the minimum output
frequency of the motor shaft. The speed
low limit must not exceed the setting in
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

Range:

Function:
[0 60000
RPM]

Enter the maximum limit for motor speed

in RPM. The motor speed high limit can be
set to correspond to the manufacturers
maximum rated motor. The motor speed
high limit must exceed the setting in
parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
[RPM]. The parameter name appears as
either parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low

MG20O802

value in parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low

Limit [Hz]. The output frequency must not
exceed 10% of the switching frequency.

NOTICE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the
inverter switching frequency (parameter 14-01 Switching
Frequency).
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 1000.0
%]

Enter the maximum torque limit for motor

operation. The torque limit is active in the
speed range up to and including the rated
motor speed set in parameter 1-25 Motor
Nominal Speed. To protect the motor from
reaching the stalling torque, the default
setting is 1.1 x the rated motor torque

4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

Size
related*

[ .1 Enter the max. limit for motor speed in Hz.

par. 4-19 Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
Hz]
can match the manufacturer's
recommended maximum motor speed. The
Motor Speed High Limit must exceed the

Function:
[ 0 - par. Enter the minimum limit for motor speed
4-13
in RPM. The motor speed low limit can be
RPM]
set to correspond to the manufacturers
recommended minimum motor speed.
The motor speed low limit must not
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM].

Size
related*

Function:

(calculated value). See also

parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit
for further details.
If a setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode to parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation
Check is changed, parameter 4-16 Torque
Limit Motor Mode is not automatically reset
to the default setting.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

63

3 3

Programming Guide

4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode

4-50 Warning Current Low

Range:

Range:

100
%*

3 3

Function:

[0 1000.0
%]

Enter the maximum torque limit for generator

mode operation. The torque limit is active in
the speed range up to and including the rated
motor speed (parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal

0
A*

Function:

[0 par.
4-51
A]

Warnings are shown on display, programmed

output or serial bus.
130BA064.10

Parameter Description

Imotor

ILIM
(P 4-18)

Speed). Refer to parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at

ON REF

IHIGH
(P 4-51)

Torque Limit for further details.

If a setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration

IN RANGE

Mode to parameter 1-28 Motor Rotation Check is

ILOW
(P 4-50)

changed, parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator

nmotor [RPM]
nMIN nLOW
(P 4-11) (P 4-52)

Mode is not automatically reset to the default

settings.

REF nHIGH nMAX

(P 4-53) (P 4-13)

Illustration 3.23 Low Current Limit

4-18 Current Limit

Range:
Size
related*

Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current falls

Function:
[ 1.0 1000.0
%]

below this limit (ILOW), the display reads CURRENT

Enter the current limit for motor and

generator operation. To protect the motor
from reaching the stalling torque, the
default setting is 1.1 x the rated motor
torque (calculated value). If a setting in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode to 1-26
Motor Cont. Rated Torque is changed,
4-18 Current Limit is not automatically reset
to the default setting.

LOW. The signal outputs can be programmed to

produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on
relay output 01 or 02. Refer to Illustration 3.23.

4-51 Warning Current High

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ par.
4-50 - par.
16-37 A]

4-19 Max Output Frequency

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[1 590
Hz]

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Enter the maximum output frequency value.
Parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency
specifies the absolute limit on the frequency
converter output frequency for improved
safety in applications where accidental
overspeeding must be avoided. This absolute

Range:
0 RPM*

Function:
[0 par. 4-53
RPM]

Define adjustable warning limits for current, speed,

reference and feedback.

falls below this limit (nLOW) the display reads

SPEED LOW. The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce a status signal on
terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or
02. Programme the lower signal limit of the
motor speed, nLOW, within the normal
Refer to the Illustration 3.23.

4-53 Warning Speed High

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ par.
4-52 par. 4-13
RPM]

NOTICE

Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor

speed exceeds this limit (nHIGH), the display
reads SPEED HIGH. The signal outputs can
be programmed to produce a status signal
on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output
01 or 02. Programme the upper signal limit
of the motor speed, nHIGH, within the
normal working range of the frequency

Not visible in display, only in MCT 10 Set-up Software.

64

Enter the nLOW value. When the motor speed

working range of the frequency converter.

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

3.6.2 4-5* Adj. Warnings

display reads CURRENT HIGH. The signal

outputs can be programmed to produce
a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and
on relay output 01 or 02. Refer to

4-52 Warning Speed Low

independent of the setting in

When parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM,

non-salient SPM, the maximum value is limited to 300 Hz

current exceeds this limit (IHIGH), the

Illustration 3.23.

limit applies to all configurations and is

NOTICE

Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

converter. Refer to Illustration 3.23.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

NOTICE

4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

Any changes in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit

[RPM] reset the value in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
High to the same value as set in parameter 4-13 Motor
Speed High Limit [RPM].
If a different value is needed in parameter 4-53 Warning
Speed High, it must be set after programming of
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
4-54 Warning Reference Low
Range:
-999999.999*

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

[ -999999.999 par. 4-55 ]

Enter the lower reference limit.

When the actual reference falls
below this limit, the display
indicates RefLow. The signal

4-55 Warning Reference High

Range:

Function:
[ par. 4-54 999999.999 ]

Enter the upper reference limit.

When the actual reference exceeds
this limit, the display reads RefHigh.
The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce a status
signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on
relay output 01 or 02.

[0]

Disabled

No alarm is displayed if a missing motor

phase occurs.

[1]

Trip 100 ms

An alarm is displayed if a missing motor

phase occurs.

[2] * Trip 1000 ms

[5]

Motor Check

3.6.3 4-6* Speed Bypass

Some systems call for avoiding certain output frequencies
or speeds, due to resonance problems in the system. A
maximum of 4 frequency or speed ranges can be avoided.
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]
Array [4]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-13 RPM]

4-56 Warning Feedback Low

Range:
-999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit*

Function:
[ -999999.999 par. 4-57
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the lower feedback

limit. When the feedback
falls below this limit, the
display reads FeedbLow.
The signal outputs can
be programmed to
produce a status signal
on terminal 27 or 29 and
on relay output 01 or 02.

999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit*

Function:
[ par. 4-56 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]

Array [4]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-14 Hz]

Some systems call for avoiding

certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the lower limits of the speeds
to be avoided.

4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM]

Range:
[ 0 - par.
4-13 RPM]

Some systems call for avoiding

certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the upper limits of the
speeds to be avoided.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

65

Enter the upper feedback

limit. When the feedback
exceeds this limit, the
display reads FeedbHigh.

Size related*

Function:

The signal outputs can

be programmed to
produce a status signal
on terminal 27 or 29 and
on relay output 01 or 02.

MG20O802

Some systems call for avoiding

certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the lower limits of the speeds
to be avoided.

Array [4]

4-57 Warning Feedback High

Range:

3 3

Displays an alarm in the event of a missing

motor phase.

Function:

outputs can be programmed to

produce a status signal on
terminal 27 or 29 and on relay
output 01 or 02.

999999.999*

Option:

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]

4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up

Array [4]

Option:

Function:

[0] * Off

No function

Range:

Function:

Size related*

3 3

[ 0 - par.
4-14 Hz]

Some systems call for avoiding

certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the upper limits of the speeds
to be avoided.

[1]

Enabled Starts the Semi-Automatic Bypass set-up and

continue with the procedure described above.

3.6.4 Semi-Automatic Bypass Speed Set-up

The Semi-Automatic Bypass Speed Setup can be used to
facilitate the programming of the frequencies to be
skipped due to resonances in the system.
Carry out following process
1.

Stop the motor.

2.

Select Enabled in parameter 4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass

Set-up.

3.

Press Hand On on the LCP to start the search for

frequency bands causing resonances. The motor
will ramp up according to the ramp set.

4.

When sweeping through a resonance band, press

OK on the LCP when leaving the band. The actual
frequency is stored as the first element in
parameter 4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] or
parameter 4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] (array).
Repeat this for each resonance band identified at
the ramp-up (maximum four can be adjusted).

5.

When maximum speed has been reached, the

motor automatically begins to ramp down.
Repeat the above procedure when speed is
leaving the resonance bands during the
deceleration. The actual frequencies registered
when pressing OK are stored in
parameter 4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] or
parameter 4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz].

6.

When the motor has ramped down to stop, press

OK. Parameter 4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up
automatically resets to Off. The frequency
converter stays in Hand mode until Off or Auto
On is pressed on the LCP.

If the frequencies for a certain resonance band are not

registered in the right order (frequency values stored in By
Pass Speed To are higher than those in By Pass Speed From)
or if they do not have the same numbers of registrations
for the By Pass From and By Pass To, all registrations will be
cancelled and the following message is displayed: Collected
speed areas overlapping or not completely determined. Press
[Cancel] to abort.

66

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.7 Parameters 5-** Digital In/Out

3.7.2 5-1* Digital Inputs

Parameter group for configuring the digital input and

output.

Parameters for configuring the input functions for the

input terminals.
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions
in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to
the following functions:

3.7.1 5-0* Digital I/O Mode

Parameters for configuring the input and output using
NPN and PNP.
5-00 Digital I/O Mode
Option:

Function:

NOTICE

Digital input function

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

All *term 32, 33, 29, 19

Reset

[1]

All

Coast inverse

[2]

All * term 27

Digital inputs and programmed digital

outputs are pre-programmable for operation
either in PNP or NPN systems.

Coast and reset inverse

[3]

All

DC-brake inverse

[5]

All

Stop inverse

[6]

All

Action on positive directional pulses (0). PNP

systems are pulled down to GND.

External interlock

[7]

All

Start

[8]

All

Latched start

[9]

All

Reversing

[10]

All

Start reversing

[11]

All

Jog

[14]

All

Preset reference on

[15]

All

Preset ref bit 0

[16]

All

NOTICE

Preset ref bit 1

[17]

All

Preset ref bit 2

[18]

All

This parameter cannot be adjusted while

the motor is running.

Freeze reference

[19]

All

Freeze output

[20]

All

Speed up

[21]

All

Speed down

[22]

All

5-01 Terminal 27 Mode

[0] * Input

Terminal

[0]

NPN - Active Action on negative directional pulses (1).

at 0V
NPN systems are pulled up to +24 V,
internally in the frequency converter.

Option:

Option

No operation

[0] * PNP - Active

at 24V
[1]

Options [120] - [138] are related to the Cascade Controller

functionality. For more information, see parameter group
25-** Cascade Controller.

Function:

Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.

Set-up select bit 0

[23]

All

Set-up select bit 1

[24]

All

5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

Pulse input

[32]

term 29, 33

Option:

Ramp bit 0

[34]

All

[1]

Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
[0] * Input
[1]

Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.

Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.

MG20O802

Mains failure inverse

[36]

All

Ref source bit 0

[42]

All
All

Hand/Auto Start

[51]

Run Permissive

[52]

All

Hand start

[53]

All

Auto start

[54]

All

DigiPot Increase

[55]

All

DigiPot Decrease

[56]

All

DigiPot Clear

[57]

All

Counter A (up)

[60]

29, 33

Counter A (down)

[61]

29, 33

Reset Counter A

[62]

All

Counter B (up)

[63]

29, 33

Counter B (down)

[64]

29, 33

Reset Counter B

[65]

All

Sleep Mode

[66]

All

Reset Maintenance Word

[78]

All

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

67

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Digital input function

Programming Guide

Option

NOTICE

Terminal

PTC Card 1

[80]

All

Latched Pump Derag

[85]

All

Lead Pump Start

[120]

All

Lead Pump Alternation

[121]

All

Pump 1 Interlock

[130]

All

Pump 2 Interlock

[131]

All

Pump 3 Interlock

[132]

All

Table 3.8 Functions for Digital Inputs

When the frequency converter is at

the torque limit and has received a
stop command, it may not stop by
itself. To ensure that the frequency
converter stops, configure a digital
output to [27] Torque limit & stop and
connect this digital output to a digital
input that is configured as coast.
[7]

All = Terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, X30/2, X30/3, X30/4. X30/
are the terminals on MCB 101.

External
Interlock

Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in

the associated parameter.
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions:
[0]
[1]
[2]

[3]

No operation
Reset
Coast inverse

Coast and
reset inverse

No reaction to signals transmitted to

terminal.

DC-brake
inverse

programmed in parameter 22-00 External

Interlock Delay. After applying a signal to the
input, the reaction described above will be

Resets frequency converter after a TRIP/

ALARM. Not all alarms can be reset.

delayed with the time set in

parameter 22-00 External Interlock Delay.

Leaves motor in free mode. Logic 0

coasting stop.
(Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop,
inverted input (NC).

[8]

Start

Select start value for a start/stop command.

1 = start, 0 = stop.
(Default Digital input 18)

Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC).

Leaves motor in free mode and resets the

[9]

Latched start

Motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min. 2

ms. Motor stops when Stop inverse is
activated

frequency converter. Logic 0coasting stop

and reset.
[5]

[10] Reversing

current for a certain time period. See

Changes direction of motor shaft rotation.

Select Logic 1 to reverse. The reversing
signal only changes the direction of rotation.
It does not activate the start function. Select

parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current to

both directions in 4-10 Motor Speed

parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM].

The function is only active when the value

Direction.
(Default Digital input 19).

Inverted input for DC braking (NC).

Stops motor by energising it with a DC

in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time is

different from 0. Logic 0 DC braking.

[11] Start
reversing

Used for start/stop and for reversing on the

same wire. Signals on start are not allowed
at the same time.

[14] Jog

Used for activating jog speed. See

This selection is not possible when

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to

parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].

(Default Digital input 29)

[1] PM, non salient SPM.

[6]

Stop inverse

Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop

function when the selected terminal goes
from logical level 1 to 0. The stop is
performed according to the selected ramp

[15] Preset
reference on

Used for shifting between external reference

and preset reference. It is assumed that [1]
External/preset has been selected in
parameter 3-04 Reference Function. Logic '0' =
external reference active; logic '1' = one of
the 8 preset references is active.

time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down

Time and parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp
Down Time.

68

Same function as Coasting stop, inverse, but

External Interlock generates the alarm
message external fault in the display when
the terminal which is programmed for Coast
Inverse is logic 0. The alarm message is also
active via digital outputs and relay outputs,
if programmed for External Interlock. The
alarm can be reset using a digital input or
the [Reset] key if the cause for the External
Interlock has been removed. A delay can be

[16] Preset ref bit

0

references according to Table 3.9.

[17] Preset ref bit

1

references according to Table 3.9.

[18] Preset ref bit

2

references according to Table 3.9.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Enables a selection of one of the 8 preset

Enables a selection of one of the 8 preset
Enables a selection of one of the 8 preset

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

Preset ref. bit

Preset ref. 0

Preset ref. 1

Preset ref. 2

Preset ref. 3

Preset ref. 4

Preset ref. 5

Preset ref. 6

Preset ref. 7

Table 3.9 Preset Ref. Bit

[19] Freeze ref

Freezes actual reference. The frozen

reference is now the point of enable/
condition for speed up and speed down to
be used. If speed up/down is used, the
speed change always follows ramp 2

[34] Ramp bit 0

Select which ramp to use. Logic 0 selects

ramp 1 while logic 1 selects ramp 2.

[36] Mains failure

inverse

Activates parameter 14-10 Mains Failure.

Mains failure inverse is active in the Logic
0 situation.

[42] Ref source bit An active input in bit 0 selects AI54 as the
0
reference source (see parameter group 3-1*
References, option [35] Digital input select).
An inactive input selects AI53.
[51] Hand/Auto
Start

Selects Hand or Auto Start. High = Auto On

only, Low = Hand on only.

[52] Run
Permissive

The input terminal, for which the [52] Run

programmed for [8] Start, [14] Jog or [20]

Freeze Output. This means that to start
running the motor, both conditions must be

(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and

parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in

fulfilled. If [52] Run Permissive is programmed

on multiple terminals, it only needs to be

the range 0 - parameter 3-03 Maximum

Reference Maximum Reference.

logic 1 on one of the terminals to carry out

the function. The digital output signal for

[20] Freeze output Freezes actual motor frequency (Hz). The

frozen motor frequency is now the point of
enable/condition for speed up and speed
down to be used. If speed up/down is used,
the speed change always follows ramp 2

Run Request ([8] Start, [14] Jog or [20] Freeze

output) programmed in parameter group
5-3* Digital Outputs, or parameter group 5-4*
Relays, will not be affected by [52] Run

(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and

Permissive.

parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in

the range 0 - parameter 1-23 Motor

[53] Hand start

NOTICE

When [20] Freeze output is active, the

frequency converter cannot be
stopped via a low start [13] signal.
Stop the frequency converter via a
terminal programmed for [2] Coast
inverse or [3] Coast and reset, inverse.

input to Auto Start and apply a signal to

this. [Hand On] and [Auto On] have no
impact. [Off] overrides Hand Start and Auto
Start. Press either [Hand On] or [Auto On] to

For digital control of the up/down speed

(motor potentiometer). Activate this function

make Hand Start and Auto Start active again.

If there is no signal on neither Hand Start

by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or

nor Auto Start, the motor stops regardless of

any normal Start command applied. If a

[20] Freeze output. When [21] Speed up is

activated for less than 400 ms the resulting

signal is applied to both Hand Start and

reference is increased by 0.1%. If [21] Speed

Auto Start, the function is Auto Start. If

up is activated for more than 400 ms the

resulting reference ramps according to
Ramp 1 in parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up
Time.

A signal applied puts the frequency

converter into Hand mode as if [Hand On]
has been pressed and a normal stop
command is overridden. If disconnecting the
signal, the motor stops. To make any other
start commands valid, assign another digital

Frequency.

[21] Speed up

Permissive has been programmed must be

logic 1 before a start command can be
accepted. Run permissive has a logic AND
function related to the terminal which is

pressing [Off], the motor stops regardless of

signals on Hand Start and Auto Start.
[54] Auto start

A signal applied puts the frequency

converter into Auto mode as if [Auto On] has

[22] Speed down

Same as [21] Speed up.

[23] Set-up select

bit 0

Selects one of the 4 set-ups. Set

[24] Set-up select

bit 1

Same as [23] Set-up select bit 0.

(Default Digital input 32)

[32] Pulse input

Select [32] Pulse input when using a pulse

sequence as either reference or feedback.

been pressed. See also [53] Hand Start.

parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up.

[55] DigiPot
Increase

Uses the input as an INCREASE signal to the

digital potentiometer function described in
parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter.

[56] DigiPot
Decrease

Uses the input as a DECREASE signal to the

digital potentiometer function described in
parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

Scaling is done in parameter group 5-5*

Pulse Input.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

69

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

[57] DigiPot Clear

Uses the input to CLEAR the digital potentiometer reference described in parameter

[60] Counter A
(up)

(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment

counting in the SLC counter.

[61] Counter A
(down)

(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement

counting in the SLC counter.

Setting in
parameter
group 5-1*

group 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

Setting in
parameter 25-06 Number of
Pumps
[0] No

[130] Pump1 Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY1
(only if not
lead pump)

[62] Reset Counter Input for reset of counter A.

A

[1] Yes
Frequency
Converter
controlled
(cannot be
interlocked)

[63] Counter B
(up)

(Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for

increment counting in the SLC counter.

[131] Pump2 Controlled by Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY2
RELAY1

[64] Counter B
(down)

(Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for

decrement counting in the SLC counter.

[132] Pump3 Controlled by Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY3
RELAY2

[65] Reset Counter Input for reset of counter B.

B

[133] Pump4 Controlled by Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY4
RELAY3

[66] Sleep Mode

mode (see parameter group 22-4* Sleep

[134] Pump5 Controlled by Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY5
RELAY4

Mode). Reacts on the rising edge of signal

applied.

[135] Pump6 Controlled by Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY6
RELAY5

Resets all data in

[136] Pump7 Controlled by Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY7
RELAY6

[78] Reset
Preventive
Maintenance
Word
[80] PTC Card1

Forces the frequency converter into sleep

parameter 16-96 Maintenance Word to 0.

[137] Pump8 Controlled by Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY8
RELAY7
All digital inputs can be set to [80] PTC Card

[138] Pump9 Controlled by Controlled by

Interlock
RELAY9
RELAY8

1. However, only one digital input must be

set to this choice.
[85] Latched
Pump Derag

Starts deragging.

5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input

Options [120] - [138] are related to the cascade controller

functionality. For more information, see parameter group
25-** Cascade Controller.

The parameter contains all options and functions listed in

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input

[120] Lead Pump
Start

Starts/Stops the lead pump (controlled by

the frequency converter). A start also
requires applying a system start signal e.g.
to one of the digital inputs set for [8] Start.

[121] Lead Pump

Alternation

Forces alternation of the lead pump in a

cascade controller. Parameter 25-50 Lead
Pump Alternation must be set to either [2] At
Command or [3] At Staging or At Command.
Parameter 25-51 Alternation Event can be set
to any of the four options.

[130
138]

Pump1
Interlock Pump9
Interlock

input.

5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input

The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input

The function depends on the setting in

The parameter contains all options and functions listed in

parameter 25-06 Number of Pumps. If set to

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

[0] No, then Pump1 refers to the pump

controlled by relay RELAY1 etc. If set to [1]
Yes, Pump1 refers to the pump controlled by
the frequency converter only (without any of
the build in relays involved) and Pump2 to
the pump controlled by the relay RELAY1.
Variable speed pump (lead) cannot be
interlocked in the basic Cascade Controller.
See Table 3.10

70

The parameter contains all options and functions listed in

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse

5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input

The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input

The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input

5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input

Option:

This parameter is related to the digital input on relay card MCB

113. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
converter. The parameter contains all options
and functions listed in parameter group 5-1*
Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

3 3

5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input

This parameter is related to the digital input on relay card MCB
113. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in

5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse

Option:

input.

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
converter. The parameter contains all options
and functions listed in parameter group 5-1*
Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
converter. The parameter contains all options
and functions listed in parameter group 5-1*
Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse

3.7.3 5-3* Digital Outputs

Parameters for configuring the output functions for the
output terminals. The 2 solid-state digital outputs are
common for terminals 27 and 29. Set the I/O function for
terminal 27 in parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and set the
I/O function for terminal 29 in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29
Mode.

NOTICE
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.

input.
The digital outputs can be programmed
with these functions:

5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input

This parameter is related to the digital input on relay card MCB
113. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in

[0]

No operation

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse

Default for all digital outputs and relay

outputs

[1]

Control ready

The control board receives supply voltage.

[2]

Drive ready

The frequency converter is ready for

operation and applies a supply signal on
the control board.

[3]

Drive ready /
remote
control

The frequency converter is ready for

operation and is in Auto On mode.

[4]

Stand-by / no
warning

The frequency converter is ready for

operation. No start or stop command has
been given (start/disable). There are no
warnings.

input.

5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input

This parameter is related to the digital input on relay card MCB
113. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input

This parameter is related to the digital input on relay card MCB
113. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

[5]

Running

Motor is running.

[6]

Running / no
warning

The output speed is higher than the speed

5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input

This parameter is related to the digital input on relay card MCB
113. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in

set in parameter 1-81 Min Speed for

Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor is
running and there are no warnings.

[8]

Run on
reference / no
warning

Motor runs at reference speed.

[9]

Alarm

An alarm activates the output. There are

no warnings.

This parameter is related to the digital input on relay card MCB

113. The parameter contains all options and functions listed in

[10]

Alarm or
warning

An alarm or a warning activates the

output.

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse

[11]

At torque limit The torque limit set in

parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs except for option [32] Pulse
input.

5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input

input.

MG20O802

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode

has been exceeded.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

71

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

[12]

Out of current The motor current is outside the range set

range
in 4-18 Current Limit.

[47]

Bus Ctrl 0 if
timeout

[13]

Below current, Motor current is lower than set in

low
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.

[55]

Pulse output

[60]

Comparator 0

[14]

Above current, Motor current is higher than set in

high
parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is be low.

[15]

Out of speed
range

[61]

Comparator 1

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[62]

Comparator 2

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[63]

Comparator 3

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[64]

Comparator 4

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[65]

Comparator 5

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[70]

Logic Rule 0

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[71]

Logic Rule 1

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[72]

Logic Rule 2

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[73]

Logic Rule 3

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[74]

Logic Rule 4

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[75]

Logic Rule 5

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[80]

SL Digital
Output A

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The output goes high whenever the Smart

Output speed is outside the range set in

parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

[16]
[17]
[18]

Below speed,
low

parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low.

Above speed,
high

parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

Output speed is lower than the setting in

Output speed is higher than the setting in

Out of
feedback
range

Feedback is outside the range set in

Below
feedback low

Feedback is below the limit set in

[20]

Above
feedback high

The feedback is above the limit set in

[21]

Thermal
warning

The thermal warning turns on when the

temperature exceeds the limit in the
motor, the frequency converter, the brake
resistor, or the thermistor.

[25]

Reverse

Reversing. Logic 1 = relay activated, 24 V

DC when CW rotation of the motor. Logic
0 = relay not activated, no signal, when
CCW rotation of the motor.

[26]

Bus OK

Active communication (no time-out) via

the serial communication port.

[27]

Torque limit
and stop

Used in performing a coasting stop and in

torque limit condition. If the frequency
converter has received a stop signal and is
at the torque limit, the signal is Logic 0.

[28]

Brake, no
warning

The brake is active and there are no

warnings.

[29]

Brake ready,
no fault

The brake is ready for operation and there

are no faults.

[30]

Brake fault
(IGBT)

The output is Logic 1 when the brake

IGBT is short-circuited. Use this function to
protect the frequency converter if there is
a fault on the brake modules. Use the
output/relay to cut out the main voltage
from the frequency converter.

[19]

[35]

External
Interlock

[40]

Out of ref
range

[41]

Below
reference low

[42]

Above
reference high

[45]

Bus Ctrl

[46]

Bus Ctrl 1 if
timeout

parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and

parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low.
parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.

External Interlock function has been

activated via one of the digital inputs.

Logic Action [38] Set digital out A high is

executed. The output goes low whenever
the Smart Logic Action [32] Set digital out
A low is executed.
[81]

SL Digital
Output B

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The output goes high whenever the Smart
Logic Action [39] Set digital out B high is
executed. The output goes low whenever
the Smart Logic Action [33] Set digital out
B low is executed.

[82]

SL Digital
Output C

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The output goes high whenever the Smart
Logic Action [40] Set digital out C high is
executed. The output goes low whenever
the Smart Logic Action [34] Set digital out
C low is executed.

72

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

SL Digital
Output D

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The output goes high whenever the Smart

[189] External Fan

Control

External fan control is active.

Logic Action [41] Set digital out D high is

executed. The output goes low whenever

[190] No-Flow

A No-Flow situation or Minimum Speed

situation has been detected if enabled in

the Smart Logic Action [35] Set digital out

D low is executed.
[84]

SL Digital
Output E

Parameter 22-21 Low Power Detection.

[191] Dry Pump

A Dry Pump condition has been detected.

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The output goes high whenever the Smart

This function must be enabled in

parameter 22-26 Dry Pump Function.

Logic Action [42] Set digital out E high is

executed. The output goes low whenever

[192] End of Curve

Active when an End of Curve condition is

present.

the Smart Logic Action [36] Set digital out

[193] Sleep Mode

The frequency converter/system has

turned into sleep mode. See parameter

E low is executed.
[85]

SL Digital
Output F

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The output goes high whenever the Smart

group 22-4* Sleep Mode.

[194] Broken Belt

A broken belt condition has been

Logic Action [43] Set digital out F high is

executed. The output goes low whenever
the Smart Logic Action [37] Set digital out
F low is executed.
[160] No alarm

Output is high when no alarm is present.

[161] Running
reverse

The output is high when the frequency

converter is running counter clockwise
(the logical product of the status bits
running AND reverse).

[165] Local
reference
active

Output is high when

detected. Enable this function in

parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function.
[195] Bypass Valve
Control

frequency converter reaches

parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
[RPM]). After the limit has been reached
the bypass valve is closed, allowing the
compressor to operate normally. This
procedure is not activated again before a
new start is initiated and the frequency
converter speed is zero during the

parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local or

when parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [0]
Linked to hand auto at the same time as
the LCP is in Hand on mode.

[166] Remote
reference
active
[167] Start
command
active

The bypass valve control (Digital/Relay

output in the frequency converter) is used
for compressor systems to unload the
compressor during start-up by using a
bypass valve. After the start command is
given the bypass valve is open until the

Output is high when

parameter 3-13 Reference Site is set to [1]

receiving of start signal. Start Delay,

Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto while

the LCP is in Auto On mode.

parameter 1-71 Start Delay can be used in

order to delay the motor start.

Output is high when there is an active

Start command. (I.e. [Auto On] and a start
command via digital input or bus is active,
or [Hand On].

Speed
REF
Speed
Min

NOTICE

Time

All inverse Stop/Coast commands

must be inactive.

ON
OFF

[168] Drive in hand

mode

Output is high when the frequency

converter is in Hand mode (as indicated
by the LED light above [Hand on].

ON
OFF

[169] Drive in auto

mode

Output is high when the frequency

converter is in Auto mode (as indicated by
the LED light above [Auto on].

[180] Clock Fault

The clock function has been reset to

default (2000-01-01) because of a power
failure.

[181] Preventive
Maintenance

[199] Pipe Filling

See parameter 5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect

MG20O802

Time

Active when the pipe fill function is

The below setting options are all related to the

Cascade Controller.
See parameter group 25-** Cascade Controller
for more details.

passed the time for the specified action in

[188] AHF Capacitor

Connect

Stop

Water Application Functions.

parameter 23-10 Maintenance Item has

parameter 23-11 Maintenance Action.

Start

operating. See parameter group 29-**

Maintenance Events programmed in

Deragging is active.

Time

Illustration 3.24 Bypass Valve Control

Principle

One or more of the Preventive

[182] Deragging

130BA251.10

[83]

Programming Guide

[200] Full
Capacity

All pumps running at full speed

Delay.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

73

3 3

Parameter Description

[201] Pump1
Running

Programming Guide

One or more of the pumps controlled by the

cascade controller are running. The function
also depends on the setting in
parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump. If set to [0]
No Pump 1 refers to the pump controlled by

3 3
[202] Pump2
Running
[203] Pump3
Running

5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output

Option:
[33]

Safe stop active

[35]

External Interlock

[40]

Out of ref range

relay RELAY1 etc. If set to [1] Yes Pump 1 refers

to the pump controlled by the frequency
converter only (without any of the built in
relays involved) and Pump 2 to the pump

[41]

Below reference, low

[42]

Above ref, high

[45]

Bus ctrl.

controlled by the relay RELAY1. See Table 3.10

[46]

Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout

See [201]

[47]

Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout

[55]

Pulse output

[60]

Comparator 0

[61]

Comparator 1

[62]

Comparator 2

[63]

Comparator 3

[64]

Comparator 4

[65]

Comparator 5

[70]

Logic rule 0

See [201]

Setting in
parameter group
5-3* Digital Outputs

Setting in parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead

Pump
[0] No

[1] Yes

[201] Pump 1
Running

Controlled by
RELAY1

Frequency Converter
controlled

[202] Pump 2
Running

Controlled by
RELAY2

Controlled by
RELAY1

[71]

Logic rule 1

[72]

Logic rule 2

Controlled by
RELAY2

[73]

Logic rule 3

[74]

Logic rule 4

[75]

Logic rule 5

[80]

SL digital output A

[203] Pump 3
Running

Table 3.10 Pumps Controlled by the Cascade Controller

[81]

SL digital output B

5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output

[82]

SL digital output C

Option:

[83]

SL digital output D

[84]

SL digital output E

[85]

SL digital output F

[90]

kWh counter pulse

Function:

[0] *

No operation

[1]

Control Ready

[2]

Drive ready

[3]

Drive rdy/rem ctrl

[4]

Stand-by / no warning

[5]

Running

[155] Verifying Flow

[6]

Running / no warning

[160] No alarm

[8]

Run on ref/no warn

[161] Running reverse

[9]

Alarm

[164] Local ref active, not OFF

[10]

Alarm or warning

[165] Local ref active

[11]

At torque limit

[166] Remote ref active

[12]

Out of current range

[167] Start command activ

[13]

Below current, low

[168] Hand mode

[14]

Above current, high

[169] Auto mode

[15]

Out of speed range

[180] Clock Fault

[16]

Below speed, low

[181] Prev. Maintenance

[17]

Above speed, high

[182] Deragging

[18]

Out of feedb. range

[183] Pre/Post Lube

[19]

Below feedback, low

[188] AHF Capacitor Connect

[20]

Above feedback, high

[189] External Fan Control

[21]

Thermal warning

[190] No-Flow

[25]

Reverse

[191] Dry Pump

[26]

Bus OK

[192] End Of Curve

[27]

Torque limit & stop

[193] Sleep Mode

[28]

Brake, no brake war

[194] Broken Belt

[29]

Brake ready, no fault

[195] Bypass Valve Control

[30]

Brake fault (IGBT)

[198] Drive Bypass

74

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Function:

Creates a pulse on the digital

output every time when the
frequency converter uses 1 kWh.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output

5-40 Function Relay

Option:

Option:

Function:

[199] Pipe Filling

[11]

At torque limit

[200] Full capacity

[12]

Out of current range

[201] Pump 1 running

[13]

Below current, low

[202] Pump 2 running

[14]

Above current, high

[203] Pump 3 running

[15]

Out of speed range

[204] Pump 4 running

[16]

Below speed, low

[205] Pump 5 running

[17]

Above speed, high

[206] Pump 6 running

[18]

Out of feedb. range

[207] Pump 7 running

[19]

Below feedback, low

[208] Pump 8 running

[20]

Above feedback, high

[209] Pump 9 running

[21]

Thermal warning

[25]

Reverse

[26]

Bus OK

[27]

Torque limit & stop

[28]

Brake, no brake war

[29]

Brake ready, no fault

[30]

Brake fault (IGBT)

[33]

Safe stop active

[35]

External Interlock

5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation Same options and functions as parameter

group 5-3*.

5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is mounted in the frequency
converter. Same options and functions as
parameter group 5-3*.

[36]

Control word bit 11

[37]

Control word bit 12

[40]

Out of ref range

[41]

Below reference, low

5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)

[42]

Above ref, high

Option:

[45]

Bus ctrl.

[46]

Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout

[47]

Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout

[60]

Comparator 0

[61]

Comparator 1

[62]

Comparator 2

3.7.4 5-4* Relays

[63]

Comparator 3

[64]

Comparator 4

Parameters for configuring the timing and the output

functions for the relays.

[65]

Comparator 5

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is mounted in the frequency
converter. Same options and functions as
parameter group 5-3* Digital Outputs.

5-40 Function Relay

Option:

Function:
Select options to define the
function of the relays.
The selection of each mechanical
relay is realised in an array
parameter.

[70]

Logic rule 0

[71]

Logic rule 1

[72]

Logic rule 2

[73]

Logic rule 3

[74]

Logic rule 4

[75]

Logic rule 5

[80]

SL digital output A

[81]

SL digital output B

[82]

SL digital output C

[0]

No operation

[83]

SL digital output D

[1]

Control Ready

[84]

SL digital output E

[2]

Drive ready

[85]

SL digital output F

[3]

Drive rdy/rem ctrl

[155] Verifying Flow

[4]

Stand-by / no warning

[160] No alarm

[5]

Running

[161] Running reverse

[6]

Running / no warning

[164] Local ref active, not OFF

[8]

Run on ref/no warn

[165] Local ref active

[9]

Alarm

[166] Remote ref active

[10]

Alarm or warning

[167] Start command activ

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Function:

3 3

75

Option:

Function:

130BA171.10

5-40 Function Relay

Selected
Event

[168] Hand mode

Relay
output

[169] Auto mode

[180] Clock Fault

On Delay
P 5-41

[181] Prev. Maintenance

[183] Pre/Post Lube
[188] AHF Capacitor Connect

Off Delay
P 5-42

Selected
Event

[189] External Fan Control

[190] No-Flow

Relay
output

[191] Dry Pump

[192] End Of Curve
[193] Sleep Mode

On Delay
P 5-41

[194] Broken Belt

Illustration 3.25 On Delay, Relay

[195] Bypass Valve Control

[198] Drive Bypass
[199] Pipe Filling
[211] Cascade Pump 1

5-42 Off Delay, Relay

[212] Cascade Pump 2

Array[2]: Relay1[0], Relay2[1]

[213] Cascade Pump 3

Range:

[214] Cascade Pump 4

0.01 s*

[215] Cascade Pump 5

[216] Cascade Pump 6

Function:
[0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-out time.
Select one of available mechanical relays
and MCB 105 in an array function. See

[217] Cascade Pump 7

5-40 Function Relay.

[218] Cascade Pump 8

130BA172.10

3 3

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

[219] Cascade Pump 9

[230] Ext. Cascade Ctrl

Selected
Event

5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [9], (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5
[4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])

Range:
0.01 s*

Function:
[0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time.
The relay only cuts in if the condition in
5-40 Function Relay is uninterrupted
during the specified time. Select one of
available mechanical relays and Relay
Option MCB 105 in an array function. See
5-40 Function Relay. Relay 3-6 are
included in Extended Relay Card MCB
113.

Relay
output
On Delay
P 5-41

Off Delay
P 5-42

Illustration 3.26 Off Delay, Relay

If the selected Event condition changes before the on- or

off delay timer expires, the relay output is unaffected.

3.7.5 5-5* Pulse Input

The pulse input parameters are used to define an
appropriate window for the impulse reference area by
configuring the scaling and filter settings for the pulse
inputs. Input terminals 29 or 33 act as frequency reference
inputs. Set terminal 29 (5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input) or
terminal 33 (5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input) to [32] Pulse
input. If terminal 29 is used as an input, then set
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode to [0] Input.

76

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

130BA076.10

Parameter Description

Ref.
(RPM)
High
ref.
value
P 5-53/
p 5-58

Low
ref.
value
P 5-52/
p 5-57

Low freq.
P 5-50/
P 5-55

High freq.
P 5-51/
P 5-56

Input
(Hz)

Illustration 3.27 Pulse Input

5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29

Range:

Function:
Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
pulse filter dampens oscillations of the
feedback signal, which is an advantage if
there is a lot of noise in the system. A high
time constant value results in better
dampening but also increases the time delay
through the filter.

5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency

Range:
100 Hz*

Function:
[0 - 110000
Hz]

Enter the low frequency corresponding

to the low motor shaft speed (i.e. low
reference value) in parameter 5-57 Term.

5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency

Range:
100
Hz*

33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

Function:
[0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency limit
Hz]
corresponding to the low motor shaft
speed (i.e. low reference value) in
parameter 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value. Refer to the diagram in this section.

5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency

Range:
100 Hz*

Function:
[0 - 110000
Hz]

Enter the high frequency corresponding

to the high motor shaft speed (i.e. high
reference value) in parameter 5-58 Term.
33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency

Range:
100 Hz*

Function:
[0 - 110000
Hz]

Enter the high frequency limit

corresponding to the high motor shaft
speed (i.e. high reference value) in
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the low reference value [RPM] for

the motor shaft speed. This is also the
low feedback value, see also
parameter 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value.

5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the low reference value limit for

the motor shaft speed [RPM]. This is also
the lowest feedback value, see also
parameter 5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value.

5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
100*

Enter the high reference value [RPM]

for the motor shaft speed and the
high feedback value, see also
parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./
Feedb. Value.

5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29

Range:
100
ms*

Range:
100*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the high reference value [RPM]

for the motor shaft speed. See also
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./
Feedb. Value.

5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
100 ms*

Function:
[1 - 1000
ms]

Enter the pulse filter time constant. The

low-pass filter reduces the influence on
and dampens oscillations on the feedback
signal from the control.
This is an advantage, e.g. if there is a
great amount on noise in the system.

Function:
[1 1000 ms]

MG20O802

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

77

3 3

Programming Guide

3.7.6 5-6* Pulse Outputs

5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27

Parameters for configuring the scaling and output

functions of pulse outputs. The pulse outputs are
designated to terminals 27 or 29. Select terminal 27 output
in parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and terminal 29 output
in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
Output value

Range:

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
running.
Set the maximum frequency for
terminal 27, corresponding to the
output variable selected in

130BA089.11

3 3

Parameter Description

High output
value
P 5-60(term27)
P 5-63(term29)

5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable.

5000 Hz*

[0 - 32000
Hz]

5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable

Option:

Function:

NOTICE
High freq.
P 5-62(term27)
P 5-65(term29)

This parameter cannot be

adjusted while the motor is
running.

Output
(Hz)

Illustration 3.28 Pulse Output

Select the variable for viewing on the
terminal 29 display. Same options and

5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable

functions as parameter group 5-6*

Option:

Pulse Output.

[0] *

No operation

Function:
Select the operation variable assigned
for terminal 27 readouts.

[0] *

No operation

[45]

Bus ctrl.

NOTICE

[48]

Bus ctrl., timeout

This parameter cannot be

adjusted while the motor is
running.
[45]

Bus ctrl.

[48]

Bus ctrl., timeout

[100] Output freq. 0-100

[101] Reference Min-Max
[102] Feedback +-200%
[103] Motor cur. 0-Imax
[104] Torque 0-Tlim
[105] Torque 0-Tnom
[106] Power 0-Pnom
[107] Speed 0-HighLim
[108] Torque +-160%
[109] Out frq 0-Fmax
[113] Ext. Closed Loop 1
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 2

[100] Output freq. 0-100

[101] Reference Min-Max
[102] Feedback +-200%
[103] Motor cur. 0-Imax
[104] Torque 0-Tlim
[105] Torque 0-Tnom
[106] Power 0-Pnom
[107] Speed 0-HighLim
[108] Torque +-160%
[109] Out frq 0-Fmax
[113] Ext. Closed Loop 1
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 2
[115] Ext. Closed Loop 3
[116] Cascade Reference

5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29

Range:
5000 Hz*

Function:
[0 - 32000
Hz]

Set the maximum frequency for terminal

29 corresponding to the output variable

[115] Ext. Closed Loop 3

set in parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse

[116] Cascade Reference

Output Variable.

78

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable

4.

The capacitor reconnect delay (default= 25 s with

a range from 1 s to 120 s, see parameter 5-80 AHF
Cap Reconnect Delay) is used for the minimum
off-time for the AHF Capacitor Output Function.

5.

In case of power loss, the frequency converter

guarantees that the minimum off-time is satisfied
when power is restored.

Select the variable for read-out on terminal X30/6.

This parameter is active when option module MCB 101 is
installed in the frequency converter.
Same options and functions as parameter group 5-6* Pulse
Outputs.

Option:

Function:

[0] *

No operation

[45]

Bus ctrl.

[48]

Bus ctrl., timeout

90%

[100]

Output freq. 0-100

80%

[101]

Reference Min-Max

[102]

Feedback +-200%

[103]

Motor cur. 0-Imax

[104]

Torque 0-Tlim

[105]

Torque 0-Tnom

[106]

Power 0-Pnom

[107]

Speed 0-HighLim

[108]

Torque +-160%

[109]

Out frq 0-Fmax

[113]

Ext. Closed Loop 1

[114]

Ext. Closed Loop 2

[115]

Ext. Closed Loop 3

[116]

Cascade Reference

Nominal Power of Drive

100%

[0 - 32000
Hz]

30% ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20% ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10% ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Relay Output

module MCB 101 is mounted in the

frequency converter.

5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay

Function:

[1 - 120
s]

40%

t1
20

30

40

Delay time between 2 consecutive AHF

capacitor connections. Timer starts once the
AHF capacitor disconnects, and connects back
once delay expires and drives power above
20% and below 30% of nominal power (see
detailed description below).

AHF capacitor connect output function for digital and

relay outputs

50

60

70

80

t2

90 100 110 120 130

Time (s)

Select the maximum frequency on

terminal X30/6 referring to the output
Output Variable.
This parameter is active when option

25 s*

50%

10

variable in 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse

Range:

60%

On

Function:

5000 Hz*

70%

0%

5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6

Range:

130BC368.10

Parameter Description

Illustration 3.29 Example of the Output Function

t1 represents the off delay timer (10 s).

t2 represents the Capacitor Reconnect Delay
(parameter 5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay).
When the nominal power of the frequency converter
exceeds 20%, the output function turns on. When the
power goes below 10% there is an off delay timer that
needs to expire before the output goes low, this is
represented by t1. After the output goes low, the capacitor
reconnect delay timer needs to expire before the output is
allowed to be on again, represented by t2. When t2 expires,
the nominal power is above 30% and the relay does not
turn on.

Functional Description:
1.
Connect capacitors at 20% nominal power
2.

Hysteresis 50% of the 20% nominal power

(=min. 10% and max. 30% nominal power)

3.

Off delay timer = 10 s. The nominal power must

be below 10% for 10 s to disconnect the
capacitors. If the nominal power exceeds 10%
during the 10 s delay, the timer (10 s) restarts.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

79

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.7.7 5-9* Bus Controlled

5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

This parameter group selects digital and relay outputs via

a fieldbus setting.

Range:
0 %*

5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control

Range:
0*

[0 2147483647 ]

Function:
This parameter holds the state of the digital
outputs and relays that is controlled by bus.
A logical '1' indicates that the output is high
or active.
A logical '0' indicates that the output is low
or inactive.
Bit 0

CC Digital Output Terminal 27

Bit 1

CC Digital Output Terminal 29

Bit 2

GPIO Digital Output Terminal X

30/6

Bit 3

GPIO Digital Output Terminal X

30/7

Bit 4

CC Relay 1 output terminal

Bit 5

CC Relay 2 output terminal

Bit 6

Option B Relay 1 output terminal

Bit 7

Option B Relay 2 output terminal

Bit 8

Option B Relay 3 output terminal

Bit 9-15 Reserved for future terminals

Bit 16

Option C Relay 1 output terminal

Bit 17

Option C Relay 2 output terminal

Bit 18

Option C Relay 3 output terminal

Bit 19

Option C Relay 4 output terminal

Bit 20

Option C Relay 5 output terminal

Bit 21

Option C Relay 6 output terminal

Bit 22

Option C Relay 7 output terminal

Bit 23

Option C Relay 8 output terminal

Bit
24-31

Reserved for future terminals

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the

digital output terminal 29, when it is
configured as [Bus Controlled].

5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the

digital output terminal 29, when it is
configured as [Bus Controlled Timeout] and
time-out is detected

5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the

digital output terminal 27, when it is
configured as [Bus Controlled].

5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the

digital output terminal 6, when it is
configured as [Bus Controlled Timeout] and
time-out is detected.

Table 3.11 Digital Output Bits

5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the

digital output terminal 27, when it is
configured as [Bus Controlled].

5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset

Range:
0 %*

80

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Contains the frequency to apply to the

digital output terminal 27, when it is
configured as [Bus Controlled Timeout] and
time-out is detected.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.8 Parameters 6-** Analog In/Out

6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Option:

3.8.1 6-0* Analog I/O Mode

Function:

Parameter group for setting up the analog I/O configuration.

The frequency converter is equipped with 2 analog inputs:
Terminal 53 and 54. The analog inputs can freely be
allocated to either voltage (0-10 V) or current input (0/4-20
mA)

6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time

[1 99 s]

Function:

[1]

Freeze
output

[2]

Stop

[3]

Jogging

[4]

Max. speed

[5]

Stop and
trip

Enter the Live Zero Timeout time period. Live Zero

Timeout time is active for analog inputs, that is,
terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference or
feedback sources. If the reference signal value
associated with the selected current input falls

[4] overruled to max. speed

[5] overruled to stop with subsequent
trip

Par 6-xx
High Ref./

below 50% of the value set in

Feedb. Value'

Ref./Feedback
[RPM]
1500

parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage,

1200

parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,

900

parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or

600

parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time

period longer than the time set in
parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time, the function
selected in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout

Par 6-xx
Low Ref./

300
150

Feedb. Value'

1V

5V

Par 6-xx
'Low Voltage'or

Function is activated.

10 V

[V]

Analog input

'Low Current'

6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Option:

3 3

[3] overruled to jog speed

130BA038.13

Thermistors may be connected to either an analog or a

digital input.

10 s*

[2] overruled to stop

[0] * Off

NOTICE

Range:

[1] frozen at the present value

Par 6-xx
'High Voltage'or

Function:
Select the time-out function. The function set
in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is
activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or
54 is below 50% of the value in
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage,

'High Current'

Illustration 3.30 Live Zero Conditions

3.8.2 6-1* Analog Input 1

parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,

parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or
parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for

analog input 1 (terminal 53).

time period defined in parameter 6-00 Live Zero

Timeout Time. If several time-outs occur
simultaneously, the frequency converter
prioritises the time-out functions as follows
1.
2.

Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout

Function
Parameter 8-04 Control Timeout
Function

6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage

Range:
0.07 V*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-11 V]

Enter the low-voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to
the low reference/feedback value set in
parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value.

The output frequency of the frequency

converter can be:

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

81

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage

6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant

Range:

Range:

10 V*

Function:

[ par. 6-10
- 10 V]

Function:
dampening, but also increases the time
delay through the filter.

Enter the high-voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to the
high reference/feedback value set in

3 3

parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.

Value.

6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero

Option:

This parameter makes it possible to disable the

Live Zero monitoring. E.g. to be used if the
analog outputs are used as part of a decentral
I/O system (e.g. when not part of any frequency
converter related control functions, but feeding
an external control system with data)

6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current

Range:
4 mA*

Function:

[0 Enter the low current value. This reference

par. 6-13 signal should correspond to the low reference/
mA]
feedback value, set in parameter 6-14 Terminal
53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value. The value must be set
at >2 mA in order to activate the Live Zero
Time-out Function in parameter 6-01 Live Zero
Timeout Function.

20 mA*

Function:
[ par. 6-12 - Enter the high current value
20 mA]
corresponding to the high reference/
feedback set in parameter 6-15 Terminal
53 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

Disabled

[1] * Enabled

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for

analog input 2 (terminal 54).
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
Range:
0.07 V*

parameter 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value.

Enter the analog input scaling value that

corresponds to the low voltage/low
Low Voltage and parameter 6-12 Terminal

6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

53 Low Current.

Range:

6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:

10 V*

Function:

[ par. 6-20
- 10 V]

Enter the high-voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to the

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

high reference/feedback value set in

parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

Enter the analog input scaling

value that corresponds to the high
voltage/high current value set in
parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High
Voltage and
parameter 6-13 Terminal 53 High
Current.

6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current

Range:
4 mA*

6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant

Range:

Function:

[0 Enter the low current value. This reference

par. 6-23 signal should correspond to the low reference/
mA]
feedback value, set in parameter 6-24 Terminal
54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value. The value must be set
at >2 mA to activate the Live Zero Time-out

Function:
[0.001 10 s]

NOTICE

Function in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.
Enter the time constant. This is a firstorder digital low-pass filter time constant
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
53. A high time constant value improves

82

Enter the low-voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to
the low reference/feedback value, set in

current set in parameter 6-10 Terminal 53

0.001 s*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-21 V]

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Size
related*

[0]

3.8.3 6-2* Analog Input 2

6-13 Terminal 53 High Current

Range:

Function:

Function.

6-23 Terminal 54 High Current

Range:
20 mA*

Function:
[ par. 6-22
- 20 mA]

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Enter the high current value

corresponding to the high reference/
feedback value set in
parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./
Feedb. Value.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage

Range:

Range:

0*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the analog input scaling value that

corresponds to the low voltage/low

value (set in parameter 6-35 Term. X30/11

High Ref./Feedb. Value).

6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the high reference/feedback

parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage

and parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low

6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100*

[ par. 6-30 10 V]

current value set in

Current.

Range:

10 V*

Function:

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the low voltage value (set

Enter the analog input scaling value

in parameter 6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low

that corresponds to the high voltage/

Voltage).

high current value set in

parameter 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
and parameter 6-23 Terminal 54 High
Current.

6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
100*

6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant

Range:

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the high voltage value
(set in parameter 6-31 Terminal X30/11

Function:

0.001 s*

[0.001 10 s]

High Voltage).

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant

Range:

Function:

0.001 s*

[0.001 - 10 s]

Enter the time constant. This is a firstorder digital low-pass filter time constant
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
54. A high time constant value improves
dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.

6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero

Option:
[0]

This parameter makes it possible to disable the

Live Zero monitoring. E.g. to be used if the
analog outputs are used as part of a decentral
I/O system (e.g. when not part of any frequency
converter related control functions, but feeding
an external control system with data)

Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for

analog input 3 (X30/11) placed on option module MCB
101.
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage
Range:

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-31 V]

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable the
Live Zero monitoring. E.g. to be used if the
analog outputs are used as part of a decentral
I/O system (e.g. when not part of any frequency
converter related control functions, but feeding
an external control system with data)

[0]

Disabled

[1] * Enabled

3.8.5 6-4* Analog Input 4 MCB 101

Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for
analog input 4 (X30/12) placed on option module MCB
101.
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the low reference/feedback
value (set in parameter 6-34 Term. X30/11
Low Ref./Feedb. Value).

A first-order digital low pass filter time

constant for suppressing electrical noise
on terminal X30/11.

Option:

3.8.4 6-3* Analog Input 3 MCB 101

0.07 V*

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

6-37 Term. X30/11 Live Zero

Function:

Disabled

[1] * Enabled

NOTICE

Range:
0.07 V*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-41 V]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the low reference/feedback
value set in parameter 6-44 Term. X30/12
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

83

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage

6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Range:

Option:

10 V*

Function:

[ par. 6-40 10 V]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the high reference/feedback

Select the function of Terminal 42 as an

analog current output. A motor current of 20
mA corresponds to Imax.

value set in parameter 6-45 Term. X30/12

3 3

High Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Sets the analog output scaling value to

correspond to the low voltage value set
in parameter 6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low
Voltage.

6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
100*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the high voltage value
set in parameter 6-41 Terminal X30/12
High Voltage.

6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant

Range:
0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 - 10 s]

[0]

No
operation

[100] Output
*
freq. 0-100

0 - 100 Hz, (0-20 mA)

[101] Reference
Min-Max

Minimum reference - Maximum reference,

(0-20 mA)

[102] Feedback
+-200%

Reference, (0-20 mA)

0 - Inverter Max. Current (parameter 16-37 Inv.

[104] Torque 0Tlim

0 - Torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque Limit

[105] Torque 0Tnom

0 - Motor rated torque, (0-20 mA)

[106] Power 0Pnom

0 - Motor rated power, (0-20 mA)

6-47 Term. X30/12 Live Zero

Option:

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable the
Live Zero monitoring. E.g. to be used if the
analog outputs are used as part of a decentral
I/O system (e.g. when not part of any frequency
converter related control functions, but feeding
an external control system with data)

[0]

Disabled

[1] * Enabled

3.8.6 6-5* Analog Output 1

[108] Torque
+-160%

0 - Speed High Limit (parameter 4-13 Motor

Speed High Limit [RPM] and

(0-20 mA)

[113] Ext. Closed

Loop 1

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[114] Ext. Closed

Loop 2

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[115] Ext. Closed

Loop 3

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[116] Cascade
Reference
[130] Out frq
0-100
4-20mA

0 - 100 Hz

[131] Reference
4-20mA

Minimum Reference - Maximum Reference

-200% to +200% of parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference

[133] Motor cur.

4-20mA

0 - Inverter Max. Current (parameter 16-37 Inv.

[134] Torq.0-lim
4-20 mA

0 - Torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque Limit

Max. Current)
Motor Mode)

[135] Torq.0-nom 0 - Motor rated torque

4-20mA
[136] Power
4-20mA

84

Motor Mode), (0-20 mA)

[109] Out frq 0Fmax

[132] Feedback
4-20mA

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for

analog output 1, i.e. Terminal 42. Analog outputs are
current outputs: 0/4-20 mA. Common terminal (terminal
39) is the same terminal and has the same electrical
potential for analog common and digital common
connection. Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.

Max. Current), (0-20 mA)

parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]),

(0-20 mA)

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.
A first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
on terminal X30/12.

-200% to +200% of parameter 3-03 Maximum

[103] Motor cur.

0-Imax

[107] Speed 0HighLim

NOTICE

Function:

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

0 - Motor rated power

MG20O802

Programming Guide

6-50 Terminal 42 Output

6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Option:

Option:

[137] Speed
4-20mA

Function:
0 - Speed High Limit (4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed
High Limit [Hz])

[138] Torque
4-20mA
[139] Bus ctrl.

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[140] Bus ctrl.

4-20 mA

0 - 100%

Function:
Frequency
converter
size

Undervoltage
limit

Overvoltage
limit

T2/S2

185 V

410 V

T4/S4

373 V

855 V

T6/T7

553 V

1130 V

Table 3.13 Undervoltage and overvoltage

limits for different frequency converter
sizes

[141] Bus ctrl t.o. 0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[142] Bus ctrl t.o. 0 - 100%
4-20mA

[143] Ext. CL 1
4-20mA

0 - 100%

[144] Ext. CL 2
4-20mA

0 - 100%

10

[145] Ext. CL 3
4-20mA

0 - 100%

400

800

1200 VDC

1 Analog output.
2 Undervoltage limit.
3 Overvoltage limit.

[147] Main act

val 0-20mA

Illustration 3.31 Example: The analogue

output of Terminal 42 on the T4
frequency converter with option [254] DC
Link 0-20mA selected

[148] Main act

val 4-20mA
[150] Out frq 0Fmax
4-20mA
With this parameter selected, the terminal
output represents the scaled DC Link voltage.
Table 3.12 shows the relationship between
the DC Link voltage and the terminal output.
DC Link voltage (V)

Terminal
output

V undervoltage limit

0%

V overvoltage limit

100 %

Voltage within range:

undervoltage < V <
overvoltage

Linearly
interpolated

[255] DC Link
4-20mA

Table 3.13 shows the undervoltage and

overvoltage limits for different frequency
converter sizes.

The function is the same as [254] DC Link

0-20mA.

NOTICE
Values for setting the Minimum Reference is found in
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference and values for
maximum reference in parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference.
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
Range:

Table 3.12 Relationship between the DC

Link voltage and the terminal output

MG20O802

20

[146] Cascade
Ref.
4-20mA

[254] DC Link
0-20mA

3 3

130BD613.10

Parameter Description

0 %*

Function:

[0 - 200 Scale for the minimum output (0 mA or 4 mA)

%]
of the analog signal at terminal 42.
Set the value to be the percentage of the full
range of the variable selected in
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

85

Programming Guide

Example 2:
Variable= FEEDBACK, range= -200% to +200%
Range needed for output= 0-100%
Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at 0% (50% of
range) - set parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to
50%
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 100% (75% of range) set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 75%

6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

Range:
100
%*

3 3

Function:

[0 200
%]

Scale for the maximum output (20 mA) of the

analog signal at terminal 42.
Set the value to be the percentage of the full
range of the variable selected in
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
130BA075.12

Current
(mA)
20

130BA856.10

Parameter Description

20 mA

0/4
0% Analogue
output
Min Scale
par. 6-93

Analogue 100% Variable

Output
for
Max Scale
output
par. 6-94
example:
Speed
(RPM)

0/4 mA

Illustration 3.32 Output Current vs Reference

Variable

0%

50%

75%

100%

-200%

0%

+100%

+200%

Illustration 3.34 Example 2

It is possible to get a value lower than 20 mA at

20 mA / desired maximum current 100%

i . e . 10mA :

20 mA
100% = 200%
10 mA

130BA858.10

Example 1:
Variable value= OUTPUT FREQUENCY, range = 0-100 Hz
Range needed for output = 0-50 Hz
Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at 0 Hz (0% of
range) - set parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to
0%
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 50 Hz (50% of range) set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 50%
20 mA

Example 3:
Variable value= REFERENCE, range= Min ref - Max ref
Range needed for output= Min ref (0%) - Max ref (100%),
0-10 mA
Output signal 0 mA or 4 mA is needed at Min ref - set
parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0%
Output signal 10 mA is needed at Max ref (100% of range)
- set parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 200%
(20 mA/10 mA x 100%=200%).
130BA857.10

full scale by programming values >100% by using

a formula as follows:

20 mA

10 mA

0/4 mA

0%

100%

200%

0/4 mA
0%

50%

100%
Min ref

0Hz

50Hz

100Hz

Max ref

Max ref X 20/10

Illustration 3.35 Example 3

Illustration 3.33 Example 1

6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control

Range:
0 %*

86

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Holds the level of Output 42 if controlled by

bus.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset

6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale

Range:

Range:

0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100
%]

Holds the preset level of Output 42.

In case of a bus timeout and a timeout

100
%*

function is selected in parameter 6-50 Terminal

[0 200
%]

42 Output, the output is preset to this level.

6-55 Terminal 42 Output Filter

Option:

Function:
The following readout analog parameters from
selection in 6-50 Terminal 42 Output have a filter
selected when parameter 6-55 Terminal 42 Output Filter
is on:
Selection

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

Motor current (0 - Imax)

[103]

[133]

Torque limit (0 - Tlim)

[104]

[134]

Rated torque (0 - Tnom)

[105]

[135]

Power (0 - Pnom)

[106]

[136]

Speed (0 - Speedmax)

[107]

[137]

Filter off

[1]

Filter on

On

i . e . 10 mA :

Range:
0 %*

Range:

Analog outputs are current outputs: 0/4 - 20 mA. Common

terminal (terminal X30/8) is the same terminal and
electrical potential for analog common connection.
Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output
Same options and functions as parameter 6-50 Terminal 42
Output.

Function:
No operation

6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 Scales the minimum output of the selected analog

200 %] signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the minimum value
as a percentage of the maximum signal value, i.e.
0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired at 25% of the maximum
output value and 25% is programmed. The value
can never be higher than the corresponding
setting in parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale
if value is below 100%.
This parameter is active when option module MCB
101 is mounted in the frequency converter.

MG20O802

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Contains the value to apply to the output

terminal, when it is configured as Bus
Controlled.

6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset

3.8.7 6-6* Analog Output 2 MCB 101

[0] *

20 mA
100 % = 200 %
10 mA

6-63 Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control

0 %*

Option:

Scales the maximum output of the selected

analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the value
to the desired maximum value of the current
signal output. Scale the output to give a lower
current than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an
output below 100% of the maximum signal value.
If 20 mA is the desired output current at a value
between 0 - 100% of the ful-scale output,
program the percentage value in the parameter,
i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20
mA is desired at maximum output (100%),
calculate the percentage value as follows:
20 mA / desired maximum current 100%

Table 3.14 Readout Analog Parameters

[0] * Off

Function:

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Contains the value to apply to the output

terminal, when it is configured as Bus
Controlled Timeout and time-out is detected.

6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output

Analog output of the VLT Extended Relay Card MCB 113.

Option:

Function:

[0] *

No operation

[100]

Output freq. 0-100

[101]

Reference Min-Max

[102]

Feedback +-200%

[103]

Motor cur. 0-Imax

[104]

Torque 0-Tlim

[105]

Torque 0-Tnom

[106]

Power 0-Pnom

[107]

Speed 0-HighLim

[108]

Torque +-160%

[109]

Out frq 0-Fmax

[113]

Ext. Closed Loop 1

[114]

Ext. Closed Loop 2

[115]

Ext. Closed Loop 3

[116]

Cascade Reference

[130]

Out frq 0-100 4-20mA

[131]

Reference 4-20mA

[132]

Feedback 4-20mA

[133]

Motor cur. 4-20mA

[134]

Torq.0-lim 4-20 mA

[135]

Torq.0-nom 4-20mA

[136]

Power 4-20mA

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

87

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output

6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output

Analog output of the VLT Extended Relay Card MCB 113.

Option:

Function:

[133]

Motor cur. 4-20mA

Speed 4-20mA

[134]

Torq.0-lim 4-20 mA

Torque 4-20mA

[135]

Torq.0-nom 4-20mA

Bus ctrl.

[136]

Power 4-20mA

[140]

Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA

[137]

Speed 4-20mA

[141]

Bus ctrl t.o.

[138]

Torque 4-20mA

[142]

Bus ctrl t.o. 4-20mA

[139]

Bus ctrl.

[143]

Ext. CL 1 4-20mA

[140]

Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA

Ext. CL 2 4-20mA

[141]

Bus ctrl t.o.

[145]

Ext. CL 3 4-20mA

[142]

Bus ctrl t.o. 4-20mA

[146]

Cascade Ref. 4-20mA

[143]

Ext. CL 1 4-20mA

[147]

Main act val 0-20mA

[144]

Ext. CL 2 4-20mA

Main act val 4-20mA

[145]

Ext. CL 3 4-20mA

Out frq 0-Fmax 4-20mA

[146]

Cascade Ref. 4-20mA

DC Link 0-20mA

[147]

Main act val 0-20mA

DC Link 4-20mA

[148]

Main act val 4-20mA

[150]

Out frq 0-Fmax 4-20mA

[254]

DC Link 0-20mA

[255]

DC Link 4-20mA

Option:
[137]
[138]
[139]

[144]

[148]
[150]
[254]
[255]

Function:

6-71 Terminal X45/1 Min. Scale

Range:
0 %*

Function:
[0 - 200 %]

6-81 Terminal X45/3 Min. Scale

6-72 Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale

Range:
100 %*

Function:

6-1* Analog Input 1.

[0 - 200 %]

Range:

6-73 Terminal X45/1 Bus Control

Range:
0 %*

Function:

6-74 Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout Preset

0 %*

Function:

Function:
No operation

[100]

Output freq. 0-100

[101]

Reference Min-Max

[102]

Feedback +-200%

[103]

Motor cur. 0-Imax

[104]

Torque 0-Tlim

[105]

Torque 0-Tnom

[106]

Power 0-Pnom

[107]

Speed 0-HighLim

[108]

Torque +-160%

[109]

Out frq 0-Fmax

[113]

Ext. Closed Loop 1

[114]

Ext. Closed Loop 2

[115]

Ext. Closed Loop 3

[116]

Cascade Reference

[130]

Out frq 0-100 4-20mA

[131]

Reference 4-20mA

[132]

Feedback 4-20mA

88

Range:
100 %*

Function:
[0 - 200 %]

Range:

6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output

[0] *

Function:
[0 - 200 %]

6-83 Terminal X45/3 Bus Control

[0 - 100 %]

Option:

0 %*

6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale

[0 - 100 %]

Range:

Analog output of the VLT Extended Relay Card MCB 113. For
information about configuring this terminal, see parameter group

0 %*

Function:
[0 - 100 %]

6-84 Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout Preset

Range:
0 %*

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Function:
[0 - 100 %]

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.9 Parameters 8-** Communications and

Options

8-03 Control Timeout Time

Range:

Function:
In BACnet, the control time-out is only
triggered if some specific objects are written.
The object list hold information on the
objects that triggers the control timeout:

3.9.1 8-0* General Settings

8-01 Control Site
Option:

Function:

The setting in this parameter overrides the

settings in parameter 8-50 Coasting Select to
parameter 8-56 Preset Reference Select.
[0] Digital and
ctrl.word

Control by using both digital input and

control word.

[1] Digital only

Control by using digital inputs only.

[2] Controlword
only

Control by using control word only.

8-02 Control Source

Option:

Function:
Select the source of the control word: one of
2 serial interfaces or 4 installed options.
During initial power-up, the frequency
converter automatically sets this parameter to
[3] Option A if it detects a valid fieldbus
option installed in slot A. If the option is
removed, the frequency converter detects a

Option:

[0]

None

[1]

FC Port

[2]

USB Port

[3]

Option A

[4]

Option B

[5]

Option C0

[6]

Option C1

BV1
BV2
BV3
BV4
BV5
Multistate Outputs

the time period specified in

parameter 8-03 Control Timeout Time.
[20] N2 Override Release only appears
after setting the Metasys N2 protocol.
[0] * Off
[1]

Freeze output

[2]

Stop

[3]

Jogging

[4]

Max. speed

[5]

Stop and trip

[7]

Select setup 1

[8]

Select setup 2

[9]

Select setup 3

8-05 End-of-Timeout Function

Option:

[1 Enter the maximum time expected to pass

18000 s] between the reception of 2 consecutive
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it
indicates that the serial communication has
parameter 8-04 Control Timeout Function
Control Time-out Function is then carried out.

Function:
Select the action after receiving a valid control
word following a time-out. This parameter is

Function:

stopped. The function selected in

MG20O802

AV4

[20] N2 Override
Release

8-03 Control Timeout Time

Size
related*

AV2

[10] Select setup 4

[30] External Can

Range:

AV1

Select the time-out function. The timeout function is activated when the
control word fails to be updated within

setting of 8-02 Control Source does not

change, but the frequency converter trips and

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

AV0

Function:

Source back to default setting [1] FC Port, and

the frequency converter then trips. If an
option is installed after initial power-up, the

NOTICE

Binary Outputs

8-04 Control Timeout Function

change in the configuration, sets 8-02 Control

displays: Alarm 67 Option Changed.

Analog Outputs

active only when parameter 8-04 Control

Timeout Function is set to [7] Set-up 1, [8] Set-up
2, [9] Set-up 3 or [10] Set-up 4.
[0]

Hold setup

Retains the set-up selected in

parameter 8-04 Control Timeout Function and
displays a warning, until parameter 8-06 Reset

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

89

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.9.2 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings

8-05 End-of-Timeout Function

Option:

Function:
Control Timeout toggles. Then the frequency
converter resumes its original set-up.

[1] * Resume
set-up

8-10 Control Profile

Option:

Resumes the set-up active before the time-out.

8-06 Reset Control Timeout

Option:

Function:
This parameter is active only when the choice [0]

[0] * FC profile

Hold set-up has been selected in

[1]

PROFIdrive
profile

[5]

ODVA

[7]

CANopen DSP
402

parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function.

[0] * Do not Retains the set-up specified in
reset
parameter 8-04 Control Timeout Function, [7] Set-up
1, [8] Set-up 2, [9] Set-up 3 and [10] Set-up 4
following a control time-out.
[1]

Do
reset

Returns the frequency converter to the original setup following a control word time-out. When the
value is set to [1] Do reset, the frequency converter
performs the reset and then immediately reverts to
the [0] Do not reset setting.

Function:
This parameter has no function for
BACnet.

[0] * Disable
[1]

Trigger on alarms

[2]

Trigger alarm/warn.

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW

Option:

8-08 Readout Filtering

[0]

No function

[1] * Profile Default Function corresponds to the profile default

[2]

Alarm 68
Only

Only set in case of an Alarm 68.

[3]

Trip excl.
Alarm 68

Set in case of a trip, except if Alarm 68

executes the trip.

[10] T18 DI status.

The bit indicates the status of terminal 18.

0 indicates that the terminal is low
1 indicates that the terminal is high

[11] T19 DI status.

The bit indicates the status of terminal 19.

0 indicates that the terminal is low
1 indicates that the terminal is high

[12] T27 DI status.

The bit indicates the status of terminal 27.

0 indicates that the terminal is low
1 indicates that the terminal is high

[13] T29 DI status.

The bit indicates the status of terminal 29.

0 indicates that the terminal is low
1 indicates that the terminal is high

[14] T32 DI status.

The bit indicates the status of terminal 32.

0 indicates that the terminal is low
1 indicates that the terminal is high

[15] T33 DI status.

The bit indicates the status of terminal 33.

0 indicates that the terminal is low
1 indicates that the terminal is high

[16] T37 DI status

The bit indicates the status of terminal 37.

0 indicates T37 is low (safe stop)
1 indicates T37 is high (normal)

[21] Thermal
warning

The thermal warning turns on when the

temperature exceeds the limit in the motor,
the frequency converter, the brake resistor,
or the thermistor.

[30] Brake fault

(IGBT)

Output is Logic 1 when the brake IGBT is

short-circuited. Use this function to protect
the frequency converter if there is a fault
on the brake modules. Use the output/relay

If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,

this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A
power-cycle is required for changes to take effect.

Option:

Function:

[0]

Motor Data StdFilt.

Select [0] for normal bus

readouts.

[1]

Motor Data LPFilter

Select [1] for filtered bus

readouts of the following
parameters:
16-10
16-11
16-12
16-14
16-16
16-17
16-22
16-25

90

Function:
This parameter enables configuration of bits
1215 in the status word.

selected in parameter 8-10 Control Profile.

8-07 Diagnosis Trigger

Option:

Function:
Select the interpretation of the control
and status words corresponding to the
installed fieldbus. Only the selections
valid for the fieldbus installed in slot A is
visible in the LPC display.

Power [kW]
Power [hp]
Motor Voltage
Motor current
Torque [Nm]
Speed [RPM]
Torque [%]
Torque [Nm] High

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:
Logic Action [40] Set digital out C high is
executed. The input goes low whenever the

to cut out the main voltage from the

frequency converter.

Smart Logic Action [34] Set digital out C low

is executed.

[40] Out of ref.

range
[60] Comparator 0

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[61] Comparator 1

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[62] Comparator 2

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[63] Comparator 3

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[64] Comparator 4

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[65] Comparator 5

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[70] Logic Rule 0

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[71] Logic Rule 1

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[72] Logic Rule 2

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[73] Logic Rule 3

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[74] Logic Rule 4

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[75] Logic Rule 5

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[80] SL Digital
Output A

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The output goes high whenever the Smart

Logic Action [41] Set digital out D high is

executed. The input goes low whenever the
Smart Logic Action [35] Set digital out D low
is executed.

Logic Action [42] Set digital out E high is

executed. The input goes low whenever the
Smart Logic Action [36] Set digital out E low
is executed.

Logic Action [43] Set digital out F high is

executed. The input goes low whenever the
Smart Logic Action [37] Set digital out F low
is executed.

8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW

Option:

Function:
Selection of control word bit 10, if it
is active low or active high.

[0]

None

[1] * Profile default

[2]

CTW Valid, active low

3.9.3 8-3* FC Port Settings

8-30 Protocol
Option:

Function:
Protocol selection for the integrated FC
(standard) Port (RS-485) on the control card.

[0] * FC

Communication according to the FC Protocol

as described in RS-485 Installation and Set-up in
the relevant Design Guide.

FC MC

Same as [0] FC but to be used when

downloading SW to the frequency converter or
uploading dll file (covering information
regarding parameters available in the
frequency converter and their inter-dependencies) to MCT 10 Set-up Software.

[2]

Modbus
RTU

Communication according to the Modbus RTU

protocol.

Smart Logic Action [33] Set digital out B low

is executed.

[3]

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart

Metasys
N2

[9]

FC Option

low is executed.
See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
The input goes high whenever the Smart
Logic Action [39] Set digital out B high is
executed. The input goes low whenever the

MG20O802

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart

[85] SL Digital
Output F

the Smart Logic Action [32] Set digital out A

[82] SL Digital
Output C

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart

[84] SL Digital
Output E

[1]

Logic Action [38] Set digital out A high is

executed. The output goes low whenever

[81] SL Digital
Output B

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart

[83] SL Digital
Output D

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

91

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.9.4 8-4* Telegram Selection

8-31 Address
Range:

Function:

Size related*

[ 1 - 255 ] Enter the address for the FC (standard)

port.
Valid range: 1-126.

8-40 Telegram Selection

Option:

8-32 Baud Rate

Option:

Function:

[1] *

Baud rates 9600, 19200, 38400 and 76800

baud are valid for BACnet only.

Standard telegram 1

[100] None
[101] PPO 1

[0] 2400 Baud

[102] PPO 2

[1] 4800 Baud

[103] PPO 3

[2] 9600 Baud

[104] PPO 4

[3] 19200 Baud

[105] PPO 5

[4] 38400 Baud

[106] PPO 6

[5] 57600 Baud

[107] PPO 7

[6] 76800 Baud

[108] PPO 8

[7] 115200 Baud

[200] Custom telegram 1

The default value depends on the FC Protocol.

[202] Custom telegram 3

8-42 PCD Write Configuration

8-33 Parity / Stop Bits

Option:

Function:
Enables use of freely configurable
telegrams or standard telegrams for
the FC port.

Option:

Function:
Parity and Stop Bits for the protocol

[0]

None

[302]

Minimum Reference

[303]

Maximum Reference

[341]

Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

8-30 Protocol using the FC Port. For

some of the protocols, not all options
are visible. Default depends on the
protocol selected.
[0] Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[1] Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[2] No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[3] No Parity, 2 Stop Bits

8-35 Minimum Response Delay

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 5 - 10000
ms]

Specify the minimum delay time

between receiving a request and
transmitting a response. This is used
for overcoming modem turnaround
delays.

[342]

Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

[351]

Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time

[352]

Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

8-36 Max Response Delay

[380]

Jog Ramp Time

Range:

[381]

Quick Stop Ramp Time

Size
related*

Function:
[ 11 - 10001 Specify the maximum permissible
ms]
delay time between transmitting a
request and receiving a response.
Exceeding this delay time causes
control word time-out.

[411]

Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

[412]

Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

[413]

Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

[414]

Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

[416]

Torque Limit Motor Mode

[417]

Torque Limit Generator Mode

8-37 Maximum Inter-Char Delay

[553]

Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:

[558]

Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[590]

Digital & Relay Bus Control

[593]

Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

[595]

Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

[597]

Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

Size related*

92

Function:
[ 0.00 35.01 ms]

Specify the maximum permissible

time interval between receipt of 2
bytes. This parameter activates timeout if transmission is interrupted.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Function:
Select the
parameters to be
assigned to PCD's
telegrams. The
number of available
PCDs depends on
the telegram type.
The values in PCDs
are then written to
the selected
parameters as data
values.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

8-42 PCD Write Configuration

Option:

8-43 PCD Read Configuration

Function:

Option:

[615]

Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[1614] Motor current

[625]

Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[1615] Frequency [%]

[653]

Terminal 42 Output Bus Control

[1616] Torque [Nm]

[663]

Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control

[1617] Speed [RPM]

[673]

Terminal X45/1 Bus Control

[1618] Motor Thermal

[683]

Terminal X45/3 Bus Control

[1622] Torque [%]

[890]

Bus Jog 1 Speed

[1626] Power Filtered [kW]

[891]

Bus Jog 2 Speed

[1627] Power Filtered [hp]

[894]

Bus Feedback 1

[1630] DC Link Voltage

[895]

Bus Feedback 2

[1632] Brake Energy /s

[896]

Bus Feedback 3

[1633] Brake Energy Average

[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1

[1634] Heatsink Temp.

[1682] Fieldbus REF 1

[1635] Inverter Thermal

[1685] FC Port CTW 1

[1638] SL Controller State

[1686] FC Port REF 1

[1639] Control Card Temp.

[2643] Terminal X42/7 Bus Control

[1650] External Reference

[2653] Terminal X42/9 Bus Control

[1652] Feedback[Unit]

[2663] Terminal X42/11 Bus Control

[1653] Digi Pot Reference

[0]

None

[894]

Bus Feedback 1

[895]

Bus Feedback 2

[896]

Bus Feedback 3

[1397] Alert Alarm Word

[1398] Alert Warning Word
[1399] Alert Status Word
[1500] Operating hours
[1501] Running Hours
[1502] kWh Counter
[1600] Control Word
[1601] Reference [Unit]
[1602] Reference [%]
[1603] Status Word
[1605] Main Actual Value [%]
[1609] Custom Readout
[1610] Power [kW]
[1611] Power [hp]
[1612] Motor Voltage
[1613] Frequency

MG20O802

3 3

[1654] Feedback 1 [Unit]

8-43 PCD Read Configuration

Option:

Function:

Function:
Select the
parameters to be
assigned to PCDs
of the telegrams.
The number of
available PCDs
depends on the
telegram type.
PCDs contain the
actual data values
of the selected
parameters.

[1655] Feedback 2 [Unit]

[1656] Feedback 3 [Unit]
[1660] Digital Input
[1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting
[1662] Analog Input 53
[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting
[1664] Analog Input 54
[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]
[1666] Digital Output [bin]
[1667] Pulse Input #29 [Hz]
[1668] Pulse Input #33 [Hz]
[1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
[1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
[1671] Relay Output [bin]
[1672] Counter A
[1673] Counter B
[1675] Analog In X30/11
[1676] Analog In X30/12
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1678] Analog Out X45/1 [mA]
[1679] Analog Out X45/3 [mA]
[1684] Comm. Option STW
[1690] Alarm Word
[1691] Alarm Word 2
[1692] Warning Word
[1693] Warning Word 2
[1694] Ext. Status Word
[1695] Ext. Status Word 2
[1696] Maintenance Word
[1830] Analog Input X42/1
[1831] Analog Input X42/3
[1832] Analog Input X42/5
[1833] Analog Out X42/7 [V]

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

93

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

8-43 PCD Read Configuration

8-52 DC Brake Select

Option:

Function:

[1834] Analog Out X42/9 [V]

Option:
[2] Logic
AND

[1835] Analog Out X42/11 [V]

[1836] Analog Input X48/2 [mA]
[1837] Temp. Input X48/4

Function:
Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial
communication port, AND additionally via one of
the digital inputs.

[3] Logic OR Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs.

[1838] Temp. Input X48/7

[1839] Temp. Input X48/10
[1850] Sensorless Readout [unit]
[1860] Digital Input 2

8-53 Start Select

[2795] Advanced Cascade Relay Output [bin]

Option:

[2796] Extended Cascade Relay Output [bin]

3.9.5 8-5* Digital/Bus

Parameters for configuring the control word Digital/Bus
merging.

NOTICE
These parameters are active only when
parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control
word.

[0]

Digital
input

Activates start command via a digital input.

[1]

Bus

Activates start command via the serial

communication port or fieldbus option.

[2]

Logic
AND

Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port, AND additionally via one
of the digital inputs.

[3] * Logic OR

8-50 Coasting Select

Option:

Function:
Select control of the coasting function via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.

[0]

Digital
input

Activates Start command via a digital input.

[1]

Bus

Activates Start command via the serial

communication port or fieldbus option.

[2]

Logic
AND

[3] * Logic OR

Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port, AND additionally via one
of the digital inputs.
Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial
communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs.

Option:

Function:
Select control of the frequency converter reverse
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or
via the fieldbus.

[0] Digital
input

Activates reverse command via a digital input.

[1] Bus

Activates reverse command via the serial

communication port or fieldbus option.

[2] Logic
AND

Activates reverse command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port, AND additionally via one of
the digital inputs.

[3] Logic OR

Activates reverse command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs.

Function:
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals
(digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.

NOTICE

NOTICE

This parameter is active only when

parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control
word.

Only selection [0] Digital Input is available

when parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is
set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM
[0] Digital
input

Activates start command via a digital input.

[1] Bus

Activates start command via the serial communication port or fieldbus option.

94

Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs.

8-54 Reversing Select

8-52 DC Brake Select

Option:

Function:
Select control of the frequency converter start
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or
via the fieldbus.

8-55 Set-up Select

Option:

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Function:
Select control of the frequency converter set-up
selection via the terminals (digital input) and/or
via the fieldbus.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

8-55 Set-up Select

8-83 Slave Error Count

Option:

Range:

Function:

[0]

Digital
input

Activates the set-up selection via a digital input.

[1]

Bus

Activates the set-up selection via the serial

communication port or fieldbus option.

[2]

Logic
AND

Activates the set-up selection via the fieldbus/

serial communication port, AND additionally via
one of the digital inputs.

[3] * Logic OR

Activate the set-up selection via the fieldbus/

serial communication port OR via one of the
digital inputs.

0*

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of error

telegrams, which could not be executed by the
frequency converter.

3.9.7 8-9* Bus Jog

8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed
Range:
100 RPM*

Function:
[ 0 - par. 4-13
RPM]

8-56 Preset Reference Select

Option:

Function:

[0]

Digital
input

Activates preset reference selection via a digital

input.

[1]

Bus

Activates preset reference selection via the

serial communication port or fieldbus option.

[2]

Logic
AND

Activates preset reference selection via the

fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
additionally via one of the digital inputs.

Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - par. 4-13
RPM]

Enter the jog speed. Activate this

fixed jog speed via the serial port
or fieldbus option.

8-94 Bus Feedback 1

Range:
0*

[-200 200 ]

Function:
Write a feedback to this parameter via the serial
communication port or fieldbus option. This
parameter must be selected in
parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source or
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source as a feedback
source.

8-95 Bus Feedback 2

Range:

These parameters are used for monitoring the bus

communication via the FC Port.
8-80 Bus Message Count
0*

Range:

Activates the preset reference selection via the

fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one
of the digital inputs.

3.9.6 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics

Range:

Enter the jog speed. Activate this

fixed jog speed via the serial port
or fieldbus option.

8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed

Select control of the preset reference selection

via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the
fieldbus.

[3] * Logic OR

3 3

0*

Function:

[-200 - 200 ] See parameter 8-94 Bus Feedback 1 for further

details.

8-96 Bus Feedback 3

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid

telegrams detected on the bus.

Range:
0*

Function:

[-200 - 200 ] See parameter 8-94 Bus Feedback 1 for further

details.

8-81 Bus Error Count

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of telegrams

with faults (e.g. CRC fault), detected on the bus.

8-82 Slave Message Rcvd

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid

telegrams addressed to the slave, sent by the
frequency converter.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

95

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.10 Parameters 9-** PROFIdrive

3.11 Parameters 10-** CAN Fieldbus

For Profibus parameter descriptions, see the VLT Profibus

Operating Instructions.

3.11.1 10-0* Common Settings

10-00 CAN Protocol

3 3

Option:

Function:

NOTICE

[1] DeviceNet

The parameter options depend on

installed option.
View the active CAN protocol.

10-01 Baud Rate Select

Option:

Function:
Select the fieldbus transmission speed. The
selection must correspond to the transmission
speed of the master and the other fieldbus
nodes.

[16] 10 Kbps
[17] 20 Kbps
[18] 50 Kbps
[19] 100 Kbps
[20] 125 Kbps
[21] 250 Kbps
[22] 500 Kbps
[23] 800 Kbps
[24] 1000 Kbps

10-02 MAC ID
Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - 63 ] Selection of station address. Every
station connected to the same
DeviceNet network must have an
unambiguous address.

10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 255 ] View the number of CAN control transmission

errors since the last power-up.

10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 255 ] View the number of CAN control receipt errors

since the last power-up.

10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter

Range:
0*

96

Function:

[0 - 255 ] View the number of Bus Off events since the last
power-up.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.11.2 10-1* DeviceNet

10-11 Process Data Config Write

Option:

Function:

10-10 Process Data Type Selection

[411]

Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

Option:

[412]

Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Function:
Select the Instance (telegram) for data
transmission. The Instances available are

[413]

Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

[414]

Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

dependent upon the setting of

[416]

Torque Limit Motor Mode

parameter 8-10 Control Profile.

[417]

Torque Limit Generator Mode

When parameter 8-10 Control Profile is set

[553]

Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

to[0] FC profile, parameter 10-10 Process Data

[558]

Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[590]

Digital & Relay Bus Control

[593]

Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

[595]

Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

[597]

Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

[615]

Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[625]

Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[653]

Terminal 42 Output Bus Control

[663]

Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control

Type Selection options [0] INSTANCE 100/150

and [1] INSTANCE 101/151 are available.
When parameter 8-10 Control Profile is set to
[5] ODVA, parameter 10-10 Process Data Type
Selection options [2] INSTANCE 20/70 and [3]
INSTANCE 21/71 are available.
Instances 100/150 and 101/151 are Danfossspecific. Instances 20/70 and 21/71 are ODVAspecific AC Drive profiles.
For guidelines in telegram selection, refer to

[673]

Terminal X45/1 Bus Control

the DeviceNet Operating Instructions.

[683]

Terminal X45/3 Bus Control

NOTICE

[890]

Bus Jog 1 Speed

[891]

Bus Jog 2 Speed

A change to this parameter is executed

immediately.

[894]

Bus Feedback 1

[895]

Bus Feedback 2

[896]

Bus Feedback 3

[0] INSTANCE
100/150

[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1

[1] INSTANCE
101/151

[1685] FC Port CTW 1

[1682] Fieldbus REF 1

[1686] FC Port REF 1

[2] INSTANCE
20/70

10-12 Process Data Config Read

Option: Function:

[3] INSTANCE
21/71

Select the process read data for I/O Assembly Instances

101/151. Elements [2] and [3] of this array can be
selected. Elements [0] and [1] of the array are fixed.

[6] INSTANCE
102/152

10-11 Process Data Config Write

Option:

10-13 Warning Parameter

Function:
Select the process
write data for I/O
Assembly Instances
101/151. Elements [2]
and [3] of this array
can be selected.
Elements [0] and [1]
of the array are fixed.

[0]

None

[302]

Minimum Reference

[303]

Maximum Reference

[341]

Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

[342]

Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

[351]

Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time

[352]

Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

[380]

Jog Ramp Time

[381]

Quick Stop Ramp Time

MG20O802

3 3

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View a DeviceNet-specific Warning word. One

bit is assigned to every warning. Refer to the
DeviceNet Operating Instructions for further
information.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

97

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

Bit

Meaning

10-22 COS Filter 3

Bus not active

Explicit connection timeout

Range:

I/O connection

Retry limit reached

Actual is not updated

CAN bus off

I/O send error

Initialisation error

10-23 COS Filter 4

No bus supply

Range:

Bus off

10

Error passive

11

Error warning

12

Duplicate MAC ID Error

13

RX queue overrun

14

TX queue overrun

15

CAN overrun

0*

0*

[0 65535 ]

[0 65535 ]

Function:
Enter the value for COS Filter 3, to set up the
filter mask for PCD 3. When operating in COS
(Change-Of-State), this function filters out bits
in PCD 3 that should not be sent if they
change.

Function:
Enter the value for COS Filter 4 to set up the
filter mask for PCD 4. When operating in COS
(Change-Of-State), this function filters out bits
in PCD 4 that should not be sent if they
change.

3.11.4 10-3* Parameter Access

Table 3.15 Warning Bits

Parameter group providing access to indexed parameters

and defining programming set-up.

10-14 Net Reference

Read only from LCP

10-30 Array Index

Option:

Range:

Function:
Select the reference source in Instance 21/71 and
20/70.

[0] * Off

Enables reference via analog/digital inputs.

[1]

Enables reference via the fieldbus.

On

0*

[0 - 255 ] View array parameters. This parameter is valid

only when a DeviceNet fieldbus is installed.

10-31 Store Data Values

Option:

Read only from LCP

Option: Function:
Select the control source in Instance 21/71 and 20/70.
[0] * Off Enables control via analog/digital inputs.
On Enable control via the fieldbus.

[0] * Off
[1]

3.11.3 10-2* COS Filters

0*

[0 65535 ]

Store edit Stores all parameter values from the active setsetup
up in the non-volatile memory. The selection

[2]

Function:
Enter the value for COS Filter 1 to set up the
filter mask for the status word. When operating
in COS (Change-Of-State), this function filters
out bits in the status word that should not be
sent if they change.

Store all
setups

Range:

98

[0 65535 ]

Stores all parameter values for all set-ups in the

non-volatile memory. The selection returns to [0]
Off when all parameter values have been stored.

10-32 Devicenet Revision

Range:
Size related*

10-21 COS Filter 2

0*

Deactivates the non-volatile storage function.

returns to [0] Off when all values have been

stored.

10-20 COS Filter 1

Range:

Function:
Parameter values changed via DeviceNet are not
automatically stored in non-volatile memory.
Use this parameter to activate a function that
stores parameter values in the EEPROM nonvolatile memory, so changed parameter values
are retained at power-down.

10-15 Net Control

[1]

Function:

Function:

Function:
[0 - 65535 ] View the DeviceNet revision number.
This parameter is used for EDS file
creation.

Enter the value for COS Filter 2, to set up the

filter mask for the Main Actual Value. When
operating in COS (Change-Of-State), this
function filters out bits in the Main Actual Value
that should not be sent if they change.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

10-33 Store Always

Option:

Function:

[0] * Off

Deactivates non-volatile storage of data.

[1]

Stores parameter data received via DeviceNet in

EEPROM non-volatile memory as default.

On

3 3

10-34 DeviceNet Product Code

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[0 - 65535 ]

10-39 Devicenet F Parameters

Array [1000]
No LCP access

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter is used to configure the frequency

converter via DeviceNet and build the EDS-file.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

99

Programming Guide

3.12 Parameters 13-** Smart Logic

13-00 SL Controller Mode

Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of user

defined actions (see parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action
[x]) executed by the SLC when the associated user defined
event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event [x]) is
evaluated as TRUE by the SLC. Events and actions are each
numbered and linked in pairs. This means that when the
first event is fulfilled (attains the value TRUE), the first
action is executed. After this, the conditions of the second
event is evaluated and if evaluated TRUE, the second action
is executed and so on. Only one event is evaluated at any
time. If an event is evaluated as FALSE, nothing happens
(in the SLC) during the current scan interval and no other
events is evaluated. This means that when the SLC starts, it
evaluates the first event (and only the first event) each scan
interval. Only when the first event is evaluated TRUE, the
SLC executes the first action and start evaluating the
second event. It is possible to programme from 1 to 20
events and actions.
When the last event/action has been executed, the
sequence starts over again from the first event/the first
action. Illustration 3.36 shows an example with 3 event/
actions.
Start
event P13-01
State 1
13-51.0
13-52.0

State 2
13-51.1
13-52.1

Stop
event P13-02
State 4
13-51.3
13-52.3

130BA062.14

3 3

Parameter Description

Stop
event P13-02

State 3
13-51.2
13-52.2
Stop
event P13-02

Illustration 3.36 Smart Logic Event Actions

Option:

Function:

[0]

Off

Disables the Smart Logic Controller.

[1]

On

Enables the Smart Logic Controller.

13-01 Start Event

Option:

Function:
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE)
input to activate Smart Logic Control.

[0]

False

Enters the fixed value of FALSE in the

logic rule.

[1]

True

Enters the fixed value TRUE in the logic

rule.

[2]

Running

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[3]

In range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[4]

On reference

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[5]

Torque limit

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[6]

Current Limit

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[7]
[8]

Out of current
range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Below I low

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Outputs for further description.

[9]

Above I high

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[10]

Out of speed
range

[11]

Below speed low

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[12]

Above speed
high

Starting and stopping the SLC

Starting and stopping the SLC can be done by selecting [1]
On or [0] Off in parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode. The
SLC always starts in state 0 (where it evaluates the first
event). The SLC starts when the Start Event (defined in
parameter 13-01 Start Event) is evaluated as TRUE (provided
that [1] On is selected in parameter 13-00 SL Controller
Mode). The SLC stops when the Stop Event
(parameter 13-02 Stop Event) is TRUE. 13-03 Reset SLC resets
all SLC parameters and starts programming from scratch.

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb.
high

[16]

Thermal warning

3.12.1 13-0* SLC Settings

[18]

[13]

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Out of feedb.
range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[17]

Mains out of
range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Reversing

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Outputs for further description.

Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate and reset the

Smart Logic Control sequence. The logic functions and
comparators are always running in the background, which
opens for separate control of digital inputs and outputs.

100

[19]

Warning

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-01 Start Event

Option:
[20]

Alarm (trip)

13-01 Start Event

Function:

Option:

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[22]

Comparator 0

Use the result of comparator 0 in the

logic rule.

Function:

[44]

Reset Key

This event is TRUE if [Reset] is pressed.

[45]

Left Key

This event is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[46]

Right Key

This event is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[47]

Up Key

This event is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[48]

Down Key

This event is TRUE if [] is pressed.

3 3

[23]

Comparator 1

Use the result of comparator 1 in the

logic rule.

[50]

Comparator 4

Use the result of comparator 4 in the

logic rule.

[24]

Comparator 2

Use the result of comparator 2 in the

logic rule.

[51]

Comparator 5

Use the result of comparator 5 in the

logic rule.

[25]

Comparator 3

Use the result of comparator 3 in the

logic rule.

[60]

Logic rule 4

Use the result of logic rule 4 in the

logic rule.

[26]

Logic rule 0

Use the result of logic rule 0 in the

logic rule.

[61]

Logic rule 5

Use the result of logic rule 5 in the

logic rule.

[27]

Logic rule 1

Use the result of logic rule 1 in the

logic rule.

[102] Verifying Flow

[28]

Logic rule 2

Use the result of logic rule 2 in the

logic rule.

[29]

Logic rule 3

Use the result of logic rule 3 in the

logic rule.

[33]

Digital input DI18 Use the value of DI18 in the logic rule
(High = TRUE).

[0]

False

Enters the fixed value of FALSE in the

logic rule.

[34]

Digital input DI19 Use the value of DI19 in the logic rule
(High = TRUE).

[1]

True

Enters the fixed value TRUE in the logic

rule.

[35]

Digital input DI27 Use the value of DI27 in the logic rule
(High = TRUE).

[2]

Running

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

[36]

Digital input DI29 Use the value of DI29 in the logic rule
(High = TRUE).

[3]

[37]

Digital input DI32 Use the value of DI32 in the logic rule
(High = TRUE).

[4]

[38]

Digital input DI33 Use the value of DI33 in the logic rule
(High = TRUE).

[5]

[39]

Start command

[40]

[41]

[42]

[43]

Drive stopped

Reset Trip

Auto Reset Trip

OK Key

MG20O802

This event is TRUE if the frequency

converter is started (either via digital
input, fieldbus or other).
This event is TRUE if the frequency
converter is stopped or coasted (either
via digital input, fieldbus or other).
This event is TRUE if the frequency
converter is tripped (but not triplocked) and [Reset] is pressed.
This event is TRUE if the frequency
converter is tripped (but not triplocked) and an Automatic Reset is
issued.
This event is TRUE if [OK] is pressed.

13-02 Stop Event

Option:

Function:
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE)
input to deactivate Smart Logic
Control.

Outputs for further description.

In range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

On reference

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Torque limit

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[6]

Current Limit

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[7]
[8]

Out of current
range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Below I low

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Outputs for further description.

[9]

Above I high

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[10]

Out of speed
range

[11]

Below speed low

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[12]

Above speed
high

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

101

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-02 Stop Event

Option:
[13]
[14]

13-02 Stop Event

Function:

Option:

Out of feedb.
range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Below feedb. low

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

[36]

Digital input DI29

Use the value of DI29 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[37]

Digital input DI32

Use the value of DI32 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[38]

Digital input DI33

Use the value of DI33 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[39]

Start command

This event is TRUE if the frequency

converter is started (either via digital
input, fieldbus or other).

[40]

Drive stopped

This event is TRUE if the frequency

converter is stopped or coasted (either
via digital input, fieldbus or other).

[41]

Reset Trip

This event is TRUE if the frequency

converter is tripped (but not triplocked) and [Reset] is pressed.

[42]

Auto Reset Trip

This event is TRUE if the frequency

converter is tripped (but not triplocked) and an Automatic Reset is
issued.

[43]

OK Key

This event is TRUE if [OK] is pressed.

[44]

Reset Key

This event is TRUE if [Reset] is pressed.

[45]

Left Key

This event is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[46]

Right Key

This event is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[47]

Up Key

This event is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[48]

Down Key

This event is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[50]

Comparator 4

Use the result of comparator 4 in the

logic rule.

[51]

Comparator 5

Use the result of comparator 5 in the

logic rule.

[60]

Logic rule 4

Use the result of logic rule 4 in the

logic rule.

[61]

Logic rule 5

Use the result of logic rule 5 in the

logic rule.

[70]

SL Time-out 3

Use the result of timer 3 in the logic

rule.

[71]

SL Time-out 4

Use the result of timer 4 in the logic

rule.

[72]

SL Time-out 5

Use the result of timer 5 in the logic

rule.

[73]

SL Time-out 6

Use the result of timer 6 in the logic

rule.

[74]

SL Time-out 7

Use the result of timer 7 in the logic

rule.

[80]

No Flow

[81]

Dry Pump

[82]

End of Curve

Outputs for further description.

Outputs for further description.

[15]
[16]

Above feedb.
high

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Thermal warning

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Outputs for further description.

[17]
[18]

Mains out of

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

range

Outputs for further description.

Reversing

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[19]

Warning

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[20]

Alarm (trip)

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[22]

Comparator 0

Use the result of comparator 0 in the

logic rule.

[23]

Comparator 1

Use the result of comparator 1 in the

logic rule.

[24]

Comparator 2

Use the result of comparator 2 in the

logic rule.

[25]

Comparator 3

Use the result of comparator 3 in the

logic rule.

[26]

Logic rule 0

Use the result of logic rule 0 in the

logic rule.

[27]

Logic rule 1

Use the result of logic rule 1 in the

logic rule.

[28]

Logic rule 2

Use the result of logic rule 2 in the

logic rule.

[29]

Logic rule 3

Use the result of logic rule 3 in the

logic rule.

[30]

SL Time-out 0

Use the result of timer 0 in the logic

rule.

[31]

SL Time-out 1

Use the result of timer 1 in the logic

rule.

[32]

SL Time-out 2

Use the result of timer 2 in the logic

rule.

[33]

Digital input DI18

Use the value of DI18 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[34]

Digital input DI19

Use the value of DI19 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[35]

Digital input DI27

Use the value of DI27 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

102

Function:

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-02 Stop Event

Option:
[83]

13-10 Comparator Operand

Function:

Array [4]

Broken Belt

Option:

[102] Verifying Flow

3.12.2 13-1* Comparators

Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables
(i.e. output frequency, output current, analog input etc.) to
fixed preset values.
130BB672.10

Par. 13-11
Comparator Operator
Par. 13-10
Comparator Operand
=
Par. 13-12
Comparator Value

TRUE longer than.

...
...

Illustration 3.37 Comparators

In addition, there are digital values that are compared to

fixed time values. See explanation in 13-10 Comparator
Operand. Comparators are evaluated once in each scan
interval. Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) directly. All
parameters in this parameter group are array parameters
with index 0 to 5. Select index 0 to programme
comparator 0, select index 1 to programme comparator 1,
and so on.

[20]

Alarm number

[21]

Warning number

[22]

Analog input x30 11

[23]

Analog input x30 12

[30]

Counter A

[31]

Counter B

[40]

Analog input x42/1

[41]

Analog input x42/3

[42]

Analog input x42/5

[46]

AI53 scaled

[47]

AI54 scaled

[48]

AI53 unit

[49]

AI54 unit

[50]

FALSE

[51]

TRUE

[52]

Control ready

[53]

Drive ready

[54]

Running

[55]

Reversing

[56]

In range

[60]

On reference

[61]

Below reference, low

[62]

Above ref, high

[65]

Torque limit

[66]

Current Limit

[67]

Out of current range

13-10 Comparator Operand

[68]

Below I low

Array [4]

[69]

Above I high

[70]

Out of speed range

Option:

Function:
Select the variable to be
monitored by the comparator.

[0]

DISABLED

[1]

Reference %

[2]

Feedback %

[3]

Motor speed

[4]

Motor Current

[5]

Motor torque

[6]

Motor power

[7]

Motor voltage

[8]

DC-link voltage

[9]

Motor Thermal

[10]

Drive thermal

[11]

Heat sink temp.

[12]

Analog input AI53

[13]

Analog input AI54

[14]

Analog input AIFB10

[15]

Analog input AIS24V

[17]

Analog input AICCT

[18]

Pulse input FI29

[19]

Pulse input FI33

MG20O802

[71]

Below speed low

[72]

Above speed high

[75]

Out of feedback range

[76]

Below feedback low

[77]

Above feedback high

[80]

Thermal warning

[82]

Mains out of range

[85]

Warning

[86]

Alarm (trip)

[87]

Alarm (trip lock)

[90]

Bus OK

[91]

Torque limit & stop

[92]

Brake fault (IGBT)

[94]

Safe stop active

Function:

3 3

[100] Comparator 0
[101] Comparator 1
[102] Comparator 2
[103] Comparator 3
[104] Comparator 4
[105] Comparator 5
[110] Logic rule 0
[111] Logic rule 1

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

103

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-10 Comparator Operand

13-11 Comparator Operator

Array [4]

Array [6]

Option:

Function:

Option:

Function:
Select [1] for the result of the evaluation to be

[1] (equal)

[112] Logic rule 2

TRUE, when the variable selected in

[113] Logic rule 3

[114] Logic rule 4

parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is approxi-

[115] Logic rule 5

mately equal to the fixed value in

[120] SL Time-out 0

parameter 13-12 Comparator Value.

[121] SL Time-out 1

Select [2] > for the inverse logic of option [0] <.

[2] >

[122] SL Time-out 2

[5] TRUE
longer
than..

[123] SL Time-out 3
[124] SL Time-out 4
[125] SL Time-out 5

[6] FALSE
longer
than..

[126] SL Time-out 6
[127] SL Time-out 7
[130] Digital input DI18

[7] TRUE
shorter
than..

[131] Digital input DI19

[132] Digital input DI27
[133] Digital input DI29

[8] FALSE
shorter
than..

[134] Digital input DI32

[135] Digital input DI33
[150] SL digital output A

13-12 Comparator Value

[151] SL digital output B

Array [6]

[152] SL digital output C

Range:

[153] SL digital output D

Size
related*

[154] SL digital output E

[155] SL digital output F

Function:
[-100000 100000 ]

[160] Relay 1
[161] Relay 2
[180] Local referecnce
active

Enter the trigger level for the

variable that is monitored by this
comparator. This is an array
parameter containing comparator
values 0 to 5.

[181] Remote reference

active

3.12.3 13-2* Timers

[182] Start command

Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) from timers directly to

define an event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event), or
as boolean input in a logic rule (see parameter 13-40 Logic
Rule Boolean 1, parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 or
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3). A timer is only
FALSE when started by an action (i.e. [29] Start timer 1)
until the timer value entered in this parameter is elapsed.
Then it becomes TRUE again.
All parameters in this parameter group are array
parameters with index 0 to 2. Select index 0 to program
Timer 0, select index 1 to program Timer 1, and so on.

[183] Drive stopped

[185] Drive in hand mode
[186] Drive in auto mode
[187] Start command given
[190] Digital input x30/2
[191] Digital input x30/3
[192] Digital input x30/4

13-11 Comparator Operator

Array [6]

Option:
[0] <

Function:

13-20 SL Controller Timer

Select [0] < for the result of the evaluation to be

TRUE, when the variable selected in
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is smaller
than the fixed value in
parameter 13-12 Comparator Value. The result is

Array [3]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 0]

FALSE, if the variable selected in

parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is greater
than the fixed value in

Enter the value to define the duration of

the FALSE output from the programmed
timer. A timer is only FALSE if it is started
by an action (i.e. [29] Start timer 1) and
until the given timer value has elapsed.

parameter 13-12 Comparator Value.

104

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.12.4 13-4* Logic Rules

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (TRUE/FALSE inputs) from

timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits and events
using the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select
boolean inputs for the calculation in parameter 13-40 Logic
Rule Boolean 1, parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 and
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. Define the operators
used to logically combine the selected inputs in
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and
parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.

Array [6]

Option:
[9]

Above I high

Function:
See parameter group 5-3* Digital
Outputs for further description.

[10]

Out of speed
range

[11]

Below speed low

3 3

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[12]

Above speed high See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Par. 13-40
Logic Rule Boolean 1
Par. 13-42
Logic Rule Boolean 2

...
...

Par. 13-43
Logic Rule Operator 2

130BB673.10

Outputs for further description.

Par. 13-41
Logic Rule Operator 1

...
...

[13]
[14]

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Below feedb. low

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Outputs for further description.

[15]

Par. 13-44
Logic Rule Boolean 3

[16]

Illustration 3.38 Logic Rules

Out of feedb.
range

Above feedb.
high

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Thermal warning

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Outputs for further description.

Priority of calculation
The results of parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 are calculated first.
The outcome (TRUE/FALSE) of this calculation is combined
with the settings of parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2
and parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3, yielding the final
result (TRUE/FALSE) of the logic rule.
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

[17]
[18]

Mains out of
range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Reversing

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[19]

Warning

[20]

Alarm (trip)
Alarm (trip lock)

Enters the fixed value of FALSE in the

logic rule.

[1]

True

Enters the fixed value TRUE in the logic

rule.

[2]

Running

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

On reference
Torque limit
Current Limit

[8]

[23]

Comparator 1

Use the result of comparator 1 in the

logic rule.

[24]

Comparator 2

Use the result of comparator 2 in the

logic rule.

[25]

Comparator 3

Use the result of comparator 3 in the

logic rule.

[26]

Logic rule 0

Use the result of logic rule 0 in the

logic rule.

[27]

Logic rule 1

Use the result of logic rule 1 in the

logic rule.

[28]

Logic rule 2

Use the result of logic rule 2 in the

logic rule.

[29]

Logic rule 3

Use the result of logic rule 3 in the

logic rule.

[30]

SL Time-out 0

Use the result of timer 0 in the logic

rule.

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[7]

Use the result of comparator 0 in the

logic rule.

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[6]

Comparator 0

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[5]

[22]

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[4]

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Function:

False

In range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

[21]

[0]

[3]

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Array [6]

Option:

Outputs for further description.

Out of current
range

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Below I low

See parameter group 5-3* Digital

Outputs for further description.

Outputs for further description.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

105

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:

[31]

SL Time-out 1

Use the result of timer 1 in the logic

rule.

[61]

Logic rule 5

Use the result of logic rule 5 in the

logic rule.

[32]

SL Time-out 2

Use the result of timer 2 in the logic

rule.

[70]

SL Time-out 3

Use the result of timer 3 in the logic

rule.

[33]

Digital input DI18

Use the value of DI18 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[71]

SL Time-out 4

Use the result of timer 4 in the logic

rule.

[34]

Digital input DI19

Use the value of DI19 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[72]

SL Time-out 5

Use the result of timer 5 in the logic

rule.

[35]

Digital input DI27

Use the value of DI27 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[73]

SL Time-out 6

Use the result of timer 6 in the logic

rule.

[36]

Digital input DI29

Use the value of DI29 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[74]

SL Time-out 7

Use the result of timer 7 in the logic

rule.

[37]

Digital input DI32

Use the value of DI32 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[80]

No Flow

[81]

Dry Pump

Use the value of DI33 in the logic rule

(High = TRUE).

[82]

End of Curve

[83]

Broken Belt

[38]
[39]

[40]

[41]

[42]

Digital input DI33

Start command

Drive stopped

Reset Trip

Auto Reset Trip

This logic rule is TRUE if the frequency

converter is started by any means
(either via digital input, fieldbus or
other).
This logic rule is TRUE if the frequency
converter is stopped or coasted by any
means (either via digital input, fieldbus
or other).

13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1

Array [6]

Option:

This logic rule is TRUE if the frequency

converter is tripped (but not triplocked) and an Automatic Reset is
issued.

OK Key

This logic rule is TRUE if [OK] is

pressed.

[44]

Reset Key

This logic rule is TRUE if [Reset] is

pressed.

[45]

Left Key

This logic rule is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[46]

Right Key

This logic rule is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[47]

Up Key

This logic rule is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[48]

Down Key

This logic rule is TRUE if [] is pressed.

[50]

Comparator 4

Use the result of comparator 4 in the

logic rule.

[51]

Comparator 5

Use the result of comparator 5 in the

logic rule.

[60]

Logic rule 4

Use the result of logic rule 4 in the

logic rule.

Function:
Select the first logical operator to use on the
Boolean inputs from parameter 13-40 Logic
Rule Boolean 1 and parameter 13-42 Logic Rule
Boolean 2.
Parameter numbers in square brackets stand
for the boolean inputs of parameters in group

This logic rule is TRUE if the frequency

converter is tripped (but not triplocked) and [Reset] is pressed.

[43]

106

[102] Verifying Flow

13-** Smart Logic Control.

[0] DISABLED

Ignores parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2,

parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2, and
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

[1] AND

Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND [13-42].

[2] OR

Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR [13-42].

[3] AND NOT

Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND NOT

[13-42].

[4] OR NOT

Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR NOT

[13-42].

[5] NOT AND

Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND

[13-42].

[6] NOT OR

Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR

[13-42].

[7] NOT AND

NOT

Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND

NOT [13-42].

[8] NOT OR NOT

Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR NOT

[13-42].

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:

[0]

False

[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[8]

Below I low

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

[11]

Below speed low

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

[16]

Thermal warning

Option:

Function:
Select the second boolean (TRUE or
FALSE) input for the selected logic
rule.

[44]

Reset Key

[45]

Left Key

[46]

Right Key

See parameter 13-40 Logic Rule

[47]

Up Key

Boolean 1 for further descriptions of

choices and their functions.

[48]

Down Key

[50]

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

[70]

SL Time-out 3

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[72]

SL Time-out 5

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[80]

No Flow

[81]

Dry Pump

[82]

End of Curve

[83]

Broken Belt

Function:

3 3

[102] Verifying Flow

13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2

Array [6]

Option:

Function:
Select the second logical operator to be used

[17]

Mains out of range

[18]

Reversing

[19]

Warning

[20]

Alarm (trip)

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[22]

Comparator 0

[23]

Comparator 1

[24]

Comparator 2

[25]

Comparator 3

parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

[13-40/13-42] signifies the boolean input

[26]

Logic rule 0

calculated in parameter 13-40 Logic Rule

[27]

Logic rule 1

Boolean 1, parameter 13-41 Logic Rule

[28]

Logic rule 2

Operator 1, and parameter 13-42 Logic Rule

[29]

Logic rule 3

Boolean 2. [0] Disabled (factory setting). select

[30]

SL Time-out 0

this option to ignore parameter 13-44 Logic

[31]

SL Time-out 1

Rule Boolean 3.

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[0] DISABLED

[33]

Digital input DI18

[1] AND

[34]

Digital input DI19

[2] OR

[35]

Digital input DI27

[3] AND NOT

[36]

Digital input DI29

[4] OR NOT

[37]

Digital input DI32

[5] NOT AND

[38]

Digital input DI33

[6] NOT OR

[39]

Start command

[7] NOT AND NOT

[40]

Drive stopped

[8] NOT OR NOT

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto Reset Trip

[43]

OK Key

MG20O802

on the boolean input calculated in

parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and the
boolean input coming from
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[13-44] signifies the boolean input of

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

107

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:

3 3
[0]

False

[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[8]

Below I low

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

[11]

Below speed low

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

Option:

Function:
Select the third boolean (TRUE or
FALSE) input for the selected logic
rule.

[45]

Left Key

[46]

Right Key

[47]

Up Key

See parameter 13-40 Logic Rule

[48]

Down Key

Boolean 1 for further descriptions of

choices and their functions.

[50]

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

[70]

SL Time-out 3

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[72]

SL Time-out 5

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[80]

No Flow

[81]

Dry Pump

[82]

End of Curve

[83]

Broken Belt

Function:

[102] Verifying Flow

3.12.5 13-5* States

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

13-51 SL Controller Event

[16]

Thermal warning

Array [20]

[17]

Mains out of range

[18]

Reversing

Option:

[19]

Warning

[20]

Alarm (trip)

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[22]

Comparator 0

[23]

Comparator 1

[24]

Comparator 2

[25]

Comparator 3

[26]

Logic rule 0

[27]

Logic rule 1

[28]

Logic rule 2

[29]

Logic rule 3

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[33]

Digital input DI18

[34]

Digital input DI19

[35]

Digital input DI27

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[38]

Digital input DI33

[39]

Start command

[40]

Drive stopped

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto Reset Trip

[43]

OK Key

[44]

Reset Key

108

Function:
Select the boolean input (TRUE or
FALSE) to define the Smart Logic
Controller event.
See parameter 13-02 Stop Event for
further descriptions of choices and
their functions.

[0]

False

[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[8]

Below I low

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

[11]

Below speed low

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

[16]

Thermal warning

[17]

Mains out of range

[18]

Reversing

[19]

Warning

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-51 SL Controller Event

13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]

Array [20]

Option:

Function:

Option:

Alarm (trip)

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[22]

Comparator 0

[0]

Disabled

[23]

Comparator 1

[1]

No action

[24]

Comparator 2

[2]

Select set-up 1

[25]

Comparator 3

[26]

Logic rule 0

[27]

Logic rule 1

[28]

Logic rule 2

[29]

Logic rule 3

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[32]

[3]

Select set-up 2

[4]

Select set-up 3

[5]

Digital input DI18

Digital input DI19

[35]

Digital input DI27

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[38]

Digital input DI33

[39]

Start command

[40]

Drive stopped

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto Reset Trip

[43]

OK Key

[44]

Reset Key

[45]

Left Key

[46]

Right Key
Up Key

[50]

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

Changes the active set-up

(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 3.

[34]

Down Key

Changes the active set-up

(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 2.

Select set-up 4

Changes the active set-up

(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 4. If the
set-up is changed, it will merge with other
set-up commands coming from either the
digital inputs or via a fieldbus.

SL Time-out 2

[47]

Changes the active set-up

(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 1.

[33]

[48]

Function:
evaluated as true. The following actions
are available for selection:

[20]

[10] Select preset

ref 0

Selects preset reference 0.

[11] Select preset

ref 1

Selects preset reference 1.

[12] Select preset

ref 2

Selects preset reference 2.

[13] Select preset

ref 3

Selects preset reference 3.

[14] Select preset

ref 4

Selects preset reference 4.

[15] Select preset

ref 5

Selects preset reference 5.

[16] Select preset

ref 6

Selects preset reference 6.

[17] Select preset

ref 7

Selects preset reference 7. If the active

preset reference is changed, it will merge
with other preset reference commands
coming from either the digital inputs or
via a fieldbus.

[61]

Logic rule 5

[70]

SL Time-out 3

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[72]

SL Time-out 5

[18] Select ramp 1

Selects ramp 1

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[19] Select ramp 2

Selects ramp 2

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[80]

No Flow

[22] Run

[81]

Dry Pump

Issues a start command to the frequency

converter.

[82]

End of Curve

[23] Run reverse

[83]

Broken Belt

Issues a start reverse command to the

frequency converter.

[24] Stop

Issues a stop command to the frequency

converter.

[26] DC Brake

Issues a DC stop command to the

frequency converter.

[27] Coast

The frequency converter coasts

immediately. All stop commands including
the coast command stop the SLC.

[102] Verifying Flow

13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]

Option:

Function:
Select the action corresponding to the SLC
event. Actions are executed when the
corresponding event (defined in
parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

109

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-52 SL Controller Action

13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]

Array [20]

Option:

Function:

Option:

[28] Freeze output

Freezes the output frequency of the

frequency converter.

[29] Start timer 0

Starts timer 0, see parameter 13-20 SL

Function:

[80] Sleep Mode

[81] Derag

Starts Deragging (see parameter groups

29-1* Deragging Function to 29-3* for
further information)

Controller Timer for further description.

[30] Start timer 1

Starts timer 1, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

[31] Start timer 2

Starts the Sleep Mode.

Starts timer 2, see parameter 13-20 SL

3.12.6 13-9* User Defined Alerts and

Readouts

Controller Timer for further description.

Parameters in this group allow to configure applicationspecific messages, warnings and alarms.
Use the following parameters to configure the frequency
converter to show a message and perform an action when
a specific event occurs:

[32] Set digital out

A low

Any output with digital output 1 selected

is low (off).

[33] Set digital out

B low

Any output with digital output 2 selected

is low (off).

[34] Set digital out

C low

Any output with digital output 3 selected

is low (off).

13-90 Alert Trigger the event that triggers the

user-defined action and message.

[35] Set digital out

D low

Any output with digital output 4 selected

is low (off).

[36] Set digital out

E low

Any output with digital output 5 selected

is low (off).

13-91 Alert Action the action that the frequency

converter performs when the event defined in
parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger occurs.

[37] Set digital out

F low

Any output with digital output 6 selected

is low (off).

13-92 Alert Text the text that the frequency

converter shows on the LCP when the event
defined in parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger occurs.

[38] Set digital out

A high

Any output with digital output 1 selected

is high (closed).

[39] Set digital out

B high

Any output with digital output 2 selected

is high (closed).

[40] Set digital out

C high

Any output with digital output 3 selected

is high (closed).

[41] Set digital out

D high

Any output with digital output 4 selected

is high (closed).

[42] Set digital out

E high

Any output with digital output 5 selected

is high (closed).

[43] Set digital out

F high

Any output with digital output 6 selected

is high (closed).

[60] Reset Counter

A

Resets Counter A to zero.

[61] Reset Counter

B

Resets Counter A to zero.

[70] Start Timer 3

Starts timer 3, see parameter 13-20 SL

[73] Start Timer 6

[74] Start Timer 7

Parameter 13-91 Alert Action = [5] Stop & warning.

Parameter 13-92 Alert Text = Valve 5 open.

13-90 Alert Trigger

Select the event that triggers the user-defined action and
message.

Option:
[0] *

Function:
False
Reversing
Comparator 0

[23]

Comparator 1

[24]

Comparator 2

[25]

Comparator 3

[26]

Logic rule 0

[27]

Logic rule 1

Starts timer 5, see parameter 13-20 SL

[28]

Logic rule 2

Controller Timer for further description.

[29]

Logic rule 3

Starts timer 6, see parameter 13-20 SL

[30]

SL Time-out 0

Controller Timer for further description.

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[33]

Digital input DI18

Starts timer 4, see parameter 13-20 SL

Starts timer 7, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

110

Parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger = Digital input DI32.

[18]

Controller Timer for further description.

[72] Start Timer 5

[22]

Controller Timer for further description.

[71] Start Timer 4

For example, consider the following use case:

If there is an active signal on digital input 32, the
frequency converter shows the message "Valve 5 open" on
the LCP and ramps down to a stop.
To achieve this configuration, a user should make the
following settings:

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

13-90 Alert Trigger

13-99 Alert Status Word

Select the event that triggers the user-defined action and

message.

Shows the status word of a user-defined alarm in hex code.

Option:

Function:

[34]

Digital input DI19

[35]

Digital input DI27

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[38]

Digital input DI33

[50]

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

[70]

SL Time-out 3

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[72]

SL Time-out 5

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[74]

SL Time-out 7

Range:
0*

Function:
[0 - 4294967295 ]

3 3

13-91 Alert Action

Select the action that the frequency converter performs when
the event defined in parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger occurs.

Option:

Function:

[0] *

Info

[1]

Warning

[2]

Freeze output

[3]

Freeze output & warn

[4]

Stop

[5]

Stop & warning

[6]

Jogging

[7]

Jogging & warning

[8]

Max speed

[9]

Max speed & warn

[10]

Stop and trip

[11]

Stop and trip w manual

reset

[12]

Trip

[13]

Trip w manual reset

13-92 Alert Text

Enter the text that the frequency converter shows on the LCP
when the event defined in parameter 13-90 Alert Trigger occurs.

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[0 - 20 ]

13-97 Alert Alarm Word

Shows the alarm word of a user-defined alarm in hex code.

Range:
0*

Function:
[0 - 4294967295 ]

13-98 Alert Warning Word

Shows the warning word of a user-defined alarm in hex code.

Range:
0*

MG20O802

Function:
[0 - 4294967295 ]

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

111

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.13 Parameters 14-** Special Functions

3.13.1 14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern
Option:

14-04 PWM Random

Option:

Function:

[0] * Off

No change of the acoustic motor switching noise.

[1]

Transforms the acoustic motor switching noise from a

clear ringing tone to a less noticeable white noise.
This is achieved by slightly and randomly altering the
synchronism of the pulse width modulated output
phases.

On

Function:
Select the switching pattern: 60 AVM or SFAVM.

[0] 60 AVM
[1] SFAVM

3.13.2 14-1* Mains On/Off

14-01 Switching Frequency

Option:

Function:
Select the inverter switching frequency. Changing
the switching frequency can help to reduce
acoustic noise from the motor.

NOTICE

Parameters for configuring mains failure monitoring and

handling.
14-10 Mains Failure
Option:

The output frequency value of the

frequency converter must never exceed
1/10 of the switching frequency. When the
motor is running, adjust the switching
frequency in parameter 14-01 Switching
Frequency until the motor is as noiseless as
possible. See also
parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern and
section Derating in the relevant Design
Guide.

Select the function at which the frequency

converter must act, when the threshold set in
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault has
been reached or a Mains Failure Inverse
command is activated via one of the digital
inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs).
Only selection [0] No function, [3] Coasting or [6]
Alarm is available when parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
[0]

No
function

The energy left in the capacitor bank is used to

run the motor, but is discharged.

Ctrl.
rampdown

The frequency converter performs a controlled

[3]

Coasting

The frequency converter turns off and the

capacitor bank backs up the control card then
ensuring a faster restart when mains
reconnected (at short power zags).

[4]

Kinetic
back-up

The frequency converter rides through by

controlling speed for generative operation of the
motor utilising the moment of inertia of the
system as long as sufficient energy is present.

[6]

Alarm

[0]

1.0 kHz

[1]

1.5 kHz

[2]

2.0 kHz

[3]

2.5 kHz

[4]

3.0 kHz

[5]

3.5 kHz

[6]

4.0 kHz

[7]

5.0 kHz

[8]

6.0 kHz

[9]

7.0 kHz

[1]

[10] 8.0 kHz

[11] 10.0 kHz
[12] 12.0kHz
[13] 14.0 kHz

14-03 Overmodulation
Option:
Off

[1] * On

ramp down. Parameter 2-10 Brake Function must

be set to [0] Off.

NOTICE

[14] 16.0kHz

[0]

Function:

Function:
Selects no over-modulation of the output voltage in
order to avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft.

For best performance of controlled ramp down and

kinetic back-up 1-03 Torque Characteristics should be set
to [0] Compressor or [1] Variable Torque (no automatic
energy optimization should be active).

The over-modulation function generates an extra

voltage of up-to 8% of Umaxoutput voltage without
over-modulation, which results in an extra torque of
10-12% in the middle of the over-syncronous range
(from 0% at nominal speed rising to approximately
12% at double nominal speed).

112

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

DC Voltage
Output Speed rpm
Par 14-11

Over Voltage Control Level

130BT101.10

Parameter Description

14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance

Option:

Operation under severe mains imbalance

conditions reduces the lifetime of the motor.
Conditions are considered severe if the motor is
operated continuously near nominal load (e.g. a
pump or fan running near full speed).
When a severe mains imbalance is detected:

Time

Mains

Over Voltage Control Level

Par 14-11

130BT108.10

Illustration 3.39 Controlled Ramp Down - Short Mains Failure.

Ramping down to stop followed by ramping up to reference.

DC Voltage
Output Speed rpm

Time

Mains

DC Voltage
Output Speed rpm
Par 14-11

Over Voltage Control Level

130BT100.10

Illustration 3.40 Controlled Ramp Down, Longer Mains Failure.

Ramping down as long as the energy in the system allows for
it, then the motor is coasted.

Time

Mains

DC Voltage
Output Speed rpm
Over Voltage Control Level

Par 14-11

130BT109.10

Illustration 3.41 Kinetic Back-up, Short Mains Failure.

Ride through as long as the energy in the system allows for it.

Time

Mains

Illustration 3.42 Kinetic Back-up, Longer Mains Failure.

The motor is coasted as soon as the energy in the system is
too low.

Function:

Select [0] Trip to trip the frequency converter.

[0]

Trip

[1]

Warning Select [1] Warning to issue a warning.

[2]

Disabled Select [2] Disabled for no action.

[3] * Derate

Select [3] Derate for derating the frequency

converter.

3.13.3 14-2* Trip Reset

Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip
handling and control card self test or initialisation.
14-20 Reset Mode
Option:
[0]

Manual reset

[1]

Automatic reset x 1

[2]

Automatic reset x 2

[3]

Automatic reset x 3

[4]

Automatic reset x 4

[5]

Automatic reset x 5

[6]

Automatic reset x 6

[7]

Automatic reset x 7

[8]

Automatic reset x 8

[9]

Automatic reset x 9

[10] * Automatic reset x 10

[11]

Automatic reset x 15

[12]

Automatic reset x 20

[13]

Infinite auto reset

14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[180 600 V]

This parameter defines the threshold

voltage at which the selected function in
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure should be
activated. The detection level is at a
factor2

of the value in

parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains

Fault.

MG20O802

Function:

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Select the reset function after

tripping. Once reset, the frequency
converter can be restarted.
Select [0] Manual reset, to perform a
reset via [Reset] or via the digital
inputs.
Select [1]-[12] Automatic reset x 1
x20 to perform between one and
twenty automatic resets after
tripping.
Select [13] Infinite Automatic Reset
for continuous resetting after
tripping.

113

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

14-20 Reset Mode

14-22 Operation Mode

Function:

NOTICE

Option:

Function:

The motor may start without

warning. If the specified
number of AUTOMATIC RESETs
is reached within 10 minutes,
the frequency converter enters
[0] Manual reset mode. After
the Manual reset is performed,
the setting of 14-20 Reset Mode
reverts to the original
selection. If the number of
automatic resets is not reached
within 10 minutes, or when a
Manual reset is performed, the
internal AUTOMATIC RESET
counter returns to zero.

3 3

10 s*

Connect to mains supply.

6.

Carry out various tests.

7.

The results are displayed on the LCP

and the frequency converter moves
into an infinite loop.

8.

Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode is

automatically set to [0] Normal
operation. Carry out a power cycle to
start up in Normal operation after a
control card test.

If the test is OK
LCP read-out: Control Card OK.
Disconnect the mains supply and remove the
test plug. The green LED on the control card
lights up.
If the test fails
LCP read-out: Control Card I/O failure.
Replace the frequency converter or control card.
The red LED on the control card is turned on.

14-21 Automatic Restart Time

Range:

5.

Function:

To test the plugs, connect/group the following

[0 - 600 s] Enter the time interval from trip to start of

the automatic reset function. This parameter

terminals as shown in Illustration 3.43: (18 - 27 32), (19 - 29 - 33) and (42 - 53 - 54).

is active when 14-20 Reset Mode is set to [1] [13] Automatic reset.

14-22 Operation Mode

Option:

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Function:

130BA314.10

Option:

Use this parameter to specify normal operation,

to perform tests or to initialise all parameters
except parameter 15-03 Power Up's,
parameter 15-04 Over Temp's and

39 42 50 53 54 55

parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. This function is

active only when the power is cycled (power
off-power on) to the frequency converter.
[0]
*

[1]

Normal
operation

Select [0] Normal operation for normal operation

of the frequency converter with the motor in
the selected application.

Control
card test

Select [1] Control card test to test the analog

and digital inputs and outputs and the +10 V
control voltage. The test requires a test
connector with internal connections.

Illustration 3.43 Wiring Control Card Test

[2]

Initialisation

parameter 15-03 Power Up's,

parameter 15-04 Over Temp's and
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. The frequency
converter resets during the next power-up.

Use the following procedure for the control card

test:
1.

Select [1] Control card test.

2.

Disconnect the mains supply and wait

for the light in the display to go out.

3.

Set switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54)

= ON/I.

4.

Insert the test plug (see

Illustration 3.43).

114

Select [2] Initialisation to reset all parameter

values to default settings, except for

Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode also reverts to

the default setting [0] Normal operation.
[3]

Boot
mode

14-23 Typecode Setting

Option: Function:
Typecode re-writing. Use this parameter to set the
typecode matching the specific frequency converter.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit

14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time

Range:

Range:

60 s*

Function:

[0 60 s]

Enter the torque limit trip delay in seconds. When

the output torque reaches the torque limits

Function:

Size related*

[1 - 100 ms] Sets a time constant for the current

limit controller low-pass filter.

(parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and

3.13.5 14-4* Energy Optimising

warning has been continuously present for the

period specified in this parameter, the frequency
converter trips. Disable the trip delay by setting
the parameter to 60 s = OFF. Thermal frequency
converter monitoring remains active.

Parameters for adjusting the energy optimisation level in

both Variable Torque (VT) and Automatic Energy Optimization (AEO) mode.
Automatic Energy Optimisation is only active if 1-03 Torque
Characteristics, is set for either [2] Auto Energy Optim. CT or
[3] Auto Energy Optim. VT.

14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[0 - 35 s] When the frequency converter detects

an overvoltage in the set time, trip is
effected after the set time.

14-40 VT Level
Range:
66 %*

Function:

[40 - 90
%]

3.13.4 14-3* Current Limit Control

The frequency converter features an integral current limit
controller which is activated when the motor current, and
thus the torque, is higher than the torque limits set in
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
When the current limit is reached during motor operation
or regenerative operation, the frequency converter tries to
reduce torque below the preset torque limits as quickly as
possible without losing control of the motor.
While the current control is active, the frequency converter
can only be stopped by setting a digital input to [2] Coast
inverse or [3] Coast and reset inv. Any signal on terminals
18 to 33 are not active until the frequency converter is no
longer near the current limit.
By using a digital input set to [2] Coast inverse or [3] Coast
and reset inv., the motor does not use the ramp-down
time, since the frequency converter is coasted.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain
Range:
100 %*

Function:
[5 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
current limit controller. Selection of a high
value makes the controller react faster. Too
high a setting leads to controller
instability.

Range:

MG20O802

Function:
[0.002 - 2 s] Controls the current limit control
integration time. Setting it to a
lower value makes it react faster. A
setting too low leads to control
instability.

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Enter the level of motor magnetisation at low
speed. Selection of a low value reduces
energy loss in the motor, but also reduces
load capability.

NOTICE
This parameter is not active when parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation
Range:

Function:

Size
related*

[40 - 75
%]

Enter the minimum allowable magnetisation for AEO. Selection of a low value
reduces energy loss in the motor, but
can also reduce resistance to sudden
load changes.

NOTICE
This parameter is not active when parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency
Range:
10 Hz*

14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time

Size related*

3 3

parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode), a

warning is triggered. When the torque limit

Function:
[5 - 40 Hz] Enter the minimum frequency at which the
Automatic Energy Optimisation (AEO) is to
be active.

NOTICE
This parameter is not active when parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

115

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

14-52 Fan Control

14-43 Motor Cosphi

Range:

Option:

Function:

Size
related*

[0.40 0.95 ]

The Cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set

for optimum AEO performance during
AMA. This parameter should normally not
be altered. However in some situations it
may be necessary to enter a new value to
fine-tune.

3 3

+35 C and at full speed at approximately

+55 C.
[1]

On 50%

[2]

On 75%

[3]

On 100%

[4]

Auto (Low
temp env.)

NOTICE
This parameter is not active when parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

Function:

14-53 Fan Monitor

Option:

Function:
Select which reaction the frequency converter
should take in case a fan fault is detected.

3.13.6 14-5* Environment

These parameters help the frequency converter to operate
under special environmental conditions.
14-50 RFI Filter
Option:
[0]

Off

[1] * On

[0]
[2]

Select [0] Off only when the frequency converter is

supplied from an isolated mains source, i.e. IT mains.
In this mode, the internal RFI capacities (filter
capacitors) between chassis and the Mains RFI Filter
circuit are cut off to avoid damage to the intermediate
circuit and to reduce the ground capacity currents
(according to IEC 61800-3).
Select [1] On to ensure the frequency converter
complies with EMC standards.

Function:
The rectified AC-DC voltage at the frequency
converter's DC-link is associated with voltage ripples.
These ripples can increase in magnitude with
increased load. These ripples are undesirable because
they can generate current and torque ripples. A
compensation method is used to reduce these voltage
ripples at DC-link. In general, DC-link compensation is
recommended for most applications, but care must be
taken when operating in field weakening as it can
generate speed oscillations at the motor shaft. In field
weakening, it is recommended to turn DC-link
compensation off.

[0]

Off

Disables DC-link Compensation.

[1] * On

Enables DC-link Compensation.

14-52 Fan Control

Option:

Option:

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
motor is running.
Select the type of output filter connected.
[0]
*

No
Filter

[1]

SineWave
Filter

[2]

SineWave
Filter
Fixed

If a Danfoss Sine-wave filter is connected to the

output, this option secures that the switching
frequency is fixed above the design frequency of
the filter (to be set in parameter 14-01 Switching
Frequency) in the specific power size. This
prevents the filter from being noisy, overheated
and damaged.

NOTICE
The switching frequency will still be
automatically controlled by the TAS
feature depending on the temperature but
limited to always be above the critical
level for the Danfoss filter.

14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units

Range:

Function:

Size related*

Select the minimum speed of the main fan.

[0] * Auto

Trip

14-55 Output Filter

Function:

14-51 DC Link Compensation

Option:

Disabled

[1] * Warning

Function:
[ 1 - 1 ] Sets the actual number of operating
inverter units.

Select [0] Auto to run the fan only when the

internal temperature of the frequency
converter is in the range +35 C to approximately +55 C. The fan runs at low speed at

116

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.13.7 14-6* Auto Derate

This group contains parameters for derating the frequency
converter in case of high temperature.
14-60 Function at Over Temperature
If either heat sink or control card temperature exceeds a
programmed temperature limit, a warning is activated. If the
temperature increases further, select whether the frequency
converter should trip (trip locked) or derate the output current.

Option:
[0]

Function:
Trip

[1] *

The frequency converter trips (trip locked)

and generates an alarm. Power must be
cycled to reset the alarm, but does not
allow restart of the motor until the heat
sink temperature has dropped below the
alarm limit.

Derate

If the critical temperature is exceeded the

output current is reduced until the
allowable temperature has been reached.

3.13.8 No Trip at Inverter Overload

Select 14-61 Function at Inverter Overload to automatically

reduce pump speed until the output current is below
100% of the rated current (set in parameter 14-62 Inv.
Overload Derate Current).
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload is an alternative to
letting the frequency converter trip.
The frequency converter estimates the load on the power
section by means of an inverter load counter, which causes
a warning at 98% and a reset of the warning at 90%. At
the value 100%, the frequency converter trips and provides
an alarm.
Status for the counter can be read in
parameter 16-35 Inverter Thermal.
If 14-61 Function at Inverter Overload is set to [3] Derate, the
pump speed is reduced when the counter exceeds 98, and
stays reduced until the counter has dropped below 90.7.
If parameter 14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current is set e.g. to
95%, a steady overload causes the pump speed to
fluctuate between values corresponding to 110% and 95%
of rated output current for the frequency converter.
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload

In some pump systems, the frequency converter has not

been sized properly to yield the current needed in all
points of the operational flow-head characteristic. At these
points, the pump needs a current higher than the rated
current of the frequency converter. The frequency
converter can yield 110% of the rated current continuously
for 60 s. If still overloaded, the frequency converter
normally trips (causing the pump to stop by coasting) and
provides an alarm.
130BA260.10

Current
% of rated
110

Is used in case of steady overload beyond the thermal limits

(110% for 60 s).

Option:
[0]

Trip

Function:
The frequency converter trips and provides an
alarm.

[1] * Derate Reduces pump speed to decrease the load on the

power section and allowing this to cool down.

14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current

Range:
95 %*

[50 - 100
%]

105
100
95

Inverter
load
counter
100
98

~
~ 60s

Function:
Defines the desired current level (in % of
rated output current for the frequency
converter) when running with reduced pump
speed after load on the frequency converter
has exceeded the allowable limit (110% for
60 s).

Time

Desired current>100%

3.13.9 14-9* Fault Settings

14-90 Fault Level
Option:

90.7

[0] Off
Warning

Use this parameter to customise fault

levels. Use [0] Off with caution as it
ignores all warnings and alarms for the
selected source.

Time

Warning

Function:

Illustration 3.44 Output Current in Overload Condition

[1] Warning

It may be preferable to run the pump at reduced speed for

a while in case it is not possible to run continuously with
demanded capacity.

MG20O802

[2] Trip
[3] Trip Lock
[4] Trip w. delayed
reset

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

117

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

Failure

Parameter

Alarm

Off

Warning

10 V low

1490.0

24 V low

1490.1

47

1.8 V supply low

1490.2

48

Voltage limit

1490.3

64

Trip

Trip Lock
D
D

Earth Fault

1490.41)

14

Earth Fault 2

1490.51)

45

Torque Limit

1490.6

12

Over Current

1490.7

13

Short Circuit

1490.8

16

Trip with delayed reset

D
D

Heatsink Temp.

1490.9

29

Heatsink Sensor

1490.10

39

Control Card Temp.

1490.11

65

Power Card Temp.

1490.12

69

Heatsink Temp.

1490.133)

244

Heatsink Sensor

1490.143)

245

Power Card Temp.

1490.153

247

Derag Limit Fault

1490.161, 2)

100

Table 3.16 Table for Selection of Choice of Action when Selected Alarm Appears
D = Default setting. x = possible selection.
1) Only these faults are configurable on the FC 202. Due to a software limitation with array parameters, all of the other show in the MCT 10 Setup Software. For the other parameter indices, writing any other value than its current value (i.e. the default value) returns a value out of range
error. Thus, it is not allowed to change the fault level for the non-configurable ones.
2) This parameter has been 1490.6 in all firmware versions up to 1.86.
3) Alarms 244, 245, and 247 are used for multiple power cards.

118

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.14 Parameters 15-** Frequency Converter

Information
Parameter group containing frequency converter
information such as operating data, hardware configuration and software versions.

3.14.1 15-0* Operating Data

NOTICE
The reset is carried out by pressing [OK].
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
Option:

0 h*

No reset of the Running Hours counter is

desired.

[1]

Select [1] Reset counter and press [OK] to reset

the Running Hours counter
(parameter 15-01 Running Hours) and

[0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the frequency

converter has run. The value is saved
when the frequency converter is
turned off.

Range:

Function:
[0 2147483647
kWh]

Registering the power consumption of

the motor as a mean value over one
hour. Reset the counter in

15-03 Power Up's

Range:

Function:

[0 - 2147483647 ] View the number of times the frequency

converter has been powered up.

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter

temperature faults which have occurred.

15-05 Over Volt's

Range:

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter

overvoltages which have occurred.

15-06 Reset kWh Counter

Option:
[0] * Do not reset

Function:
No reset of the kWh counter is desired.

Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to zero

(see parameter 15-02 kWh Counter).

MG20O802

NOTICE

3.14.2 15-1* Data Log Settings

The Data Log enables continuous logging of up to 4 data
sources (15-10 Logging Source) at individual rates
(parameter 15-11 Logging Interval). A trigger event
(parameter 15-12 Trigger Event) and window
(parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger) are used to start
and stop the logging conditionally.
15-10 Logging Source
Option:

15-04 Over Temp's

Range:

Function:

[0 - 2147483647 ] This is a read out parameter only. The

counter shows the numbers of starts and
stops caused by a normal Start/Stop
command and/or when entering/leaving
sleep mode.

This parameter is reset when resetting

parameter 15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter.

parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter.

[1]

Range:

Reset the counter in

Range:

0*

15-08 Number of Starts

View how many hours the motor has run.

15-02 kWh Counter

0*

also parameter 15-01 Running Hours).

0*

parameter 15-07 Reset Running Hours

Counter. The value is saved when the
frequency converter is turned off.

0*

parameter 15-08 Number of Starts to zero (see

Function:

[0 2147483647 h]

0 kWh*

Reset
counter

Function:

15-01 Running Hours

0 h*

3 3

[0] * Do not
reset

15-00 Operating hours

Range:

Function:

Function:

[0] *

None

[1397]

Alert Alarm Word

[1398]

Alert Warning Word

[1399]

Alert Status Word

[1600]

Control Word

[1601]

Reference [Unit]

[1602]

Reference [%]

[1603]

Status Word

[1610]

Power [kW]

[1611]

Power [hp]

[1612]

Motor Voltage

[1613]

Frequency

[1614]

Motor current

[1616]

Torque [Nm]

[1617]

Speed [RPM]

[1618]

Motor Thermal

[1622]

Torque [%]

[1626]

Power Filtered [kW]

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

119

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

15-10 Logging Source

15-12 Trigger Event

Option:

Function:

Option:

Function:

[1627]

Power Filtered [hp]

(parameter 15-14 Samples Before

[1630]

DC Link Voltage

Trigger).

[1632]

Brake Energy /s

[1633]

Brake Energy Average

[1]

True

[1634]

Heatsink Temp.

[2]

Running

[1635]

Inverter Thermal

[3]

In range

[1650]

External Reference

[4]

On reference

[1652]

Feedback[Unit]

[5]

Torque limit

[1654]

Feedback 1 [Unit]

[6]

Current Limit

[1655]

Feedback 2 [Unit]

[7]

Out of current range

[1656]

Feedback 3 [Unit]

[8]

Below I low

[1659]

Adjusted Setpoint

[9]

Above I high

[1660]

Digital Input

[10] Out of speed range

[1662]

Analog Input 53

[11] Below speed low

[1664]

Analog Input 54

[12] Above speed high

[1665]

Analog Output 42 [mA]

[13] Out of feedb. range

[1666]

Digital Output [bin]

[14] Below feedb. low

[1675]

Analog In X30/11

[15] Above feedb. high

[1676]

Analog In X30/12

[16] Thermal warning

[1677]

Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

[17] Mains out of range

[0] * False

[1690]

Alarm Word

[18] Reversing

[1691]

Alarm Word 2

[19] Warning

[1692]

Warning Word

[20] Alarm (trip)

[1693]

Warning Word 2

[21] Alarm (trip lock)

[1694]

Ext. Status Word

[22] Comparator 0

[1695]

Ext. Status Word 2

[23] Comparator 1

[1830]

Analog Input X42/1

[24] Comparator 2

[1831]

Analog Input X42/3

[25] Comparator 3

[1832]

Analog Input X42/5

[26] Logic rule 0

[1833]

Analog Out X42/7 [V]

[27] Logic rule 1

[1834]

Analog Out X42/9 [V]

[28] Logic rule 2

[1835]

Analog Out X42/11 [V]

[29] Logic rule 3

[1850]

Sensorless Readout [unit]

[33] Digital input DI18

[1860]

Digital Input 2

[34] Digital input DI19

[2791]

Cascade Reference

[35] Digital input DI27

[3110]

Bypass Status Word

[36] Digital input DI29

[37] Digital input DI32

15-11 Logging Interval

[38] Digital input DI33

Array [4]

Range:
Size related*

[50] Comparator 4

Function:
[ 0 - 0 ] Enter the interval in ms between each
sampling of the variables to be logged.

[61] Logic rule 5

Option:

Function:
Selects the trigger event. When the
trigger event occurs, a window is
applied to freeze the log. The log
then retains a specified percentage of
samples before the occurrence of the
trigger event

120

[60] Logic rule 4

15-13 Logging Mode

15-12 Trigger Event

Option:

[51] Comparator 5

Function:

[0] * Log always

Select [0] Log always for continuous logging.

[1]

Select [1] Log once on trigger to conditionally

Log once
on trigger

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

start and stop logging using

parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and
parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

15-14 Samples Before Trigger

15-21 Historic Log: Value

Range:

Array [50]

50*

Function:

[0 100 ]

Enter the percentage of all samples before a

trigger event which are to be retained in the

Range:

Function:
Digital output
(not
monitored in
this SW
release)

log. See also parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and

parameter 15-13 Logging Mode.

3.14.3 15-2* Historic Log

1.

Digital input

2.

Digital outputs (not monitored in this SW release)

3.

Warning word

16-92 Warning Word for

description.

4.

Alarm word

5.

Status word

6.

Control word

7.

Extended status word

Alarm word

Status word

Extended
status word

View the event type of the logged events.

Function:
View the value of the logged event.
Interpret the event values according to this
table:
Digtal input

Decimal value. See

16-60 Digital Input for
description after
converting to binary
value.

MG20O802

16-94 Ext. Status Word for

description.

15-22 Historic Log: Time

Array [50]

Range:
0 ms*

Function:

[0 - 2147483647 View the time at which the logged

ms]
event occurred. Time is measured in
ms since frequency converter start. The
max. value corresponds to approx. 24
days which means that the count
restarts at zero after this time period.

Array [50]

Range:
Size related*

Array [50]
[0 2147483647 ]

Decimal value. See

15-23 Historic log: Date and Time

Function:

15-21 Historic Log: Value

0*

Decimal value. See

parameter 16-00 Control
Word for description.

Array [50]

Range:

Decimal value. See

parameter 16-03 Status
Word for description after
converting to binary
value.

15-20 Historic Log: Event

[0 - 255 ]

Decimal value. See

16-90 Alarm Word for
description.

Control word

Events are logged with value, and time stamp in ms. The
time interval between 2 events depends on how often
events occur (maximum once every scan time). Data
logging is continuous, but if an alarm occurs, the log is
saved and the values can be viewed on the display. This
feature is useful, for example when carrying out service
following a trip. View the historic log contained in this
parameter via the serial communication port or via the
display.

0*

16-66 Digital Output [bin]

for description after
converting to binary
value.

Warning word Decimal value. See

View up to 50 logged data items via the array parameters

in this parameter group. For all parameters in the group,
[0] is the most recent data and [49] the oldest data. Data is
logged every time an event occurs (not to be confused
with SLC events). Events in this context are defined as a
change in one of the following areas

Range:

Decimal value. See

Function:
[ 0 - 0 ] Array parameter; Date & Time 0 - 49: This
parameter shows at which time the
logged event occurred.

3.14.4 15-3* Alarm Log

Parameters in this group are array parameters, where up to
10 fault logs can be viewed. [0] is the most recent logged
data, and [9] the oldest. Error codes, values, and time
stamp can be viewed for all logged data.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

121

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code

15-37 Alarm Log: Process Ctrl Unit

Array [10]

Array [10]

Range:
0*

Function:

Option:

[0 - 255 ] View the error code and look up its meaning in

Function:

[10]

1/min

[11]

RPM

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

Array [10]

[21]

l/min

Range:

[22]

l/h

[23]

m/s

[24]

m/min

[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

15-32 Alarm Log: Time

[31]

kg/min

Array [10]

[32]

kg/h

[33]

t/min

[34]

t/h

[40]

m/s

[41]

m/min

[45]

[60]

[70]

mbar

[71]

bar

[72]

Pa

[73]

kPa

[74]

m WG

[75]

mm Hg

[80]

kW

[120]

GPM

[121]

gal/s

[122]

gal/min

[123]

gal/h

[124]

CFM

[125]

ft/s

[126]

ft/min

[127]

ft/h

[130]

lb/s

[131]

lb/min

[132]

lb/h

[140]

ft/s

[141]

ft/min

[145]

ft

[160]

[170]

psi

[171]

lb/in

[172]

in WG

[173]

ft WG

chapter 5 Troubleshooting.

15-31 Alarm Log: Value

0*

Function:

[-32767 - 32767 ] View an extra description of the error.

This parameter is mostly used in
combination with alarm 38 internal fault.

Range:
0 s*

Function:

[0 - 2147483647 s] View the time when the logged event

occurred. Time is measured in seconds
from frequency converter start-up.

15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time

Array [10]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - 0 ] Array parameter; Date & Time 0 - 9: This
parameter shows at which time the
logged event occurred.

15-34 Alarm Log: Setpoint

Array [10]

Range:

Function:

0 ProcessCtrlUnit*

[-999999.999 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

Array parameter, status

value 0 - 9. This
parameter shows the
status of the alarm:
0: Alarm inactive
1: Alarm active

15-35 Alarm Log: Feedback

Array [10]

Range:

Function:

0 ProcessCtrlUnit*

[-999999.999 - 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

15-36 Alarm Log: Current Demand

Array [10]

Range:
0 %*

Function:
[0 - 100 %]

15-37 Alarm Log: Process Ctrl Unit

[174]

in Hg

[180]

HP

Array [10]

Option:

Function:

[0] *

[1]

[5]

PPM

122

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.14.5 15-4* Drive Identification

15-49 SW ID Control Card

Parameters containing read-only information about the

hardware and software configuration of the frequency
converter.
15-40 FC Type
Range:
0*

[0 - 6 ] View the FC type. The read-out is identical to

theVLT AQUA Drive Series power field of the type
code definition, characters 1-6.

[0 - 20 ] View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the

VLT AQUA Drive Series power field of the type
code definition, characters 7-10.

Function:

[0 - 5 ] View the combined SW version (or package

version) consisting of power SW and control SW.

Range:

Function:

Size related*

Function:

Range:
0*

Function:
View the power card ordering number.

Range:
[0 - 20 ]

MG20O802

[0 - 20 ]

Function:
View the installed option type.

View the installed option software version.

Array [8]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 8 ] Shows the ordering number for the installed

options.

15-63 Option Serial No

Array [8]
0*

Function:

Function:

15-62 Option Ordering No

Range:

15-48 LCP Id No
0*

[0 - 30 ]

Range:

15-47 Power Card Ordering No

[0 - 8 ]

Function:
[0 - 16 ] Shows the currently used CSIV
(Costumer Specific Initial Values)
filename.

This read-only parameter group contains information about

the hardware and software configuration of the options
installed in slots A, B, C0 and C1.

0*

[0 - 8 ] View the 8-digit ordering number used for reordering the frequency converter in its original
configuration.

Range:

Function:
View the power card serial number.

Array [8]

View the actual type code string.

15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No

0*

[0 - 19 ]

15-61 Option SW Version

Function:

[0 - 40 ]

Range:

Range:
0*

Array [8]

[0 - 40 ] View the type code string used for re-ordering the

frequency converter in its original configuration.

Range:

0*

Function:
View the frequency converter serial number.

15-60 Option Mounted

15-45 Actual Typecode String

0*

[0 - 10 ]

3.14.6 15-6* Option Ident.

15-44 Ordered Typecode String

0*

Range:

Range:

Function:

15-43 Software Version

0*

View the power card software version number.

15-59 CSIV Filename

[0 - 20 ] View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the

VLT AQUA Drive Series power field of the type
code definition, characters 11-12.

Range:

[0 - 20 ]

Function:

15-53 Power Card Serial Number

15-42 Voltage
0*

View the control card software version number.

15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number

0*

Function:

Range:

[0 - 20 ]

Function:

15-50 SW ID Power Card

0*

15-41 Power Section

0*

0*

Range:

Function:

Range:

Range:

[0 - 18 ]

Function:
View the installed option serial number.

View the LCP ID number.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

123

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.14.7 15-9* Parameter Info

15-70 Option in Slot A

Range:
0*

3 3

Function:

[0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed

in slot A, and a translation of the type code
string. E.g. for type code string 'AX' the translation
is 'No option'.

15-92 Defined Parameters

Array [1000]

Range:
0*

15-71 Slot A Option SW Version

Range:
0*

Function:

15-93 Modified Parameters

[0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed

in slot A.

0*

[0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed

in slot B, and a translation of the type code string.
E.g. for type code string 'BX' the translation is 'No
option'.

Range:

Function:

changed from their default setting. The list ends

with 0. Changes may not be visible until up to
30 s after implementation.

15-98 Drive Identification

Range:

Function:
[0 - 40 ]

15-99 Parameter Metadata

[0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed

in slot B.

Range:

[0 - 9999 ] View a list of the parameters that have been

0*

Array [23]

Range:
0*

15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0

0*

Function:

Function:

15-73 Slot B Option SW Version

0*

Array [1000]

Range:
0*

15-72 Option in Slot B

Range:

Function:

[0 - 9999 ] View a list of all defined parameters in the

frequency converter. The list ends with 0.

Function:

Function:

[0 - 9999 ] This parameter contains data used by the MCT

10 Set-up Software software tool.

[0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed

in slot C, and a translation of the type code string.
E.g. for type code string 'CXXXX' the translation is
'No option'.

15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed

in slot C.

15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 30 ] Shows the typecode string for the options (CXXXX

if no option) and the translation i.e. >No option<.

15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 20 ] Software version for the installed option in option

slot C.

15-80 Fan Running Hours

Range:
0 h*

124

Function:

[0 - 2147483647 h] This parameter shows how many

hours the external fan has run. The
value is saved when the frequency
converter is turned off.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.15 Parameters 16-** Data Readouts

16-10 Power [kW]

3.15.1 16-0* General Status

Range:
0 kW*

16-00 Control Word

Range:
0*

3.15.2 16-1* Motor Status

Function:

Function:

[0 10000
kW]

[0 - 65535 ] View the Control word sent from the frequency

converter via the serial communication port in
hex code.

16-01 Reference [Unit]

Range:

Function:

0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999 backUnit*

999999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

View the present reference

value applied on impulse
or analog basis in the unit
resulting from the configu-

Displays motor power in kW. The value shown

is calculated based on the actual motor
voltage and motor current. The value is
filtered, and therefore approx. 30 ms may pass
from when an input value changes to when
the data readout values change. The
resolution of readout value on fieldbus is in
10 W steps.

16-11 Power [hp]

Range:
0 hp*

Function:

[0 10000 hp]

ration selected in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode (Hz, Nm, or
RPM).

View the motor power in hp. The value

shown is calculated based on the actual
motor voltage and motor current. The value
is filtered, and therefore approximately 30 ms
may pass from when an input value changes
to when the data readout values change.

16-02 Reference [%]

16-12 Motor Voltage

Range:

Range:

0 %*

Function:

[-200 - 200
%]

View the total reference. The total reference

is the sum of digital, analog, preset, bus,
and freeze references, plus catch-up and
slow-down.

0*

0 Hz*

[0 - 65535 ] View the status word sent from the frequency

converter via the serial communication port in
hex code.

Range:

Function:
[0 - 6500 Hz] View the motor frequency, without
resonance dampening.

16-14 Motor current

Range:
0 A*

[0 - 10000
A]

Function:

[-100 - 100
%]

Actual Value. Refer to the VLT Profibus

Range:

0 %*

Function:
[-999999.99 999999.99
CustomReadoutUnit]

View the motor current measured as a mean

value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and thus

16-15 Frequency [%]

Range:

16-09 Custom Readout

Function:

approximately 30 ms may pass from when an

input value changes to when the data
readout values change.

View the 2-byte word sent with the status

word to the bus master reporting the Main
Operating Instructions for further details.

0 CustomReadoutUnit*

16-13 Frequency

Function:

16-05 Main Actual Value [%]

0 %*

[0 - 6000 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value

used for controlling the motor.

Range:

16-03 Status Word

Range:

0 V*

Function:

[-100 100 %]

Function:
View a 2-byte word reporting the actual motor
frequency (without resonance dampening) as a

View the user-defined readouts

percentage (scale 0000-4000 hex) of

as defined in

parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Set

parameter 0-30 Custom Readout

Unit, parameter 0-31 Custom

9-16 PCD Read Configuration index 1 to send it

with the status word instead of the MAV.

Readout Min Value and

parameter 0-32 Custom Readout
Max Value.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

125

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

16-16 Torque [Nm]

16-32 Brake Energy /s

Range:

Range:

0
Nm*

Function:

[-30000
- 30000
Nm]

3 3

View the torque value with sign, applied to

the motor shaft. Linearity is not exact between
110% motor current and torque in relation to
the rated torque. Some motors supply more
than 160% torque. Consequently, the min.
value and the max. value will depend on the
max. motor current as well as the motor used.
The value is filtered, and thus approx. 1.3 s
may pass from when an input changes value
to when the data read-out values change.

0 kW*

Function:
[0 - 10000 kW] View the brake power transmitted to an
external brake resistor, stated as an
instantaneous value.

16-33 Brake Energy Average

Range:
0 kW*

Function:

[0 - 10000
kW]

View the brake power transmitted to an

external brake resistor. The mean power is
calculated on an average level based on
the selected time period within 2-13 Brake
Power Monitoring.

16-17 Speed [RPM]

Range:
0 RPM*

Function:
[-30000 - 30000 RPM]

View the actual motor RPM.

0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100
%]

View the calculated thermal load on the motor.

The cut-out limit is 100%. The basis for
parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.

16-22 Torque [%]

0
%*

Function:

[0 - 255
C]

View the frequency converter heatsink

temperature. The cut-out limit is 90 5 C,
and the motor cuts back in at 60 5 C.

calculation is the ETR function selected in

Range:

Range:
0 C*

16-18 Motor Thermal

Range:

16-34 Heatsink Temp.

16-35 Inverter Thermal

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %]

View the percentage load on the inverter.

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

Function:

[-200 - This is a read out parameter only.

200 %] Shows the actual torque yielded in percentage of
the rated torque, based on the setting of the

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0.01 10000 A]

motor size and rated speed in

parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP] and
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
This is the value monitored by the Broken Belt
Function set in parameter group 22-6*.

Range:
0 kW*

16-37 Inv. Max. Current

Range:
Size
related*

16-26 Power Filtered [kW]

0 hp*

Function:
[0 - 10000 hp]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 100 ] View the state of the event under execution by

the SL controller.

16-39 Control Card Temp.

16-30 DC Link Voltage

Range:

View the inverter maximum current,

which should match the nameplate
data on the connected motor. The
data are used for calculation of
torque, motor protection, etc.

16-38 SL Controller State

3.15.3 16-3* Drive Status

126

[0.01 10000 A]

Function:

Range:

0 V*

Function:

[0 - 10000 kW]

16-27 Power Filtered [hp]

View the inverter nominal current,

which should match the nameplate
data on the connected motor. The
data are used for calculation of
torque, motor protection, etc.

Range:

Function:

[0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered

with a 30 ms time constant.

0 C*

Function:

[0 - 100 C] View the temperature on the control card,

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

stated in C

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

16-40 Logging Buffer Full

16-53 Digi Pot Reference

Option:

Range:

Function:
View whether the logging buffer is full (see parameter

0*

Function:

[-200 - 200 ] View the contribution of the Digital Potentiometer to the actual reference.

group 15-1* Data Log Settings). The logging buffer is

never full when setting parameter 15-13 Logging Mode

Range:

[0] * No
[1]

Function:

0 ProcessCtrlUnit*

Yes

16-49 Current Fault Source

Range:
0*

16-55 Feedback 2 [Unit]

Range:

Function:

0
ProcessCtrlUnit*

[-999999.999 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

see parameter group 20-0*

Feedback.
The value is limited by
settings in 20-13 Minimum
Reference/Feedb. and
20-14 Maximum Reference/
Feedb. Units as set in
20-12 Reference/Feedback
Unit.

Range:

Function:

0 ProcessCtrlUnit*

Function:

[-200 - 200 ] View the total reference, the sum of digital,

analog, preset, bus and freeze references, plus
catch-up and slow-down.

View value of resulting

feedback value after
processing of Feedback 1-3
(see parameter 16-54 Feedback
1 [Unit],

Function:

[0 - 100 %] This parameter returns the Drive Closed Loop

PID controller output value in percent.

16-59 Adjusted Setpoint

Range:

Function:

0 ProcessCtrlUnit*

parameter 16-55 Feedback 2

[Unit] and
parameter 16-56 Feedback 3
[Unit]) in the feedback
manager.

View value of
Feedback 3, see
parameter group

16-58 PID Output [%]

0 %*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

20-0* Feedback.

Range:

16-52 Feedback[Unit]
0
[-999999.999 ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

View value of Feedback 2,

16-56 Feedback 3 [Unit]

16-50 External Reference

Range:

View value of
Feedback 1, see
parameter group
20-0* Feedback.

3.15.4 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.

Range:

[-999999.999 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

Function:

[0 - 8 ] Value indicates source of current fault, including:

short circuit, over current and phase imbalance
(from left): [1-4] Inverter, [5-8] Rectifier, [0] No fault
recorded

After a short circuit alarm (Imax2) or overcurrent alarm (Imax1

or phase imbalance) this contains the power card number
associated with the alarm. It only holds one number so it
indicates the highest priority power card number (master
first). The value persists on power cycle, but if a new alarm
occurs it is overwritten with the new power card number
(even if it a lower priority number). The value is only
cleared when the alarm log is cleared (i.e. a 3-finger reset
would reset the readout to 0).

0*

3 3

16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit]

to [0] Log always.

[-999999.999 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

View value of the

adjusted set point
according to par.
20-29.

3.15.5 16-6* Inputs and Outputs

See parameter group 20-0*

Feedback.

16-60 Digital Input

The value is limited by

settings in 20-13 Minimum
Reference/Feedb. and
20-14 Maximum Reference/
Feedb.. Units as set in

Range:
0*

[0 65535 ]

Function:
View the signal states from the active digital
inputs. Input 18 corresponds for example to bit 5.
'0' = NO signal, '1' = connected signal.

20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

127

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

16-60 Digital Input

16-68 Pulse Input #33 [Hz]

Range:

Range:

3 3

Function:

0*

Function:

[0 - 130000 ] View the actual frequency rate on terminal 33.

Bit 0

Digital input term. 33

Bit 1

Digital input term. 32

Bit 2

Digital input term. 29

16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

Bit 3

Digital input term. 27

Range:

Bit 4

Digital input term. 19

Bit 5

Digital input term. 18

Bit 6

Digital input term. 37

Bit 7

Digital input GP I/O term. X30/2

Bit 8

Digital input GP I/O term. X30/3

Bit 9

Digital input GP I/O term. X30/4

Bit 10-63

Reserved for future terminals

Table 3.17 Digital Input Bits

0*

Function:

[0 - 40000 ] View the actual value on terminal 27 in digital

output mode.

16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of pulses on terminal 29

in digital output mode.

16-71 Relay Output [bin]

Range:

16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting

Option:

0*

Function:

[0 - 65535 ]

View the settings of all relays.

Function:
View the setting of input terminal 53.

[0] *

Current

[1]

Voltage

16-62 Analog Input 53

Range:
0*

Function:

[-20 - 20 ]

View the actual value at input 53.

16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting

Option:

Illustration 3.46 Relay Settings

Function:
View the setting of input terminal 54.

[0] *

Current

[1]

Voltage

16-72 Counter A
Range:
0*

16-64 Analog Input 54

Range:
0*

Function:

[-20 - 20 ]

Function:

[-2147483648
- 2147483647 ]

see parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand.

The value can be reset or changed either via

View the actual value at input 54.

digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital

16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]

Range:
0*

Inputs) or by using an SLC action

Function:

(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).

[0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The

value shown reflects the selection in
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.

Range:
[0 - 15 ]

16-73 Counter B
Range:
0*

16-66 Digital Output [bin]

0*

View the present value of Counter A.

Counters are useful as comparator operands,

Function:

Function:

[-2147483648
- 2147483647 ]

View the present value of Counter B.

Counters are useful as comparator operands
(parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand).
The value can be reset or changed either via

View the binary value of all digital outputs.

digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital

16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz]

Inputs) or by using an SLC action

Range:

(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).

0*

Function:

[0 - 130000 ] View the actual frequency rate on terminal 29.

16-75 Analog In X30/11

Range:
0*

128

Function:

[-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/11 of MCB

101.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.15.7 16-9* Diagnosis Read-Outs

16-76 Analog In X30/12

Range:
0*

Function:

[-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/12 of MCB

101.

16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

Range:
0*

[0 - 30 ]

Function:

NOTICE
When using MCT 10 Set-up Software, the readout
parameters can only be read online, i.e. as the actual
status. This means that the status is not stored in the
MCT 10 Set-up Software file.

3 3

View the actual value at input X30/8 in mA.

16-90 Alarm Word

Range:

3.15.6 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port

0*

Parameters for reporting the BUS references and control

words.
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
Range:
0*

[0 65535 ]

0*

View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received

from the bus master. Interpretation of the control
word depends on the fieldbus option installed
parameter 8-10 Control Profile.
For more information, refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual.

16-92 Warning Word

Range:
0*

[-200 - 200 ] View the 2-byte word sent with the control
word from the bus master to set the reference
value.
For more information, refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual.

0*

Range:
[0 65535 ]

Function:
View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
from the bus master. Interpretation of the
control word depends on the fieldbus option
installed and the control word profile selected
in parameter 8-10 Control Profile.

Range:
[-200 200 ]

[0 - 4294967295 ] Returns the extended status word sent

via the serial communication port in hex
code.

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] Returns the extended warning word 2

sent via the serial communication port in
hex code.

16-96 Maintenance Word

Range:
0*

[0 4294967295 ]

Function:
Readout of the preventive maintenance word.
The bits reflect the status for the
programmed preventive maintenance events
in parameter group 23-1* Maintenance. 13
bits represent combinations of all the
possible items:

16-86 FC Port REF 1

0*

Function:

16-95 Ext. Status Word 2

16-85 FC Port CTW 1

0*

[0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word 2 sent via the

serial communication port in hex code.

Range:

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the extended fieldbus comm. option

status word.
For more information, refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual.

Function:

16-94 Ext. Status Word

0*

Range:

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word sent via the serial

communication port in hex code.

Range:

Function:

16-84 Comm. Option STW

0*

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word 2 sent via the serial

communication port in hex code.

16-93 Warning Word 2

16-82 Fieldbus REF 1

0*

16-91 Alarm Word 2

Range:

Function:

and the control word profile selected in

Range:

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word sent via the serial

communication port in hex code.

Function:
View the 2-byte status word (STW) sent to the
bus master. Interpretation of the status word
depends on the fieldbus option installed and the
control word profile selected in
parameter 8-10 Control Profile.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Bit 0: Motor bearings

Bit 1: Pump bearings
Bit 2: Fan bearings
Bit 3: Valve

129

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

16-96 Maintenance Word

16-96 Maintenance Word

Range:

Range:

Function:

3 3

Position

Bit 4: Pressure transmitter

Position

Bit 5: Flow transmitter

hex-value

Bit 6: Temperature transmitter

Position
2

Table 3.19 Example

Bit 7: Pump seals

Bit 8: Fan belt
Bit 9: Filter
Bit 10: Drive cooling fan
Bit 11: Drive system health check
Bit 12: Warranty

The first digit 0 indicates that no items from

the fourth row requires maintenance
The second digit 4 refers to the third row
indicating that the drive cooling fan requires
maintenance
The third digit 0 indicates that no items from
the second row requires maintenance
The fourth digit A refers to the top row
indicating that the valve and the pump
bearings require maintenance

Bit 13: Maintenance Text 0

Bit 14: Maintenance Text 1
Bit 15: Maintenance Text 2
Bit 16: Maintenance Text 3
Bit 17: Maintenance Text 4
Valve

4
Position

Function:

Pump
seals

Fan
bearings

Pump
bearings

Motor
bearings

Tempe- Flow
rature transtransmi mitter
tter

Pressur
e
transmi
tter

Drive
Drive
system cooling
health
fan
check

Filter

Position

Fan
belt

Warran
ty

1
0hex

1hex

2hex

3hex

4hex

5hex

6hex

7hex

8hex

9hex

Ahex

Bhex

Chex

Dhex

Ehex

Fhex

Table 3.18 Maintenance Word

Example:
The preventive maintenance word shows
040Ahex.

130

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.16 Parameters 18-** Data Readouts 2

18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time

Array [10]

3.16.1 18-0* Maintenance Log

Range:

This group contains the last 10 preventive maintenance

events. Maintenance log 0 is the latest and maintenance
log 9 the oldest.
By selecting one of the logs and pressing [OK], the
maintenance item, action and time of the occurrence can
be found in parameter 18-00 Maintenance Log: Item
parameter 18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time.

parameter 0-72 Time Format.

The frequency converter has no back

up of the clock function and the set
date/time resets to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power
down unless a Real Time Clock
module with back-up is installed. In
parameter 0-79 Clock Fault it is
possible to program for a warning in
case the clock has not been set
properly, e.g. after a power down.
Incorrect setting of the clock affects
the time stamps for the maintenance
events.

18-00 Maintenance Log: Item

Array [10]. Array parameter; Error code 0-9: The meaning of the
error code can be found in the chapter Troubleshooting in the
Design Guide.

Range:

Function:
[0 - 255 ]

3 3

NOTICE

The alarm log key allows access to both alarm log and
maintenance log.

0*

Function:
depends on the setting in

Locate the meaning of the maintenance

item in the description of
parameter 23-10 Maintenance Item.

NOTICE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a
battery back-up of date and time is included.

18-01 Maintenance Log: Action

Array [10]. Array parameter; Error code 0-9: The meaning of the
error code can be found in the chapter Troubleshooting in the
Design Guide

Range:
0*

Function:
[0 - 255 ]

Locate the meaning of the maintenance

item in the description of
parameter 23-11 Maintenance Action

3.16.2 18-3* Analog Readouts

18-30 Analog Input X42/1
Range:
0*

[-20 20 ]

18-02 Maintenance Log: Time

Array [10]. Array parameter; Time 0-9: This parameter shows at
which time the logged event occurred. Time is measured in
seconds since start of the frequency converter.

Range:
0 s*

Function:
[0 - 2147483647 s]

Shows when the logged

event occurred. Time is
measured in seconds
since last power-up.

correspond to the mode selected in

parameter 26-00 Terminal X42/1 Mode.

18-31 Analog Input X42/3

Range:
0*

[-20 20 ]

Function:
Read-out of the value of the signal applied to
terminal X42/3 on the Analog I/O Card (MCB 109).
The units of the value shown in the LCP will
correspond to the mode selected in
parameter 26-01 Terminal X42/3 Mode.

18-03 Maintenance Log: Date and Time

Array [10]

18-32 Analog Input X42/5

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
Read-out of the value of the signal applied to
terminal X42/1 on the Analog I/O Card (MCB 109).
The units of the value shown in the LCP will

Function:
[0 0]

Range:

Shows when the logged event occurred.

NOTICE
This requires that the date and time is
programmed in 0-70 Date and Time.

0*

[-20 20 ]

Function:
Read-out of the value of the signal applied to
terminal X42/5 on the Analog I/O Card (MCB 109).
The units of the value shown in the LCP will
correspond to the mode selected in
parameter 26-02 Terminal X42/5 Mode.

Date format depends on the setting in

0-71 Date Format, while the time format

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

131

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.16.3 18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2

18-33 Analog Out X42/7 [V]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 30 ] Read-out of the value of the signal applied to

terminal X42/7 on the Analog I/O Card (MCB 109).
The value shown reflects the selection in

3 3

18-34 Analog Out X42/9 [V]

0*

Range:
0*

parameter 26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output.

Range:

18-60 Digital Input 2

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the signal states from the active digital

inputs on the MCO 102 (Advanced Cascade
Controller): Counting from right to left the
positions in the binary are: DI7...DI1 pos.
2 ...pos. 8.

Function:

[0 - 30 ] Read-out of the value of the signal applied to

terminal X42/9 on the Analog I/O Card (MCB 109).
The value shown reflects the selection in
parameter 26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output.

18-35 Analog Out X42/11 [V]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 30 ] Read-out of the value of the signal applied to

terminal X42/11 on the Analog I/O Card (MCB
109).
The value shown reflects the selection in
parameter 26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output.

18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA]

Range:
0*

Function:

[-20 - 20 ] View the actual current measured at input X48/2

(MCB 114).

18-37 Temp. Input X48/4

Range:
0*

[-500 500 ]

Function:
View the actual temperature measured at input
X48/4 (MCB 114). The temperature unit is based
on the selection in parameter 35-00 Term. X48/4
Temperature Unit.

18-38 Temp. Input X48/7

Range:
0*

[-500 500 ]

Function:
View the actual temperature measured at input
X48/7 (MCB 114). The temperature unit is based
on the selection in parameter 35-02 Term. X48/7
Temperature Unit.

18-39 Temp. Input X48/10

Range:
0*

[-500 500 ]

Function:
View the actual temperature measured at input
X48/10 (MCB 114). The temperature unit is
based on the selection in parameter 35-04 Term.
X48/10 Temperature Unit.

18-50 Sensorless Readout [unit]

Range:
0 SensorlessUnit*

132

Function:
[-999999.999 - 999999.999
SensorlessUnit]

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.17 Parameters 20-** FC Closed Loop

This parameter group is used for configuring the closed
loop PID Controller, that controls the output frequency of
the frequency converter.

Loop Mode or Open Loop Mode, the feedback signals can

be shown on the frequency converters display. It can also
be used to control a frequency converter analog output,
and be transmitted over various serial communication
protocols.

3 3

3.17.1 20-0* Feedback

0%
Setpoint 1

Setpoint to
Reference
Handling

130BA354.12

This parameter group is used to configure the feedback

signal for the frequency converters closed loop PID
Controller. Whether the frequency converter is in Closed

P 20-21
Setpoint 2
0%

P 20-22
Multi setpoint min.
Multi setpoint max.

Setpoint 3
P 20-23

0%

Feedback
Feedback 1 Source
P 20-00
Feedback 2 Source
P 20-03
Feedback 3 Source
P 20-06

Feedback conv.
P 20-01

Feedback 1

Feedback conv.
P 20-04

Feedback 2

Feedback conv.
P 20-07

Feedback 3

Feedback 1 only
Feedback 2 only
Feedback 3 only
Sum (1+2+3)
Difference (1-2)
Average (1+2+3)
Minimum (1|2|3)
Maximum (1|2|3)

0%

Feedback Function
P 20-20

Illustration 3.47 Input Signals in Closed Loop PID Controller

20-00 Feedback 1 Source

20-00 Feedback 1 Source

Option:

Option:

Function:
Up to 3 different feedback signals
can be used to provide the feedback
signal for the frequency converters
PID Controller.
This parameter defines which input
is used as the source of the first
feedback signal.
Analog input X30/11 and analog
input X30/12 refer to inputs on the
optional General Purpose I/O board.

[0]

No function

[1]

Analog Input 53

[2] *

Analog Input 54

[3]

Pulse input 29

[4]

Pulse input 33

[7]

Analog Input X30/11

MG20O802

[8]

Analog Input X30/12

[9]

Analog Input X42/1

[10]

Analog Input X42/3

[11]

Analog Input X42/5

[15]

Analog Input X48/2

Function:

[100] Bus Feedback 1

[101] Bus Feedback 2
[102] Bus feedback 3
[104] Sensorless Flow

Requires set-up by MCT 10 Set-up

Software with sensorless specific
plug-in.

[105] Sensorless Pressure

Requires set-up by MCT 10 Set-up

Software with sensorless specific
plug-in.

[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

133

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

20-00 Feedback 1 Source

20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit

Option:

Option:

Function:

[201] Ext. Closed Loop 2

[80]

[202] Ext. Closed Loop 3

[120] GPM

Function:

kW

[121] gal/s

NOTICE
If a feedback is not used, its source must be set to [0] No
Function. Parameter 20-20 Feedback Function determines
how the PID controller uses the 3 possible feedbacks.

[122] gal/min
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min

20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion

[127] ft/h

Option:

[130] lb/s

Function:

[131] lb/min

[0] * Linear
[1]

Square
root

This parameter allows a conversion function to

be applied to Feedback 1.

[132] lb/h

[0] Linear has no effect on the feedback.

[141] ft/min

[1] Square root is commonly used when a

pressure sensor is used to provide flow
feedback ( flow pressure ).

[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in

20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit

Option:

[140] ft/s

[172] in WG

Function:

[173] ft WG

This parameter determines the unit that is used

for this feedback source, before applying the
feedback conversion of 20-01 Feedback 1
Conversion. This unit is not used by the PID
Controller.

[174] in Hg
[180] HP

NOTICE
This parameter is only available when using pressure to
temperature feedback conversion.
If the choice [0] Linear is selected in 20-01 Feedback 1
Conversion, the setting of any choice in
parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit does not matter
as a conversion is one-to-one.

[0]

[1]

[5]

PPM

[10]

1/min

[11]

RPM

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

[21]

l/min

[22]

l/h

See parameter 20-00 Feedback 1

[23]

m/s

Source for details.

[24]

m/min

[0] *

No function

[25]

m/h

[1]

Analog Input 53

[30]

kg/s

[2]

Analog Input 54

[31]

kg/min

[3]

Pulse input 29

[32]

kg/h

[4]

Pulse input 33

[33]

t/min

[7]

Analog Input X30/11

[34]

t/h

[8]

Analog Input X30/12

[40]

m/s

[9]

Analog Input X42/1

[41]

m/min

[10]

Analog Input X42/3

[45]

[11]

Analog Input X42/5

[60]

[15]

Analog Input X48/2

[70]

mbar

[100] Bus Feedback 1

[71]

bar

[101] Bus Feedback 2

[72]

Pa

[102] Bus feedback 3

[73]

kPa

[104] Sensorless Flow

[74]

m WG

[105] Sensorless Pressure

[75]

mm Hg

[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1

134

20-03 Feedback 2 Source

Option:

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Function:

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

20-03 Feedback 2 Source

20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit

Option:

See parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.

Function:

[201] Ext. Closed Loop 2

Option:

[202] Ext. Closed Loop 3

20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion

Option:

Function:
See 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for details.

Function:

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

[21]

l/min

[22]

l/h

[23]

m/s

[0] * Linear

[24]

m/min

[1]

[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

[31]

kg/min

[32]

kg/h

[33]

t/min

[34]

t/h

[40]

m/s

[41]

m/min

[45]

[60]

[70]

mbar
bar

Square root

20-05 Feedback 2 Source Unit

See parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.

Option:
[0] *

Function:
Linear

20-06 Feedback 3 Source

Option:

Function:
See parameter 20-00 Feedback 1
Source for details.

[0] *

No function

[71]

[1]

Analog Input 53

[72]

Pa

[2]

Analog Input 54

[73]

kPa

[3]

Pulse input 29

[74]

m WG

[4]

Pulse input 33

[75]

mm Hg

[7]

Analog Input X30/11

[80]

kW

[8]

Analog Input X30/12

[120]

GPM

[9]

Analog Input X42/1

[121]

gal/s

[10]

Analog Input X42/3

[122]

gal/min

[11]

Analog Input X42/5

[123]

gal/h

[15]

Analog Input X48/2

[124]

CFM

[100] Bus Feedback 1

[125]

ft/s

[101] Bus Feedback 2

[126]

ft/min

[102] Bus feedback 3

[127]

ft/h

[104] Sensorless Flow

[130]

lb/s

[105] Sensorless Pressure

[131]

lb/min

[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1

[132]

lb/h

[201] Ext. Closed Loop 2

[140]

ft/s

[202] Ext. Closed Loop 3

[141]

ft/min

[145]

ft

[160]

[170]

psi

[171]

lb/in

[0] * Linear

[172]

in WG

[1]

[173]

ft WG

[174]

in Hg

[180]

HP

20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion

Option:

Function:
See 20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for details.

Square root

20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit

See parameter 20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.

Option:

Function:

[0]

[1]

[5]

PPM

[10]

1/min

[11]

RPM

MG20O802

3 3

20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option:
[0]

[1]

[5]

PPM

[10]

1/min

Function:

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

135

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.17.2 20-2* Feedback & Setpoint

20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option:
[11]

RPM

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

[21]

l/min

[22]

l/h

[23]

m/s

[24]

m/min

[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

[31]

kg/min

[32]

kg/h

[33]

t/min

[34]

t/h

[40]

m/s

[41]

m/min

[45]

[60]

[70]

mbar

[71]

bar

[72]

Pa

[73]

kPa

[74]

m WG

[75]

mm Hg

[80]

kW

Function:

This parameter group is used to determine how the

frequency converters PID Controller uses the 3 possible
feedback signals to control the output frequency of the
frequency converter. This group is also used to store the 3
internal setpoint references.
20-20 Feedback Function
This parameter determines how the 3 possible feedbacks
are used to control the output frequency of the frequency
converter.

NOTICE
Any unused feedback must be set to No function in its
Feedback Source parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source or
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
The feedback resulting from the function selected in
parameter 20-20 Feedback Function is used by the PID
Controller to control the output frequency of the
frequency converter. This feedback can also be shown on
the frequency converters display, be used to control a
frequency converter's analog output, and be transmitted
over various serial communication protocols.
The frequency converter can be configured to handle
multi-zone applications. 2 different multi-zone applications
are supported:

[120] GPM
[121] gal/s

[122] gal/min
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h

Example 1 Multi-zone, single setpoint

In an office building, a VAV (variable air volume) water
system must ensure a minimum pressure at selected VAV
boxes. Due to the varying pressure losses in each duct, the
pressure at each VAV box cannot be assumed to be the
same. The minimum pressure required is the same for all
VAV boxes. This control method can be set up by setting
Feedback Function, parameter 20-20 Feedback Function to
option [3] Minimum and entering the desired pressure in
parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1. The PID Controller increases the
speed of the fan if any one feedback is below the setpoint
and decrease the speed of the fan if all feedbacks are
above the setpoint.

[130] lb/s
[131] lb/min
[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in WG
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg

136

Multi-zone, multi setpoint

The difference between the 2 is illustrated by the following

examples:

[125] ft/s

[180] HP

Multi-zone, single setpoint

This parameter determines the unit that is used

for the setpoint reference and feedback that the
PID Controller uses for controlling the output
frequency of the frequency converter.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

130BA353.10

Parameter Description

P
Damper

Supply

Zone 1

Damper

3 3

VAV
Box

air fan

Zone 2
VAV
Box

Cooling/
heating coil
P

Zone 3
Damper

VAV
Box

Return air fan

Illustration 3.48 Multi-zone Application Scheme

Example 2 Multi-zone, multi setpoint

The previous example can be used to illustrate the use of
multi-zone, multi-setpoint control. If the zones require
different pressures for each VAV box, each setpoint may be
specified in parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1,
parameter 20-22 Setpoint 2 and 20-23 Setpoint 3. By
selecting [5] Multi setpoint minimum in
parameter 20-20 Feedback Function, the PID Controller
increases the speed of the fan if any one of the feedbacks
is below its setpoint and decrease the speed of the fan if
all feedbacks are above their individual setpoints.

20-20 Feedback Function

Option:

group 3-1* References) is used as the PID

Controllers setpoint reference.
[4]

Maximum

[0]

Sum

The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other references

that are enabled (see parameter group 3-1*
References) is used as the PID Controllers
setpoint reference.
[1]

Difference

parameter group 3-1* References) is used as the

PID Controllers setpoint reference.

Function:
Sets up the PID Controller to use the sum of
Feedback 1, Feedback 2 and Feedback 3 as the
feedback.

Sets up the PID Controller to use the difference

between Feedback 1 and Feedback 2 as the
feedback. Feedback 3 is not used with this
selection. Only setpoint 1 is used. The sum of
Setpoint 1 and any other references that are

Sets up the PID Controller to compare Feedback

1, Feedback 2 and Feedback 3 and use the
highest value as the feedback.
Only Setpoint 1 is used. The sum of Setpoint 1
and any other references that are enabled (see

20-20 Feedback Function

Option:

Function:
used. The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other
references that are enabled (see parameter

[5]

Multi
Setpoint
Min

Sets up the PID Controller to calculate the

difference between Feedback 1 and Setpoint 1,
Feedback 2 and Setpoint 2, and Feedback 3 and
Setpoint 3. It uses the feedback/setpoint pair in
which the feedback is the farthest below its
corresponding setpoint reference. If all feedback
signals are above their corresponding setpoints,
the PID Controller uses the feedback/setpoint
pair in which the difference between the
feedback and setpoint is the least.

enabled (see parameter group 3-1* References) is

used as the PID Controllers setpoint reference.
[2]

Average

Sets up the PID Controller to use the average of

Feedback 1, Feedback 2 and Feedback 3 as the
feedback.

[3]

Minimum

Sets up the PID Controller to compare Feedback

1, Feedback 2 and Feedback 3 and use the
lowest value as the feedback. Only setpoint 1 is

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

137

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

20-20 Feedback Function

20-21 Setpoint 1

Option:

Range:

Function:

NOTICE
If only 2 feedback signals are used, the
feedback that is not to be used must be
set to No Function in
parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note
that each setpoint reference is the sum of
its respective parameter value and any
other references that are enabled (see
parameter group 3-1* References).

3 3

[6]

Multi
Setpoint
Max

Sets up the PID Controller to calculate the

difference between Feedback 1 and Setpoint 1,
Feedback 2 and Setpoint 2, and Feedback 3 and
Setpoint 3. It uses the feedback/setpoint pair in
which the feedback is farthest above its
corresponding setpoint reference. If all feedback
signals are below their corresponding setpoints,
the PID Controller uses the feedback/setpoint
pair in which the difference between the
feedback and the setpoint reference is the least.

NOTICE
The setpoint reference
entered here is added to
any other references that
are enabled (see
parameter group 3-1*
References).

20-22 Setpoint 2
Range:
0
[-999999.999 ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

Function:
Setpoint 2 is used in closed
loop mode to enter a
setpoint reference that may
be used by the frequency
converters PID controller. See
the description of Feedback
Function,
parameter 20-20 Feedback
Function.

NOTICE
The setpoint reference
entered here is added to
any other references that
are enabled (see
parameter group 3-1*
References).

NOTICE
If only 2 feedback signals are used, the
feedback that is not to be used must be
set to No Function in
parameter 20-00 Feedback 1 Source,
parameter 20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or
parameter 20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note
that each setpoint reference is the sum of
its respective parameter value
(parameter 20-21 Setpoint 1,
parameter 20-22 Setpoint 2 and
20-23 Setpoint 3) and any other
references that are enabled (see
parameter group 3-1* References).

Function:

20-23 Setpoint 3
Range:
0
[-999999.999 ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

Function:
Setpoint 3 is used in Closed
Loop Mode to enter a
setpoint reference that may
be used by the frequency
converters PID Controller. See
the description of

20-21 Setpoint 1
Range:
0
[-999999.999 ProcessCtrlUnit* 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

Function:
Setpoint 1 is used in closed
loop mode to enter a
setpoint reference that is
used by the frequency
converters PID controller. See

parameter 20-20 Feedback

Function.

NOTICE
If the min and max
references are altered, a
new PI - Autotune may
be needed.

the description of
parameter 20-20 Feedback
Function.

138

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

20-23 Setpoint 3
Range:

Function:

NOTICE
The setpoint reference
entered here is added to
any other references that
are enabled (see
parameter group 3-1*
References).

20-60 Sensorless Unit

Option:

Function:

[20]

l/s

[23]

m/s

[24]

m/min

[25]

m/h

[71]

bar

[73]

kPa

[74]

m WG

[75]

mm Hg

[120]

GPM

[121]

gal/s

[122]

gal/min

[123]

gal/h

[124]

CFM

[125]

ft/s

[126]

ft/min

[170]

psi

[171]

lb/in

[172]

in WG

[173]

ft WG

[174]

in Hg

Range:

The fan/pump is started by pressing [Auto On] and

applying a start signal. The speed is adjusted manually by
pressing [] or [] to a level where the feedback is around
the system set-point.

NOTICE
It is not possible to run the motor at maximum or
minimum speed, when manually adjusting the motor
speed due to the need of giving the motor a step in the
speed during auto-tuning.
PID auto-tuning functions by introducing step changes
whilst operating at a steady state and then monitoring the
feedback. From the feedback response, the required values
for parameter 20-93 PID Proportional Gain and
parameter 20-94 PID Integral Time are calculated.
Parameter 20-95 PID Differentiation Time is set to value 0
(zero). Parameter 20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control is
determined during tuning process.

20-69 Sensorless Information

0*

Enabling parameter 20-79 PID Autotuning, puts the

frequency converter into auto-tuning mode. The LCP then
directs the user with on-screen instructions.

Function:
[0 - 25 ]

3.17.3 20-7* PID Autotuning

The frequency converter PID Closed Loop controller
(parameter group 20-**, FC Drive Closed Loop) can be autotuned, simplifying and saving time during commissioning,
whilst ensuring accurate PID control adjustment. To use
auto-tuning it is necessary for the frequency converter to
be configured for closed loop in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

These calculated values are presented in the LCP and the

user can decide whether to accept or reject them. Once
accepted, the values are written to the relevant parameters
and auto-tuning mode is disabled in parameter 20-79 PID
Autotuning. Depending on the system being controlled, the
time required to carry out auto-tuning could be several
minutes.
It is advised to set the ramp times in parameter 3-41 Ramp
1 Ramp Up Time, parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
or parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time according to the
load inertia before carrying out PID autotuning. If PID
autotuning is carried out with slow ramp times, the autotuned parameters typically results in very slow control.
Excessive feedback sensor noise should be removed using
the input filter (parameter groups 6-** Analog In/Out, 5-5*
Pulse Input and 26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109, Terminal
53/54 Filter Time Constant/Pulse Filter Time Constant
#29/33) before activating PID autotuning. To obtain the
most accurate controller parameters, it is advised to carry
out PID autotuning, when the application is running in
typical operation, i.e. with a typical load.

A Graphical Local Control Panel (LCP) must be used in

order to react on messages during the auto-tuning
sequence.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

139

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

20-70 Closed Loop Type

20-74 Maximum Feedback Level

Option:

Range:

Function:
This parameter defines the application
response. The default mode should be
sufficient for most applications. If the
application response speed is known, it
can be selected here. This decreases the
time needed for carrying out PID
autotuning. The setting has no impact
on the value of the tuned parameters
and is used only for the autotuning
sequence.

3 3

[0] * Auto
[1]

Fast Pressure

[2]

Slow Pressure

[3]

Fast
Temperature

[4]

Slow
Temperature

Function:

999999
ProcessCtrlUnit*

[ par. 20-73 999999.999

ProcessCtrlUnit]

defined in 20-12 Reference/

Feedback Unit. If the level
rises above
parameter 20-74 Maximum
Feedback Level, autotuning is
aborted and an error
message appears in the LCP.

20-79 PID Autotuning

Option:

Function:
This parameter starts the PID autotuning
sequence. Once the autotuning has successfully
completed and the settings have been accepted
or rejected by the user, by pressing [OK] or
[Cancel] at the end of tuning, this parameter is

20-71 PID Performance

Option:

reset to [0] Disabled.

Function:

[0] * Disabled

[0] * Normal Normal setting of this parameter is suitable for

pressure control in fan systems.
[1]

Fast

Fast setting would generally be used in pumping

systems, where a faster control response is
desirable.

20-72 PID Output Change

Range:
0.10*

Function:

[0.01 - This parameter sets the magnitude of step

0.50 ]
change during autotuning. The value is a
percentage of full speed. I.e. if maximum output
frequency in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM]/parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit
[Hz] is set to 50 Hz, 0.10 is 10% of 50 Hz, which is
5 Hz. This parameter should be set to a value
resulting in feedback changes of between 10%
and 20% for best tuning accuracy.

[1]

Range:

Function:
[ -999999.999 par. 20-74
ProcessCtrlUnit]

Enabled

3.17.4 20-8* PID Basic Settings

This parameter group is used to configure the basic
operation of the frequency converters PID Controller,
including how it responds to a feedback that is above or
below the setpoint, the speed at which it first starts
functioning, and when it indicates that the system has
reached the setpoint.
20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
Option:

Function:

[0] * Normal The frequency converters output frequency

decreases when the feedback is greater than the
setpoint reference. This is common for pressurecontrolled supply fan and pump applications.
[1]

20-73 Minimum Feedback Level

-999999
ProcessCtrlUnit*

The maximum allowable

feedback level should be
entered here in user units as

Inverse The frequency converters output frequency

increases when the feedback is greater than the
setpoint reference.

The minimum allowable

feedback level should be
entered here in user units as
defined in 20-12 Reference/
Feedback Unit. If the level falls
below
parameter 20-73 Minimum
Feedback Level, autotuning is
aborted and an error
message appears in the LCP.

140

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.17.5 20-9* PID Controller

20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 par. 4-13
RPM]

When the frequency converter is first

started, it initially ramps up to this output
speed in open loop mode, following the
active ramp up time. When the output
speed programmed is reached, the
frequency converter automatically switches
to closed loop mode and the PID
Controller begins to function. This is useful
in applications that require quick
acceleration to a minimum speed at startup.

Use these parameters to adjust the PID controller

manually. By adjusting the PID Controller parameters the
control performance may be improved. See the
Introduction to VLT AQUA Drive in the VLT AQUA Drive FC
202 Design Guide for guidelines on adjusting the PID
Controller parameters.
20-91 PID Anti Windup
Option:
[0]

Off

NOTICE
This parameter is only visible if
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is
set to [0] RPM.

[1] * On

20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 When the frequency converter is first
par.
started, it initially ramps up to this output
4-14 Hz] frequency in open loop mode, following
the active ramp up time. When the output
frequency programmed here is reached, the
frequency converter will automatically
switch to closed loop mode and the PID
Controller begins to function. This is useful
in applications that require quick
acceleration to a minimum speed at startup.

NOTICE
This parameter is only visible if
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit is
set to [1] Hz.

5 %*

[0 200 %]

The integrator continues to change value also after

output has reached one of the extremes. This can
afterwards cause a delay of change of the output of
the controller.
The integrator is locked if the output of the built-in
PID controller has reached one of the extremes (min
or max value) and therefore is not able to add further
change to the value of the process parameter
controlled. This allows the controller to respond more
quickly when it again can control the system.

20-93 PID Proportional Gain

Range:
2*

Function:

[0 - 10 ] The proportional gain indicates the number of

times the error between the set point and the
feedback signal is to be applied.

If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference the PID controller tries
to change the output speed equal to what is set in
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz], but in practice
of course limited by this setting.
The proportional band (error causing output to change
from 0-100%) can be calculated by means of the formula
1
Max Reference
Proportional Gain

NOTICE

20-84 On Reference Bandwidth

Range:

Function:

Function:
When the difference between the feedback and
the setpoint reference is less than the value of
this parameter, the frequency converters display
shows Run on Reference. This status can be
communicated externally by programming the

Always set the desired value for

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference before setting the
values for the PID controller in parameter group 20-9*
PID Controller.

function of a digital output for [8] Run on

Reference/No Warning. In addition, for serial
communications, the On Reference status bit of
the frequency converters status word is high (1).
The On Reference Bandwidth is calculated as a
percentage of the setpoint reference.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

141

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

20-94 PID Integral Time

Range:
8 s*

[0.01 10000 s]

3 3

Function:
The integrator accumulates a contribution to the
output from the PID controller as long as there
is a deviation between the reference/setpoint
and feedback signals. The contribution is proportional to the size of the deviation. This ensures
that the deviation (error) approaches zero.
Quick response on any deviation is obtained
when the integral time is set to a low value.
Setting it too low, however, may cause the
control to become unstable.
The value set is the time needed for the
integrator to add the same contribution as the
proportional for a certain deviation.
If the value is set to 10,000, the controller acts as
a pure proportional controller with a P-band
based on the value set in parameter 20-93 PID
Proportional Gain. When no deviation is present,
the output from the proportional controller is 0.

20-95 PID Differentiation Time

Range:
0 s*

Function:

[0 - 10 The differentiator monitors the rate of change of

s]
the feedback. If the feedback is changing quickly,
it adjusts the output of the PID controller to
reduce the rate of change of the feedback. Quick
PID controller response is obtained when this
value is large. However, if too large of a value is
used, the frequency converters output frequency
may become unstable.
Differentiation time is useful in situations where
extremely fast frequency converter response and
precise speed control are required. It can be
difficult to adjust this for proper system control.
Differentiation time is not commonly used in
water/wastewater applications. Therefore, it is
generally best to leave this parameter at 0 or OFF.

20-96 PID Diff. Gain Limit

Range:
5*

[1 50 ]

Function:
The differential function of a PID controller
responds to the rate of change of the feedback. As
a result, an abrupt change in the feedback can
cause the differential function to make a very large
change in the PID controllers output. This
parameter limits the maximum effect that the PID
controllers differential function can produce. A
smaller value reduces the maximum effect of the
PID Controllers differential function.
This parameter is only active when
parameter 20-95 PID Differentiation Time is not set
to OFF (0 s).

142

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.18 Parameters 21-** Extended Closed

Loop
The FC 202 offers 3 extended closed loop PID controllers
in addition to the PID controller. These can be configured
independently to control either external actuators (valves,
dampers etc.) or be used together with the internal PID
controller to improve the dynamic responses to setpoint
changes or load disturbances.
The extended closed loop PID controllers may be interconnected or connected to the PID closed loop controller to
form a dual loop configuration.
To control a modulating device (e.g. a valve motor), this
device must be a positioning servo motor with built-in
electronics accepting either a 0-10 V (signal from Analog
I/O card MCB 109) or a 0/4-20 mA (signal from Control
Card and/or General Purpose I/O card MCB 101) control
signal.
The output function can be programmed in the following
parameters:

Control Card, terminal 42: Parameter 6-50 Terminal

42 Output (setting [113]...[115] or [149]...[151], Ext.
Closed Loop 1/2/3

General Purpose I/O card MCB 101, terminal

X30/8: 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output, (setting [113]...
[115] or [149]...[151], Ext. Closed Loop 1/2/3

Analog I/O card MCB 109, terminal X42/7...11:

Parameter 26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output,
parameter 26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output,
parameter 26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output (setting
[113]...[115], Ext. Closed Loop 1/2/3

PID autotuning functions by introducing step changes and

then monitoring the feedback. From the feedback
response, the required values for PID Proportional Gain,
parameter 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain for EXT CL 1,
parameter 21-41 Ext. 2 Proportional Gain for EXT CL 2 and
parameter 21-61 Ext. 3 Proportional Gain for EXT CL 3 and
Integral Time, parameter 21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time for EXT
CL 1, parameter 21-42 Ext. 2 Integral Time for EXT CL 2 and
parameter 21-62 Ext. 3 Integral Time for EXT CL 3 are
calculated. PID Differentiation Time, parameter 21-23 Ext. 1
Differentation Time for EXT CL 1, parameter 21-43 Ext. 2
Differentation Time for EXT CL 2 and parameter 21-63 Ext. 3
Differentation Time for EXT CL 3 are set to value 0 (zero).
Normal/Inverse, parameter 21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse
Control for EXT CL 1, parameter 21-40 Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse
Control for EXT CL 2 and parameter 21-60 Ext. 3 Normal/
Inverse Control for EXT CL 3 are determined during the
tuning process.
These calculated values are presented on the LCP and the
user can decide whether to accept or reject them. Once
accepted, the values are written to the relevant parameters
and PID autotuning mode is disabled in
parameter 21-09 PID Auto Tuning. Depending on the system
being controlled, the time required to carry out PID
autotuning could be several minutes.
Excessive feedback sensor noise should be removed using
the input filter (parameter groups 5-5* Pulse Input, 6-**
Analog In/Out, and 26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109,
Terminal 53/54 Filter Time Constant/Pulse Filter Time
Constant #29/33) before activating PID autotuning.
21-00 Closed Loop Type
Option:

General Purpose I/O card and Analog I/O card are optional
cards.

3.18.1 21-0* Extended CL Autotuning

The extended PID closed loop PID controllers can each be
auto-tuned, simplifying and saving time during commissioning, whilst ensuring accurate PID control adjustment.
To use PID autotuning it is necessary for the relevant
extended PID controller to have been configured for the
application.
A graphical LCP must be used to react on messages during
the autotuning sequence.
Enabling autotuning, parameter 21-09 PID Auto Tuning puts
the relevant PID controller into PID autotuning mode. The
LCP then directs the user with on-screen instructions.

MG20O802

Function:
This parameter defines the application
response. The default mode should be
sufficient for most applications. If the
relative application speed is known, it
can be selected here. This decreases the
time needed for carrying out PID
Autotuning. The setting has no impact
on the value of the tuned parameters
and is used only for the PID auto-tuning
sequence.

[0] * Auto
[1]

Fast Pressure

[2]

Slow Pressure

[3]

Fast
Temperature

[4]

Slow
Temperature

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

143

3 3

Programming Guide

21-01 PID Performance

21-09 PID Auto Tuning

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:
end of tuning, this parameter is reset to

[0] * Normal Normal setting of this parameter is suitable for

pressure control in fan systems.
[1]

Fast

Fast setting would generally be used in pumping

systems, where a faster control response is
desirable.

[0] Disabled.
[0] * Disabled
[1]

Enabled Ext CL1

PID

[2]

Enabled Ext CL 2
PID

[3]

Enabled Ext CL 3
PID

21-02 PID Output Change

Range:
0.10*

Function:

[0.01 0.50 ]

This parameter sets the magnitude of step

change during autotuning. The value is a
percentage of full operating range. I.e. if
maximum analog output voltage is set to 10 V,
0.10 is 10% of 10 V, which is 1 V. This
parameter should be set to a value resulting in
feedback changes of between 10% and 20% for
best tuning accuracy.

21-03 Minimum Feedback Level

Range:
-999999*

3.18.2 21-1* Closed Loop 1 Ref/Feedback

130BA355.11

3 3

Parameter Description

FC

External
Reference
P 21-13
Set
point

Function:
[ -999999.999 Enter the minimum allowable
- par. 21-04 ]
feedback level in user units as defined

P 21-15

in parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback

Feedback

Unit for EXT CL 1, parameter 21-30 Ext.

P 21-14

Ext.
Closed
Loop
controller
1

Output
Signal
P 6-50

2 Ref./Feedback Unit for EXT CL 2 or

parameter 21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback
Unit for EXT CL 3. If the level falls

MCB101

below parameter 21-03 Minimum

Feedback Level, PID autotuning is
aborted and an error message appears
on the LCP.

Output
Signal
P 6-60

Illustration 3.49 Closed Loop 1 Ref/Feedback

21-04 Maximum Feedback Level

Range:
999999*

21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit

Function:
[ par. 21-03
999999.999 ]

Enter the maximum allowable feedback

Option:

level in user units as defined in

parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit
for EXT CL 1, parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./

[0] *

[1]

[5]

PPM

[10]

1/min

[11]

RPM

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

[21]

l/min

21-09 PID Auto Tuning

[22]

l/h

Option:

[23]

m/s

[24]

m/min

[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

[31]

kg/min

[32]

kg/h

[33]

t/min

[34]

t/h

Feedback Unit for EXT CL 2 or

parameter 21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit
for EXT CL 3. If the level rises above
parameter 21-04 Maximum Feedback
Level, PID autotuning is aborted and an
error message appears on the LCP.

Function:
This parameter enables selection of the
Extended PID controller to be autotuned
and starts the PID autotuning for that
controller. Once the autotuning has
successfully completed and the settings
have been accepted or rejected by the
user, by pressing [OK] or [Cancel] at the

144

Function:
Select the unit for the reference and feedback.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

NOTICE

21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit

Option:

Function:

Always set the desired value for parameter 21-12 Ext. 1

Maximum Reference before setting the values for the PID
controller in parameter group 20-9* PID Controller.

[40]

m/s

[41]

m/min

[45]

[60]

21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source

[70]

mbar

[71]

bar

Option:

[72]

Pa

[73]

kPa

[74]

m WG

[75]

mm Hg

[80]

kW

This parameter defines which input

on the frequency converter should be
treated as the source of the reference
signal for the Closed Loop 1
Controller. Analog input X30/11 and
Analog input X30/12 refer to inputs
on the General Purpose I/O.

[120] GPM
[121] gal/s

[0] * No function

[122] gal/min
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min

[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Pulse input 29

[8]

Pulse input 33

[20] Digital pot.meter

[127] ft/h

[21] Analog input X30/11

[130] lb/s

[22] Analog input X30/12

[131] lb/min

[23] Analog Input X42/1

[132] lb/h

[24] Analog Input X42/3

[140] ft/s

[25] Analog Input X42/5

[141] ft/min

[29] Analog Input X48/2

[145] ft

[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1

[160] F

[31] Ext. Closed Loop 2

[170] psi

[32] Ext. Closed Loop 3

[171] lb/in

[35] Digital input select

[172] in WG
[173] ft WG

21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source

[174] in Hg

Option:

[180] HP

Range:

Function:
[ -999999.999 - par.
21-12 ExtPID1Unit]

Select the minimum

reference for the Closed
Loop 1 Controller.
[0] *

No function

[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[3]

Pulse input 29

[4]

Pulse input 33

[7]

Analog Input X30/11

The dynamics of the PID

controller depend on the value

[8]

Analog Input X30/12

[9]

Analog Input X42/1

set in this parameter. See also

[10]

Analog Input X42/3

[11]

Analog Input X42/5

[15]

Analog Input X48/2

21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference

Range:
100
ExtPID1Unit*

Function:
[ par. 21-11 999999.999
ExtPID1Unit]

Select the maximum reference

for the Closed Loop 1
Controller.

parameter 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain.

Function:
This parameter defines which input
on the frequency converter should
be treated as the source of the
feedback signal for the Closed Loop
1 controller. Analog input X30/11
and Analog input X30/12 refer to
inputs on the General Purpose I/O.

21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference

0 ExtPID1Unit*

3 3

Function:

[100] Bus Feedback 1

[101] Bus Feedback 2
[102] Bus feedback 3

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

145

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] but in practice

of course limited by this setting.
The proportional band (error causing output to change
from 0-100%) can be calculated with the formula

21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source

Option:

Function:

[104] Sensorless Flow

[105] Sensorless Pressure
[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1

1
Max Reference
Proportional Gain

[201] Ext. Closed Loop 2

NOTICE

[202] Ext. Closed Loop 3

21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint

Range:
0
ExtPID1Unit*

Function:
[-999999.999 - The setpoint reference is used in
999999.999
extended 1 closed loop. Ext.1
ExtPID1Unit]
Setpoint is added to the value
from the Ext.1 Reference source
selected in parameter 21-13 Ext.
1 Reference Source.

Always set the desired value for

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference before setting the
values for the PID controller in parameter group 20-9*
PID Controller.
21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time
Range:
20
s*

[0.01 10000 s]

21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]

Range:
0 ExtPID1Unit*

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ExtPID1Unit]

Readout of the reference

value for the Closed Loop
1 Controller.

21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]

Range:
0 ExtPID1Unit*

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ExtPID1Unit]

Readout of the feedback

value for the Closed Loop
1 Controller.

21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%]

Range:
0 %*

Function:

based on the value set in parameter 20-93 PID

Proportional Gain. When no deviation is
present, the output from the proportional
controller is 0.

[0 - 100 %] Readout of the output value for the Closed

Loop 1 Controller.

3.18.3 21-2* Closed Loop 1 PID

21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control
Option:

21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time

Range:
0 s*

Function:

[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal if the output should be reduced

when feedback is higher than the reference.
[1]

Inverse Select [1] Inverse if the output should be increased

when feedback is higher than the reference.

21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain

Range:
0.50*

Function:
Over time, the integrator accumulates a contribution to the output from the PID controller as
long as there is a deviation between the
Reference/Setpoint and feedback signals. The
contribution is proportional to the size of the
deviation. This ensures that the deviation
(error) approaches zero.
Quick response on any deviation is obtained
when the integral time is set to a low value.
Setting it too low, however, may cause the
control to become unstable.
The value set, is the time needed for the
integrator to add the same contribution as the
proportional for a certain deviation.
If the value is set to 10,000, the controller acts
as a pure proportional controller with a P-band

Function:

[0 - 10 s] The differentiator does not react to a constant

error. It only provides a gain when the feedback
changes. The quicker the feedback changes, the
stronger the gain from the differentiator.

21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit

Range:
5*

[0 - 10 ] The proportional gain indicates the number of

times the error between the setpoint and the
feedback signal is to be applied.

Function:

Function:

[1 - 50 ] Set a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). The DG

will increase if there are fast changes. Limit the
DG to obtain a pure differentiator gain at slow
changes and a constant differentiator gain where
quick changes occur.

If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, the PID controller tries
to change the output speed equal to what is set in
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/

146

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.18.4 21-3* Closed Loop 2 Ref/Fb

21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit

Option:

21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit

Option:

Function:

[180] HP

Function:
See parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit for
details

21-31 Ext. 2 Minimum Reference

Range:
0 ExtPID2Unit*

Function:
[ -999999.999 par. 21-32
ExtPID2Unit]

[0] *

[1]

[5]

PPM

[10]

1/min

[11]

RPM

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

[21]

l/min

[22]

l/h

[23]

m/s

[24]

m/min

[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

[31]

kg/min

[32]

kg/h

[0] * No function

[33]

t/min

[1]

Analog Input 53

[34]

t/h

[2]

Analog Input 54

[40]

m/s

[7]

Pulse input 29

m/min

[8]

Pulse input 33

[45]

[20] Digital pot.meter

[60]

[21] Analog input X30/11

[70]

mbar

[22] Analog input X30/12

[71]

bar

[23] Analog Input X42/1

[72]

Pa

[24] Analog Input X42/3

[73]

kPa

[25] Analog Input X42/5

[74]

m WG

[29] Analog Input X48/2

[75]

mm Hg

[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1

[80]

kW

[31] Ext. Closed Loop 2

[41]

See parameter 21-11 Ext. 1

Minimum Reference for
details.

21-32 Ext. 2 Maximum Reference

Range:
100
ExtPID2Unit*

Function:
[ par. 21-31 999999.999
ExtPID2Unit]

See parameter 21-12 Ext. 1

Maximum Reference for
details.

21-33 Ext. 2 Reference Source

Option:

Function:
See parameter 21-13 Ext. 1 Reference
Source for details.

[120] GPM

[32] Ext. Closed Loop 3

[121] gal/s

[35] Digital input select

[122] gal/min
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM
[125] ft/s
[126] ft/min
[127] ft/h
[130] lb/s
[131] lb/min
[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in
[172] in WG
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

147

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

21-34 Ext. 2 Feedback Source

21-40 Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse Control

Option:

Option:

Function:

[0] *

No function

[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[3]

Pulse input 29

[4]

Pulse input 33

[7]

Analog Input X30/11

[8]

Analog Input X30/12

[9]

Analog Input X42/1

[10]

Analog Input X42/3

[11]

Analog Input X42/5

[15]

Analog Input X48/2

See parameter 21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback

[0] * Normal

Source for details.

[1]

Range:

21-42 Ext. 2 Integral Time

Range:

21-43 Ext. 2 Differentation Time

Range:
0 s*

[104] Sensorless Flow

[105] Sensorless Pressure

Range:

[201] Ext. Closed Loop 2

5*

[202] Ext. Closed Loop 3

21-35 Ext. 2 Setpoint

Function:
See parameter 21-15 Ext. 1
Setpoint for details.

3.18.6 21-5* Closed Loop 3 Ref/Fb

21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit

See parameter 21-17 Ext. 1

[0] *

[1]

[5]

PPM

[10]

1/min

[11]

RPM

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

[21]

l/min

[22]

l/h

21-39 Ext. 2 Output [%]

[23]

m/s

Range:

[24]

m/min

[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

[31]

kg/min

[32]

kg/h

[33]

t/min

[34]

t/h

21-40 Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse Control

[40]

m/s

Option:

[41]

m/min

[45]

[60]

[70]

mbar

Reference [Unit], Ext. 1

Reference [Unit], for details.

21-38 Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit]

Range:
0 ExtPID2Unit*

0 %*

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ExtPID2Unit]

See parameter 21-18 Ext. 1

Feedback [Unit] for details.

Function:

[0 - 100 %] See parameter 21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] for

details.

3.18.5 21-4* Closed Loop 2 PID

Function:
See parameter 21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control
for details.

148

Function:
See parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit for
details.

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ExtPID2Unit]

Function:

[1 - 50 ] See parameter 21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit for

details.

Option:

21-37 Ext. 2 Reference [Unit]

Range:

Function:

[0 - 10 s] See parameter 21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time for

details.

21-44 Ext. 2 Dif. Gain Limit

[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1

0 ExtPID2Unit*

Function:

[0.01 - 10000 s] See parameter 21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time

for details.

20 s*

[102] Bus feedback 3

[-999999.999 999999.999
ExtPID2Unit]

Function:

[0 - 10 ] See parameter 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain for

details.

0.50*

[101] Bus Feedback 2

Range:

Inverse

21-41 Ext. 2 Proportional Gain

[100] Bus Feedback 1

0 ExtPID2Unit*

Function:

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit

21-53 Ext. 3 Reference Source

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:

[71]

bar

[23] Analog Input X42/1

[72]

Pa

[24] Analog Input X42/3

[73]

kPa

[25] Analog Input X42/5

[74]

m WG

[29] Analog Input X48/2

[75]

mm Hg

[30] Ext. Closed Loop 1

[80]

kW

[31] Ext. Closed Loop 2

[120] GPM

[32] Ext. Closed Loop 3

[121] gal/s

[35] Digital input select

[122] gal/min

3 3

21-54 Ext. 3 Feedback Source

[123] gal/h

Option:

[124] CFM

Function:

[125] ft/s

See parameter 21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback

[126] ft/min

Source for details.

[127] ft/h

[0] *

No function

[130] lb/s

[1]

Analog Input 53

[131] lb/min

[2]

Analog Input 54

[132] lb/h

[3]

Pulse input 29

[140] ft/s

[4]

Pulse input 33

[141] ft/min

[7]

Analog Input X30/11

[145] ft

[8]

Analog Input X30/12

[160] F

[9]

Analog Input X42/1

[170] psi

[10]

Analog Input X42/3

[171] lb/in

[11]

Analog Input X42/5

[172] in WG

[15]

Analog Input X48/2

[173] ft WG

[100] Bus Feedback 1

[174] in Hg

[101] Bus Feedback 2

[180] HP

[102] Bus feedback 3

[104] Sensorless Flow

21-51 Ext. 3 Minimum Reference

Range:
0 ExtPID3Unit*

Function:
[ -999999.999 par. 21-52
ExtPID3Unit]

See parameter 21-11 Ext. 1

Minimum Reference for
details.

[105] Sensorless Pressure

[200] Ext. Closed Loop 1
[201] Ext. Closed Loop 2
[202] Ext. Closed Loop 3

21-55 Ext. 3 Setpoint

21-52 Ext. 3 Maximum Reference
Range:
100
ExtPID3Unit*

Range:
Function:

[ par. 21-51 999999.999

ExtPID3Unit]

Maximum Reference for

details.

[-999999.999 999999.999
ExtPID3Unit]

0 ExtPID3Unit*

Function:

See parameter 21-15 Ext. 1

Setpoint for details.

21-57 Ext. 3 Reference [Unit]

Range:

21-53 Ext. 3 Reference Source

Option:

0 ExtPID3Unit*

See parameter 21-12 Ext. 1

Function:

See parameter 21-13 Ext. 1 Reference

Source for details.

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ExtPID3Unit]

[0] * No function

21-58 Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit]

[1]

Analog Input 53

Range:

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Pulse input 29

[8]

Pulse input 33

0 ExtPID3Unit*

See parameter 21-17 Ext. 1

Reference [Unit] for details.

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ExtPID3Unit]

See parameter 21-18 Ext. 1

Feedback [Unit] for details.

[20] Digital pot.meter

[21] Analog input X30/11
[22] Analog input X30/12

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

149

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

21-59 Ext. 3 Output [%]

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] See parameter 21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] for

details.

3.18.7 21-6* Closed Loop 3 PID

21-60 Ext. 3 Normal/Inverse Control
Option:

Function:
See parameter 21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control
for details.

[0] * Normal
[1]

Inverse

21-61 Ext. 3 Proportional Gain

Range:
0.50*

Function:

[0 - 10 ] See parameter 21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain for

details.

21-62 Ext. 3 Integral Time

Range:
20 s*

Function:

[0.01 - 10000 s] See parameter 21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time

for details.

21-63 Ext. 3 Differentation Time

Range:
0 s*

Function:

[0 - 10 s] See parameter 21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time for

details.

21-64 Ext. 3 Dif. Gain Limit

Range:
5*

150

Function:

[1 - 50 ] See parameter 21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit for

details.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.19 Parameters 22-** Application

Functions

22-01 Power Filter Time

Range:

Function:

0.50 s*

3.19.1 22-0* Miscellaneous

[0.02 - 10 s]

3 3

This group contains parameters used for monitoring water/

wastewater applications.
22-00 External Interlock Delay
Range:
0 s*

Function:

[0 - 600 Only relevant if one of the digital inputs in

s]
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs has been
programmed for [7] External Interlock. The
external interlock timer will introduce a delay
after the signal has been removed from the
digital input programmed for external interlock,
before reaction takes place.

3.19.2 22-2* No-Flow Detection

130BA252.15

Sleep mode
External
sleep mode
command

No flow/low
speed detection
P 22-21

Low Power
detected

Off
Detection
timer

Low speed
detected

Warning

P 22-24

Sleep
mode

P 22-40
P 22-41

Alarm
P 22-22

Min run
timer
Min sleep
timer

P 22-23
Cascade
controller
(destaging
command)
P 25-26

Illustration 3.50 Signal Flow Chart

The VLT AQUA Drive includes functions for detecting if the

load conditions in the system allow the motor to be
stopped:
*Low Power Detection
*Low Speed Detection
One of these 2 signals must be active for a set time
(parameter 22-24 No-Flow Delay) before selected action
takes place. Possible actions to select (parameter 22-23 NoFlow Function): No action, Warning, Alarm, Sleep Mode.

MG20O802

No Flow Detection
This function is used for detecting a no flow situation in
pump systems where all valves can be closed. Can be used
both when controlled by the integrated PI controller in
VLT AQUA Drive or an external PI controller. Actual configuration must be programmed in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
Configuration mode for

Integrated PI Controller: Closed Loop

External PI Controller: Open Loop

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

151

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

CAUTION
Carry out No Flow tuning before setting the PI controller
parameters!
130BA253.10

FC

3 3

the valve(s) closed. The data are programmed in the

parameter group 22-3* No Flow Power Tuning. It is also
possible to run a parameter 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up,
automatically stepping through the commissioning process
and also automatically storing the data measured. The
frequency converter must be set for open loop in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode, when carrying out the
Auto Set-Up (See parameter group 22-3* No-Flow Power
Tuning).

CAUTION
When using the integrated PI controller, carry out No
Flow tuning before setting the PI controller parameters!
Low speed detection
Low Speed Detection gives a signal if the motor is operating
with minimum speed as set in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed
Low Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
[Hz]. Actions are common with No Flow Detection
(individual selection not possible).
The use of Low Speed Detection is not limited to systems
with a no flow situation, but can be used in any system
where operation at minimum speed allows for a stop of
the motor until the load calls for a speed higher than
minimum speed, e.g. systems with fans and compressors.

Illustration 3.51 No Flow Detection Scheme

130BA254.10

NOTICE

Head
1

In pump systems, ensure that the minimum speed in

parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has been set
high enough for detection as the pump can run with a
rather high speed even with valves closed.
Dry pump detection
No Flow Detection can also be used for detecting if the
pump has run dry (low power consumption-high speed).
Can be used with both the integrated PI controller and an
external PI controller.
The condition for dry pump signal:

Power consumption below no flow level

and
Flow

Illustration 3.52 No Flow Detection Graph

No Flow Detection is based on the measurement of speed

and power. For a certain speed the frequency converter
calculates the power at no flow.
This coherence is based on the adjustment of 2 sets of
speed and associated power at no flow. By monitoring the
power it is possible to detect no flow conditions in
systems with fluctuating suction pressure or if the pump
has a flat characteristic towards low speed.
The 2 sets of data must be based on measurement of
power at approx. 50% and 85% of maximum speed with

152

Pump running at maximum speed or maximum

reference open loop, whichever is lowest.

The signal must be active for a set time

(parameter 22-27 Dry Pump Delay) before selected the
action takes place.
Possible Actions to select (parameter 22-26 Dry Pump
Function):

Warning
Alarm

Enable the low power detection in parameter 22-21 Low

Power Detection. Perform the tuning using parameter
group 22-3*, No-Flow Power Tuning.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

In a dry pump detection setup, select [0] Off in parameter

22-23 No-Flow Function. Otherwise make sure that the
options in that parameter do not prevent the dry pump
detection.

22-22 Low Speed Detection

Option:

Function:

[0] * Disabled
[1]

Enabled

Detects when the motor operates with a speed

22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up

as set in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit

Start of auto set-up of power data for No-Flow Power tuning.

[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit

Option:

[Hz].

Function:

[0] * Off
[1]

Enabled When set for [1] Enabled, an auto set-up sequence

is activated, automatically setting speed to
approx. 50 and 85% of rated motor speed

22-23 No-Flow Function

Common actions for low-power detection and low-speed
detection (Individual selections not possible).

(parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM],

Option:

parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]). At

those 2 speeds, the power consumption is
automatically measured and stored.
Before enabling Auto Set-Up:

[0] * Off

1.

Close valve(s) to create a no flow

condition

2.

The frequency converter must be set for

[1]

Function:

Sleep Mode

detected. See parameter group 22-4* Sleep

Mode for programming options for sleep
mode.
[2]

Warning

The frequency converter continues to run,

but activates a no-flow warning [W92]. A
digital output or a serial communication bus
can communicate a warning to other
equipment.

[3]

Trip

The frequency converter stops running and

activates a no-flow alarm [A 92]. A frequency
converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.

[4]

Stop and Trip

Open Loop (parameter 1-00 Configuration

Mode).
Note that it is important also to set
1-03 Torque Characteristics.

NOTICE
Auto Set-up must be done when the system has reached
normal operating temperature!

NOTICE
It is important that the parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
is set to the max. operational speed of the motor!
It is important to do the Auto Set-up before configuring
the integrated PI Controller as settings are reset when
changing from closed to open loop in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

NOTICE
Do not set 14-20 Reset Mode, to [13] Infinite auto reset,
when parameter 22-23 No-Flow Function is set to [3]
Alarm. Doing so causes the frequency converter to
continuously cycle between running and stopping when
a no-flow condition is detected.

NOTICE

NOTICE
Carry out the tuning with the same settings in
1-03 Torque Characteristics, as for operation after the
tuning.

Disable the bypasss automatic bypass funcion

if the frequency converter is equipped with a

constant speed bypass with an automatic
bypass function starting the bypass if the
frequency converter experiences a persistent
alarm condition, and

if [3] Alarm is selected as the no-flow function.

22-21 Low Power Detection

Option:

Function:

[0] * Disabled
[1]

Enabled

The low-power detection commissioning must be

carried out to set the parameters in parameter
group 22-3* No-Flow Power Tuning for proper
operation.

MG20O802

The frequency converter enters sleep mode

and stops when a no-flow condition is

22-24 No-Flow Delay

Range:
10 s*

Function:

[1 - 600 s] Set the time low power/low speed must stay

detected to activate signal for actions. If
detection disappears before run out of the
timer, the timer is reset.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

153

3 3

3 3

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

22-26 Dry Pump Function

22-27 Dry Pump Delay

Select desired action for dry pump operation.

Range:

Option:

Function:
expire before the timer for the dry pump delay
starts.

Function:

[0] * Off
[1]

Warning

The frequency converter continues to run,

but activates a dry pump warning [W93]. A
frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate a
warning to other equipment.

[2]

Trip

[3]

Manual Reset The frequency converter stops running and

Trip
activates a dry pump alarm [A93]. A
frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.

[4]

The frequency converter stops running and

activates a dry pump alarm [A93]. A
frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.

22-28 No-Flow Low Speed [RPM]

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[ 0 - par.
4-13 RPM]

22-29 No-Flow Low Speed [Hz]

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[ 0 - par.
4-14 Hz]

Stop and
Trip

NOTICE
Low Power Detection must be Enabled
(parameter 22-21 Low Power Detection) and commissioned (using either parameter group 22-3* No-flow
Power Tuning No Flow Power Tuning, or
parameter 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up) to use Dry Pump
Detection.

Used to set the speed for no-flow

low speed detection.
If a low speed detection at a speed
different from the motor minimum
speed is needed, this parameter may
be used.

Used to set the speed for no-flow low

speed detection.
If a low speed detection at a speed
different from the motor minimum
speed is needed, this parameter may
be used.

3.19.3 22-3* No-Flow Power Tuning

Tuning sequence, if not selecting Auto Set Up in
parameter 22-20 Low Power Auto Set-up:
1.

Close the main valve to stop flow.

NOTICE

2.

Run with motor until the system has reached

normal operating temperature.

Do not set 14-20 Reset Mode, to [13] Infinite auto reset,

when parameter 22-26 Dry Pump Function is set to [2]
Alarm. Doing so causes the frequency converter to
continuously cycle between running and stopping when
a dry pump condition is detected.

3.

Press [Hand On] and adjust speed for approx.

85% of rated speed. Note the exact speed.

4.

Read power consumption either by looking for

actual power in the data line in the LCP or call

NOTICE
If the frequency converter is equipped with a constant
speed bypass with an automatic bypass function that
starts the bypass if the frequency converter experiences
a persistent alarm condition, be sure to disable the
bypasss automatic bypass function, if [2] Alarm or [3]
Man. Reset Alarm is selected as the dry pump function.

10 s*

[0 - 600
s]

154

4b

parameter 16-11 Power [hp] in Main

Menu.

5.

Change speed to approx. 50% of rated speed.

Note the exact speed.

6.

Read power consumption either by looking for

actual power in the data line in the LCP or call

Function:
Defines for how long the dry pump condition
must be active before activating warning or
alarm.
The frequency converter waits for the no-flow
delay time (parameter 22-24 No-Flow Delay) to

parameter 16-10 Power [kW]

or

Note the power read out.

22-27 Dry Pump Delay

Range:

4a

6a

parameter 16-10 Power [kW]

or

6b

parameter 16-11 Power [hp] in Main

Menu.

Note the power read.

7.

Program the speeds used in

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

8.

Programming Guide

7a

parameter 22-32 Low Speed [RPM]

22-34 Low Speed Power [kW]

7b

parameter 22-33 Low Speed [Hz]

Range:

7c

parameter 22-36 High Speed [RPM]

7d

parameter 22-37 High Speed [Hz]

Size
related*

[0 5.50
kW]

Program the associated power values in

9.

8a

parameter 22-34 Low Speed Power [kW]

8b

parameter 22-35 Low Speed Power [HP]

8c

parameter 22-38 High Speed Power [kW]

8d

parameter 22-39 High Speed Power [HP]

Switch back with of [Auto On] or [Off].

NOTICE

Range:
Size
related*

22-30 No-Flow Power

Range:
0 kW*

Function:
[0 - 0 kW] Read out of calculated no flow power at
actual speed. If power drops to the display
value, the frequency converter considers the
condition as a no flow situation.

22-31 Power Correction Factor

Range:

Range:

parameter 22-30 No-Flow Power.

If no flow is detected, when it should not be
detected, decrease the setting. However, if no
flow is not detected, when it should be
detected, increase the setting to above 100%.

Range:

MG20O802

[0 To be used if parameter 0-03 Regional

7.50 hp] Settings has been set for North America
(parameter not visible if International
selected).
Set power consumption at 50% speed level.
This function is used for storing values
needed to tune no flow detection.

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed

[0 par. 4-13
RPM]

Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not

visible if Hz selected).
Set used speed for the 85% level.
The function is used for storing values
needed to tune no flow detection.

22-37 High Speed [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0 - par. To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
22-36
Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not
RPM]
visible if Hz selected).
Set used speed for the 50% level.
This function is used for storing values
needed to tune no flow detection.

22-33 Low Speed [Hz]

Size
related*

Function:

Make corrections to the calculated power at

22-32 Low Speed [RPM]

Size
related*

Settings has been set for International

(parameter not visible if North America
selected).
Set power consumption at 50% speed level.
This function is used for storing values
needed to tune no flow detection.

22-36 High Speed [RPM]

Function:

[1 400 %]

To be used if parameter 0-03 Regional

22-35 Low Speed Power [HP]

Set 1-03 Torque Characteristics before tuning takes place.

100
%*

Function:

Function:
[ 0 - par. To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
22-37 Hz] Unit has been set for Hz (parameter not
visible if RPM selected).
Set used speed for the 50% level.
The function is used for storing values
needed to tune no flow detection.

Function:
[0 To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
par. 4-14 Unit has been set for Hz (parameter not
Hz]
visible if RPM selected).
Set used speed for the 85% level.
The function is used for storing values
needed to tune no flow detection.

22-38 High Speed Power [kW]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 5.50
kW]

To be used if parameter 0-03 Regional

Settings has been set for International
(parameter not visible if North America
selected).
Set power consumption at 85% speed level.
This function is used for storing values
needed to tune no flow detection.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

155

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

Range:
Size
related*

3 3

Function:

130BA255.11

22-39 High Speed Power [HP]

FC

[0 To be used if parameter 0-03 Regional

7.50 hp] Settings has been set for North America
(parameter not visible if International
selected).
Set power consumption at 85% speed level.
This function is used for storing values
needed to tune no flow detection.

pSL

3.19.4 22-4* Sleep Mode

If the load on the system allows for stop of the motor and
the load is monitored, the motor can be stopped by
activating the sleep mode function. This is not a normal
stop command, but ramps the motor down to 0 RPM and
stops energizing the motor. When in sleep mode, certain
conditions are monitored to find out when load has been
applied to the system again.
Sleep mode can be activated either from the no flow
detection/minimum speed detection or via an external
signal applied to one of the digital inputs (must be
programmed via the parameters for configuration of the
digital inputs, parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs).
To make it possible to use e.g. an electro-mechanical flow
switch to detect a no flow condition and activate Sleep
Mode, the action takes place at raising edge of the
external signal applied (otherwise the frequency converter
would never come out of Sleep Mode again as the signal
would be steady connected).

fo

PS

Illustration 3.53 Legend: FC=frequency converter;

fO=frequency out; PS=P system; PSL=P setpoint

1) Systems where the integrated PI controller is used for

controlling pressure or temperature e.g. boost systems
with a pressure feed back signal applied to the frequency
converter from a pressure transducer.
Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode, must be set for Closed
Loop and the PI Controller configured for desired reference
and feed back signals.
Example: Boost system.

When entering sleep mode, the lower status line in the

LCP shows Sleep Mode.

P 22-45
P 22-44

130BA257.10

p (Pressure)

If parameter 25-26 Destage At No-Flow, is set for [1] Enabled,

activating sleep mode applies a command to the cascade
controller (if enabled) to start de-staging of lag pumps
(fixed speed) before stopping the lead pump (variable
speed).

PSystem

P Boost
P Set
P Wake

Time

f Ref f out (Frequency)

See also signal flow chart, Illustration 3.50.

There are 3 different ways of using the sleep mode
function:

No/Low Flow
detected

t1

Sleep mode
activated
pSystem = pWake
Boost
activated

Time

Illustration 3.54 Boost System with Pressure Feedback

If no flow is detected, the frequency converter increases

the set point for pressure to ensure a slight over pressure
in the system (boost to be set in parameter 22-45 Setpoint
Boost).
The feedback from the pressure transducer is monitored
and when this pressure has dropped with a set percentage

156

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

130BA256.11

below the normal set point for pressure (Pset), the motor
ramps up again and pressure is controlled for reaching the
set value (Pset).

FC

Example: Boost system.

p (Pressure)

130BA258.10

Parameter Description

pSystem

PSet

Time
fRef fOut (Frequency)
External PID

f Wake

controller
fRef

fRef / fOut
fRef

PSet
No/Low Flow
detected

PSystem
fOut

t1

fOut
Sleep mode
activated

Time
P Ref = PWake

Illustration 3.56 Boost System without Pressure Feedback

Illustration 3.55 System with Pressure Feedback

2) In systems where the pressure or temperature is

controlled by an external PI controller, the wake up
conditions cannot be based on feedback from the
pressure/temperature transducer as the setpoint is not
known. In the example with a boost system, desired
pressure Pset is not known. Parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode, must be set for Open Loop.

When low power or low speed is detected, the motor is

stopped, but the reference signal (fref) from the external
controller is still monitored and because of the low
pressure created, the controller increases the reference
signal to gain pressure. When the reference signal has
reached a set value fwake, the motor restarts.
The speed is set manually by an external reference signal
(Remote Reference). The settings (parameter group 22-3*
No-Flow Power Tuning) for tuning of the no-flow function
must be set to default.

Internal PI Controller
(Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode)

External PI Controller or manual control

(Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode)

Sleep mode

Sleep mode

Wake up

No Flow detection (pumps

only)

Yes

Yes (except manual

setting of speed)

Low speed detection

Yes

Yes

External signal

Yes

Wake up

Yes

Pressure/Temperature
(transmitter connected)

Yes

No

Output frequency

No

Yes

Table 3.20 Configuration Possibilities, Overview

NOTICE
Sleep mode is not active when local reference is active
(set speed manually with the navigation keys on the
LCP). See parameter 3-13 Reference Site.
Does not work in Hand mode. Carry out auto set-up in
open loop before setting input/output in closed loop.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

157

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

22-40 Minimum Run Time

22-45 Setpoint Boost

Range:

Range:

60 s*

Function:

[0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum running time for

the motor after a start command (digital
input or Bus) before entering sleep mode.

0
%*

[-100
- 100
%]

22-41 Minimum Sleep Time

Range:
30 s*

Function:

[0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum time for staying in

sleep mode. This setting overrides any wakeup conditions.

Size
related*

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set for

open loop and an external controller
applies speed reference.
Set the reference speed at which the sleep
mode should be cancelled.

22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 par.
4-14
Hz]

To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed

Unit, has been set for Hz (parameter not
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode, is set for

22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference

Range:
[0 100 %]

Function:
Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode, is set for [3] Closed Loop and the
integrated PI controller is used for controlling the
pressure.
Set the pressure drop allowed in percentage of
set point for the pressure (Pset) before cancelling
the sleep mode.

NOTICE
If used in application where the
integrated PI controller is set for inverse
control in parameter 20-71 PID
Performance, the value set in 22-44 Wakeup Ref./FB Difference will automatically be
added.

158

22-46 Maximum Boost Time

Range:
60
s*

[0 600 s]

Function:
Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode is set for Closed Loop and the integrated PI
controller is used for controlling the pressure.
Set the maximum time for which boost mode is
allowed. If the set time is exceeded, Sleep Mode
is entered, not waiting for the set boost pressure
to be reached.

3.19.5 22-5* End of Curve

visible if RPM selected). Only to be used if

[0] Open Loop and speed reference is applied
by an external controller controlling the
pressure.
Set the reference speed at which the sleep
mode should be cancelled.

10
%*

Mode, is set for [3] Closed Loop and the integrated

PI controller is used. In systems with e.g. constant
pressure control, it is advantageous to increase the
system pressure before the motor is stopped. This
extends the time in which the motor is stopped
and help to avoid frequent start/stop.
Set the desired over pressure/temperature in
percentage of set point for the pressure (Pset)/

The negative values can be used for e.g. cooling

tower control where a negative change is needed.

Function:
[0 To be used if parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
par. 4-13 Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not
RPM]
visible if Hz selected). Only to be used if

Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration

temperature before entering the sleep mode.

If setting for 5%, the boost pressure is Pset*1.05.

22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM]

Range:

Function:

The end of curve conditions occur when a pump is

yielding a too large volume to ensure the set pressure.
This can occur if there is a leakage in the distribution pipe
system after the pump causing the pump to operate at the
end of the pump characteristic, valid for the max. speed
set in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
In case the feed back is 2.5% of the programmed value in
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference below the set point for
the desired pressure for a set time (parameter 22-51 End of
Curve Delay), and the pump is running with max. speed set
in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz], - the function
selected in parameter 22-50 End of Curve Function takes
place.
It is possible to get a signal on one of the digital outputs
by selecting End of Curve [192] in parameter group 5-3*
Digital Outputs and/or parameter group 5-4* Relays. The
signal is present, when an end of curve condition occurs
and the selection in parameter 22-50 End of Curve Function,
is different from Off. The end of curve function can only be
used when operating with the built-in PID controller ([3]
Closed Loop in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode).

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.19.6 22-6* Broken Belt Detection

22-50 End of Curve Function

Option:

Function:

[0] * Off

End-of-curve monitoring not active.

[1]

The frequency converter continues to run, but

activates an end-of-curve warning [W94]. A
frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate a
warning to other equipment.

[2]

Warning

Trip

[3]

Manual
Reset Trip

[4]

Stop and
Trip

The frequency converter stops running and

activates an end-of-curve alarm [A 94]. A
frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.
The frequency converter stops running and
activates an end-of-curve alarm [A 94]. A
frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.

The broken belt detection can be used in both closed and

open loop systems for pumps and fans. If the estimated
motor torque is below the broken belt torque value
(parameter 22-61 Broken Belt Torque) and the frequency
converter output frequency is above or equal to 15 Hz, the
broken belt function (parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function)
is performed.
22-60 Broken Belt Function
Selects the action to be performed if the broken belt condition is
detected

Option:

Function:

[0] * Off
[1]

Warning

The frequency converter continues to run,

but activates a broken belt warning [W95]. A
frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate a
warning to other equipment.

[2]

Trip

The frequency converter stops running and

activates a broken belt alarm [A 95]. A
frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.

[3]

Stop and Trip

NOTICE
Automatic restart resets the alarm and restarts the
system.

NOTICE
Do not set 14-20 Reset Mode, to [13] Infinite auto reset,
when parameter 22-50 End of Curve Function is set to [2]
Alarm. Doing so causes the frequency converter to
continuously cycle between running and stopping when
an end-of-curve condition is detected.

NOTICE
If the frequency converter is equipped with a constant
speed bypass with an automatic bypass function that
starts the bypass if the frequency converter experiences
a persistent alarm condition, be sure to disable the
bypasss automatic bypass function, if [2] Alarm or [3]
Man. Reset Alarm is selected as the end-of-curve
function.

10 s*

[0 600 s]

Do not set 14-20 Reset Mode, to [13] Infinite auto reset,

when parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function is set to [2]
Trip. Doing so causes the frequency converter to continuously cycle between running and stopping when a
broken belt condition is detected.

NOTICE
If the frequency converter is equipped with a constant
speed bypass with an automatic bypass function that
starts the bypass if the frequency converter experiences
a persistent alarm condition, be sure to disable the
bypasss automatic bypass function, if [2] Trip is selected
as the broken belt function.
22-61 Broken Belt Torque

22-51 End of Curve Delay

Range:

NOTICE

Range:

Function:
When an end-of-curve condition is detected, a
timer is activated. When the time set in this
parameter expires, and the end-of-curve
condition has been steady in the entire period,
the function set in parameter 22-50 End of Curve
Function is activated. If the condition disappears
before the timer expires, the timer is reset.

10 %*

Function:
[0 - 100 %] Sets the broken belt torque as a percentage
of the rated motor torque.

22-62 Broken Belt Delay

Range:
10 s

[0 - 600
s]

Function:
Sets the time for which the broken belt
conditions must be active before carrying out
the action selected in parameter 22-60 Broken
Belt Function.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

159

3 3

Programming Guide

3.19.7 22-7* Short Cycle Protection

In some applications, there is often a need for limiting the
numbers of starts. One way to do this is to ensure a
minimum run time (time between a start and a stop) and a
minimum interval between starts.
This means that any normal stop command can be
overridden by parameter 22-77 Minimum Run Time and any
normal start command (Start/Jog/Freeze) can be
overridden by parameter 22-76 Interval between Starts.
None of the 2 functions are active if Hand On or Off modes
have been activated via the LCP. If selecting Hand On or
Off, the 2 timers are reset to 0, and do not start counting
until [Auto On] is pressed and an active start command
applied.
22-75 Short Cycle Protection
Option:

Function:

[0] * Disabled Timer set in parameter 22-76 Interval between

22-78 Minimum Run Time Override

Option:

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

22-79 Minimum Run Time Override Value

Range:
0 ProcessCtrlUnit*

Function:
[-999999.999 - 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

3.19.8 22-8* Flow Compensation

Sometimes it is not possible for a pressure transducer to
be placed at a remote point in the system and it can only
be located close to the fan/pump outlet. Flow compensation operates by adjusting the set-point according to the
output frequency, which is almost proportional to flow,
thus compensating for higher losses at higher flow rates.

Starts is disabled.
[1]

Timer set in parameter 22-76 Interval between

Enabled

Starts is enabled.

HDESIGN (Required pressure) is the setpoint for closed loop

(PI) operation of the frequency converter and is set as for
closed loop operation without flow compensation.

22-76 Interval between Starts

Range:
Size
related*

130BA383.11

3 3

Parameter Description

Function:
[ par. 22-77
- 3600 s]

Sets the time desired as minimum

time between 2 starts. Any normal
start command (Start/Jog/Freeze) is
disregarded until the timer has
expired.

22-77 Minimum Run Time

Range:
0 s*

[ 0 - par.
22-76 s]

Function:
Sets the time desired as minimum run time
after a normal start command (start/jog/freeze).
Any normal stop command is disregarded until
the set time has expired. The timer starts
counting following a normal start command
(start/jog/freeze).
A coast (inverse) or an external interlock
command overrides the timer.

NOTICE

Illustration 3.57 Flow Compensation Setup

There are 2 methods which can be employed, depending

upon whether or not the Speed at System design Working
Point is known.

Does not work in cascade mode.

160

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

Speed at design point

KNOWN

Speed at design point

UNKNOWN

Parameter 22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation

Parameter 22-82 Work Point Calculation

Parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]/parameter 22-84 Speed at NoFlow [Hz]

Parameter 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]/parameter 22-86 Speed at

Design Point [Hz]

Parameter 22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed

Parameter 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed

Parameter used
Parameter 22-80 Flow Compensation

Parameter 22-89 Flow at Design Point

Parameter 22-90 Flow at Rated Speed

3 3

Table 3.21 Speed at Design Point Known/Unknown

22-80 Flow Compensation

22-82 Work Point Calculation

Option:

Option:

Function:

Example 1

Enabled

Set-Point compensation is active. Enabling this

parameter allows the Flow Compensated Setpoint
operation.

HDESIGN
Set Point

130BA388.11

IGN

H (head)

ES

Not visible when running in cascade.

Control Curve

ED
AT

NOTICE

_f R

[0 - 100 %] Example 1:
Adjustment of this parameter allows the
shape of the control curve to be adjusted.
0 = Linear
100% = Ideal shape (theoretical).

HMIN
Par.:
22-83/
22-84/
22-87

D
TE

100 %*

Function:

n RA GN-f D 2-86
SI
/2
n DE 2-85
P2

22-81 Square-linear Curve Approximation

Range:

H(head)

130BA385.11

[0] * Disabled Set-Point compensation not active.

[1]

Function:

Q(flow)

Illustration 3.59 Speed at System Design

Working Point is Known

From the data sheet showing characteristics for

the specific equipment at different speeds, simply
reading across from the HDESIGN point and the
QDESIGN point allows us to find point A, which is
the System Design Working Point. The pump
characteristics at this point should be identified
and the associated speed programmed. Closing
the valves and adjusting the speed until HMIN has

P2

1
2-8

0%

been achieved allows the speed at the no flow

point to be identified.

%
100

Adjustment of parameter 22-81 Square-linear Curve

Approximation then allows the shape of the
control curve to be adjusted infinitely.

Control Curve
Q (flow)

Illustration 3.58 Square-linear Curve Approximation

Example 2:
Speed at System Design Working Point is not
known: Where the Speed at System Design
Working Point is unknown, another reference
point on the control curve needs to be
determined by means of the data sheet. By
looking at the curve for the rated speed and
plotting the design pressure (HDESIGN, Point C) the
flow at that pressure QRATED can be determined.
Similarly, by plotting the design flow (QDESIGN,

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

161

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

22-82 Work Point Calculation

22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz]

Option:

Range:

Function:

3 3

Function:

Point D). The pressure HDESIGN at that flow can be

pressure HMIN is achieved. Alternatively, the

determined. Knowing these 2 points on the pump

curve, along with HMIN as described above, allows

parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]. If it

speed in RPM can be entered in

has been decided to use Hz in

the frequency converter to calculate the reference

point B and thus to plot the control curve which
will also include the System design Working Point
A.

D
B
A

C
D
TE

I
ES

DESIGN

Par.
22-89

Q RATED

ED

ESI

T
-f RA GN

HMIN
Par.:
22-83/
22-84/ Control Curve
22-87
Q

n RA GN -f D

nD

Set point

130BA387.11

H (head)
HRATED
Par.
22-88
H DESIGN

parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit,

parameter 22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]
should also be used. Closing the valves and
reducing the speed until minimum pressure
HMIN is achieved determines this value.

22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]

Range:
Size
related*

(flow)
Par.
22-90

Function:
[0 60000
RPM]

Illustration 3.60 Speed at System Design

Working Point is not Known

Resolution 1 RPM.
Only visible when parameter 22-82 Work
Point Calculation is set to [0] Disabled. Enter
the motor speed in RPM at which the
system design working point is achieved.
Alternatively, the speed in Hz can be
entered in parameter 22-86 Speed at Design
Point [Hz]. If it has been decided to use

[0]
*

Disabled Work Point Calculation not active. To be used if

speed at design point is known.

[1]

Enabled

Work Point Calculation is active. Enabling this

parameter allows the calculation of the unknown
System Design Working Point at 50/60 Hz speed,
from the input data set in parameter 22-83 Speed
at No-Flow [RPM] parameter 22-84 Speed at No-Flow
[Hz], parameter 22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed,

RPM in parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit

then parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow
[RPM] should also be used.

22-86 Speed at Design Point [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

parameter 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed,

parameter 22-89 Flow at Design Point and

Function:
[ 0.0 par.
4-19
Hz]

parameter 22-90 Flow at Rated Speed.

Resolution 0.033 Hz.

Only visible when parameter 22-82 Work
Point Calculation is set to [0] Disabled. Enter
the motor speed in Hz at which the system
design working point is achieved. Alternatively, the speed in RPM can be entered in

22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]

parameter 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM].

Range:

If it has been decided to use Hz in

Size
related*

Function:
[0 par.
22-85
RPM]

parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit, then

Resolution 1 RPM.
The speed of the motor at which flow Is
zero and minimum pressure HMIN is achieved
should be entered here in RPM. Alternatively, the speed in Hz can be entered in
parameter 22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz]. If it
has been decided to use RPM in

parameter 22-83 Speed at No-Flow [RPM]

should also be used.

22-87 Pressure at No-Flow Speed

Range:
0*

parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit then

parameter 22-85 Speed at Design Point [RPM]
should also be used. Closing the valves and
reducing the speed until minimum pressure
HMIN is achieved determines this value.

Function:

[ 0 - par. 22-88 ] Enter the pressure HMIN corresponding to

Speed at No Flow in Reference/Feedback
Units.

Also see parameter 22-82 Work Point Calculation point D.

22-84 Speed at No-Flow [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

162

Function:
[0 par.
22-86
Hz]

Resolution 0.033 Hz.

Enter the motor speed in Hz at which flow
has effectively stopped and minimum

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed

Range:
999999.999*

Function:
[ par. 22-87 999999.999 ]

Enter the value corresponding

to the Pressure at Rated Speed,
in Reference/Feedback Units.
This value can be defined using
the pump datasheet.

3 3

See parameter 22-88 Pressure at Rated Speed point A.

22-89 Flow at Design Point
Range:
0*

[0 - 999999.999 ]

Function:
Flow at design point (no units).

Also see parameter 22-82 Work Point Calculation point C.

22-90 Flow at Rated Speed
Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 999999.999 ] Enter the value corresponding to Flow at

Rated Speed. This value can be defined
using the pump datasheet.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

163

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.20 Parameters 23-** Time-based

Functions

23-00 ON Time
Array [10]

Range:

3.20.1 23-0* Timed Actions

Use Timed Actions for actions needing to be performed on
a daily or weekly basis, e.g. different references for working
hours/non-working hours. Up to 10 timed actions can be
programmed in the frequency converter. The timed action
number is selected from the list when entering parameter
group 23-0* Timed Actions from the LCP.
Parameter 23-00 ON Time parameter 23-04 Occurrence
then refer to the selected timed action number. Each
timed action is divided into an ON time and an OFF time,
in which 2 different actions may be performed.
Display lines 2 and 3 in the LCP show the status for timed
actions mode (0-23 Display Line 2 Large and 0-24 Display
Line 3 Large, setting [1643] Timed Actions Status).

Size
related*

Function:
[ 0 - 0 ] Sets the ON time for the timed action.

NOTICE
The frequency converter has no
back-up of the clock function and
the set date/time resets to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power
down unless a Real Time Clock
module with back-up is installed. In
parameter 0-79 Clock Fault it is
possible to program for a Warning
in case clock has not been set
properly, e.g. after a power down.

23-01 ON Action
Arra [10]

NOTICE

Option:

A change in mode via the digital inputs can only take

place if 23-08 Timed Actions Mode is set for [0] Times
Actions Auto.
If commands are applied simultaneously to the digital
inputs for Constant OFF and Constant ON, the timed
actions mode changes to timed actions auto and the 2
commands are disregarded.
If 0-70 Date and Time is not set or the frequency
converter is set to HAND or OFF mode (e.g. via the LCP),
the timed actions mode is changed to Timed Actions
Disabled.
The timed actions have a higher priority than the same
actions/commands activated by the digital inputs or the
Smart Logic Controller.
The actions programmed in timed actions are merged with
corresponding actions from digital inputs, control word via
bus and Smart Logic Controller, according to merge rules
set up in parameter group 8-5* Digital/Bus.

Function:
Select the action during ON Time.
See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
Action for descriptions of the
options.

[0] * Disabled
[1]

No action

[2]

Select set-up 1

[3]

Select set-up 2

[4]

Select set-up 3

[5]

Select set-up 4

[10] Select preset ref 0

[11] Select preset ref 1
[12] Select preset ref 2
[13] Select preset ref 3
[14] Select preset ref 4
[15] Select preset ref 5
[16] Select preset ref 6
[17] Select preset ref 7
[18] Select ramp 1

NOTICE

[19] Select ramp 2

The clock (parameter group 0-7* Clock Settings) must be

correctly programmed for timed actions to function
correctly.

[22] Run
[23] Run reverse
[24] Stop
[26] DC Brake

NOTICE

[27] Coast

When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a

battery back-up of the date and time is included.

[29] Start timer 0

[28] Freeze output

[31] Start timer 2

NOTICE

[32] Set digital out A low

The PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10 Set-up

Software comprises a special guide for easy
programming of timed actions.

164

[30] Start timer 1

[33] Set digital out B low

[34] Set digital out C low
[35] Set digital out D low

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

23-01 ON Action

23-04 Occurrence

Arra [10]

Array [10]

Option:

Function:

Option:

[36] Set digital out E low

Function:

[37] Set digital out F low

Select which day(s) the timed action

applies to. Specify working/non-working

[38] Set digital out A high

days in parameter 0-81 Working Days,

[39] Set digital out B high

parameter 0-82 Additional Working Days

and parameter 0-83 Additional Non-

[40] Set digital out C high

Working Days.

[41] Set digital out D high

[42] Set digital out E high

[0] * All days

[43] Set digital out F high

[1]

Working days

[60] Reset Counter A

[2]

Non-working days

[61] Reset Counter B

[3]

Monday

[70] Start Timer 3

[4]

Tuesday

[71] Start Timer 4

[5]

Wednesday

[72] Start Timer 5

[6]

Thursday

[73] Start Timer 6

[7]

Friday

[74] Start Timer 7

[8]

Saturday

[80] Sleep Mode

[9]

Sunday

[81] Derag

NOTICE
For choices [32] - [43], see also parameter group 5-3*
Digital Outputs and 5-4* Relays.
23-02 OFF Time
Array [10]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0 - 0 ] Sets the OFF time for the timed action.

NOTICE
The frequency converter has no
back-up of the clock function and
the set date/time is reset to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power
down unless a Real Time Clock
module with back-up is installed. In
parameter 0-79 Clock Fault it is
possible to program for a Warning
in case clock has not been set
properly, e.g. after a power down.

23-03 OFF Action

Array [10]
See parameter 23-01 ON Action for available actions.

Option:
[0] *

MG20O802

Function:
Disabled

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

165

3 3

3.20.2 23-1* Maintenance

Wear and tear calls for periodic inspection and service of elements in the application, e.g. motor bearings, feedback sensors
and seals or filters. With preventive maintenance the service intervals may be programmed into the frequency converter.
The frequency converter gives a message when maintenance is required. 20 preventive maintenance events can be
programmed into the frequency converter. Specify the following for each event:

Maintenance item (e.g. Motor Bearings)

Maintenance action (e.g. Replace)
Maintenance Time Base (e.g. Running Hours or a specific date and time)
Maintenance Time Interval or the date and time of next maintenance

NOTICE
To disable a preventive maintenance event the associated parameter 23-12 Maintenance Time Base must be set to [0]
Disabled.
Preventive maintenance can be programmed from the LCP, but use of the PC-based VLT Motion Control Tool MCT 10 Setup Software is recommended.
130BA492.10

3 3

Programming Guide

Parameter Description

Untitled - MCT 10 SET - up Software

File

Edit

View

Insert Communication

Tools

Network
Project

+
-

VLT AQUA DRIVE

All Parameters
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-

Operation/Display
Load/Motor
Brakes
Reference / Ramps
Limits / Warnings
Digital In/Out
Analog In/Out
Comm. andOptions
Smart logic
Special Functions
Drive Information
Data Readouts
Info & Readouts
Drive Closed Loop
Ext. Closed Loop
Application Functions
Time-based Functions
Timed Actions
Maintenance
Maintenance Reset
Energy Log
Trending
Payback Counter

+
+
+

Cascade Controller
Water Application Functions

OptionsHelp

ID

Name

Setup 1

Setup 2

Setup 3

Setup 4

2310.0

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.1

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.2

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.3

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.4

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.5

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.6

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.7

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.8

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.9

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.10

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.11

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.12

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.13

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.14

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.15

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.16

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.17

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.18

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2310.19

Maintenance Item

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

Motor bearings

2311.0

Maintenance Action

Lubricate

Lubricate

Lubricates

Lubricate

2311.2

Maintenance Action

Lubricate

Lubricate

Lubricates

Lubricate

2311.3

Maintenance Action

Lubricate

Lubricate

Lubricates

Lubricate

2311.4

Maintenance Action

Lubricate

Lubricate

Lubricates

Lubricate

2311.5

Maintenance Action

Lubricate

Lubricate

Lubricates

Lubricate

2311.6

Maintenance Action

Lubricate

Lubricate

Lubricates

Lubricate

Cascade Controller

Illustration 3.61 MCT 10 Set-up Software

The LCP indicates (with a wrench-icon and an M) when it is time for a preventive maintenance action, and can be
programmed to be indicated on a digital output in parameter group 5-3* Digital Outputs. The Preventive maintenance status
may be read in parameter 16-96 Maintenance Word. A preventive maintenance indication can be reset from a digital input,
the FC bus or manually from the LCP through parameter 23-15 Reset Maintenance Word.
A maintenance log with the latest 10 loggings can be read from parameter group 18-0* Maintenance Log and via the alarm
log key on the LCP after selecting maintenance log.

166

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

NOTICE
The preventive maintenance events are defined in a 20 element array. Hence each preventive maintenance event must
use the same array element index in parameter 23-10 Maintenance Item to parameter 23-14 Maintenance Date and Time.
23-10 Maintenance Item

23-12 Maintenance Time Base

Array [20]

Array [20]

Option:

Option:

Function:
Array with 20 elements displayed
below parameter number in the
display. Press [OK] and step between
elements with [], [], [] and [].
Select the item to be associated with
the preventive maintenance event.

Fan bearings

[3]

Pump bearings

[4]

Valve

[5]

Pressure transmitter

[6]

Flow transmitter

[7]

Temperature transm.

[8]

Pump seals

[9]

Fan belt

Function:
Select the time base to be associated with the
preventive maintenance event.

[0]

Disabled

Disables the preventive maintenance event.

Running
Hours

The number of hours the motor has been

running. Running hours are not reset at

[1]

power-on. The Maintenance Time Interval must

[1] * Motor bearings

[2]

3 3

be specified in parameter 23-13 Maintenance

Time Interval.
[2]

Operating
Hours

The number of hours the frequency converter

has been running. Operating hours are not
reset at power-on. The Maintenance Time
Interval must be specified in
parameter 23-13 Maintenance Time Interval.

[3]

[10] Filter

Date &
Time

Uses the internal clock. The date and time of

the next maintenance occurrence must be
specified in parameter 23-14 Maintenance Date

[11] Drive cooling fan

and Time.

[12] System health check

[13] Warranty

23-13 Maintenance Time Interval

[20] Maintenance Text 0

Array [20]

[21] Maintenance Text 1

Range:

[22] Maintenance Text 2

[23] Maintenance Text 3

1
h*

[24] Maintenance Text 4

[25] Maintenance Text 5

[1 2147483647
h]

Function:
Set the interval associated with the current
preventive maintenance event. This
parameter is only used if [1] Running Hours or
[2] Operating Hours is selected in

23-11 Maintenance Action

parameter 23-12 Maintenance Time Base. The

Array [20]

timer is reset from parameter 23-15 Reset

Option:

Maintenance Word.

Function:
Select the action to be associated with
the preventive maintenance event.

[1] * Lubricate
[2]

Clean

[3]

Replace

[4]

Inspect/Check

[5]

Overhaul

[6]

Renew

[7]

Check

Example
A preventive maintenance event is set up
Monday at 8:00. Parameter 23-12 Maintenance
Time Base is [2] Operating hours and
parameter 23-13 Maintenance Time Interval is
7 x 24 hours=168 hours. Next maintenance
event is indicated the following Monday at
8:00. If this maintenance event is not reset
until Tuesday at 9:00, the next occurrence is
the following Tuesday at 9:00.

[20] Maintenance Text 0

[21] Maintenance Text 1
[22] Maintenance Text 2
[23] Maintenance Text 3
[24] Maintenance Text 4
[25] Maintenance Text 5

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

167

Programming Guide

23-14 Maintenance Date and Time

23-16 Maintenance Text

Array [20]

Array [6]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 0]

Range:

depends on the setting in 0-71 Date Format

while the time format depends on the setting
in parameter 0-72 Time Format.

NOTICE
The frequency converter has no backup of the clock function and the set
date/time isl reset to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power down.
In parameter 0-79 Clock Fault it is
possible to program for a Warning in
case the clock has not been set
properly, e.g. after a power down.
The time set must be at least one hour
from the actual time!

NOTICE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB
109 option card, a battery back-up of
the date and time is included.

23-15 Reset Maintenance Word

Option:

Function:
Set this parameter to [1] Do reset to reset the
Maintenance Word in
parameter 16-96 Maintenance Word and reset the
message displayed in the LCP. This parameter
changes back to [0] Do not reset when pressing
[OK].

[0] * Do not
reset
[1]

Function:
The text is written according to the guidelines in

Set the date and time for next maintenance

occurrence if the preventive maintenance
event is based on date/time. Date format

parameter 0-37 Display Text 1.

3.20.3 23-5* Energy Log

The frequency converter is continuously accumulating the
consumption of the motor controlled, based on the actual
power yielded by the frequency converter.
These data can be used for an energy log function
allowing the user to compare and structure the
information about the energy consumption related to time.
There are basically 2 functions:

Data related to a pre-programmed period,

defined by a set date and time for start

Data related to a predefined period back in time

e.g. last 7 days within the pre-programmed
period

For each of the above 2 functions, the data are stored in a

number of counters allowing for selecting time frame and
a split on hours, days or weeks.
The period/split (resolution) can be set in
parameter 23-50 Energy Log Resolution.
The data are based on the value registered by the kWh
counter in the frequency converter. This counter value can
be read in parameter 15-02 kWh Counter containing the
accumulated value since the first power up or latest reset
of the counter (parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter).
All data for the energy log are stored in counters which
can be read from parameter 23-53 Energy Log.

Do reset

NOTICE

kWh
(P 15-02, kWh Counter)

When messages are reset - Maintenance Item, Action and

Maintenance Date/Time are not cancelled.
Parameter 23-12 Maintenance Time Base is set to [0]
Disabled.

Counter 6

130BA282.10

3 3

Parameter Description

Counter 5
Counter 4
Counter 3
Counter 2

23-16 Maintenance Text

Counter 1
Counter 0

Array [6]

Range:
0*

[0 20 ]

Function:
6 individual texts (Maintenance Text
0...Maintenance Text 5) can be written for use in
Days

either parameter 23-10 Maintenance Item or

parameter 23-11 Maintenance Action.

168

Illustration 3.62 Energy Log Graph

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

Counter 00 always contains the oldest data. A counter

covers a period from XX:00 to XX:59 if hours or 00:00 to
23:59 if days.
If logging either the last hours or last days, the counters
shift contents at XX:00 every hour or at 00:00 every day.
The counter with highest index is always subject to update
(containing data for the actual hour since XX:00 or the
actual day since 00:00).

23-51 Period Start

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 0]

Set the date and time at which the energy log

starts updating the counters. First data will be
stored in counter [00] and start at the time/
date programmed in this parameter.
Date format depends on setting in 0-71 Date
Format and time format on setting in

The contents of counters can be displayed as bars on LCP.

Select Quick Menu, Loggings, Energy Log: Trending
Continued Bin/Trending Timed Bin/Trending Comparison.

NOTICE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a
battery back-up of the date and time is included.

23-50 Energy Log Resolution

Option:

parameter 0-72 Time Format.

Function:
Select the desired type of period for logging
of consumption. [0] Hour of Day, [1] Day of
Week or [2] Day of Month. The counters
contain the logging data from the
programmed date/time for start
(parameter 23-51 Period Start) and the
numbers of hours/days as programmed for

23-53 Energy Log

Array [31]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 Array with a number of elements equal to the

4294967295 ] number of counters ([00]-[xx] below parameter
number in display). Press [OK] and Step
between elements with [] and [].

(parameter 23-50 Energy Log Resolution).

The logging starts on the date programmed

Array elements:

in parameter 23-51 Period Start, and continues

130BA280.11

until one day/week/month has gone. [5] Last

24 Hours, [6] Last 7 Days or [7] Last 5 Weeks.
The counters contain data for one day, one
week or 5 weeks back in time and up to the
actual time.
The logging starts at the date programmed in

Energy meter 23-5*

23-53 Energy meter
(06)
Energy meter 23-5*
23-53 Energy meter
(05)

parameter 23-51 Period Start. In all cases the

period split refers to Operating Hours (time
where frequency converter is powered up).
[0]

Hour of Day

[1]

Day of
Week

[2]

Day of
Month

Energy meter 23-5*

23-53 Energy meter
(04)
Energy meter 23-5*
23-53 Energy meter
(03)
Energy meter 23-5*
23-53 Energy meter
(02)
Energy meter 23-5*
23-53 Energy meter
(01)
Energy meter 23-5*
23-53 Energy meter
(00)

[5] * Last 24
Hours
[6]

Last 7 Days

[7]

Last 5
Weeks

Illustration 3.64

Data from latest period is stored in the

counter with the highest index.
At power down all counter values are stored
and resumed at next power up.

NOTICE
The frequency converter has no back-up of the clock
function and the set date/time resets to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power down unless a Real
Time Clock module with back-up is installed.
Consequently, the logging is stopped until date/time is
readjusted in 0-70 Date and Time. In parameter 0-79 Clock
Fault it is possible to program for a warning in case the
clock not has been set properly, e.g. after a power down.

MG20O802

NOTICE
All counters are automatically reset when changing the
setting in parameter 23-50 Energy Log Resolution. At
overflow, the update of the counters stops at maximum
value.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

169

3 3

Programming Guide

NOTICE

The relative value for the operating variable is

When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a

battery back-up of the date and time is included.

Actual/Rated * 100%
for Power and Current and

23-54 Reset Energy Log

Option:

Function:
Select [1] Do reset to reset all values in the
Energy Log counters shown in
parameter 23-53 Energy Log. After pressing OK,
the setting of the parameter value automatically
changes to [0] Do not reset.

[0] * Do not
reset
[1]

Do reset

for Output Frequency and Motor Speed.

The size of each interval can be adjusted individually, but
will default be 10% for each. Power and Current can
exceed rated value, but those registrations are included in
90%-100% (MAX) counter.
Relative value
operating variable

3.20.4 23-6* Trending

Trending is used to monitor a process variable over a

period of time and record how often the data falls into
each of ten user-defined data ranges. This is a convenient
tool to get a quick overview indicating where to focus on
improvement of operation.
2 sets of data for Trending can be created to make it
possible to comoare current values for a selected
operating variable with data for a certain reference period,
for the same variable. This reference period can be preprogrammed (parameter 23-63 Timed Period Start and
parameter 23-64 Timed Period Stop). The 2 sets of data can
be read from parameter 23-61 Continuous Bin Data (current)
and parameter 23-62 Timed Bin Data (reference).
It is possible to create trending for following operation
variables:

Actual/Max * 100%

Power
Current

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10

Counter 9: +0
Counter 8: +6
Counter 7: +2
Counter 6: +1
Counter 5: +11
Counter 4: +0
Counter 3: +1
Counter 2: +0
Counter 1: +1
Counter 0: +5

130BA281.10

3 3

Parameter Description

Illustration 3.65 Time and Relative Values

Once a second, the value of the operating variable

selected is registered. If a value has been registered to
equal 13%, the counter 10% - <20% is updated with the
value 1. If the value stays at 13% for 10s, then 10 is
added to the counter value.
The contents of counters can be displayed as bars on LCP.
Select Quick MenuLoggings: Trending Continued Bin/
Trending Timed Bin/Trending Comparison.

NOTICE

Output frequency
Motor Speed

The trending function includes 10 counters (forming a bin)

for each set of data containing the numbers of
registrations reflecting how often the operating variable is
within each of ten pre-defined intervals. The sorting is
based on a relative value of the variable.

The counters starts counting whenever the frequency

converter is powered-up. Power cycle shortly after a
reset zeros the counters. EEPROM data are updated once
per hour.
23-60 Trend Variable
Option:

Function:
Select the desired operating variable to be
monitored for Trending.

[0]

Power [kW]

Power yielded to the motor. Reference for the

relative value is the rated motor power
programmed in parameter 1-20 Motor Power
[kW] or parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP].
Actual value can be read in

170

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

23-60 Trend Variable

23-62 Timed Bin Data

Option:

Range:

Function:
parameter 16-10 Power [kW] or
parameter 16-11 Power [hp].

[1]

[2]
*

[3]

Current [A]

Frequency
[Hz]

Motor
Speed
[RPM]

0*

Function:

[0 4294967295 ]

step between elements with [] and [].

Output current to the motor. Reference for the

relative value is the rated motor current
programmed in parameter 1-24 Motor Current.

10 counters with the frequency of occurrence

for the operating data monitored sorted

Actual value can be read in

according to the intervals as for

parameter 16-14 Motor current.

parameter 23-61 Continuous Bin Data.

Output frequency to the motor. Reference for

the relative value is the maximum output

in parameter 23-63 Timed Period Start, and

Starts to count at the date/time programmed

frequency programmed in

stops at the time/date programmed in

parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

parameter 23-64 Timed Period Stop. All

Actual value can be read in

counters can be reset to 0 in

parameter 16-13 Frequency.

parameter 23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data.

Speed of the motor. Reference for relative

value is the maximum motor speed
programmed in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed
High Limit [RPM].

23-63 Timed Period Start

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 0]

23-61 Continuous Bin Data

Range:
0*

[0 4294967295 ]

Array with 10 elements ([0]-[9] below

parameter number in display). Press [OK] and

Function:

Date format depends on setting in

Array with 10 elements ([0]-[9] below

parameter number in display). Press [OK] and
step between elements with [] and [].
10 counters with the frequency of
occurrence for the operating variable
monitored, sorted according to the following
intervals:

Set the date and time at which the

trending starts the update of the timed bin
counters.

Counter [0]: 0% - <10%

Counter [1]: 10% - <20%
Counter [2]. 20% - <30%
Counter [3]: 30% - <40%
Counter [4]: 40% - <50%
Counter [5]: 50% - <60%
Counter [6]. 60% - <70%

0-71 Date Format, and time format on

setting in parameter 0-72 Time Format.

NOTICE
The frequency converter has no back-up of the clock
function and the set date/time is reset to default
(2000-01-01 00:00) after a power down unless a Real
Time Clock module with back-up is installed.
Consequently, the logging is stopped until date/time is
readjusted in 0-70 Date and Time. In parameter 0-79 Clock
Fault it is possible to program for a warning in case
clock not has been set properly, e.g. after a power down.

NOTICE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a
battery back-up of the date and time is included.

Counter [7]: 70% - <80%

Counter [8]. 80% - <90%
Counter [9]: 90% - <100% or Max

The above minimum limits for the intervals

are the default limits. These can be changed

23-64 Timed Period Stop

Range:
Size
related*

in parameter 23-65 Minimum Bin Value.

Set the date and time at which the trend

analyses must stop updating the timed bin
counters.
Date format depends on setting in

Starts to count when the frequency

converter is powered up for the first time. All

0-71 Date Format, and time format on

setting in parameter 0-72 Time Format.

counters can be reset to 0 in

parameter 23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data.

Function:
[0 0]

NOTICE
When mounting an Analog I/O MCB 109 option card, a
battery back-up of the date and time is included.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

171

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

23-65 Minimum Bin Value

Range:
Size
related*

3 3

Function:
[0 100
%]

Array with 10 elements ([0]-[9] below

parameter number in display). Press [OK] and
step between elements with [] and [].
Set the minimum limit for each interval in
parameter 23-61 Continuous Bin Data and
parameter 23-62 Timed Bin Data. Example: If
selecting [1] counter and changing setting from
10% to 12%, [0] counter is based on the
interval 0 - <12% and [1] counter on interval
12% - <20%.

23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data

Option:

Function:
Select [1] Do reset to reset all values in

[0] * Do not
reset

parameter 23-61 Continuous Bin Data. After

pressing [OK], the setting of the parameter
value automatically changes to [0] Do not reset.

[1]

Do reset

As value for the fixed speed case, the rated motor size
(kW) is multiplied with a factor (set in %) representing the
power yielded at fixed speed. The difference between this
reference power and the actual power is accumulated and
stored. The difference in energy can be read in
parameter 23-83 Energy Savings.
The accumulated value for the difference in power
consumption is multiplied with the energy cost in local
currency and the investment is subtracted. This calculation
for cost savings can also be read in parameter 23-84 Cost
Savings.
Cost Savings = ( (Reference Power Actual Power)) *
Energy Cost Additional Cost
Break even (payback) occurs when the value read in the
parameter turns from negative to positive.
It is not possible to reset the energy savings counter, but
the counter can be stopped any time by setting
parameter 23-80 Power Reference Factor, to 0.

23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data

Option:

Parameter for settings

Function:
Select [1] Do reset to reset all counters in

Rated Motor Power

1-20 Motor Power [kW]

Power Reference Factor in %

Parameter 23-80 Power

Reference Factor

parameter 23-62 Timed Bin Data.

After pressing [OK] the setting of the

Energy Cost per kWh

Parameter 23-81 Energy Cost

parameter value automatically changes to [0]

Investment

Parameter 23-82 Investment

Do not reset.

Parameters for readout

[0] * Do not
reset

Energy Savings

Parameter 23-83 Energy

Savings

[1]

Actual Power

Parameter 16-10 Power [kW]/

parameter 16-11 Power [hp]

Cost Savings

Parameter 23-84 Cost Savings

Do reset

3.20.5 23-8* Payback counter

Rated power for the

motor size used
(P 1-20/21)
Reference power
(at fixed speed)
(P 23-80)
Actual power yielded
with variable
speed control
(read P 16-10/11)

Table 3.22 Parameter Overview

23-80 Power Reference Factor

Range:
100
%*

[0 100 %]

Illustration 3.66 Comparison of the Reference Power and

Actual Power

172

Set the percentage of the rated motor size (set

in parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or

23-81 Energy Cost

Range:

The difference between the reference power at fixed speed

and the actual power yielded with speed control represent
the actual saving.

Function:

parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP]) which is

supposed to represent the average power
yielded at the time running with fixed speed
(before upgrade with variable speed control).
Must be set to a value different from zero to
start counting.

130BA259.11

The VLT AQUA Drive includes a feature which can give a

rough calculation on payback in cases where the frequency
converter has been installed in an existing plant to ensure
energy saving by changing from fixed to variable speed
control. Reference for the savings is a set value to
represent the average power yielded before the upgrade
with variable speed control.

1*

Function:

[0 - 999999.99 ] Set the actual cost for a kWh in local

currency. If the energy cost is changed
later on it will impact the calculation for
the entire period.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

23-82 Investment
Range:
0*

Function:

[0 999999999 ]

Set the value of the investment spent on

upgrading the plant with speed control, in
same currency as used in

3 3

parameter 23-81 Energy Cost.

23-83 Energy Savings

Range:
0 kWh*

Function:
[0 - 0
kWh]

This parameter allows a readout of the

accumulated difference between the
reference power and the actual output power.
If motor size set in hp (parameter 1-21 Motor
Power [HP]), the equivalent kW value is used
for the energy savings.

23-84 Cost Savings

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 2147483647 ] This parameter allows a readout of the

calculation based on the above equation
(in local currency).

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

173

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.21 Parameters 24-** Application

Functions 2
Parameter group for application monitoring functions.

24-11 Drive Bypass Delay Time

Range:

Function:
which has been programmed for Bypass in
5-40 Function Relay. If a relay delay has also been
programmed in parameter 5-41 On Delay, Relay or

3.21.1 24-1* Drive Bypass

Function for activation of external contactors to bypass the
frequency converter for direct on-line operation of the
motor, in case of trip.

parameter 5-42 Off Delay, Relay, [Relay], this time

must also elapse before the relay action is
performed.

24-10 Drive Bypass Function

Option:

Function:
This parameter determines, what circumstances
will activate the drive bypass function:

[0] * Disabled
[1]

Enabled

If in normal operation, the automatic drive bypass

function is activated at following conditions:
At a Trip Lock or a Trip.
After the programmed number of reset attempts,
programmed in 14-20 Reset Mode or if the Bypass
Delay Timer (parameter 24-11 Drive Bypass Delay
Time) expires before reset attempts have been
completed.

CAUTION
Important! After enabling the drive bypass function, the
Safe Stop function (in versions, where included) is not
complying with standard EN 954-1, Cat. 3 installations
anymore.
24-11 Drive Bypass Delay Time
Range:
0 s*

[0 600 s]

Function:
Programmable in 1 s increments. Once the bypass
function is activated in accordance with the setting
in parameter 24-10 Drive Bypass Function, the
bypass delay timer begins to operate. If the
frequency converter has been set for a number of
restart attempts, the timer will continue to run
while the frequency converter tries to restart.
Should the motor have restarted within the time
period of the bypass delay timer, then the timer is
reset.
Should the motor fail to restart at the end of the
bypass delay time, the drive bypass relay is
activated, which has been programmed for Bypass
in 5-40 Function Relay. If a [Relay Delay] has also
been programmed in parameter 5-41 On Delay,
Relay, [Relay] or parameter 5-42 Off Delay, Relay,
[Relay], this time must also elapse before the relay
action is performed.
Where no restart attempts are programmed, the
timer runs for the delay period set in this
parameter and activates the drive bypass relay,

174

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.22 Parameters 25-** Cascade Controller

Parameters for configuring the Basic Cascade Controller for sequence control of multiple pumps. For a more application
oriented description and wiring examples, see Chapter Application Examples, item Basic Cascade Controller in the Design
Guide.
To configure the Cascade Controller to the actual system and the desired control strategy, it is recommended to follow the
below sequence, starting with parameter group 25-0* System Settings and next parameter group 25-5* Alternation Settings.
These parameter can normally be set in advance.
Parameters in 25-2* Bandwidth Settings and 25-4* Staging Settings, will often be dependent on the dynamic of the system
and final adjustment to be done at the commissioning of the plant.

NOTICE
The Cascade Controller is supposed to operate in closed loop controlled by the built-in PI controller (Closed Loop
selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode). If Open Loop is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode, all fixed
speed pumps will be destaged, but the variable speed pump will still be controlled by the frequency converter, now as
an open loop configuration:

Configuration mode (P 1-00):

Open Loop

Closed Loop

Cascade controller (P 25-00):

Disabled

Enabled

Direct on line

Motor start (P 25-02):

Pump cycling (P 25-04):

130BA279.12

Config. of cascade controller

Soft Starter

Disabled

Enabled

Fixed lead pump (P 25-05):

No

Yes

Number of pumps (P 25-06):

Off

Lead pump alternation (P 25-50):

At
staging

Alternation Event (P 25-51):

At
command

External

Alt. if capacity<50% (P 25-55):

Staging mode at alternation (P 25-56):

At staging
or
command

Alt. timer
interval
P 25-52

Disabled

Enabled

Slow

Quick

Sleep
mode

Predefined
timer
P 25-54

Illustration 3.67 Cascade Controller Sample Set-up

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

175

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.22.1 25-0* System Settings

Parameters related to control principles and configuration
of the system.

25-04 Pump Cycling

Option:
[1] Enabled

25-00 Cascade Controller

Option:

Function:
For operation of multiple devices (pump/fan)
systems where capacity is adapted to actual
load by means of speed control combined
with on/off control of the devices. For
simplicity only pump systems are described.

[0] Disabled

The cascade controller is not active. All builtin relays assigned to pump motors in the
cascade function are de-energised. If a
variable speed pump is connected to the
frequency converter directly (not controlled
by a built-in relay); this pump/fan is
controlled as a single pump system.

Option: Function:
Fixed lead pump means that the variable speed pump
is connected directly to the frequency converter and if
a contactor is applied between frequency converter and
pump, this contactor is not controlled by the frequency
converter.
If operating with parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation
set to other than [0] Off, set this parameter to [0] No.
[0] No

directly to the frequency converter. The

parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation is automatically
set to [0] Off. Built-in relays Relay 1 and Relay 2 can be
assigned to separate fixed speed pumps. In total 3
pumps can be controlled by the frequency converter.

Function:
Motors are connected to the mains directly with a
contactor or with a soft starter. When the value of
parameter 25-02 Motor Start is set to an option
other than [0] Direct on Line, then
parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation is
automatically set to the default of [0] Direct on
Line.

[0]

Direct
on Line

Each fixed speed pump is connected to line

directly via a contactor.

[1]

Soft
Starter

Each fixed speed pump is connected to line via a

soft starter.

[2]

Star
Delta

Fixed pumps connected with star delta starters

are staged in the same way as pumps connected
with soft starters. They are destaged in the same
way as pumps connected directly to line.

25-06 Number of Pumps

Range:
2*

[2 9]

Function:
The number of pumps connected to the cascade
controller including the variable speed pump. If the
variable speed pump is connected directly to the
frequency converter and the other fixed speed
pumps (lag pumps) are controlled by the 2 built-in
relays, 3 pumps can be controlled. If both the
variable speed and fixed speed pumps are to be
controlled by built-in relays, only 2 pumps can be
connected.
If parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump, is set to [0] No:
one variable speed pump and one fixed speed
pump; both controlled by built in relay. If
parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump is set to [1] Yes:
one variable speed pump and one fixed speed
pump controlled by built-in relay.

25-04 Pump Cycling

Option:

The lead pump function can alternate between the

pumps controlled by the 2 built-in relays. One pump
must be connected to the built-in RELAY 1, and the
other pump to RELAY 2. The pump function (Cascade
Pump1 and Cascade Pump2) is automatically assigned
to the relays (maximum 2 pumps can in this case be
controlled from the frequency converter).

[1] Yes The lead pump is fixed (no alternation) and connected

25-02 Motor Start

Option:

The fixed speed pumps are connected/disconnected to have equal running hours for each
pump.

25-05 Fixed Lead Pump

[1] Basic Cascade The cascade controller is active and stages/

Ctrl
destages pumps according to load on the
system.
[2] Motor
Alternation
Only

Function:

Function:
To provide equal hours of operation with fixed
speed pumps, the pump use can be cycled. The
selection of pump cycling is either first in last
out or equal running hours for each pump.

One lead pump, see parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead

Pump. 2 fixed speed pumps controlled by built-in
relays.

[0] Disabled The fixed speed pumps are connected in the order
12 and disconnected in the order 21. (First in
last out).

176

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.22.2 25-2* Bandwidth Settings

25-20 Staging Bandwidth

Parameters for setting the bandwidth within which the

pressure is allowed to operate before staging/destaging
fixed speed pumps. Also includes various timers to stabilise
the control.

Range:

Function:

3 3

25-20 Staging Bandwidth

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[1 par.
25-21
%]

Set the staging bandwidth (SBW) percentage

to accommodate normal system pressure
fluctuation. In cascade control systems, to
avoid frequent switching of fixed speed
pumps, the desired system pressure is typically
kept within a bandwidth rather than at a
constant level.
The SBW is programmed as a percentage of
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. For
example, if the maximum reference is 6 bar,
the setpoint is 5 bar and the SBW is set to
10%, a system pressure between 4.5 and 5.5
bar is tolerated. No staging or de-staging will
occur within this bandwidth.

Illustration 3.69 Staging Bandwidth

25-21 Override Bandwidth

Range:
100
%*

[ par.
25-20 100 %]

Function:
When a large and quick change in the system
demand occurs (such as a sudden water
demand), the system pressure rapidly changes
and an immediate staging or destaging of a
fixed speed pump becomes necessary to match
the requirement. The override bandwidth (OBW)
is programmed to override the staging/
destaging timer (parameter 25-23 SBW Staging
Delay and parameter 25-24 SBW Destaging Delay)
for immediate response.
The OBW must always be programmed to a
higher value than the value set in
parameter 25-20 Staging Bandwidth. The OBW is
a percentage of parameter 3-02 Minimum

Illustration 3.68 Staging Bandwidth

Size
related*

[1 par.
25-21
%]

Reference and parameter 3-03 Maximum

Reference.

Set the staging bandwidth (SBW) percentage

to accommodate normal system pressure
fluctuation. In cascade control systems, to
avoid frequent switching of fixed speed
pumps, the desired system pressure is typically
kept within a bandwidth rather than at a
constant level.
The SBW is programmed as a percentage of
20-13 Minimum Reference and 20-14 Maximum
Reference. For example, if the setpoint is 5 bar
and the SBW is set to 10%, a system pressure
between 4.5 and 5.5 bar is tolerated. No
staging or de-staging will occur within this
bandwidth.

Illustration 3.71

Setting the OBW too close to the SBW could

defeat the purpose with frequent staging at
momentary pressure changes. Setting the OBW
too high might lead to unacceptably high or
low pressure in the system while the SBW
timers are running. The value can be optimized
with increased familiarity with the system. See
parameter 25-25 OBW Time.
To avoid unintended staging during the
commissioning phase and fine tuning of the

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

177

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

25-21 Override Bandwidth

25-24 SBW Destaging Delay

Range:

Range:

Function:
controller, initially leave the OBW at the factory
setting of 100% (Off). When the fine tuning is
completed, the OBW should be set to the
desired value. An initial value of 10% is
suggested.

[0 3000
s]

25-22 Fixed Speed Bandwidth

Size
related*

Function:
[ par.
25-20 par.
25-21
%]

When the cascade control system is running

normally and the frequency converter issues
a trip alarm, it is important to maintain the
system head. The cascade controller does
this by continuing to stage/destage the fixed
speed pump on and off. Due to the fact that
keeping the head at the setpoint would
require frequent staging and destaging when
only a fixed speed pump is running, a wider
Fixed Speed Bandwidth (FSBW) is used
instead of SBW. It is possible to stop the
fixed speed pumps, in case of an alarm
situation, by pressing [Off] or [Hand On] or if
the signal programmed for Start on digital
input goes low.
In case the issued alarm is a trip-lock alarm
then the cascade controller must stop the
system immediately by cutting out all the
fixed speed pumps. This is basically the same
as Emergency Stop (Coast/Coast inverse
Command) for the cascade controller.

25-23 SBW Staging Delay

Range:
15
s*

[0 3000
s]

Function:
Immediate staging of a fixed speed pump is not
desirable when a momentary pressure drop in the
system exceeds the Staging Bandwidth (SBW).
Staging is delayed by the length of time
programmed. If the pressure increases to within the
SBW before the timer has elapsed, the timer is
reset.

(27-24) SBW destage delay

SBW
(27-20)
Setpoint
SBW
(27-20)

Illustration 3.73 SBW Destaging Delay

25-25 OBW Time

Range:
10
s*

[0 300 s]

Function:
Staging a fixed speed pump creates a momentary
pressure peak in the system, which might exceed
the Override Bandwidth (OBW). It is not desirable to
destage a pump in response to a staging pressure
peak. The OBW Time can be programmed to
prevent staging until the system pressure has
stabilised and normal control established. Set the
timer to a value that allows the system to stabilise
after staging. The 10 s factory setting is appropriate
in most applications. In highly dynamic systems, a
shorter time may be desirable.

OBW (27-71)

130BA370.11

Range:

Immediate destaging of a fixed speed pump is not

desirable when a momentary pressure increase in
the system that exceeds the Staging Bandwidth
(SBW). Destaging is delayed by the length of time
programmed. If the pressure decreases to within
the SBW before the timer has elapsed, the timer is
reset.
175ZA671.11

3 3

15
s*

Function:

SBW (27-70)
Actual head
Setpoint
SBW (27-70)

OBW timer (27-25)

OBW (27-71)

Illustration 3.74 OBW Time

Illustration 3.72 SBW Staging Delay

178

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

25-26 Destage At No-Flow

25-30 Destage Function Time

Option:

Range:

Function:

Function:
system requirements satisfied. In this situation, the
adjustable speed pump contributes a little to the
system. When the programmed value of the timer
expires, a stage is removed, avoiding dead head
water circulation in the adjustable speed pump.

The Destage at No-Flow parameter ensures that

when a no-flow situation occurs, the fixed speed
pumps are destaged one-by-one until the no-flow
signal disappears. This requires that No Flow
Detection is active. See parameter group 22-2*
If [0] Disabled is selected, the cascade controller
does not change the normal behavior of the
system.

175ZA640.11

No-Flow Detection.

F VLT pump

Pump

[0] * Disabled
[1]

switch-off

Enabled

25-27 Stage Function

Option:

Function:
If the Stage Function is set to [0] Disabled,

Fmin
(4-12)

parameter 25-28 Stage Function Time is not

activated.
[0] Disabled

De-stage

[1] Enabled

timer period
(27-27)

Illustration 3.75 Destage Function Time

25-28 Stage Function Time

Range:
15
s*

[0 300 s]

Function:
The Stage Function Time is programmed to avoid
frequent staging of the fixed speed pumps. The
Stage Function Time starts if it is [1] Enabled by
parameter 25-27 Stage Function, and when the
variable speed pump is running at Motor Speed
High Limit, parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM] or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz],
with at least one fixed speed pump in the stop
position. When the programmed value of the timer
expires, a fixed speed pump is staged.

3.22.3 25-4* Staging Settings

Parameters determining conditions for staging/destaging
the pumps.
25-40 Ramp Down Delay
Range:
10 s*

[0 120 s]

25-29 Destage Function

Option:

Function:
The destage function ensures that the lowest
numbers of pumps are running to save energy and
to avoid dead head water circulation in the
variable speed pump. If the destage function is set
to [0] Disabled, parameter 25-30 Destage Function

[1] Enabled

25-30 Destage Function Time

Range:

25-41 Ramp Up Delay

2 s*

[0] Disabled

15
s*

Use this option only if [1] Soft Starter or [2] Star

Delta is selected in parameter 25-02 Motor Start.

Range:

Time is not activated.

Function:

[0 - The destage function timer is programmable to

300 s] avoid frequent staging/destaging of the fixed speed
pumps. The destage function time starts when the

Function:
When adding a fixed speed pump controlled by
a soft starter or a star delta starter, it is possible
to delay the ramp down of the lead pump until
a preset time after the start of the fixed speed
pump to eliminate pressure surges or water
hammer in the system.

[0 12 s]

Function:
When removing a fixed speed pump controlled by
a soft starter, it is possible to delay the ramp up of
the lead pump until a preset time after the
stopping of the fixed speed pump to eliminate
pressure surges or water hammer in the system.
Only to be used if [1] Soft Starter is selected in
parameter 25-02 Motor Start.

adjustable speed pump is running at

parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz], with one
or more fixed speed pumps in operation and

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

179

3 3

Programming Guide

130BC371.10

Parameter Description

Staging
Speed
Fixed speed pump
(controlled by soft starter)

3 3

NOTICE
Fixed pumps connected with star delta starters are
staged in the same way as pumps connected with soft
starters. They are destaged in the same way as pumps
connected directly to line.
25-42 Staging Threshold
Range:
Size
related*

Lead pump
(controlled by freq. conv.)

t1

Function:
[0 100
%]

When adding a fixed speed pump, to prevent

an overshoot of pressure, the variable speed
pump ramps down to a lower speed. When
the variable speed pump reaches the Staging
Speed the fixed speed pump is staged on.
The staging threshold is used to calculate the
speed of the variable speed pump when the
cut-in point of the fixed speed pump occurs.
The calculation of the staging threshold is the

Time

P 25-40

ratio of parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit

[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit

Lead pump starts

to ramp down

[Hz], to the parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High

Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed

Cascade Controller
calls for another
pump

High Limit [Hz], expressed in percent.

Staging threshold must range from
STAGE% = LOW 100%
HIGH

Illustration 3.76 Staging

to 100%, where nLOW is motor speed low limit

Destaging
Speed

Fixed speed
pump

Motor speed
high limit
Staging speed

Lead pump
(controlled by freq. conv.)

Motor speed
low limit

130BA366.10

130BC372.10

and nHIGH is Motor Speed High Limit.

Variable speed
pump

Seconds

Illustration 3.78 Staging Threshold

Fixed speed pump

(controlled by soft starter)

t2

NOTICE
If the set-point is reached after staging before the
variable speed pump reaches its minimum speed - the
system will enter the state closed loop as soon as the
feedback pressure is crossing the set-point.

Time

P 25-41
Lead pump starts
to ramp up
Cascade Controller
prepares for
removing pump

Illustration 3.77 Destaging

180

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

25-43 Destaging Threshold

25-45 Staging Speed [Hz]

Range:

Range:

Function:

Size
related*

[0 100
%]

When removing a fixed speed pump to

prevent an undershoot of pressure, the
variable speed pump ramps up to a higher
speed. When the variable speed pump
reaches the Destaging Speed the fixed
speed pump is destaged. The destaging
threshold is used to calculate the speed of
the variable speed pump when the destaging
of the fixed speed pump occurs. The
calculation of the destaging threshold is the

0
Hz*

Function:

[0 0 Hz]

Staging speed calculation is based on

parameter 25-42 Staging Threshold, and
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
Staging speed is calculated with the following
formula:

ratio of parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit

[RPM] or parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit

STAGE = HIGH

[Hz], to the parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High

High Limit [Hz], expressed in percent.

threshold.

LOW
100%
HIGH

to 100%, where nLOW

is motor speed low limit and nHIGH is Motor

Motor speed
high limit

Variable speed
pump

Destaging
speed

25-46 Destaging Speed [RPM]

Range:
0
RPM*

Function:
[000 0 RPM]

130BA367.10

Speed High Limit.

Fixed speed
pump

Motor speed
low limit
3

on parameter 25-43 Destaging Threshold, and

Seconds

Destaging speed is calculated with the

following formula:
DESTAGE = HIGH

NOTICE

where nHIGH is motor

destaging threshold.

25-47 Destaging Speed [Hz]

Range:
0
Hz*

25-44 Staging Speed [RPM]

Function:
[000 0 RPM]

DESTAGE%
100

speed high limit and nDESTAGE100% is the value of

If the setpoint is reached after staging before the

variable speed pump reaches its maximum speed, the
system will enter the state closed loop as soon as the
feedback pressure is crossing the setpoint.

0
RPM*

Readout of the below calculated value for

destaging speed. When removing a fixed speed
pump to prevent an undershoot of pressure,
the variable speed pump ramps up to a higher
speed. When the variable speed pump reaches
the Destaging Speed, the fixed speed pump is
destaged. Destaging speed is calculated based
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].

Illustration 3.79 Destaging Threshold

Range:

where nHIGH is motor speed

high limit and nSTAGE100% is the value of staging

STAGE % =

STAGE%
100

Limit [RPM] or parameter 4-14 Motor Speed

Destaging threshold must range from

Readout of the below calculated value for staging

speed. When adding a fixed speed pump to
prevent an overshoot of pressure, the variable
speed pump ramps down to a lower speed. When
the variable speed pump reaches the Staging
Speed the fixed speed pump is staged on.

Readout of the below calculated value for

staging speed. When adding a fixed speed
pump to prevent an overshoot of pressure, the
variable speed pump ramps down to a lower
speed. When the variable speed pump reaches
the Staging Speed, the fixed speed pump is
staged on. Staging speed calculation is based
on parameter 25-42 Staging Threshold, and

[0 0 Hz]

Function:
Readout of the below calculated value for
destaging speed. When removing a fixed speed
pump to prevent an undershoot of pressure, the
variable speed pump ramps up to a higher speed.
When the variable speed pump reaches the
Destaging Speed, the fixed speed pump is
destaged. Destaging speed is calculated based on
parameter 25-43 Destaging Threshold, and
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
Destaging speed is calculated with the following
formula:
DESTAGE%
100

parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].

DESTAGE = HIGH

Staging speed is calculated with the following

formula:

where nHIGH is motor speed high limit and

nDESTAGE100% is the value of destaging threshold.

STAGE%
STAGE = HIGH
100

where nHIGH is motor speed high limit and

nSTAGE100% is the value of staging threshold.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

181

3 3

Programming Guide

Motor speed
high limit
Destaging
speed
Motor speed
low limit

3 3

Motor speed
high limit
Destaging
speed

Variable speed
pump

Controlled stop
command
activated

130BA368.10

Parameter Description

25-51 Alternation Event

Option:

Function:
This parameter is only active if the options [2]
At Command or [3] At Staging or Command

Seconds

have been selected in parameter 25-50 Lead

Pump Alternation. If an Alternation Event is
selected, the alternation of lead pump takes
place every time the event occurs.

Fixed speed
pump

Motor speed
low limit

Seconds

Motor speed
high limit
Destaging
speed

Fixed speed
pump

[0]

External

Alternation takes place when a signal is

applied to one of the digital inputs on the
terminal strip and this input has been assigned

to [121] Lead Pump Alternation in parameter

group 5-1*, Digital Inputs.

Motor speed
low limit

Seconds

[1]

Illustration 3.80 Destaging Speed

3.22.4 25-5* Alternation Settings

Parameters for defining the conditions for alternation of
the variable speed pump (lead), if selected as of the
control strategy.

[2]

Alternation
Time
Interval

Alternation takes place every time

parameter 25-52 Alternation Time Interval,
expires.

Sleep Mode Alternation takes place each time the lead

pump goes into sleep mode. 20-23 Setpoint 3
must be set to [1] Sleep Mode or an external
signal applied for this function.

[3]

Predefined
Time

Alternation takes place at a defined time of the

day. If parameter 25-54 Alternation Predefined

25-50 Lead Pump Alternation

Option:

Function:
Lead pump alternation equalizes the use of
pumps by periodically changing the pump that
is speed controlled. This ensures that pumps are
equally used over time. Alternation equalizes
the usage of pumps by always selecting the
pump with the lowest number of used hours to
stage on next.

[0] Off

Time, is set, the alternation is carried out every

day at the specified time. Default time is
midnight (00:00 or 12:00AM depending on the
time format).

25-52 Alternation Time Interval

Range:
24
h*

Function:
If [1] Alternation Time Interval option in

[1 999 h]

parameter 25-51 Alternation Event, is selected, the

alternation of the variable speed pump takes
place every time the Alternation Time Interval

No alternation of lead pump function takes

place. It is not possible to set this parameter to

expires (can be checked out in

options other that [0] Off if

parameter 25-53 Alternation Timer Value).

parameter 25-02 Motor Start is set other than [0]

Direct on Line.
[1] At staging

Alternation of the lead pump function takes

place when staging another pump.

[2] At
command

Alternation of the lead pump function takes

place at an external command signal or a pre-

25-53 Alternation Timer Value

Range:
0*

[0 - 7 ] Readout parameter for the Alternation Time

Interval value set in parameter 25-52 Alternation
Time Interval.

programmed event. See

parameter 25-51 Alternation Event for available
options.
[3] At staging
or
command

Alternation of the variable speed (lead) pump

takes place at staging or the At Command
signal. (See above.)

Function:

25-54 Alternation Predefined Time

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 0]

NOTICE
It is not possible to select other than [0] Off if
parameter 25-05 Fixed Lead Pump is set to [1] Yes.

182

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

If option [3] Predefined Time in

parameter 25-51 Alternation Event, is selected,
the variable speed pump alternation is carried
out every day at the specified time set in
Alternation Predefined Time. Default time is
midnight (00:00 or 12:00AM depending on the
time format).

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

Option:

Coast

Function:
If [1] Enabled is selected, the pump alternation
can only occur if the capacity is equal to or
below 50%. The capacity calculation is the ratio
of running pumps (including the variable speed
pump) to the total number of available pumps
(including variable speed pump, but not those
interlocked).

Mains operation
200ms-2s (default 500ns)5 s

3 3
Time

Illustration 3.82 Quick Configuration

For the Basic cascade controller all pumps are

equal size.
[0]

Disabled The lead pump alternation will take place at any

pump capacity.

[1]

Enabled

The lead pump function will be alternated only if

the numbers of pumps running are providing less
than 50% of total pump capacity.

25-58 Run Next Pump Delay

Range:
0.1 s*

Function:

[0.1 5 s]

This parameter is only active if the option

selected in parameter 25-50 Lead Pump
Alternation, is different from [0] Off.
This parameter sets the time between stopping
the old variable speed pump and starting

NOTICE

another pump as a new variable speed pump.

Only valid if parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation is

different from [0] Off.

Refer to 25-56 Staging Mode at Alternation, the

illustration for description of staging and
alternation.

25-56 Staging Mode at Alternation

Option:

Function:

25-59 Run on Mains Delay

[0] * Slow
[1]

Time

100ms

NRUNNING
Capacity =
100%
NTOTAL

130BA614.10

25-55 Alternate if Load < 50%

Quick This parameter is only active if the option selected

in parameter 25-50 Lead Pump Alternation is different

Range:
0.5 s*

from [0] Off.

2 types of staging and destaging of pumps are
possible. Slow transfer makes staging and destaging
smooth. Quick Transfer makes staging and destaging
as fast as possible; the variable speed pump is just
cut out (coasted).
[0] Slow: At alternation, the variable speed pump is
ramped up to maximum speed and then ramped
down to a stand still.
[1] Quick: At alternation, the variable speed pump is
ramped up to maximum speed and then coasted to
stand still.

Alternation command/PID stops

fMAX
Destaging freq.
fMIN.

Mains operation
PID contr.
starts

Time

130BA613.10

Illustration 3.81 and Illustration 3.82 show Alternation

in both Quick and Slow configurations.

Function:

[ par.
25-58 - 5
s]

This parameter is only active if the option

selected in parameter 25-50 Lead Pump
Alternation, is different from [0] Off.
This parameter sets the time between
stopping the old variable speed pump and
starting this pump as a new fixed speed
pump. Refer to Illustration 3.81 for description
of staging and alternation.

3.22.5 25-8* Status

Readout parameters informing about the operating status
of the cascade controller and the pumps controlled.
25-80 Cascade Status
Range:
0*

[0 - 25 ]

Function:
Read out of the status of the cascade controller.

fMAX
Staging freq.
Mains operation

5s

Time

Illustration 3.81 Slow Configuration

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

183

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

25-81 Pump Status

25-85 Relay ON Time

Range:

Range:

0*

[0 25 ]

3 3

Function:

cascade controller is monitoring the Relay

ON time.

Pump Status shows the status for the number of

pumps selected in parameter 25-06 Number of Pumps.
It is a readout of the status for each of the pumps
showing a string, which consists of pump number
and the current status of the pump.
Example: Readout is with the abbreviation like 1:D
2:O This means that pump 1 is running and speed
controlled by the frequency converter and pump 2 is
stopped.

25-86 Reset Relay Counters

Option:

25-82 Lead Pump

Range:
[ 0 - par.
25-06 ]

Resets all elements in parameter 25-85 Relay

[0] * Do not reset
Do reset

3.22.6 25-9* Service

Function:
Readout parameter for the actual variable speed
pump in the system. The Lead Pump parameter
is updated to reflect the current variable speed
pump in the system when an alternation takes
place. If no lead pump is selected (cascade
controller disabled or all pumps interlocked) the
display will show NONE.

Parameters used in case of service on one or more of the

pumps controlled.
25-90 Pump Interlock
Option:

Range:
[0 4]

Function:
Read out of the status for each of the relays
assigned to control the pumps. Every element in
the array represents a relay. If a relay is activated,
the corresponding element is set to On. If a relay
is deactivated, the corresponding element is set to
Off.

25-84 Pump ON Time

Range:
0 h*

[0 2147483647 h]

The digital input interlocks are selected as Pump 1-3

Interlock [130132] in parameter group 5-1*, Digital
Inputs.
[0] * Off

The pump is active for staging/destaging.

[1]

The Pump Interlock command is given. If a pump is

running it is immediately destaged. If the pump is not
running it is not allowed to stage on.

On

Function:
Readout of the value for Pump ON Time.
The cascade controller has separate
counters for the pumps and for the relays
that control the pumps. Pump ON Time
monitors the operating hours of each
pump. The value of each Pump ON Time
counter can be reset to 0 by writing in the
parameter, e.g. if the pump is replaced in
case of service.

Function:
In this parameter, it is possible to disable one or more
of the fixed lead pumps. For example, the pump will
not be selected for staging on even if it is the next
pump in the operation sequence. It is not possible to
disable the lead pump with the Pump Interlock
command.

25-83 Relay Status

0*

Function:
ON Time counters.

[1]

0*

Function:

25-91 Manual Alternation

Range:
0*

[ 0 - par.
25-06 ]

25-85 Relay ON Time

Range:
0
h*

[0 2147483647
h]

Function:
Readout parameter for the actual variable speed
pump in the system. The Lead Pump parameter
is updated to reflect the current variable speed
pump in the system when an alternation takes
place. If no lead pump is selected (cascade
controller disabled or all pumps interlocked) the
display will show NONE.

Function:
Readout of the value for Relay ON time. The
cascade controller has separate counters for
the pumps and for the relays that control
the pumps. Pump cycling is always done
based on the relay counters, otherwise it
would always use the new pump if a pump
is replaced and its value in
parameter 25-84 Pump ON Time is reset. To
use parameter 25-04 Pump Cycling, the

184

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.23 Parameters 26-** Analog I/O Option

MCB 109
The Analog I/O Option MCB 109 extends the functionality
of VLT AQUA Drive FC 202 Series frequency converters, by
adding a number of additional, programmable analog
inputs and outputs. This could be especially useful in
control installations where the frequency converter may be
used as decentral I/O, obviating the need for an outstation
and thus reducing cost. It also gives flexibility in project
planning.

Terminal

Parameters
Analog inputs (read)

X42/1

18-30

X42/3

18-31

X42/5

18-32

3 3

Analog outputs (write)

X42/7

18-33

X42/9

18-34

X42/11

18-35
Analog inputs (read)

53

16-62

54

NOTICE

16-64
Analog output

The maximum current for the analog outputs 0-10 V is 1

mA.

NOTICE
Where Live Zero Monitoring is used, it is important that
any analog inputs not being used for the frequency
controller, i.e. being used as part of the Building
Management System decentral I/O, should have their
Live Zero function disabled.

42

6-63
Relays

Relay 1 Term 1, 2, 3

16-71

Relay 2 Term 4, 5, 6

16-71

NOTICE

The relay outputs must be enabled via Control Word Bit

11 (Relay 1) and Bit 12 (Relay 2)

Table 3.24 Relevant Parameters

Terminal

Parameters
Analog inputs

X42/1

26-00, 26-1*

X42/3

26-01, 26-2*

X42/5

26-02, 26-3*
Analog outputs

X42/7

26-4*

X42/9

26-5*

X42/11

26-6*
Analog inputs

53

6-1*

54

6-2*
Analog output

42

6-5*

Setting of on-board Real Time Clock.

The Analog I/O option incorporates a real time clock with
battery back-up. This can be used as back up of the clock
function included in the frequency converter as standard.
See parameter group 0-7*, Clock Settings.
The Analog I/O option can be used for the control of
devices such as actuators or valves, using the Extended
Closed loop facility, thus removing control from the
existing control system. See chapter 3.18 Parameters 21-**
Extended Closed Loop. There are three independent closed
loop PID controllers.

Relays
Relay 1 Term 1, 2, 3

5-4*

Relay 2 Term 4, 5, 6

5-4*

Table 3.23 Relevant Parameters

It is also possible to read the analog inputs, write to the

analog outputs and control the relays, using communication via the serial bus. In this instance, these are the
relevant parameters.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

185

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

26-00 Terminal X42/1 Mode

26-01 Terminal X42/3 Mode

Option:

Option:

Function:
Terminal X42/1 can be programmed as an
analog input accepting a voltage or input
from either Pt1000 (1000 at 0 C) or Ni

3 3

1000 (1000 at 0 C) temperature sensors.

Select the desired mode.

[5]

Function:

Ni 1000
[F]

26-02 Terminal X42/5 Mode

Option:

[2] Pt 1000 [C] and [4] Ni 1000 [C] if

Function:
Terminal X42/5 can be programmed as an
analog input accepting a voltage or input

operating in Celsius - [3] Pt 1000 [F] and [5] Ni

1000 [F] if operating in Fahrenheit.

from either Pt 1000 (1000 at 0 C) or Ni

NOTICE

1000 (1000 at 0 C) temperature sensors.

Select the desired mode.

If the input is not in use, it must be set

for Voltage!

[2] Pt 1000 [C] and [4] Ni 1000 [C] if

operating in Celsius - [3] Pt 1000 [F] and [5] Ni
1000 [F] if operating in Fahrenheit.

If set for temperature and used as feedback,

the unit must be set for either Celsius or

NOTICE

Fahrenheit (20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit,

If the input is not in use, it must be set

for Voltage!

parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit,

parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit or
parameter 21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit).

If set for temperature and used as feedback,

the unit must be set for either Celsius or

[1] * Voltage
[2]

Pt 1000 [C]

[3]

Pt 1000 [F]

[4]

Ni 1000 [C]

[5]

Ni 1000 [F]

Fahrenheit (20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit,

parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit,
parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit or
parameter 21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit).
[1] * Voltage

26-01 Terminal X42/3 Mode

Option:

Function:
Terminal X42/3 can be programmed as an
analog input accepting a voltage or input from
either Pt 1000 or Ni 1000 temperature sensors.
Select the desired mode.
[2] Pt 1000 [C] and [4] Ni 1000 [C] if operating
in Celsius - [3] Pt 1000 [F] and [5] Ni 1000 [F] if
operating in Fahrenheit.

[2]

Pt 1000 [C]

[3]

Pt 1000 [F]

[4]

Ni 1000 [C]

[5]

Ni 1000 [F]

26-10 Terminal X42/1 Low Voltage

Range:
0.07 V*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-31 V]

the low reference/feedback value set in

WARNING
If the input is not in use, it must be set
for Voltage!
If set for temperature and used as feedback,
the unit must be set for either Celsius or

parameter 26-14 Term. X42/1 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value.

26-11 Terminal X42/1 High Voltage

Range:
10 V*

Fahrenheit (20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit,

[ par. 6-30
- 10 V]

[1]

Voltage

[2]

Pt 1000
[C]

[3]

Pt 1000
[F]

[4]

Ni 1000
[C]

186

Function:
Enter the high voltage value. This analog
input scaling value should correspond to the

parameter 21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit,

high reference/feedback value set in

parameter 21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit or

parameter 26-15 Term. X42/1 High Ref./Feedb.

Value.

parameter 21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit).

Enter the low voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to

26-14 Term. X42/1 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Function:
Enter the analog input scaling value that
corresponds to the low voltage value set
in parameter 26-10 Terminal X42/1 Low
Voltage.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

26-15 Term. X42/1 High Ref./Feedb. Value

26-25 Term. X42/3 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:

Range:

100*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the analog input scaling value

that corresponds to the high voltage

100*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the analog input scaling value

that corresponds to the high voltage

value set in parameter 26-11 Terminal

value set in parameter 26-21 Terminal

X42/1 High Voltage.

X42/3 High Voltage.

26-16 Term. X42/1 Filter Time Constant

26-26 Term. X42/3 Filter Time Constant

Range:

Range:

Function:

0.001 s*

[0.001 10 s]

Function:

high time constant value improves

dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.

Enter the time constant. This is a firstorder digital low pass filter time constant
for suppressing noise in terminal X42/3. A
high time constant value improves
dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.

NOTICE

NOTICE

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

Enter the time constant. This is a firstorder digital low pass filter time constant
for suppressing noise in terminal X42/1. A

0.001 s*

[0.001 10 s]

26-17 Term. X42/1 Live Zero

26-27 Term. X42/3 Live Zero

Option:

Option:

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to enable the
Live Zero monitoring. E.g. where the analog input
is a of the frequency converter control, rather
than being used as of a decentral I/O system,
such as a Building Management System.

[0]

Disabled

[0]

[1] * Enabled

Range:

26-30 Terminal X42/5 Low Voltage

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-31 V]

Disabled

[1] * Enabled

26-20 Terminal X42/3 Low Voltage

0.07 V*

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to enable the
Live Zero monitoring. E.g. where the analog input
is a of the frequency converter control, rather
than being used as of a decentral I/O system,
such as a Building Management System.

Range:

Enter the low voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to

0.07 V*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-31 V]

Enter the low voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to

the low reference/feedback value set in

the low reference/feedback value set in

parameter 26-24 Term. X42/3 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value.

parameter 26-34 Term. X42/5 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value.

26-21 Terminal X42/3 High Voltage

26-31 Terminal X42/5 High Voltage

Range:

Range:

10 V*

[ par. 6-30
- 10 V]

Function:
Enter the high voltage value. This analog
input scaling value should correspond to the

10 V*

[ par. 6-30
- 10 V]

Function:
Enter the high voltage value. This analog
input scaling value should correspond to the

high reference/feedback value set in

high reference/feedback value set in

parameter 26-25 Term. X42/3 High Ref./Feedb.

Value.

parameter 26-35 Term. X42/5 High Ref./Feedb.

Value.

26-24 Term. X42/3 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

26-34 Term. X42/5 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:

Range:

0*

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

MG20O802

Function:
Enter the analog input scaling value that
corresponds to the low voltage value set

0*

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Function:
Enter the analog input scaling value that
corresponds to the low voltage value set

in parameter 26-20 Terminal X42/3 Low

in parameter 26-30 Terminal X42/5 Low

Voltage.

Voltage.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

187

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

26-35 Term. X42/5 High Ref./Feedb. Value

26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output

Range:

Option:

100*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

X42/3 High Voltage.

26-36 Term. X42/5 Filter Time Constant

Range:
0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 10 s]

[RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed

Enter the analog input scaling value

that corresponds to the high voltage
value set in parameter 26-21 Terminal

3 3

Enter the time constant. This is a firstorder digital low pass filter time constant
for suppressing noise in terminal X42/5. A
high time constant value improves
dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.

NOTICE

High Limit [Hz]), (0-20 mA)

[108] Torque +-160%
[109] Out frq 0-Fmax
[113] Ext. Closed
Loop 1

0-100%, (0-20 mA)

[114] Ext. Closed

Loop 2

0-100%, (0-20 mA)

[115] Ext. Closed

Loop 3

0-100%, (0-20 mA)

[139] Bus ctrl.

0-100%, (0-20 mA)

[141] Bus ctrl t.o.

0-100%, (0-20 mA)

26-41 Terminal X42/7 Min. Scale

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

Range:
0 %*

26-37 Term. X42/5 Live Zero

Option:

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to enable the
Live Zero monitoring. E.g. where the analog input
is a of the frequency converter control, rather
than being used as of a decentral I/O system,
such as a Building Management System.

[0]

Disabled

setting in parameter 26-42 Terminal X42/7 Max.

Scale.
See principle graph for parameter 6-51 Terminal 42
Output Min Scale.

Range:

26-40 Terminal X42/7 Output

100
%*

Function:
Set the function of terminal X42/7 as an
analog voltage output.

[0] *

[0 200
%]

No operation

[100] Output freq.

0-100

0-100 Hz, (0-20 mA)

[101] Reference MinMax

Minimum reference - Maximum

reference, (0-20 mA)

[102] Feedback
+-200%

-200% to +200% of

[103] Motor cur. 0Imax

0 - Inverter Max. Current

[104] Torque 0-Tlim

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, (0-20

mA)

0 - Torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque

[105] Torque 0-Tnom

0 - Motor rated torque, (0-20 mA)

[106] Power 0-Pnom

0 - Motor rated power, (0-20 mA)

[107] Speed 0HighLim

0 - Speed High Limit

(parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit

Function:
Scale the maximum output of the selected analog
signal at terminal X42/7. Set the value to the
maximum value of the voltage signal output.
Scale the output to give a voltage lower than 10
V at full scale; or 10 V at an output below 100%
of the maximum signal value. If 10 V is the
desired output current at a value between
0-100% of the full-scale output, programme the
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 10
V. If a voltage between 0 and 10 V is desired at
maximum output, calculate the percentage as
follows:
10V
x 100%
desired maximum voltage

i.e.

(parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (0-20

mA)
Limit Motor Mode), (0-20 mA)

188

Function:

[0 Scale the minimum output of the selected analog

200 %] signal at terminal X42/7, as a percentage of the
maximum signal level. E.g. if a 0 V (or 0 Hz) is
desired at 25% of the maximum output value.
Then programme 25%. Scaling values up to 100%
can never be higher than the corresponding

26-42 Terminal X42/7 Max. Scale

[1] * Enabled

Option:

Function:

5V :

10V
100% = 200%
5V

See principle graph for parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output

Max Scale.
26-43 Terminal X42/7 Bus Control
Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Holds the level of terminal X42/7 if

controlled by bus.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

26-44 Terminal X42/7 Timeout Preset

26-52 Terminal X42/9 Max. Scale

Range:

Range:

0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100
%]

Holds the preset level of terminal X42/7.

In case of a bus timeout and a timeout function

100
%*

is selected in parameter 26-50 Terminal X42/9

[0 200
%]

Output the output will preset to this level.

26-50 Terminal X42/9 Output

Option:

Function:
Set the function of terminal X42/9.

[0] *

No operation

[100] Output freq.

0-100

0-100 Hz, (0-20 mA)

[101] Reference MinMax

Minimum reference - Maximum

reference, (0-20 mA)

[102] Feedback
+-200%

-200% to +200% of

[103] Motor cur. 0Imax

0 - Inverter Max. Current

i.e.

(parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (0-20

mA)
0 - Torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque

[105] Torque 0-Tnom

0 - Motor rated torque, (0-20 mA)

[106] Power 0-Pnom

0 - Motor rated power, (0-20 mA)

26-53 Terminal X42/9 Bus Control

Range:
0 %*

Range:

(parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit

[0 - 100
%]

Function:
Holds the preset level of terminal X42/9.
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout function
is selected in parameter 26-60 Terminal X42/11

[RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed

Output the output will preset to this level.

High Limit [Hz]), (0-20 mA)

[108] Torque +-160%

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Holds the level of terminal X42/9 if

controlled by bus.

26-54 Terminal X42/9 Timeout Preset

0 %*

0 - Speed High Limit

10V
x 100% = 200%
5V

See principle graph for parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output

Max Scale.

Limit Motor Mode), (0-20 mA)

[107] Speed 0HighLim

Scale the maximum output of the selected analog

signal at terminal X42/9. Set the value to the
maximum value of the voltage signal output.
Scale the output to give a voltage lower than 10
V at full scale; or 10 V at an output below 100%
of the maximum signal value. If 10 V is the
desired output current at a value between
0-100% of the full-scale output, programme the
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 10
V. If a voltage between 0 and 10V is desired at
maximum output, calculate the percentage as
follows:

5V :

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, (0-20

mA)

[104] Torque 0-Tlim

Function:

26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output

[109] Out frq 0-Fmax

Option:

Function:

[113] Ext. Closed

Loop 1

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[114] Ext. Closed

Loop 2

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[0] *

0-100 Hz, (0-20 mA)

[115] Ext. Closed

Loop 3

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[100] Output freq.

0-100

[139] Bus ctrl.

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[101] Reference MinMax

Minimum reference - Maximum

reference, (0-20 mA)

[141] Bus ctrl t.o.

0 - 100%, (0-20 mA)

[102] Feedback
+-200%

-200% to +200% of

[103] Motor cur. 0Imax

0 - Inverter Max. Current

[104] Torque 0-Tlim

0 - Torque limit (parameter 4-16 Torque

Set the function of terminal X42/11.

No operation

26-51 Terminal X42/9 Min. Scale

Range:
0 %*

[0 200 %]

Function:
Scale the minimum output of the selected analog
signal at terminal X42/9, as a percentage of the
maximum signal level. E.g. if a 0 V is desired at
25% of the maximum output value. Then
programme 25%. Scaling values up to 100% can

(parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (0-20

mA)
Limit Motor Mode), (0-20 mA)

never be higher than the corresponding setting in

[105] Torque 0-Tnom

0 - Motor rated torque, (0-20 mA)

parameter 26-52 Terminal X42/9 Max. Scale.

[106] Power 0-Pnom

0 - Motor rated power, (0-20 mA)

[107] Speed 0HighLim

0 - Speed High Limit

See principle graph for parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output

Min Scale.

MG20O802

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference, (0-20

mA)

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

(parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit

189

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

26-60 Terminal X42/11 Output

26-64 Terminal X42/11 Timeout Preset

Option:

Range:

Function:
[RPM] and parameter 4-14 Motor Speed
High Limit [Hz]), (0-20 mA)

[108] Torque +-160%

[109] Out frq 0-Fmax

0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Holds the preset level of terminal X42/11.

In case a bus time-out and a time-out
function are selected, the output will preset
to this level.

[113] Ext. Closed Loop 0-100%, (0-20 mA)

1
[114] Ext. Closed Loop 0-100%, (0-20 mA)
2
[115] Ext. Closed Loop 0-100%, (0-20 mA)
3
[139] Bus ctrl.

0-100%, (0-20 mA)

[141] Bus ctrl t.o.

0-100%, (0-20 mA)

26-61 Terminal X42/11 Min. Scale

Range:
0 %*

[0 200 %]

Function:
Scale the minimum output of the selected analog
signal at terminal X42/11, as a percentage of the
maximum signal level. E.g. if a 0 V is desired at
25% of the maximum output value. Then
programme 25%. Scaling values up to 100% can
never be higher than the corresponding setting in
parameter 26-62 Terminal X42/11 Max. Scale.

See principle graph for parameter 6-51 Terminal 42 Output

Min Scale.
26-62 Terminal X42/11 Max. Scale
Range:
100
%*

[0 200
%]

Function:
Scale the maximum output of the selected analog
signal at terminal X42/9. Set the value to the
maximum value of the voltage signal output.
Scale the output to give a voltage lower than 10
V at full scale; or 10 V at an output below 100%
of the maximum signal value. If 10 V is the
desired output current at a value between
0-100% of the full-scale output, programme the
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 10
V. If a voltage between 0 and 10 V is desired at
maximum output, calculate the percentage as
follows:
10V
x 100%
desired maximum voltage

i.e.
5V :

10V
x 100% = 200%
5V

See principle graph for parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output

Max Scale.
26-63 Terminal X42/11 Bus Control
Range:
0 %*

190

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Holds the level of terminal X42/11 if

controlled by bus.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

3.24 Parameters 29-** Water Application

Functions

Speed

130BA612.10

Parameter Description

Max. speed

The group contains parameters used for monitoring water/

wastewater applications.

Closed loop
Min. speed

In water supply systems water hammering can occur when

filling the pipes too fast. It is therefore desirable to limit
the filling rate. Pipe Fill Mode eliminates the occurrence of
water hammering associated with the rapid exhausting of
air from the piping system by filling the pipes at a low
rate.
This function is used in horizontal, vertical and mixed
piping systems. Due to the fact that the pressure in
horizontal pipe systems does not climb as the system fills,
filling horizontal pipe systems requires a user specified
speed to fill, for a user specified time and/or until a user
specified pressure set-point is reached.
The best way to fill a vertical pipe system is to use the PID
function to ramp the pressure at a user specified rate
between the motor speed low limit and a user specified
pressure.
The Pipe Fill function uses a combination of above to
ensure a safe filling in any system.
No matter which system - the pipe fill-mode will start
using the constant speed set in 29-01 Pipe Fill Speed [RPM]
until the pipe fill-time in 29-03 Pipe Fill Time has expired,
thereafter filling will continue with the filling ramp set in
29-04 Pipe Fill Rate until the filling set-point specified in
29-05 Filled Setpoint is reached.
130BA611.10

Speed

Max. speed
Closed loop

Fill speed
Min. speed

3 3

Fill rate unit/sec.

3.24.1 29-0* Pipe Fill function

Initial ramp
Filled setpoint

Time

Illustration 3.84 Vertical Pipe System

29-00 Pipe Fill Enable

Option:

Function:

[0] * Disabled Select Enabled to fill pipes at a user specified

rate.
[1]

Enabled

Select Enabled to fill pipes with a user specified

rate.

29-01 Pipe Fill Speed [RPM]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ par.
4-11 par. 4-13
RPM]

Set the filling speed for filling horizontal

pipe systems. The speed can be selected
in Hz or RPM depending on the choices
made in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low
Limit [RPM]/parameter 4-13 Motor Speed
High Limit [RPM] or in
parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]/
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit
[Hz].

29-02 Pipe Fill Speed [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

Normal ramp

Function:
[ par.
4-12 par. 4-14
Hz]

Set the filling speed for filling horizontal

pipe systems. The speed can be selected
in Hz or RPM depending on the choices
made in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low
Limit [RPM]/parameter 4-13 Motor Speed
High Limit [RPM] or in

Initial ramp

parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]/

Fill time or filled setpoint

parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

Illustration 3.83 Horizontal Pipe System

29-03 Pipe Fill Time

Range:
0 s*

MG20O802

Function:

[0 - 3600 s] Set the specified time for pipe filling of

horizontal pipe systems.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

191

Programming Guide

29-04 Pipe Fill Rate

Range:

Speed

Function:

0.001
ProcessCtrlUnit*

3 3

[0.001 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

Specifies the filling rate in

units/second using the PI
controller. Filling rate units
are feedback units/second.
This function is used for
filling-up vertical pipe
systems but will be active
when the filling-time has
expired, no matter what ,
until the pipe fill-set-point

130BC369.10

Parameter Description

Derag
function
activated

+/- Derag
Speed:
Par.: 29 -13
Par.: 29 -14
Derag Off Delay:
Par. 29 -15
0 Hz / RPM

set in 29-05 Filled Setpoint

is reached.

29-05 Filled Setpoint

Range:

Function:

0
ProcessCtrlUnit*

[-999999.999 999999.999
ProcessCtrlUnit]

Specifies the Filled Setpoint at which the Pipe

Fill Function will be
disabled and the PID
controller will take control.
This function can be used
both for horizontal and
vertical pipe systems.

29-06 No-Flow Disable Timer

Range:
0 s*

Function:
[0 - 3600 s]

The purpose of the deragging feature is to free the pump

blade of debris in waste water applications so that the
pump operates normally.
A deragging event is defined as the time when the
frequency converter starts to derag to when the deragging
finishes. When a derag is started, the frequency converter
ramps first to a stop and then an Off Delay expires before
the first cycle begins.

Deragging Run Time : Par . 29-12

1 Cycle
Number of Cycles : Par . 29 -10

Illustration 3.85 Derag Function

If a derag is triggered from a drive stopped state, the first

Off Delay is skipped. The deragging event may consist of
several cycles; one cycle consists of one pulse in the
reverse direction followed by one pulse in the forward
direction. Deragging is considered finished after the
specified number of cycles has completed. More specifically, on the last pulse (it will always be forward) of the
last cycle, the derag is considered finished after the
Deragging Run Time expires (the frequency converter will
be running at Derag Speed). In between pulses, the
frequency converter output coasts for a specified Off Delay
time to let debris in the pump settle.

NOTICE
Do not enable deragging if the pump cannot operate in
reverse direction.
There are three different notifications for an ongoing
deragging event:
Status in the LCP: "Auto Remote Derag"

A bit in the Extended Status Word (Bit 23 , 80

0000 hex)

A digital output can be configured to reflect the

active deragging status.

Depending on the application and on the purpose of using

it, this feature can be used as preventative or reactive
measure and can be triggered/started in the following
different ways:

192

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

On each Start Command (parameter 29-11 Derag

at Start/Stop)

3.24.2 29-2* Derag Power Tuning

On each Stop Command (parameter 29-11 Derag

at Start/Stop)

On each Start/Stop Command

(parameter 29-11 Derag at Start/Stop)

On Digital Input (parameter group 5-1*)

The derag feature monitors drive power in a similar

fashion as no-flow. Based on two user defined points and
an offset value, the monitor calculates a derag power
curve. It uses the exact same calculations as No-Flow with
the difference being that derag monitors for high-power
and not low-power.
Commissioning the No-Flow user points via the No-Flow
Auto Setup will also set the points of the derag curve to
the same value.

On Drive Action with the Smart Logic Controller

(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action)

As Timed Action (parameter group 23-**)

29-10 Derag Cycles

Range:
Size related*

130BC370.10

On High Power (parameter group 29-2*)

Power [kW/HP]

Function:
[0 - 10 ] The number of cycles the frequency
converter will derag.

29-11 Derag at Start/Stop

Option:

Function:

The calculated power

+ the power factor (readout)
Par. 29-20, Par. 29-21
High Speed
power
Par. 29-30,
Par. 29-31

Derag function when starting and stopping

the frequency converter.

Activate Derag
Derag power factor
Par. 29-22

[0] * Off
[1]

Start

[2]

Stop

[3]

Start and stop

Low Speed
power
Par. 29-26,
Par. 29-27

29-12 Deragging Run Time

Range:
0 s*

Function:

[0 - 3600 s] The time that the frequency converter will

dwell at the derag speed.
Low Speed
Par. 29-24, Par. 29-25

29-13 Derag Speed [RPM]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - par. 4-13
RPM]

Illustration 3.86 Derag Power Tuning

The speed at which the

frequency converter will derag
in RPM.

Size related*

0 kW*

Function:
[ 0.0 - par. 4-14
Hz]

The speed at which the

frequency converter will derag
in Hertz.

Range:

MG20O802

Range:

Function:

[1 - 600 s] The time that the frequency converter will

remain off before starting another derag
pulse. Allows contents of the pump to settle.

Function:
[0 - 0 kW] Readout of calculated derag power at actual
speed.

29-21 Derag Power[HP]

0 hp*

29-15 Derag Off Delay

10 s*

29-20 Derag Power[kW]

Range:

29-14 Derag Speed [Hz]

Range:

Speed [Hz/RPM]
High Speed
Par. 29-28, Par. 29-29

Function:
[0 - 0 hp] Readout of calculated derag power at actual
speed.

29-22 Derag Power Factor

Range:
200 %*

Function:
[1 - 400 %] Set a correction if Derag Detection reacts
on too low a power value.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

193

3 3

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

29-23 Derag Power Delay

29-32 Derag On Ref Bandwidth

Range:

Range:

601 s*

Function:
[1 - 601 s] The time that the frequency converter must
remain on reference and a high power
condition for a derag to occur.

29-24 Low Speed [RPM]

Range:
Size related*

Set output speed used for

registration of derag power at
low speed in RPM.

Range:

Function:
[ 0 - par. 29-29
Hz]

Range:
3*

Function:

[0 - 10 ] The number of times the power monitor can

trigger consecutive derags before a fault is
reported.

29-34 Consecutive Derag Interval

29-25 Low Speed [Hz]

Size related*

[1 - 100 %] Set the bandwidth percentage of motor

speed high limit to accommodate system
pressure fluctuation.

29-33 Power Derag Limit

Function:

[ 0 - par. 29-28
RPM]

5 %*

Function:

Set output speed used for

registration of derag power at
low speed in Hz.

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[Size related] Derags are considered to be
consecutive if they happen within
the interval specified in this
parameter.

29-26 Low Speed Power [kW]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - 5.50 kW] Set derag power at low speed in
kW.

29-27 Low Speed Power [HP]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - 7.50 hp] Set derag power at low speed in
hp.

29-28 High Speed [RPM]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0.0 - par. 4-13 Set output speed used for
RPM]
registration of derag power at
high speed in RPM.

29-29 High Speed [Hz]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0.0 - par.
4-14 Hz]

Set output speed used for

registration of derag power at
high speed in Hz.

29-30 High Speed Power [kW]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - 5.50 kW] Set derag power at high speed in
kW.

29-31 High Speed Power [HP]

Range:
Size related*

194

Function:
[ 0 - 7.50 hp] Set derag power at high speed in
hp.

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Programming Guide

3.24.3 29-4* Pre/Post Lube Function

Use the Pre/Post Lube function in the following

applications:

An application requires external fans to run.

Parameter 29-40 Pre/Post Lube Function

T
1
0
t1

t2

t3

Speed curve

Start command (e.g. terminal 18)

Pre Lube Output Signal

t1

Start command issued (e.g. terminal 18 is set active). The

Start Delay timer (1-71 Start Delay) and the Pre Lube
timer (parameter 29-41 Pre Lube Time).

Parameter 29-42 Post Lube Time

A lubricating device starts the lubrication at the
time when the frequency converter receives the
start command.

The frequency converter starts the motor. The

lubrication device is still running.

After a certain time, the frequency converter

stops the lubrication device.

See Illustration 3.87

3 3

1
0

Parameter 29-41 Pre Lube Time

Consider the following use case:

N MAX

N MIN

A motor requires lubrication of its mechanical

parts before and while it runs to prevent damage
and wear. This is especially the case when the
motor has not been running for a long period of
time.

The function makes the frequency converter signal an

external device for a user-defined period of time. A start
delay can be configured with parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
With this delay the pre-lube function runs while the motor
is stopped.
For information about the Pre/Post Lube function options,
see the following parameters:

130BD765.10

Parameter Description

t2

The Start Delay timer expires. The frequency converter

starts to ramp up.

t3

The Pre Lube timer (parameter 29-41 Pre Lube Time)

expires.

Illustration 3.87 Pre/Post Lube Function Example

29-40 Pre/Post Lube Function

Select when the Pre/Post Lube function is active. Use 1-71 Start
Delay to set the delay before the frequency converter starts to
ramp up.

Option:

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Pre Lube Only

[2]

Pre & Running

[3]

Pre & Running & Post

29-41 Pre Lube Time

Enter how long the Pre Lube function is active. Use only when
option [1] Pre Lube Only is selected in parameter 29-40 Pre/Post
Lube Function.

Range:
10 s*

Function:
[0 - 600 s]

29-42 Post Lube Time

Enter how long the Post Lube function is on after the motor
stops. Use only when option [3] Pre & Running & Post is selected
in parameter 29-40 Pre/Post Lube Function.

Range:
10 s*

Function:
[0 - 600 s]

The Flow Confirmation feature is designed for applications

where there is a need for the motor/pump to run while
waiting for an external event. The Flow Confirmation

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

195

Programming Guide

monitor expects to get a digital input from a sensor on a

gate valve, flow switch, or a similar external device
indicating that the device is in the open position and flow
is possible. In parameter 29-50 Validation Time a user
defines how long the VLT AQUA Drive FC 202 waits for
the digital input signal from the external device to confirm
the flow. After the flow is confirmed, the frequency
converter checks the signal again after the flow verification
time and then runs normally. The LCP status reads
"Verifying flow" while the flow monitor is active.
The frequency converter trips with the alarm "Flow Not
Confirmed", if the expected digital input signal becomes
inactive before either the flow validation time or the flow
verification time expires.

N MAX
N MIN
0

29-50 Validation Time

Range:

Function:
The digital input from an external device
must be active during the validation time.

29-51 Verification Time

Range:
15 s*

[ 0.10 255 s]

130BD766.10

3 3

Parameter Description

Function:

NOTICE
Parameter 29-51 Verification Time is only
visible in the LCP if a digital input is set
to [86] Flow Confirmation (see parameter
group 5-1* Digital Inputs).
When the time in this parameter passes, the
frequency converter checks the signal from the
external device. If the signal is active, the
frequency converter runs normally.

1
0

1
0

1
0
t0

<t1

t2

Speed curv.

Start command (e.g. terminal 18)

Digital signal from an external device that confirms that

the flow is possible.

Flow verification

t0

Start command issued (e.g. terminal 18 is set active)

t1

Digital signal from an external device gets active before

parameter 29-50 Validation Time expires.

t2

When parameter 29-51 Verification Time passes, the

frequency converter checks the signal from the external
device again and then runs normally.

Illustration 3.88 Flow Confirmation

29-50 Validation Time

Range:
Size
related*

196

Function:
[0 999 s]

NOTICE
Parameter 29-50 Validation Time is
only visible in the LCP if a digital
input is set to [86] Flow Confirmation
(see parameter group 5-1* Digital
Inputs).

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.25 Parameters 30-** Special Features

31-11 Bypass Running Hours

Range:

3.25.1 30-8* Compatibility

0 h*

30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm)

Range:

[0 2147483647 h]

Views the number of hours in which the

motor has run in Bypass Mode. The
counter can be reset in

Function:
[ 5 - 65535.00 Set the brake resistor value in
Ohm]
with 2 decimals. This value is used
for monitoring the power to the

Size
related*

Function:

brake resistor in 2-13 Brake Power

31-19 Remote Bypass Activation

Monitoring.

Option:

3.26 Parameters 31-** Bypass Option

3 3

parameter 15-07 Reset Running Hours

Counter. The value is saved, when the
frequency converter is turned off.

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

Feature: Unknown.

Parameter group for the configuration of the electronically

controlled bypass option board, MCO 104.
31-00 Bypass Mode
Option:
[0] * Drive

Function:
Select the operating mode of the bypass:
[0] Drive: the motor is operated by the frequency
converter.

[1]

Bypass Select the operating mode of the bypass:

[1] Bypass: motor can be run at full speed in bypass
mode.

31-01 Bypass Start Time Delay

Range:
30 s*

Function:

[0 - 60 s] Set the time delay within the time when the

bypass receives a run command and the time
when it starts the motor at full speed. A
countdown timer will display time left.

31-02 Bypass Trip Time Delay

Range:
0 s*

[0 - 300
s]

Function:
Set the time delay within the time that the drive
experiences an alarm that stops it and the time
when the motor is automatically switched to
bypass control. If the time delay is set to zero, a
drive alarm will not automatically switch the
motor to bypass control.

31-03 Test Mode Activation

Option:

Function:

[0] * Disabled [0] Disabled means that the Test Mode is

disabled.
[1]

Enabled

[1] Enabled means that the motor runs in bypass,

while the frequency converter can be tested in an
open circuit. In this mode the LCP will not control
start/stop of the bypass.

31-10 Bypass Status Word

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] Views the status of the bypass as a

hexadecimal value.

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

197

3 3

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.27 Parameters 35-** Sensor Input Option

3.27.1 35-0* Temp. Input Mode (MCB 114)

Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/4 settings

and readouts:

Function:

[60] *

[160]

Option:

Function:
Off

[2]

Stop

[5] *

Stop and trip

3.27.2 35-1* Temp. Input X48/4 (MCB 114)

35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant

35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type

Range:

View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/4:

Option:
[0] *

Select the alarm function:

[0]

35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit

Option:

35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function

0.001 s*

Function:

Function:
[0.001 - 10
s]

Not Connected

[1]

PT100 2-wire

[3]

PT1000 2-wire

[5]

PT100 3-wire

[7]

PT1000 3-wire

Enter the filter time constant. This is a

first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/4. A high time constant
value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit

35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor

Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/7 settings

and readouts:

This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the

temperature monitor for terminal X48/4. The temperature limits

Option:

Function:

[60] *

[160]

can be set in parameter 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit and
parameter 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit.

Option:

35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type

View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/7:

Option:

Function:

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit

Range:

Function:

[0] *

Not Connected

[1]

PT100 2-wire

[3]

PT1000 2-wire

35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit

[5]

PT100 3-wire

Range:

[7]

PT1000 3-wire

Size related*

Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/10

settings and readouts:

Option:

Function:

[60] *

[160]

Function:

Size related*

35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit

3.27.3 35-2* Temp. Input X48/7 (MCB 114)

35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 - 10
s]

View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/10:

[0] *

Function:
Not Connected

[1]

PT100 2-wire

[3]

PT1000 2-wire

[5]

PT100 3-wire

[7]

PT1000 3-wire

198

[ par. 35-16 - 204 ]

Range:

35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type

Option:

[ -50 - par. 35-17 ]

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

Enter the filter time constant. This is a

first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/7. A high time constant
value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

MG20O802

Parameter Description

Programming Guide

3.27.5 35-4* Analog Input X48/2 (MCB 114)

35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor

This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the
temperature monitor for terminal X48/7. The temperature limits
can be set in parameter 35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit and
parameter 35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit.

Option:

35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current

Range:
4 mA*

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

Function:

[ 0 - par. Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to

35-43 mA] the low reference value, set in
parameter 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value. The value must be set at > 2mA in
order to activate the Live Zero Time-out

35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit

Range:

Function in 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.

Function:

Size related*

[ -50 - par.
35-27 ]

Enter the minimum temperature

reading that is expected for
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/7.

35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current

Range:
20 mA*

Function:
[ par. 35-42
- 20 mA]

35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Function:

Size related*

[ par. 35-26 204 ]

Enter the maximum temperature

reading that is expected for
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/7.

3.27.4 35-3* Temp. Input X48/10 (MCB 114)

0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 - 10
s]

Range:
0*

Enter the filter time constant. This is a

first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/10. A high time constant
value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

the voltage or current set in

35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the reference or feedback value

(in RPM, Hz, bar, etc.) that corresponds
to the voltage or current set in
parameter 35-43 Term. X48/2 High
Current.

35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant

Range:
0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 - 10
s]

35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor

This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the
temperature monitor for terminal X48/10. The temperature limits
can be set in parameter 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit/
parameter 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit.

Option:

Enter the reference or feedback value (in

RPM, Hz, bar, etc.) that corresponds to
parameter 35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current.

100*

35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant

Range:

to the high reference value (set in

parameter 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./
Feedb. Value).

35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit

Range:

Enter the current (mA) that corresponds

Enter the filter time constant. This is a

first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/2. A high time constant
value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ -50 - par. 35-37 ]

35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit

Range:
Size related*

MG20O802

Function:
[ par. 35-36 - 204 ]

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

199

3 3

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4 Parameter Lists
4.1 Parameter Options
4.1.1 Default Settings
Changes during operation
TRUE means that the parameter can be changed while the frequency converter is in operation and FALSE means that
the frequency converter must be stopped before a change can be made.
4-Set-up
'All set-up': the parameter can be set individually in each of the four set-ups, i. e. one single parameter can have four
different data values.
1 set-up: data value will be the same in all set-ups.
SR
Size related
N/A
No default value available.
Conversion index
This number refers to a conversion figure used when writing or reading by means of a frequency converter.
Conv.
index

100

Conv.
factor

75

74

3600000 3600

70
60

67

1/60 100000 10000 10000 1000

0
0

-1

100

10

0.1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

0.01 0.001 0.000 0.00001 0.00000

1
1

Table 4.1
Data type

Description

Type

Integer 8

Int8

Integer 16

Int16

Integer 32

Int32

Unsigned 8

Uint8

Unsigned 16

Uint16

Unsigned 32

Uint32

Visible String

VisStr

33

Normalized value 2 bytes

N2

35

Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables

V2

54

Time difference w/o date

TimD

Table 4.2

200

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.2 0-** Operation/Display

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

0-0* Basic Settings

0-01

Language

[0] English

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0-02

Motor Speed Unit

[0] RPM

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0-03

Regional Settings

[0] International

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0-04

Operating State at Power-up

[0] Resume

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-05

Local Mode Unit

[0] As Motor Speed Unit

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

4 4

0-1* Set-up Operations

0-10

Active Set-up

[1] Set-up 1

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0-11

Programming Set-up

[9] Active Set-up

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-12

This Set-up Linked to

[0] Not linked

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0-13

Readout: Linked Set-ups

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

0-14

Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

0-2* LCP Display

0-20

Display Line 1.1 Small

1601

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-21

Display Line 1.2 Small

1662

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-22

Display Line 1.3 Small

1614

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-23

Display Line 2 Large

1613

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-24

Display Line 3 Large

1652

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-25

My Personal Menu

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

[1] %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Int32

0-3* LCP Custom Readout

0-30

Custom Readout Unit

0-31

Custom Readout Min Value

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

0-32

Custom Readout Max Value

100 CustomReadoutUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

0-37

Display Text 1

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[25]

0-38

Display Text 2

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[25]

0-39

Display Text 3

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[25]

0-4* LCP Keypad

0-40

[Hand on] Key on LCP

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-41

[Off] Key on LCP

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-42

[Auto on] Key on LCP

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-43

[Reset] Key on LCP

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-44

[Off/Reset] Key on LCP

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-45

[Drive Bypass] Key on LCP

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-5* Copy/Save
0-50

LCP Copy

[0] No copy

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0-51

Set-up Copy

[0] No copy

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

100 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Int16

[0] Full access

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

200 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Full access

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-6* Password
0-60

Main Menu Password

0-61

Access to Main Menu w/o Password

0-65

Personal Menu Password

0-66

Access to Personal Menu w/o Password

0-67

Bus Password Access

0-7* Clock Settings

0-70

Date and Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

TimeOfDay

0-71

Date Format

[0] YYYY-MM-DD

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0-72

Time Format

[0] 24 h

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0-74

DST/Summertime

[0] Off

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0-76

DST/Summertime Start

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

TimeOfDay

0-77

DST/Summertime End

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

TimeOfDay

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

201

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

0-79

Clock Fault

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

0-81

Working Days

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8
Uint8

0-82

Additional Working Days

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

TimeOfDay

0-83

Additional Non-Working Days

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

TimeOfDay

0-89

Date and Time Readout

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[25]

4 4

202

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.3 1-** Load/Motor

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

1-0* General Settings

1-00

Configuration Mode

1-01

Motor Control Principle

1-03

Torque Characteristics

1-04

Overload Mode

1-06

Clockwise Direction

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[1] VVC+

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

[3] Auto Energy Optim. VT

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[1] Normal torque

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

[0] Normal

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

[0] Asynchron

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

4 4

1-1* Motor Selection

1-10

Motor Construction

1-1* VVC+ PM
1-14

Damping Gain

120 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

1-15

Low Speed Filter Time Const.

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

1-16

High Speed Filter Time Const.

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

1-17

Voltage filter time const.

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

1-2* Motor Data

1-20

Motor Power [kW]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

1-21

Motor Power [HP]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Uint32

1-22

Motor Voltage

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-23

Motor Frequency

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-24

Motor Current

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Uint32

1-25

Motor Nominal Speed

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

67

Uint16

1-26

Motor Cont. Rated Torque

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Uint32

1-28

Motor Rotation Check

[0] Off

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-29

Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

[0] Off

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-3* Adv. Motor Data

1-30

Stator Resistance (Rs)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-31

Rotor Resistance (Rr)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-33

Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-34

Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-35

Main Reactance (Xh)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-36

Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint32

1-37

d-axis Inductance (Ld)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-6

Int32

1-39

Motor Poles

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-40

Back EMF at 1000 RPM

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-46

Position Detection Gain

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

1-5* Load Indep. Setting

1-50

Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

1-51

Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

1-52

Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-55

V/f Characteristic - V

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-56

V/f Characteristic - f

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-58

Flying Start Test Pulses Current

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-59

Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-6* Load Depen. Setting

1-60

Low Speed Load Compensation

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

1-61

High Speed Load Compensation

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

1-62

Slip Compensation

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

1-63

Slip Compensation Time Constant

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

1-64

Resonance Damping

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

1-65

Resonance Damping Time Constant

5 ms

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint8

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

203

4 4

Parameter Lists

1-66

Programming Guide

Min. Current at Low Speed

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[1] Parking

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-7* Start Adjustments

1-70

PM Start Mode

1-71

Start Delay

00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-72

Start Function

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-73

Flying Start

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-77

Compressor Start Max Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

1-78

Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-79

Pump Start Max Time to Trip

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

1-8* Stop Adjustments

1-80

Function at Stop

[0] Coast

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-81

Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

1-82

Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-86

Trip Speed Low [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

1-87

Trip Speed Low [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-9* Motor Temperature

1-90

Motor Thermal Protection

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-91

Motor External Fan

[0] No

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

1-93

Thermistor Source

[0] None

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

204

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.4 2-** Brakes

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

2-0* DC-Brake
2-00

DC Hold/Preheat Current

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

2-01

DC Brake Current

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

2-02

DC Braking Time

10.0 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

2-03

DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

2-04

DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

2-1* Brake Energy Funct.

2-10

Brake Function

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

2-11

Brake Resistor (ohm)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

2-12

Brake Power Limit (kW)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

2-13

Brake Power Monitoring

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

2-15

Brake Check

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

100.0 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint32

[2] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

2-16

AC brake Max. Current

2-17

Over-voltage Control

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

205

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.5 3-** Reference/Ramps

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

Int32

3-0* Reference Limits

3-02

Minimum Reference

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

3-03

Maximum Reference

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

3-04

Reference Function

[0] Sum

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-1* References
3-10

Preset Reference

0.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

3-11

Jog Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

3-13

Reference Site

[0] Linked to Hand / Auto

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-14

Preset Relative Reference

0.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

3-15

Reference 1 Source

[1] Analog input 53

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-16

Reference 2 Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-17

Reference 3 Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-19

Jog Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

3-4* Ramp 1
3-41

Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-42

Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-5* Ramp 2
3-51

Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-52

Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-8* Other Ramps

3-80

Jog Ramp Time

ExpressionLimit

3-81

Quick Stop Ramp Time

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-84

Initial Ramp Time

0.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

3-85

Check Valve Ramp Time

0.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

3-86

Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

3-87

Check Valve Ramp End Speed [HZ]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

3-88

Final Ramp Time

0.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

3-90

Step Size

0.10 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

3-91

Ramp Time

1.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-92

Power Restore

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-93

Maximum Limit

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

3-94

Minimum Limit

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

3-95

Ramp Delay

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

TimD

206

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.6 4-** Limits/Warnings

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

4-1* Motor Limits

4-10

Motor Speed Direction

[0] Clockwise

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

4-11

Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-12

Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-13

Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-14

Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-16

Torque Limit Motor Mode

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-17

Torque Limit Generator Mode

100.0 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-18

Current Limit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint32

4-19

Max Output Frequency

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Uint16

4 4

4-5* Adj. Warnings

4-50

Warning Current Low

0.00 A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

4-51

Warning Current High

ImaxVLT (P1637)

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

4-52

Warning Speed Low

0 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-53

Warning Speed High

outputSpeedHighLimit
(P413)

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-54

Warning Reference Low

-999999.999 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

4-55

Warning Reference High

999999.999 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

Warning Feedback Low

-999999.999 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

4-57

Warning Feedback High

999999.999 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

4-58

Missing Motor Phase Function

[2] Trip 1000 ms

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

4-56

4-6* Speed Bypass

4-60

Bypass Speed From [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-61

Bypass Speed From [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-62

Bypass Speed To [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-63

Bypass Speed To [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-64

Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up

[0] Off

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

207

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.7 5-** Digital In/Out

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

5-0* Digital I/O mode

5-00

Digital I/O Mode

[0] PNP - Active at 24V

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

5-01

Terminal 27 Mode

[0] Input

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-02

Terminal 29 Mode

[0] Input

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-1* Digital Inputs

5-10

Terminal 18 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-11

Terminal 19 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-12

Terminal 27 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-13

Terminal 29 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-14

Terminal 32 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-15

Terminal 33 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-16

Terminal X30/2 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-17

Terminal X30/3 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-18

Terminal X30/4 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-19

Terminal 37 Digital Input

[1] Safe Stop Alarm

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

5-20

Terminal X46/1 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-21

Terminal X46/3 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-22

Terminal X46/5 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-23

Terminal X46/7 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-24

Terminal X46/9 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-25

Terminal X46/11 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-26

Terminal X46/13 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Uint8

5-3* Digital Outputs

5-30

Terminal 27 Digital Output

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

5-31

Terminal 29 Digital Output

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-32

Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-33

Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-40

Function Relay

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-41

On Delay, Relay

0.01 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5-42

Off Delay, Relay

0.01 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5-4* Relays

5-5* Pulse Input

5-50

Term. 29 Low Frequency

100 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-51

Term. 29 High Frequency

100 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-52

Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

5-53

Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

5-54

Pulse Filter Time Constant #29

100 ms

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint16

5-55

Term. 33 Low Frequency

100 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-56

Term. 33 High Frequency

100 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-57

Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

5-58

Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

5-59

Pulse Filter Time Constant #33

100 ms

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint16

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5000 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5000 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5000 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-6* Pulse Output

5-60

Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable

5-62

Pulse Output Max Freq #27

5-63

Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable

5-65

Pulse Output Max Freq #29

5-66

Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable

5-68

Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6

208

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

5-8* I/O Options

5-80

AHF Cap Reconnect Delay

25 s

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16
Uint32

5-9* Bus Controlled

5-90

Digital & Relay Bus Control

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

5-93

Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

5-94

Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5-95

Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

5-96

Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5-97

Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

5-98

Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

209

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.8 6-** Analog In/Out

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

6-0* Analog I/O Mode

6-00

Live Zero Timeout Time

6-01

Live Zero Timeout Function

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-1* Analog Input 53

6-10

Terminal 53 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-11

Terminal 53 High Voltage

10 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-12

Terminal 53 Low Current

4 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

6-13

Terminal 53 High Current

20 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

6-14

Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-15

Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-16

Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

6-17

Terminal 53 Live Zero

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-2* Analog Input 54

6-20

Terminal 54 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-21

Terminal 54 High Voltage

10 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-22

Terminal 54 Low Current

4 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

6-23

Terminal 54 High Current

20 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

6-24

Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-25

Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-26

Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

6-27

Terminal 54 Live Zero

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-3* Analog Input X30/11

6-30

Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-31

Terminal X30/11 High Voltage

10 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-34

Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-35

Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-36

Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant

6-37

Term. X30/11 Live Zero

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-4* Analog Input X30/12

6-40

Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-41

Terminal X30/12 High Voltage

10 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-44

Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-45

Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-46

Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

6-47

Term. X30/12 Live Zero

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-5* Analog Output 42

6-50

Terminal 42 Output

[100] Output freq. 0-100

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-51

Terminal 42 Output Min Scale

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16
Int16

6-52

Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

6-53

Terminal 42 Output Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

6-54

Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

6-55

Terminal 42 Output Filter

[0] Off

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8
Uint8

6-6* Analog Output X30/8

6-60

Terminal X30/8 Output

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

6-61

Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-62

Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-63

Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

6-64

Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout

Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

210

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

6-7* Analog Output X45/1

6-70

Terminal X45/1 Output

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-71

Terminal X45/1 Min. Scale

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-72

Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-73

Terminal X45/1 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

6-74

Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout

Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-8* Analog Output X45/3

6-80

Terminal X45/3 Output

6-81

Terminal X45/3 Min. Scale

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-82

Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-83

Terminal X45/3 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

4 4

Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout

6-84

MG20O802

Preset

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

211

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.9 8-** Comm. and Options

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

Uint8

8-0* General Settings

8-01

Control Site

null

All set-ups

TRUE

8-02

Control Source

null

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-03

Control Timeout Time

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-1

Uint32
Uint8

8-04

Control Timeout Function

[0] Off

1 set-up

TRUE

8-05

End-of-Timeout Function

[1] Resume set-up

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

8-06

Reset Control Timeout

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-07

Diagnosis Trigger

[0] Disable

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-08

Readout Filtering

null

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-1* Control Settings

8-10

Control Profile

[0] FC profile

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-13

Configurable Status Word STW

[1] Profile Default

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-14

Configurable Control Word CTW

[1] Profile default

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

Protocol

[0] FC

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8
Uint8

8-3* FC Port Settings

8-30
8-31

Address

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

8-32

Baud Rate

null

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

8-33

Parity / Stop Bits

null

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

8-35

Minimum Response Delay

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-3

Uint16

8-36

Max Response Delay

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-3

Uint16

8-37

Maximum Inter-Char Delay

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-5

Uint16

8-4* FC MC protocol set

8-40

Telegram Selection

[1] Standard telegram 1

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-42

PCD Write Configuration

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

8-43

PCD Read Configuration

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16
Uint8

8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50

Coasting Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

8-52

DC Brake Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-53

Start Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-54

Reversing Select

null

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-55

Set-up Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-56

Preset Reference Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Uint32

8-7* BACnet
8-70

BACnet Device Instance

8-72

MS/TP Max Masters

8-73

MS/TP Max Info Frames

8-74

"I-Am" Service

8-75

Initialisation Password

1 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

127 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

1 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Send at power-up

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[20]

8-8* FC Port Diagnostics

8-80

Bus Message Count

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

8-81

Bus Error Count

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

8-82

Slave Message Rcvd

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

8-83

Slave Error Count

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

212

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

8-9* Bus Jog / Feedback

8-90

Bus Jog 1 Speed

100 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

8-91

Bus Jog 2 Speed

200 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

8-94

Bus Feedback 1

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

N2

8-95

Bus Feedback 2

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

N2

8-96

Bus Feedback 3

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

N2

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

4.1.10 9-** Profibus

Par. No. #

Parameter description

9-00

Setpoint

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-07

Actual Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-15

PCD Write Configuration

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

9-16

PCD Read Configuration

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-18

Node Address

9-22

Telegram Selection

9-23

Parameters for Signals

9-27

Parameter Edit

9-28

Process Control

[1] Enable cyclic master

9-31

Safe Address

9-44

Fault Message Counter

9-45

126 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

[100] None

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

[1] Enabled

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

Fault Code

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-47

Fault Number

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-52

Fault Situation Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-53

Profibus Warning Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

9-63

Actual Baud Rate

[255] No baudrate found

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

9-64

Device Identification

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-65

Profile Number

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

OctStr[
2]

9-67

Control Word 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

V2

9-68

Status Word 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

9-70

Programming Set-up

[9] Active Set-up

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

9-71

Profibus Save Data Values

9-72

ProfibusDriveReset

9-75
9-80

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] No action

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

DO Identification

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

Defined Parameters (1)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-81

Defined Parameters (2)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-82

Defined Parameters (3)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-83

Defined Parameters (4)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-84

Defined Parameters (5)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-85

Defined Parameters (6)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-90

Changed Parameters (1)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-91

Changed Parameters (2)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-92

Changed Parameters (3)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-93

Changed Parameters (4)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-94

Changed Parameters (5)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-99

Profibus Revision Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

213

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

10-0* Common Settings

10-00

CAN Protocol

null

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

10-01

Baud Rate Select

null

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-02

MAC ID

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-05

Readout Transmit Error Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-06

Readout Receive Error Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-07

Readout Bus Off Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

null

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-1* DeviceNet
10-10

Process Data Type Selection

10-11

Process Data Config Write

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-12

Process Data Config Read

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-13

Warning Parameter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-14

Net Reference

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-15

Net Control

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-2* COS Filters

10-20

COS Filter 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

10-21

COS Filter 2

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

10-22

COS Filter 3

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

10-23

COS Filter 4

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-3* Parameter Access

10-30

Array Index

10-31

Store Data Values

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-32

Devicenet Revision

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-33

Store Always

[0] Off

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

10-34

DeviceNet Product Code

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

10-39

Devicenet F Parameters

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

Table 4.3

214

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.12 13-** Smart Logic

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

13-0* SLC Settings

13-00

SL Controller Mode

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-01

Start Event

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-02

Stop Event

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-03

Reset SLC

[0] Do not reset SLC

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-1* Comparators
13-10

Comparator Operand

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-11

Comparator Operator

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-12

Comparator Value

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

SL Controller Timer

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-3

TimD

13-2* Timers
13-20

13-4* Logic Rules

13-40

Logic Rule Boolean 1

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-41

Logic Rule Operator 1

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-42

Logic Rule Boolean 2

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-43

Logic Rule Operator 2

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-44

Logic Rule Boolean 3

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-51

SL Controller Event

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-52

SL Controller Action

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Uint8

13-5* States

13-9* User Defined Alerts

13-90

Alert Trigger

[0] False

2 set-ups

TRUE

13-91

Alert Action

[0] Info

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-92

Alert Text

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[20]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

13-9* User Defined Readouts

13-97

Alert Alarm Word

13-98

Alert Warning Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

13-99

Alert Status Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

215

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.13 14-** Special Functions

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

Uint8

14-0* Inverter Switching

14-00

Switching Pattern

null

All set-ups

TRUE

14-01

Switching Frequency

null

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-03

Overmodulation

[1] On

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

14-04

PWM Random

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-1* Mains On/Off

14-10

Mains Failure

[0] No function

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

14-11

Mains Voltage at Mains Fault

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

14-12

Function at Mains Imbalance

[3] Derate

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-2* Reset Functions

14-20

Reset Mode

14-21

Automatic Restart Time

[10] Automatic reset x 10

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16
Uint8

14-22

Operation Mode

[0] Normal operation

All set-ups

TRUE

14-23

Typecode Setting

null

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

14-25

Trip Delay at Torque Limit

60 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-26

Trip Delay at Inverter Fault

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-28

Production Settings

[0] No action

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-29

Service Code

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.

14-30

Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain

100 %

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

14-31

Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time

0.020 s

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint16

14-32

Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time

27.0 ms

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint16
Uint8

14-4* Energy Optimising

14-40

VT Level

14-41

AEO Minimum Magnetisation

14-42

Minimum AEO Frequency

14-43

Motor Cosphi

66 %

All set-ups

FALSE

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

14-5* Environment
14-50

RFI Filter

[1] On

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

14-51

DC Link Compensation

[1] On

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

14-52

Fan Control

[0] Auto

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-53

Fan Monitor

[1] Warning

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-55

Output Filter

14-59

Actual Number of Inverter Units

[0] No Filter

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8
Uint8

14-6* Auto Derate

14-60

Function at Over Temperature

[1] Derate

All set-ups

TRUE

14-61

Function at Inverter Overload

[1] Derate

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-62

Inv. Overload Derate Current

95 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

Option Supplied by External 24VDC

[0] No

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

null

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

14-8* Options
14-80

14-9* Fault Settings

14-90

216

Fault Level

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.14 15-** FC Information

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

15-0* Operating Data

15-00

Operating hours

0h

All set-ups

FALSE

74

Uint32

15-01

Running Hours

0h

All set-ups

FALSE

74

Uint32

15-02

kWh Counter

0 kWh

All set-ups

FALSE

75

Uint32

15-03

Power Up's

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

15-04

Over Temp's

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

15-05

Over Volt's

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

15-06

Reset kWh Counter

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15-07

Reset Running Hours Counter

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15-08

Number of Starts

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32
Uint16

4 4

15-1* Data Log Settings

15-10

Logging Source

2 set-ups

TRUE

15-11

Logging Interval

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

TimD

15-12

Trigger Event

[0] False

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

15-13

Logging Mode

[0] Log always

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15-14

Samples Before Trigger

50 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15-2* Historic Log

15-20

Historic Log: Event

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

15-21

Historic Log: Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

15-22

Historic Log: Time

0 ms

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint32

15-23

Historic log: Date and Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

TimeOfDay
Uint16

15-3* Alarm Log

15-30

Alarm Log: Error Code

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

15-31

Alarm Log: Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int16

15-32

Alarm Log: Time

0s

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

15-33

Alarm Log: Date and Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

TimeOfDay
Int32

15-34

Alarm Log: Setpoint

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

15-35

Alarm Log: Feedback

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

15-36

Alarm Log: Current Demand

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

15-37

Alarm Log: Process Ctrl Unit

[0] -

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

15-4* Drive Identification

15-40

FC Type

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[6]

15-41

Power Section

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-42

Voltage

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-43

Software Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[5]

15-44

Ordered Typecode String

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[40]

15-45

Actual Typecode String

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[40]

15-46

Frequency Converter Ordering No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[8]

15-47

Power Card Ordering No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[8]

15-48

LCP Id No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-49

SW ID Control Card

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-50

SW ID Power Card

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-51

Frequency Converter Serial Number

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[10]

15-53

Power Card Serial Number

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[19]

15-58

SmartStart Filename

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[20]

15-59

CSIV Filename

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

FALSE

VisStr[16]

15-6* Option Ident

15-60

Option Mounted

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-61

Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

217

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

15-62

Option Ordering No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[8]

15-63

Option Serial No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[18]

15-70

Option in Slot A

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-71

Slot A Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-72

Option in Slot B

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-73

Slot B Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-74

Option in Slot C0/E0

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-75

Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-76

Option in Slot C1/E1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-77

Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-8* Operating Data II

15-80

Fan Running Hours

0h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint32

15-81

Preset Fan Running Hours

0h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint32
Uint16

15-9* Parameter Info

15-92

Defined Parameters

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

15-93

Modified Parameters

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

15-98

Drive Identification

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[40]

15-99

Parameter Metadata

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

218

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.15 16-** Data Readouts

Par.
No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

16-0* General Status

16-00

Control Word

16-01

Reference [Unit]

16-02

Reference [%]

16-03

Status Word

16-05

Main Actual Value [%]

16-09

Custom Readout

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Int16

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

0 CustomReadoutUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32
Int32

16-1* Motor Status

16-10

Power [kW]

0 kW

All set-ups

TRUE

16-11

Power [hp]

0 hp

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

16-12

Motor Voltage

0V

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

16-13

Frequency

0 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

16-14

Motor current

0A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

16-15

Frequency [%]

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

16-16

Torque [Nm]

0 Nm

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Int32

16-17

Speed [RPM]

0 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Int32

16-18

Motor Thermal

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

16-20

Motor Angle

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

16-22

Torque [%]

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

16-26

Power Filtered [kW]

0 kW

All set-ups

FALSE

Int32

16-27

Power Filtered [hp]

0 hp

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

16-3* Drive Status

16-30

DC Link Voltage

0V

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

16-32

Brake Energy /s

0 kW

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-33

Brake Energy Average

0 kW

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-34

Heatsink Temp.

0 C

All set-ups

TRUE

100

Uint8

16-35

Inverter Thermal

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

16-36

Inv. Nom. Current

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

16-37

Inv. Max. Current

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

16-38

SL Controller State

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

16-39

Control Card Temp.

0 C

All set-ups

TRUE

100

Uint8

16-40

Logging Buffer Full

[0] No

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

16-49

Current Fault Source

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

16-5* Ref. & Feedb.

16-50

External Reference

16-52

Feedback[Unit]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Int16

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

16-53
16-54

Digi Pot Reference

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

Feedback 1 [Unit]

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

16-55

Feedback 2 [Unit]

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

16-56

Feedback 3 [Unit]

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

16-58

PID Output [%]

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Int16

16-59

Adjusted Setpoint

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

16-6* Inputs & Outputs

16-60

Digital Input

16-61

Terminal 53 Switch Setting

16-62

Analog Input 53

16-63

Terminal 54 Switch Setting

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Current

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

[0] Current

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

16-64

Analog Input 54

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

16-65

Analog Output 42 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int16

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

219

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

16-66

Digital Output [bin]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

16-67

Pulse Input #29 [Hz]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16
Int32

16-68

Pulse Input #33 [Hz]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

16-69

Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

16-70

Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

16-71

Relay Output [bin]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

16-72

Counter A

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

16-73

Counter B

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

16-75

Analog In X30/11

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

16-76

Analog In X30/12

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

16-77

Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int16

16-78

Analog Out X45/1 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

16-79

Analog Out X45/3 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port

16-80

Fieldbus CTW 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

16-82

Fieldbus REF 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

N2

16-84

Comm. Option STW

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

16-85

FC Port CTW 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

V2

16-86

FC Port REF 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

N2

16-9* Diagnosis Readouts

16-90

Alarm Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-91

Alarm Word 2

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-92

Warning Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-93

Warning Word 2

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-94

Ext. Status Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-95

Ext. Status Word 2

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-96

Maintenance Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

220

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.16 18-** Data Readouts 2

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

18-0* Maintenance Log

18-00

Maintenance Log: Item

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

18-01

Maintenance Log: Action

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

18-02

Maintenance Log: Time

0s

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

18-03

Maintenance Log: Date and Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

TimeOfDay

18-3* Analog Readouts

18-30

Analog Input X42/1

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

18-31

Analog Input X42/3

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

18-32

Analog Input X42/5

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

18-33

Analog Out X42/7 [V]

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

18-34

Analog Out X42/9 [V]

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

18-35

Analog Out X42/11 [V]

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

18-36

Analog Input X48/2 [mA]

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

18-37

Temp. Input X48/4

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

18-38

Temp. Input X48/7

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

18-39

Temp. Input X48/10

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2

18-60

MG20O802

Digital Input 2

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

221

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.17 20-** FC Closed Loop

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

Uint8

20-0* Feedback
20-00

Feedback 1 Source

[2] Analog Input 54

All set-ups

TRUE

20-01

Feedback 1 Conversion

[0] Linear

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

20-02

Feedback 1 Source Unit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Uint8

20-03

Feedback 2 Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

20-04

Feedback 2 Conversion

[0] Linear

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

20-05

Feedback 2 Source Unit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-06

Feedback 3 Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-07

Feedback 3 Conversion

[0] Linear

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

20-08

Feedback 3 Source Unit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-12

Reference/Feedback Unit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-2* Feedback/Setpoint
20-20

Feedback Function

[4] Maximum

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-21

Setpoint 1

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

20-22

Setpoint 2

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

20-23

Setpoint 3

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[25]

Uint8

20-6* Sensorless
20-60

Sensorless Unit

20-69

Sensorless Information

20-7* PID Autotuning

20-70

Closed Loop Type

[0] Auto

2 set-ups

TRUE

20-71

PID Performance

[0] Normal

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-72

PID Output Change

0.10 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16
Int32

20-73

Minimum Feedback Level

-999999 ProcessCtrlUnit

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

20-74

Maximum Feedback Level

999999 ProcessCtrlUnit

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

20-79

PID Autotuning

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-8* PID Basic Settings

20-81

PID Normal/ Inverse Control

[0] Normal

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-82

PID Start Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

20-83

PID Start Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

20-84

On Reference Bandwidth

5%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-9* PID Controller

20-91

PID Anti Windup

[1] On

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

20-93

PID Proportional Gain

2 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

20-94

PID Integral Time

8s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

20-95

PID Differentiation Time

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

20-96

PID Diff. Gain Limit

5 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

222

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.18 21-** Ext. Closed Loop

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

21-0* Ext. CL Autotuning

21-00

Closed Loop Type

[0] Auto

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-01

PID Performance

[0] Normal

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-02

PID Output Change

0.10 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

21-03

Minimum Feedback Level

-999999.000 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-04

Maximum Feedback Level

999999.000 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-09

PID Auto Tuning

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0]

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-1* Ext. CL 1 Ref./Fb.

21-10

Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit

21-11

Ext. 1 Minimum Reference

0.000 ExtPID1Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-12

Ext. 1 Maximum Reference

100.000 ExtPID1Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-13

Ext. 1 Reference Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-14

Ext. 1 Feedback Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-15

Ext. 1 Setpoint

0.000 ExtPID1Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-17

Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]

0.000 ExtPID1Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-18

Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]

0.000 ExtPID1Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-19

Ext. 1 Output [%]

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

21-2* Ext. CL 1 PID

21-20

Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control

21-21

Ext. 1 Proportional Gain

21-22

Ext. 1 Integral Time

21-23

Ext. 1 Differentation Time

21-24

Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit

[0] Normal

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0.50 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

20.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

0.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5.0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

21-3* Ext. CL 2 Ref./Fb.

21-30

Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit

[0]

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-31

Ext. 2 Minimum Reference

0.000 ExtPID2Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-32

Ext. 2 Maximum Reference

100.000 ExtPID2Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-33

Ext. 2 Reference Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-34

Ext. 2 Feedback Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-35

Ext. 2 Setpoint

0.000 ExtPID2Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-37

Ext. 2 Reference [Unit]

0.000 ExtPID2Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-38

Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit]

0.000 ExtPID2Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-39

Ext. 2 Output [%]

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

[0] Normal

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0.50 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

21-4* Ext. CL 2 PID

21-40

Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse Control

21-41

Ext. 2 Proportional Gain

21-42

Ext. 2 Integral Time

20.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

21-43

Ext. 2 Differentation Time

0.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

21-44

Ext. 2 Dif. Gain Limit

5.0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

21-5* Ext. CL 3 Ref./Fb.

21-50

Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit

[0]

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-51

Ext. 3 Minimum Reference

0.000 ExtPID3Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-52

Ext. 3 Maximum Reference

100.000 ExtPID3Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-53

Ext. 3 Reference Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-54

Ext. 3 Feedback Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-55

Ext. 3 Setpoint

0.000 ExtPID3Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-57

Ext. 3 Reference [Unit]

0.000 ExtPID3Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-58

Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit]

0.000 ExtPID3Unit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

21-59

Ext. 3 Output [%]

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

223

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Par. No. #

Programming Guide

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

[0] Normal

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

21-6* Ext. CL 3 PID

21-60

Ext. 3 Normal/Inverse Control

21-61

Ext. 3 Proportional Gain

0.50 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

21-62

Ext. 3 Integral Time

20.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

21-63

Ext. 3 Differentation Time

0.00 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

21-64

Ext. 3 Dif. Gain Limit

5.0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

224

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.19 22-** Application Functions

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Off

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

Uint8
Uint8

22-0* Miscellaneous
22-00

External Interlock Delay

22-2* No-Flow Detection

22-20

Low Power Auto Set-up

22-21

Low Power Detection

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

22-22

Low Speed Detection

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

22-23

No-Flow Function

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

22-24

No-Flow Delay

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

22-26

Dry Pump Function

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

22-27

Dry Pump Delay

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

22-28

No-Flow Low Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

22-29

No-Flow Low Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

22-3* No-Flow Power Tuning

22-30

No-Flow Power

22-31

Power Correction Factor

0.00 kW

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

22-32
22-33

Low Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

Low Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

22-34

Low Speed Power [kW]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

22-35

Low Speed Power [HP]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

22-36

High Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

22-37

High Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

22-38

High Speed Power [kW]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

22-39

High Speed Power [HP]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

22-4* Sleep Mode

22-40

Minimum Run Time

60 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

22-41

Minimum Sleep Time

30 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

22-42

Wake-up Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

22-43

Wake-up Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

22-44

Wake-up Ref./FB Difference

10 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int8

22-45

Setpoint Boost

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Int8

22-46

Maximum Boost Time

60 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

22-5* End of Curve

22-50

End of Curve Function

22-51

End of Curve Delay

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

22-6* Broken Belt Detection

22-60

Broken Belt Function

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

22-61

Broken Belt Torque

10 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

22-62

Broken Belt Delay

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

Short Cycle Protection

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

start_to_start_min_on_time
(P2277)

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

22-7* Short Cycle Protection

22-75
22-76

Interval between Starts

22-77

Minimum Run Time

22-78

Minimum Run Time Override

22-79

Minimum Run Time Override Value

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

225

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Par. No. #

Programming Guide

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

TRUE

[0] Disabled

Uint8

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

67

Uint16

22-8* Flow Compensation

22-80

Flow Compensation

22-81

Square-linear Curve Approximation

22-82

Work Point Calculation

22-83

Speed at No-Flow [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

22-84

Speed at No-Flow [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

22-85

Speed at Design Point [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16
Uint16

22-86

Speed at Design Point [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

22-87

Pressure at No-Flow Speed

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

22-88

Pressure at Rated Speed

999999.999 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

22-89

Flow at Design Point

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

22-90

Flow at Rated Speed

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

226

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.20 23-** Timed Actions

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

TimeOfDayWoDate

23-0* Timed Actions

23-00

ON Time

23-01

ON Action

23-02

OFF Time

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

TimeOfDayWoDate

23-03

OFF Action

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

23-04

Occurrence

[0] All days

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

23-1* Maintenance
23-10

Maintenance Item

[1] Motor bearings

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

23-11

Maintenance Action

[1] Lubricate

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Disabled

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

1h

1 set-up

TRUE

74

Uint32

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

TimeOfDay

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[20]

[5] Last 24 Hours

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

TimeOfDay

23-12

Maintenance Time Base

23-13

Maintenance Time Interval

23-14

Maintenance Date and Time

23-1* Maintenance Reset

23-15

Reset Maintenance Word

23-16

Maintenance Text

23-5* Energy Log

23-50

Energy Log Resolution

23-51

Period Start

23-53

Energy Log

23-54

Reset Energy Log

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

23-6* Trending
23-60

Trend Variable

23-61

Continuous Bin Data

[0] Power [kW]

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

23-62

Timed Bin Data

23-63

Timed Period Start

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

TimeOfDay

23-64

Timed Period Stop

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

TimeOfDay

23-65

Minimum Bin Value

ExpressionLimit

23-66

Reset Continuous Bin Data

[0] Do not reset

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

23-67

Reset Timed Bin Data

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

23-8* Payback Counter

23-80

Power Reference Factor

23-81

Energy Cost

100 %

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1.00 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32
Uint32

23-82

Investment

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

23-83

Energy Savings

0 kWh

All set-ups

TRUE

75

Int32

23-84

Cost Savings

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

227

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.21 24-** Application Functions 2

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

24-1* Drive Bypass

24-10

Drive Bypass Function

24-11

Drive Bypass Delay Time

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0s

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

4.1.22 25-** Cascade Controller

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

Uint8

25-0* System Settings

25-00

Cascade Controller

25-02

Motor Start

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

FALSE

[0] Direct on Line

2 set-ups

FALSE

25-04

Uint8

Pump Cycling

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-05

Fixed Lead Pump

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

25-06

Number of Pumps

2 N/A

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

25-2* Bandwidth Settings

25-20

Staging Bandwidth

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-21

Override Bandwidth

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-22

Fixed Speed Bandwidth

casco_staging_bandwi
dth (P2520)

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-23

SBW Staging Delay

15 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

25-24

SBW Destaging Delay

15 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

25-25

OBW Time

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

25-26

Destage At No-Flow

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-27

Stage Function

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-28

Stage Function Time

Uint16

25-29

Destage Function

25-30

Destage Function Time

15 s

All set-ups

TRUE

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

25-4* Staging Settings

25-40

Ramp Down Delay

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

25-41

Ramp Up Delay

2s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

25-42

Staging Threshold

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-43

Destaging Threshold

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-44

Staging Speed [RPM]

0 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

25-45

Staging Speed [Hz]

0 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

25-46

Destaging Speed [RPM]

0 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

25-47

Destaging Speed [Hz]

0 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] External

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-5* Alternation Settings

25-50

Lead Pump Alternation

25-51

Alternation Event

25-52

Alternation Time Interval

24 h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint16

25-53

Alternation Timer Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[7]

25-54

Alternation Predefined Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

TimeOfDayWoDate

25-55

Alternate if Load < 50%

25-56

Staging Mode at Alternation

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Slow

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-58

Run Next Pump Delay

0.1 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

25-59

Run on Mains Delay

0.5 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

25-8* Status

228

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Par. No. #

Programming Guide

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

25-80

Cascade Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[25]

25-81

Pump Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[25]

25-82

Lead Pump

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-83

Relay Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[4]

25-84

Pump ON Time

0h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint32

25-85

Relay ON Time

0h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint32

25-86

Reset Relay Counters

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

4 4

25-9* Service
25-90

Pump Interlock

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

25-91

Manual Alternation

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

4.1.23 26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109

Par. No. #

Parameter description

26-0* Analog I/O Mode

26-00

Terminal X42/1 Mode

[1] Voltage

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

26-01

Terminal X42/3 Mode

[1] Voltage

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

26-02

Terminal X42/5 Mode

[1] Voltage

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-1* Analog Input X42/1

26-10

Terminal X42/1 Low Voltage

26-11

Terminal X42/1 High Voltage

10.00 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-14

Term. X42/1 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

26-15

Term. X42/1 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

26-16

Term. X42/1 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

26-17

Term. X42/1 Live Zero

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

26-2* Analog Input X42/3

26-20

Terminal X42/3 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-21

Terminal X42/3 High Voltage

10.00 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-24

Term. X42/3 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

26-25

Term. X42/3 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

26-26

Term. X42/3 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

26-27

Term. X42/3 Live Zero

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

26-3* Analog Input X42/5

26-30

Terminal X42/5 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-31

Terminal X42/5 High Voltage

10.00 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-34

Term. X42/5 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

26-35

Term. X42/5 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

26-36

Term. X42/5 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

26-37

Term. X42/5 Live Zero

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

26-4* Analog Out X42/7

26-40

Terminal X42/7 Output

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

26-41

Terminal X42/7 Min. Scale

0.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-42

Terminal X42/7 Max. Scale

100.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-43

Terminal X42/7 Bus Control

0.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

26-44

Terminal X42/7 Timeout Preset

0.00 %

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

26-5* Analog Out X42/9

26-50

Terminal X42/9 Output

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

26-51

Terminal X42/9 Min. Scale

0.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-52

Terminal X42/9 Max. Scale

100.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

229

4 4

Parameter Lists

Par. No. #

Parameter description

26-53
26-54

Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

Terminal X42/9 Bus Control

0.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

Terminal X42/9 Timeout Preset

0.00 %

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

26-6* Analog Out X42/11

26-60

Terminal X42/11 Output

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

26-61

Terminal X42/11 Min. Scale

0.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-62

Terminal X42/11 Max. Scale

100.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

26-63

Terminal X42/11 Bus Control

0.00 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

26-64

Terminal X42/11 Timeout Preset

0.00 %

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

230

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.24 27-** Cascade CTL Option

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

27-0* Control & Status

27-01

Pump Status

[0] Ready

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-02

Manual Pump Control

[0] No Operation

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-03

Current Runtime Hours

0h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint32

27-04

Pump Total Lifetime Hours

0h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint32

4 4

27-1* Configuration
27-10

Cascade Controller

null

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

27-11

Number Of Drives

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

27-12

Number Of Pumps

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

27-14

Pump Capacity

27-16

Runtime Balancing

100 %

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

[0] Balanced Priority 1

2 set-ups

TRUE

27-17

Uint8

Motor Starters

[0] Direct Online

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

27-18

Spin Time for Unused Pumps

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

27-19

Reset Current Runtime Hours

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-2* Bandwidth Settings

27-20

Normal Operating Range

27-21

Override Limit

27-22

Fixed Speed Only Operating Range

27-23

Staging Delay

15 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

27-24

Destaging Delay

15 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

27-25

Override Hold Time

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

27-27

Min Speed Destage Delay

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

27-3* Staging Speed

27-30

Auto Tune Staging Speeds

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-31

Stage On Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

27-32

Stage On Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

27-33

Stage Off Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

27-34

Stage Off Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

27-4* Staging Settings

27-40

Auto Tune Staging Settings

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-41

Ramp Down Delay

10.0 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

27-42

Ramp Up Delay

2.0 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16
Uint8

27-43

Staging Threshold

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

27-44

Destaging Threshold

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-45

Staging Speed [RPM]

0 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

27-46

Staging Speed [Hz]

0.0 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

27-47

Destaging Speed [RPM]

0 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

27-48

Destaging Speed [Hz]

0.0 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

null

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-5* Alternate Settings

27-50

Automatic Alternation

27-51

Alternation Event

27-52

Alternation Time Interval

0 min

All set-ups

TRUE

70

Uint16

27-53

Alternation Timer Value

0 min

All set-ups

TRUE

70

Uint16

27-54

Alternation At Time of Day

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
TimeOfDayWoDate

27-55

Alternation Predefined Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

27-56

Alternate Capacity is <

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-58

Run Next Pump Delay

0.1 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

27-6* Digital Inputs

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

231

4 4

Parameter Lists

Par. No. #

Parameter description

27-60
27-61

Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

Terminal X66/1 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

Terminal X66/3 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-62

Terminal X66/5 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-63

Terminal X66/7 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-64

Terminal X66/9 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-65

Terminal X66/11 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-66

Terminal X66/13 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Standard Relay

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

27-7* Connections
27-70

Relay

27-9* Readouts
27-91

Cascade Reference

0.0 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Int16

27-92

% Of Total Capacity

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

27-93

Cascade Option Status

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

27-94

Cascade System Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[25]

27-95

Advanced Cascade Relay Output [bin]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

232

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.25 29-** Water Application Functions

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

29-0* Pipe Fill

29-00

Pipe Fill Enable

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

29-01

Pipe Fill Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

29-02

Pipe Fill Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

29-03

Pipe Fill Time

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

29-04

Pipe Fill Rate

0.001 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

29-05

Filled Setpoint

0 ProcessCtrlUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

29-06

No-Flow Disable Timer

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16
Uint32

29-1* Deragging Function

29-10

Derag Cycles

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

FALSE

29-11

Derag at Start/Stop

[0] Off

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

29-12

Deragging Run Time

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

29-13

Derag Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

29-14

Derag Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

29-15

Derag Off Delay

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

29-2* Derag Power Tuning

29-20

Derag Power[kW]

0 kW

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

29-21

Derag Power[HP]

0 hp

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

29-22

Derag Power Factor

200 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

29-23

Derag Power Delay

601 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

29-24

Low Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

29-25

Low Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

29-26

Low Speed Power [kW]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

29-27

Low Speed Power [HP]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

29-28

High Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

29-29

High Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

29-30

High Speed Power [kW]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

29-31

High Speed Power [HP]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

29-32

Derag On Ref Bandwidth

29-33

Power Derag Limit

29-34

Consecutive Derag Interval

5%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3 N/A

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

29-4* Pre/Post Lube

29-40

Pre/Post Lube Function

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

29-41

Pre Lube Time

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

29-42

Post Lube Time

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

29-5* Flow Confirmation

29-50

Validation Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

29-51

Verification Time

15 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

233

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

4.1.26 30-** Special Features

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

App.Dependent

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint32

30-8* Compatibility (I)

30-81

Brake Resistor (ohm)

4.1.27 31-** Bypass Option

Par. No. #

Parameter description

31-00

Bypass Mode

31-01

Bypass Start Time Delay

31-02

Bypass Trip Time Delay

31-03

Test Mode Activation

31-10

Bypass Status Word

31-11

Bypass Running Hours

31-19

Remote Bypass Activation

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

[0] Drive

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

30 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

V2

0h

All set-ups

FALSE

74

Uint32

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

Default value

4-set-up

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

4.1.28 35-** Sensor Input Option

Par. No. #

Parameter description

35-0* Temp. Input Mode

35-00

Term. X48/4 Temp. Unit

[60] C

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-01

Term. X48/4 Input Type

[0] Not Connected

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-02

Term. X48/7 Temp. Unit

[60] C

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-03

Term. X48/7 Input Type

[0] Not Connected

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-04

Term. X48/10 Temp. Unit

[60] C

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-05

Term. X48/10 Input Type

[0] Not Connected

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-06

Temperature Sensor Alarm Function

[5] Stop and trip

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-1* Temp. Input X48/4

35-14

Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant

35-15

Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

35-16

Uint8

Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-17

Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-2* Temp. Input X48/7

35-24

Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant

35-25

Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

35-26

Uint8

Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-27

Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-3* Temp. Input X48/10

35-34

Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant

35-35

Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

35-36

Uint8

Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

35-37

Int16

Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-4* Analog Input X48/2

35-42

Term. X48/2 Low Current

4.00 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

35-43

Term. X48/2 High Current

20.00 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

35-44

Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

234

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Parameter Lists

Programming Guide

35-45

Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value

35-46

Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant

35-47

Term. X48/2 Live Zero

100.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

4 4

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

235

5 5

Troubleshooting

Programming Guide

5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Status Messages

If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its

cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
(see also Table 5.1).

5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages

A warning or an alarm is signalled by the relevant LED on
the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a
code on the display.

Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection,

meaning that the mains supply must be switched off
before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and may
be reset as described above once the cause has been
rectified.

A warning remains active until its cause is no longer

present. Under certain circumstances operation of the
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be
critical, but are not necessarily so.

Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the
automatic reset function in 14-20 Reset Mode (Warning:
automatic wake-up is possible!)

An alarm trips the frequency converter. Reset alarmsto

restart operation once their cause has been rectified.

If a warning and alarm is marked against a code in

Table 5.1, this means that either a warning occurs before
an alarm, or else that it is possible to specify whether it is
a warning or an alarm that is to be displayed for a given
fault.

This may be done in three ways

By pressing [Reset].

Via a digital input with the Reset function.

Via serial communication/optional fieldbus.
NOTICE

This is possible, for instance, in 1-90 Motor Thermal

Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on
coasting, and the alarm and warning flash. Once the
problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
flashing until the frequency converter is reset.

After a manual reset pressing [Reset], [Auto On] must be

pressed to restart the motor.

NOTICE
No missing motor phase detection (no 30-32) and no
stall detection is active when parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
No.

Description

10 Volts low

Live zero error

(X)

No motor

(X)

Mains phase loss

(X)

DC link voltage high

DC link voltage low

DC over-voltage

DC under voltage

Inverter overloaded

10

Motor ETR over temperature

(X)

(X)

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

11

Motor thermistor over temperature

(X)

(X)

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

12

Torque limit

13

Over Current

14

Earth Fault

15

Hardware mismatch

236

Warning

Alarm/Trip

Alarm/Trip Lock

(X)

Parameter
reference
6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function
1-80 Function at Stop

(X)

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

(X)

14-12 Function at Mains

Imbalance

MG20O802

Troubleshooting

Programming Guide

No.

Description

Warning

Alarm/Trip

Alarm/Trip Lock

16

Short Circuit

17

Control word time-out

(X)

(X)

8-04 Control Timeout Function

18

Start Failed

1-77 Compressor Start Max

Speed [RPM] and 1-79 Pump
Start Max Time to Trip

20

Temp. Input Error

21

Param Error

22

Hoist Mech. Brake

(X)

23

Internal Fans

(X)

Parameter group 2-2*

24

External Fans

25

Brake resistor short-circuited

26

Brake resistor power limit

(X)

(X)

27

Brake chopper short-circuited

28

Brake check

(X)

(X)

29

Heatsink temp

30

Motor phase U missing

(X)

(X)

(X)

4-58 Missing Motor Phase

Function

31

Motor phase V missing

(X)

(X)

(X)

4-58 Missing Motor Phase

Function

32

Motor phase W missing

(X)

(X)

(X)

4-58 Missing Motor Phase

Function

33

Inrush Fault

34

Fieldbus communication fault

35

Option Fault

36

Mains failure

37

Phase imbalance

38

Internal Fault

39

Heatsink sensor

40

Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27

(X)

5-00 Digital I/O Mode,

parameter 5-01 Terminal 27
Mode

41

Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29

(X)

5-00 Digital I/O Mode,

5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

42

Ovrld X30/6-7

(X)

43

Ext. Supply (option)

45

Earth Fault 2

46

Pwr. card supply

47

24 V supply low

48
49

5 5

2-13 Brake Power Monitoring

2-15 Brake Check

1.8 V supply low

Speed limit

50

AMA calibration failed

51

AMA check Unom and Inom

52

AMA low Inom

53

AMA motor too big

54

AMA motor too small

55

AMA parameter out of range

56

AMA interrupted by user

57

AMA time-out

58

AMA internal fault

59

Current limit

60

External Interlock

MG20O802

X
X

Parameter
reference

Parameter 1-86 Trip Speed Low

[RPM]

X
X

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

237

5 5

Troubleshooting

No.

Description

61

Programming Guide

Warning

Alarm/Trip

Alarm/Trip Lock

Feedback Error

(X)

(X)

4-30 Motor Feedback Loss

Function

62

Output Frequency at Maximum Limit

63

Mechanical Brake Low

(X)

2-20 Release Brake Current

64

Voltage Limit

65

Control Board Over-temperature

66

Heat sink Temperature Low

67

Option Configuration has Changed

68

Safe Stop

69

Pwr. Card Temp

70

Illegal FC configuration

71

PTC 1 Safe Stop

72

Dangerous failure

73

Safe Stop Auto Restart

74

PTC Thermistor

75

Illegal Profile Sel.

76

Power Unit Setup

77

Reduced power mode

78

Tracking Error

(X)

79

Illegal PS config

80

Drive Initialized to Default Value

81

CSIV corrupt

82

CSIV parameter error

83

Illegal Option Combination

84

No Safety Option

88

Option Detection

89

Mechanical Brake Sliding

90

Feedback Monitor

(X)

91

Analog input 54 wrong settings

163

ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning

164

ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm

165

ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning

166

ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm

250

New spare parts

251

New Type Code

Parameter
reference

X
(X)

5-19 Terminal 37 Digital Input

(X)1)
X

X
X

(X)

(X)

5-19 Terminal 37 Digital Input

X

X
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter
Units
(X)

4-34 Tracking Error Function

X

X
X
X
(X)

17-61 Feedback Signal

Monitoring
X

S202

X
X
X
X
X
X

Table 5.1 Alarm/Warning Code List

(X) Dependent on parameter
1) Can not be Auto reset via 14-20 Reset Mode

A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip

coasts the motor and can be reset by pressing [Reset] or
make a reset by a digital input (parameter group 5-1*
Digital Inputs [1]). The origin event that caused an alarm
cannot damage the frequency converter or cause
dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action when an
alarm occurs, which may damage the frequency converter
or connected parts. A Trip Lock situation can only be reset
by a power cycling.

238

Warning

yellow

Alarm

flashing red

Trip locked

yellow and red

Table 5.2 LED Indication

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Troubleshooting

Bit

Hex

Programming Guide

Dec

Alarm Word

Alarm Word 2

Warning Word

Warning
Word 2

Extended
Status Word

Alarm Word Extended Status Word

0

00000001

Brake Check (A28)

ServiceTrip, Read/
Write

Brake Check (W28)

reserved

Ramping

00000002

Heatsink temp.
(A29)

ServiceTrip,
(reserved)

Heatsink temp. (W29)

reserved

AMA Running

00000004

Earth Fault (A14)

ServiceTrip,
Typecode/
Sparepart

Earth Fault (W14)

reserved

Start CW/CCW
start_possible is
active, when the DI
selections [12] OR
[13] are active and
the requested
direction matches the
reference sign

00000008

Ctrl.Card Temp
(A65)

00000010

16

Ctrl. Word TO (A17) ServiceTrip,

(reserved)

Ctrl. Word TO (W17)

00000020

32

Over Current (A13)

reserved

Over Current (W13)

reserved

Feedback High
feedback > 4-57

00000040

64

Torque Limit (A12)

reserved

Torque Limit (W12)

reserved

Feedback Low
feedback < 4-56

00000080

128

Motor Th Over
(A11)

reserved

Motor Th Over (W11)

reserved

Output Current High

current > 4-51

00000100

256

Motor ETR Over

(A10)

reserved

Motor ETR Over (W10)

reserved

Output Current Low

current < 4-50

00000200

512

Inverter Overld.
(A9)

reserved

Inverter Overld (W9)

reserved

Output Freq High

speed > 4-53

10

00000400

1024

DC under Volt (A8) reserved

DC under Volt (W8)

Output Freq Low

speed < 4-52

11

00000800

2048

DC over Volt (A7)

reserved

DC over Volt (W7)

Brake Check OK
brake test NOT ok

12

00001000

4096

Short Circuit (A16)

reserved

DC Voltage Low (W6)

13

00002000

8192

Inrush Fault (A33)

reserved

DC Voltage High (W5)

Braking

14

00004000

16384

Mains ph. Loss (A4) reserved

Mains ph. Loss (W4)

Out of Speed Range

15

00008000

32768

AMA Not OK

No Motor (W3)

OVC Active

16

00010000

65536

Live Zero Error (A2) reserved

Live Zero Error (W2)

AC Brake

17

00020000

131072

Internal Fault (A38) KTY error

10V Low (W1)

KTY Warn

Password Timelock
number of allowed
password trials
exceeded - timelock
active

18

00040000

262144

Brake Overload
(A26)

Brake Overload (W26)

Fans Warn

Password Protection
0-61 =
ALL_NO_ACCESS OR
BUS_NO_ACCESS OR
BUS_READONLY

MG20O802

ServiceTrip,
(reserved)

reserved

Fans error

Ctrl.Card Temp (W65)

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

reserved

Slow Down
slow down command
active, e.g. via CTW
bit 11 or DI
Catch Up
catch up command
active, e.g. via CTW
bit 12 or DI

reserved

Braking Max
BrakePower >
BrakePowerLimit
(2-12)

239

5 5

5 5

Troubleshooting

Programming Guide

Bit

Hex

Dec

19

00080000

524288

20

00100000

21

Alarm Word

Alarm Word 2

Warning Word

Warning
Word 2

Extended
Status Word

U phase Loss (A30) ECB error

Brake Resistor (W25)

ECB Warn

Reference High
reference > 4-55

1048576

V phase Loss (A31)

Brake IGBT (W27)

reserved

Reference Low
reference < 4-54

00200000

2097152

W phase Loss (A32) reserved

Speed Limit (W49)

reserved

Local Reference
reference site =
REMOTE -> auto on
pressed & active

22

00400000

4194304

Fieldbus Fault (A34) reserved

Fieldbus Fault (W34)

reserved

Protection Mode

23

00800000

8388608

24 V Supply Low
(A47)

24V Supply Low (W47)

reserved

Unused

24

01000000

16777216

Mains Failure (A36) reserved

Mains Failure (W36)

reserved

Unused

25

02000000

33554432

1.8V Supply Low

(A48)

Current Limit (W59)

reserved

Unused

26

04000000

67108864

Brake Resistor (A25) reserved

Low Temp (W66)

reserved

Unused

27

08000000

134217728

Brake IGBT (A27)

reserved

Voltage Limit (W64)

reserved

Unused

28

10000000

268435456

Option Change
(A67)

reserved

Encoder loss (W90)

reserved

Unused

29

20000000

536870912

Drive
Initialized(A80)

Feedback Fault
(A61, A90)

Feedback Fault (W61,

W90)

30

40000000

1073741824 Safe Stop (A68)

PTC 1 Safe Stop

(A71)

Safe Stop (W68)

31

80000000

2147483648 Mech. brake low

(A63)

Dangerous Failure Extended Status Word

(A72)

reserved

reserved

reserved

Unused
PTC 1 Safe
Stop (W71)

Unused
Unused

Table 5.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word

The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for diagnose.
See also 16-94 Ext. Status Word.

240

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Index

Programming Guide

Index

Copy/save, 0-5*..................................................................................... 36
Current Limit Control, 14-3*........................................................... 115

A
Abbreviations..................................................................................... 0

Adv. Motor Data, 1-3*......................................................................... 44

Data Log Settings, 15-1*.................................................................. 119

Alarm log, 15-3*.................................................................................. 121

Data readout........................................................................................ 219

Alarm message.................................................................................... 236

Data readout 2.................................................................................... 221

Analog I/O Mode, 6-0*........................................................................ 81

Data readout, 16-**........................................................................... 125

Analog I/O option MCB 109........................................................... 229

DC-Brake.................................................................................................. 54

Analog I/O Option MCB 109, 26-**.............................................. 185

Default setting............................................................................. 25, 200

Analog in/out...................................................................................... 210

DeviceNet................................................................................................ 97

Analog input............................................................................................. 5

Diagnosis Read-Outs, 16-9*............................................................ 129

Analog Input 2, 6-2*............................................................................ 82

Digital I/O Mode, 5-0*......................................................................... 67

Analog Input 3 MCB 101, 6-3*.......................................................... 83

Digital In/out........................................................................................ 208

Analog Input 4 MCB 101, 6-4*.......................................................... 83

Display Line 1.2 Small, 0-21............................................................... 33

Analog input scaling value............................................................. 187

Display Line 1.3 Small, 0-22............................................................... 33

Analog Output 2 MCB 101, 6-6*...................................................... 87

Display Line 2 large, 0-23................................................................... 33

Application function......................................................................... 225

Display Line 3 Large, 0-24.................................................................. 33

Application function 2..................................................................... 228

Display mode......................................................................................... 16

Auto Derate, 14-6*............................................................................. 117

Display mode, selection of read-outs............................................ 17

Drive Closed Loop, 20-**................................................................. 133

Drive identification, 15-4*............................................................... 123

Brake Energy Funct., 2-1*................................................................... 55

Drive Information, 15-**.................................................................. 119

Brake power.............................................................................................. 6

Drive status, 16-3*.............................................................................. 126

Brakes..................................................................................................... 205

Dry pump function............................................................................ 154

Break-away torque................................................................................. 5
Broken Belt Detection, 22-6*......................................................... 159

Bus Controlled, 5-9*............................................................................. 80

End of Curve, 22-5*............................................................................ 158

Bus Jog, 8-9*........................................................................................... 95

Energy Log, 23-5*............................................................................... 168

Bypass option...................................................................................... 234

Energy Optimising, 14-4*................................................................ 115

ETR........................................................................................................... 126

Ext. closed loop................................................................................... 223

CAN Fieldbus....................................................................................... 214

Extended CL Autotuning, 21-0*.................................................... 143

Cascade controller............................................................................. 228

Cascade Controller, 25-**................................................................ 175

Cascade CTL option........................................................................... 231

FC closed loop..................................................................................... 222

Changing a text value......................................................................... 22

FC information.................................................................................... 217

Changing data....................................................................................... 22

FC port diagnostics, 8-8*.................................................................... 95

Changing, group of numeric data values.................................... 22

Feedback & Setpoint, 20-2*............................................................ 136

Clock setting........................................................................................... 37

Feedback, 20-0*.................................................................................. 133

Coasting.............................................................................................. 5, 16

Flow Compensation, 22-8*............................................................. 160

Comm. and options........................................................................... 212

Flow confirmation.............................................................................. 195

Comparator, 13-1*............................................................................. 103

Freeze output........................................................................................... 5

Configuration......................................................................................... 90

Frequency Converter Information, 15-**................................... 119

Control cable.......................................................................................... 11
Cooling..................................................................................................... 52
MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

241

Index

Programming Guide

Motor protection.................................................................................. 52

Motor status, 16-1*............................................................................ 125

General setting, 8-0*............................................................................ 89

Motor Temperature, 1-9*................................................................... 52

General Settings, 1-0*......................................................................... 39

Multiple frequency converters........................................................ 16

General status, 16-0*......................................................................... 125

Graphical display.................................................................................. 13

N
Numerical local control panel.......................................................... 23

H
Historic Log, 15-2*............................................................................. 121

O
Operating Data, 15-0*...................................................................... 119

Operating mode................................................................................... 28

Indexed parameter.............................................................................. 23

Operation/display.............................................................................. 201

Indicator light........................................................................................ 14

Operation/display, 0-**...................................................................... 27

Initialisation............................................................................................ 25

Option Ident. , 15*6*......................................................................... 123

Inverter overload, no trip................................................................ 117

Other Ramps, 3-8*................................................................................ 60

Inverter switching, 14-0*................................................................. 112

Parameter Access, 10-3*.................................................................... 98

Jog................................................................................................................ 5

Parameter Info, 15-9*........................................................................ 124

Parameter option............................................................................... 200

Parameter selection...................................................................... 21, 26

Language package 2........................................................................... 27

Parameter set-up........................................................................... 17, 26

LCP...................................................................................... 4, 6, 13, 16, 23

Password, 0-6*....................................................................................... 37

LCP Custom Readout, 0-3*................................................................ 34

PID autotuning.................................................................................... 139

LCP Display, 0-2*................................................................................... 30

PID Basic Settings, 20-8*.................................................................. 140

LCP key..................................................................................................... 24

PID Controller, 20-9*......................................................................... 141

LCP keypad, 0-4*................................................................................... 35

Pipe Fill function, 29-0*.................................................................... 191

LED............................................................................................................. 13

Pipe fill mode....................................................................................... 191

Limit/warning...................................................................................... 207

Potentiometer reference................................................................... 12

Load Depend. Setting, 1-6*............................................................... 49

Pre lube.................................................................................................. 195

Load/motor.......................................................................................... 203

Profibus.................................................................................................. 213

Local reference............................................................................... 28, 60

Protection mode..................................................................................... 9

Logic rule, 13-4*.................................................................................. 105

Pulse start/stop..................................................................................... 12

Low power detection....................................................................... 153

Low speed detection........................................................................ 153

Q
Q3 function set-up............................................................................... 19

Quick menu.............................................................................. 14, 18, 26

Main menu....................................................................................... 17, 26

Quick menu mode......................................................................... 15, 17

Main menu mode.......................................................................... 15, 21

Quick transfer, parameter settings................................................. 16

Main reactance...................................................................................... 43
Mains On/Off, 14-1*........................................................................... 112

Mains RFI filter circuit....................................................................... 116

Ramp 2, 3-5*........................................................................................... 60

Mains supply............................................................................................. 7

Rated motor speed................................................................................. 5

MCB 114................................................................................................. 198

RCD............................................................................................................... 6

Motor Data, 1-2*................................................................................... 42

Reference & feedback, 16-5*.......................................................... 127

Motor limit, 4-1*.................................................................................... 63

Reference Limits, 3-0*......................................................................... 57

242

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

MG20O802

Index

Programming Guide

Reference/ramps................................................................................ 206
Relay output........................................................................................... 71
Reset.......................................................................................................... 16

S
Safety........................................................................................................... 8
Screened/armoured............................................................................ 11
Sensor input option.......................................................................... 234
Serial communication........................................................................... 5
Short Cycle Protection, 22-7*......................................................... 160
Sleep Mode, 22-4*.............................................................................. 156
Smart Logic.......................................................................................... 215
Special feature..................................................................................... 234
Special function.................................................................................. 216
Speed Bypass, 4-6*............................................................................... 65
Speed up/down.................................................................................... 12
Start Adjustments, 1-7*...................................................................... 50
Start delay............................................................................................... 50
Start function......................................................................................... 50
Start/stop................................................................................................. 11
Stator leakage reactance................................................................... 43
Status........................................................................................................ 14
Status message...................................................................................... 13
Step-by-step........................................................................................... 22
Stop Adjustments, 1-8*...................................................................... 51
Synchronous motor speed.................................................................. 5

T
Thermal load................................................................................. 47, 126
Thermistor.......................................................................................... 7, 52
Timed action........................................................................................ 227
Timed Actions, 23-0*......................................................................... 164
Timer, 13-2*.......................................................................................... 104
Trending, 23-6*................................................................................... 170
Trip Reset, 14-2*.................................................................................. 113

V
Value.......................................................................................................... 22
Voltage reference via a potentiometer........................................ 12
VVC+............................................................................................................ 7

W
Warning................................................................................................. 236
Water application function............................................................. 233
Water Application Functions......................................................... 191

MG20O802

Danfoss A/S Rev. 2014-04-25 All rights reserved.

243

www.danfoss.com/drives
Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to
products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property
of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
www.danfoss.com/drives

130R0338

MG20O802

*MG20O802*

Rev. 2014-04-25